Et101-2008+a1+a2 Ac A3-2018

LICENCE
for
ET101 : 2008 : INC : A3 : 2018 : EN : COMBINED PDF
Licensee: Thomas Murphy

Date: 30/11/2023
COPYRIGHT NOTICE & PERMISSION TO USESAI Global is willing to deliver the standards publication to you in electronic
form on Condition that you accept the following terms of use. Read the terms of use carefully.CopyrightThe National Standards
Authority of Ireland or its licensors owns the copyright in this standards publication. All rights are reserved.Permission to
UseYou may download an electronic file of this standards publication for temporary storage on one computer for the purposes
of viewing and/or printing one copy of the standards publication. Apart from this permitted usage, neither the electronic file nor
the hard copy print may be reproduced in any way. The electronic file may not be redistributed elsewhere over computer
networks or otherwise. The hard copy print may not be copied for distribution to other persons within your organisation or other
persons outside your organisation.Use Outside of Permission Outlined AboveIf you require permission to distribute the hard
copy of this standards publication within your organisation or make it available on a network for other persons within your
organisation, please address this specific request to SAI at one of the addresses below providing your full contact information
and details of your intended use of the NSAI copyrighted publication(s).In Ireland Contact:-SAI Global, Northumberland House,
42/44 Northumberland Road, Dublin 4 Phone: 01 857 6730 / 6731 Fax: 01 857 6729 Email: info@standards.ie Web:
http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/
To read the full licence agreement, simply click within the red box above and scroll through with your cursor
Learn about LexConnect, All Jurisdictions, Standards referenced in Australian legislation

Know when a Standard has changed
Visit our store to find more Publications
Copyrighted material licensed to SAI Global for Thomas Murphy.
No further reproduction or distribution permitted. Printed / viewed by:tommy1980murf@yahoo.co.uk @ 30/11/2023
National Rules Cover new 2013:Layout 1
24/06/2013
16:16
Page 1
Fourth Edition National Rules for Electrical Installations ET 101: 2008

for
ET 101 : 2008
Fourth Edition
National Rules
a
Electrical Installations
an nd
d A su
Am m bse
en end que
d m n
Electro-Technical Council of Ireland
In me en t ad
co nt t N d
rp N
or . o o iti
at 1 2: ons
in . 20 201
g 11 6
ET 101:2008/AC:2018
ET 101:2008, National rules for electrical installations

Fourth Edition ET 101:2008 (Incorporating Amendment No.1 and Amendment No. 2)
Corrigendum to ET 101:2008
This corrigendum becomes effective on 2018-05-31
Remove the following Clause
“701.559.03 A bathroom shall have at least one luminaire which:
- is mounted outside the zones and supplied by a circuit not protected by an RCD in accordance
with 701.416.1, or
- contains a stand-by source of illumination complying with Chapter 56.
Note: This requirement applies to e.g. hotels, guest houses and nursing homes. It is not
necessary to provide a standby source of illumination in situations such as domestic
bathrooms”.
Insert the following paragraph under Clause 527.3 “Harmful products of combustion” and
before Table 52H.
“Where it has been established, after an examination of the design, the density of occupation
of a building, and the quantity and physical arrangement of the proposed wiring system, that
the use of PVC or similar material could, in the event of a fire, emit smoke or other harmful
gases in such quantity and in such a manner as to cause danger, one or both of the following
measures shall be applied as appropriate:
- the use of wiring materials that do not produce significant smoke or harmful gases when
subjected to fire,
- the provision of automatic smoke and fume control equipment.
Note: Cable known as “LSOH” or “LSF or “NHMH” e.g. type H07Z-U and H07Z-R satisfies
this measure. It is not necessarily fire-resistant”.
This page is intentionally left BLANK.

© ETCI 2018
National Rule
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
No copying without NSAI permission except as permitted by copyright law.

National rules for electrical installations
I.S. xxx: Irish Standard – national specification based on the consensus of an expert panel and
subject to public consultation.
S.R. xxx: Standard Recommendation - recommendation based on the consensus of an expert

panel and subject to public consultation.
SWiFT xxx: A rapidly developed recommendatory document based on the consensus of the
participants of an NSAI workshop.
ET 101:2008/A3:2018 21 May, 2018
ICS number:
This document was published 91.140.50
under the authority of the NSAI
and comes into effect on:
31 May, 2018
1 Swift Square, T +353 1 807 3800 T +353 1 857 6730

Northwood, Santry F +353 1 807 3838 F +353 1 857 6729
Dublin 9 E standards@nsai.ie W standards.ie
W
Údarás um Chaighdeáin Náisiúnta na hÉireann

ET 101:2008/A3:2018
Contents
722 Supplies for electric vehicles ........................................................................................... 3

722.1 Scope ..................................................................................................................... 3
722.2 Normative References ............................................................................................ 3
722.3 Terms and definitions.............................................................................................. 4
722.30 Assessment of general characteristics .................................................................... 5
722.31 Purposes, supplies and structure of an installation .................................................. 5
722.311 Maximum demand and diversity ....................................................................... 5
722.312 Supply conductor arrangement and system earthing ........................................ 5
722.314 Arrangements of circuits .................................................................................. 5

722.4 Protection for safety ................................................................................................ 6
722.41 Protection against electric shock ............................................................................. 6
722.413 Protection by basic insulation with electrical separation ................................... 6
722.5 Selection and erection of equipment ....................................................................... 6
722.51 Common rules and external influences .................................................................... 6
722.511 Compliance with standards .............................................................................. 6
722.512 Operational conditions and external influences ................................................ 6
722.53 Equipment for protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring ..................... 7
722.530 Scope, General requirements and Distribution Boards ..................................... 7
722.531 Devices for protection against electric shock by automatic
disconnection of supply ........................................................................................... 7
722.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent ....................................................... 8
722.536 Coordination of protective devices ................................................................... 8
722.538 Monitoring devices ........................................................................................... 8
722.543 Protective conductors ...................................................................................... 8
722.55 Other equipment ..................................................................................................... 9
Bibliography .......................................................................................................................... 10
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
FOREWORD
Amendment No. 3: ET 101:2008/A3:2018 to the National R ules for Electrical Installations

ET 101:2008 Fourth Edition (Incorporating Amendment No. 1: ET 101: 2008/A1:2011 and

Amendment No. 2: ET 101:2008/A2:2016), prepared by NSAI ETC TC 2, is based on
IEC/CENELEC HD Standards.
The text of this Standard is based on the following documents:
CENELEC HD 60364-7-722:2016, Part 7-722 Requirements for special installations or

locations - Supplies for electric vehicles
Requirements for special installations or locations - Supplies for electric vehicles, and is
intended for use in conjunction with the requirements of the general parts of ET 101:2008. Parts
722 of ET 101:2008 supplement, modify or replace certain requirements of the general parts of
ET 101:2008 being valid at the time of publication of this part. The absen ce of reference to the
exclusion of a part or a clause of a general part means that the corresponding clauses of the
general part are applicable.
Requirements of other 7XX parts being relevant for installations covered by this part also apply.
This part may therefore also supplement, modify or replace certain of these requirements valid
at the time of publication of this part.
The clause numbering of this part follows the pattern and corresponding references of
ET 101:2008. The numbers following the particu lar number of this part are those of the
corresponding parts, or clauses of the other parts of ET 101:2008, valid at the time of publication
of this part, as indicated in the normative references of this document.
If requirements or explanations additional to those of the other parts of ET 101:2008 are

needed, the numbering of such items appears as 722.101, 722.102, 722.103 etc.
In the case where new or amended general parts with modified numbering were published after
this part was issued, the clause numbers referring to a general part in this part of ET 101:2008
may no longer align with the latest edition of the general part. Dated references should be
observed.
Under the rules of CENELEC, NSAI’s scope to change the requirements is limited. This
document has been drafted in accordance with the ISO/IEC
Directives, Part 2.
The implementation date for ET 101:2008/A3:2018 is 2018-05-31.
In line with international standards practice the following representation of numbers and
numerical values apply:
 The decimal point is shown as a comma ( , ) throughout this Standard Recommendation.

 Each group of three digits reading to the left or to the right of a decimal sign are
separated by a space from the preceding digits of following digits respectively.
2
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
722 Supplies for electric vehicles

722.1 Scope
This Part implements CENELEC HD 60364-7-722:2016.

The particular requirements of this part of ET 101:2008 apply to:
– circuits intended to supply energy to electric vehicles;
– circuits intended for feeding back electricity from electric vehicles into the supply network.
NOTE The requirements for feeding back electricity from electric vehicles into the supply network are under
consideration.
Inductive charging is not covered.

722.2 Normative References

The following documents, in whole or in part, are normatively referenced in this document and
are indispensable for its application. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For
undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments)
applies.
I.S. EN 60269 / HD 60269 / CLC/TR 60269 (series), Low-voltage fuses (IEC 60269 series)
I.S. EN 60309-1:1999, Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes – Part 1:
General requirements (IEC 60309-1:1999)
I.S. EN 60309-2, Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes – Part 2:
Dimensional interchangeability requirements for pin a nd contact-tube accessories (IEC 60309-
2)
HD 384 / HD 60364 (series), Electrical installations of building / Low -voltage electrical

installations (IEC 60364 series)
I.S. EN 60898 (series), Electrical accessories – Circuit breakers for overcurrent protectio n for
household and similar installations (IEC 60898 series)
I.S. EN 60947-2, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 2: Circuit-breakers

(IEC 60947-2)
I.S. EN 60947-6-2, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 6-2: Multiple function
equipment – Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS) (IEC 60947-6-2)
I.S. EN 61008-1, Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral overcurrent

protection for household and similar uses (RCCB's) – Part 1: General rules (IEC 61008-1)
I.S. EN 61009-1, Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection
for household and similar uses (RCBOs) – Part 1: General rules (IEC 61009-1)
I.S. EN 61140:2002, Protection against electric shock – Common aspects for installation and
equipment (IEC 61140:2001)
I.S. EN 61557-8, Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1 000 V a.c. and 1
500 V d.c. – Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures – Part 8:
Insulation monitoring devices for IT systems (IEC 61557-8)
I.S. EN 61557-9, Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1 000 V a.c. and 1
500 V d.c. – Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures – Part 9:
Equipment for insulation fault location in IT systems (IEC 61557-9)
3
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
I.S. EN 61558-2-4, Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for
supply voltages up to 1 100 V – Part 2-4: Particular requirements and tests for isolating
transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating transformers (IEC 61558-2-4)
I.S. EN 61851 (series), Electric vehicle conductive charging system (IEC 61851 series)
I.S. EN 62196-1, Plugs, socket-outlets, vehicle connectors and vehicle inlets – Conductive
charging of electric vehicles – Part 1: General requirements (IEC 62196-1)
I.S. EN 62196-2, Plugs, socket-outlets, vehicle connectors and vehicle inlets – Conductive
charging of electric vehicles – Part 2: Dimensional compatibility and interchangeability
requirements for a.c. pin and contact-tube accessories (IEC 62196-2)
I.S. EN 62196-3, Plugs, socket-outlets, vehicle connectors and vehicle inlets - Conductive
charging of electric vehicles – Part 3: Dimensional compatibility and interchangeability
requirements for d.c. and a.c./d.c. pin and contact-tube vehicle couplers
I.S. EN 62262, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment against
external mechanical impacts (IK code) (IEC 62262)
I.S. EN 62423, Type F and type B residual current operated circuit -breakers with and without
integral overcurrent protection for household and similar uses (IEC 62423)
722.3 Terms and definitions
For the purposes of this document, the following terms and definitions apply. ISO and IEC
maintain terminological databases for use in sta ndardization at the following addresses:
 IEC Electropedia: available at http://electropedia.org/
 ISO Online browsing platform: available at http;//iso.org/obp
722.3.1
electric vehicle
EV
any vehicle propelled by an electric motor drawing current from a rechargeable storage battery
or from other portable energy storage devices (rechargeable, using energy from a source off
the vehicle such as a residential or public electricity service), which is manufactured primarily
for use on public streets, roads or highways
[SOURCE: I.S. EN 61851-1:2011, 3.8]
722.3.2
connecting point
point where one electric vehicle is connected to the fixed installation
Note 1 to entry: The connecting point is a socket-outlet or a vehicle connector.
Note 2 to entry: The connecting point may be part of the fixed installed electric vehicle supply equipment in
accordance with the I.S. EN 61851 series.
722.3.3
mode 1 charging
connection of the EV to the a.c. supply network (mains) utilizing standardized socket -outlets
not exceeding 16 A and not exceeding 250 V a.c. single-phase or 480 V a.c. three-phase, at
the supply side, and utilizing the live and protective earth conductors
[SOURCE: I.S. EN 61851-1:2011, 6.2 "EV charging modes, mode 1 charging"]
4
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
722.3.4
mode 2 charging
connection of the EV to the a.c. supply network (mains) utilizing standardized single -phase or
three-phase socket-outlets not exceeding 32 A and not exceeding 250 V a.c. single -phase or
480 V a.c. three-phase, and utilizing the live and protective earth conductors together with a
control pilot function and system of personnel protection against electric shock (RCD) between
the EV and the plug or as a part of the in-cable control box
[SOURCE: I.S. EN 61851-1:2011, 6.2 "EV charging modes, mode 2 charging", modified]
722.3.5
mode 3 charging
connection of the EV to the a.c. supply network (mains) utilizing dedicated electric vehicle
supply equipment where the control pilot function extends to control equipment i n the electric
vehicle supply equipment permanently connected to the a.c. supply network (mains)
722.3.6
mode 4 charging
connection of the EV to the a.c. supply network (mains) utilizing an off-board charger where the
control pilot function extends to equipment permanently connected to the a.c. supply
722.3.7
demand factor
ratio, expressed as a numerical value or as a percentag e, of the maximum demand of a circuit
or a group of circuits within a specified period, to the corresponding total installed load of the
circuit(s)
Note 1 to entry: In using this term, it is necessary to specify to which level of the system it relates.
[SOURCE: IEC 60050-691:1973, 691-10-05, modified – the word "circuit" has replaced the word
"installation"].
722.30 Assessment of general characteristics

722.31 Purposes, supplies and structure of an installation
722.311 Maximum demand and diversity
Add the following:
It shall be considered that in normal use each single connecting point is used at its rated current.
NOTE For this application the demand factor of the final circuit supplying the connecting point (e.g. the socket-
outlet) is equal to 1.
Since all the connecting points of the installation can be used simultaneously, the diversity
factor of the distribution circuit shall be taken as equal to 1. However, this factor may b e reduced
where load control is available.
722.312 Supply conductor arrangement and system earthing

722.312.2.1 TN systems (neutral connected to earth)
Add the following:
In TN system, the final circuit supplying a connecting point shall be a TN -S system.
722.314 Arrangements of circuits

Add the following:
722.314.101 A dedicated circuit shall be provided for the connection to electric vehicles.
5
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
722.4 Protection for safety

722.41 Protection against electric shock
722.413 Protection by basic insulation with electrical separation
722.413.3 Requirements for protection in case of a fault (protection against indirect

contact)
Add the following:
722.413.3.101 The circuit shall be supplied through a fixed isolating transformer complying with
I.S. EN 61558-2-4.
NOTE In mode 4 (d.c. charging), requirements for the isolating transformer are under consideration.
722.41.B Obstacles and placing out of reach

722.41.B.2 Protection by obstacles

Replace the existing text by the following:
Protection by obstacles shall not be used.
722.41.B.3 Protection by placing out of reach

Protection by placing out of reach shall not be used.
722.41.C.1 Non-conducting location

Protection by non-conducting location shall not be used.
722.41.C.2 Protection by earth-free local equipotential bonding

Protection by earth-free local equipotential bonding shall not be used.
722.41.C.3 Protection by electrical separation for the supply of more than one item of
current-using equipment
Electrical separation shall not be used for the supply of more than one electric vehicle.
722.5 Selection and erection of equipment

722.51 Common rules and external influences
722.511 Compliance with standards
Add the following:
722.511.101 EV charging stations shall comply with the appropriate parts of the
I.S. EN 61851 series.
722.512 Operational conditions and external influences

722.512.2 External influences
Add the following new subclauses:
722.512.2.101 Presence of water (AD)

Where the connection point is installed outdoors, the equipment shall be selected with a degree
of protection of at least IPX4 in order to protect against water splashes (AD4).
6
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
722.512.2.102 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)

Where the connecting point is installed outdoors, the equipment shall be selected or provi ded
with a degree of protection of at least IP4X in order to protect against the ingress of small
objects (AE3).
722.512.2.103 Impact (AG)

Equipment installed in public areas and car park sites shall be protected against mechanical
damage (impact of medium severity AG2). Protection of the equipment shall be afforded by one
or more of the following:
– the position or location shall be selected to avoid damage by any reasonably foreseeable
impact;
– local or general mechanical protection shall be provided;
–
equipment shall be installed that complies with a minimum degree of protection against
external mechanical impact of IK07 in accordance with the requirements of I.S. EN 62262.
722.53 Equipment for protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring
722.530 Scope, General requirements and Distribution Boards
722.530.2 General requirements
Add the following paragraph:
The requirements of this clause shall be achieved either by the selection and erection of the
appropriate equipment in the fixed installation or by the selection of an EV charging station
which incorporates the appropriate equipment or a combination of both.
722.531 Devices for protection against electric shock by automatic disconnection of

supply
722.531.2 Residual-current protective devices (RCDs)
Add the following:
722.531.2.101 Except for circuits using the protective measure of electrical separation, each
connecting point shall be protected by its own RCD of at least type A, having a rated residual
operating current not exceeding 30 mA.
Where the EV charging station is equipped with a socket-outlet or vehicle connector complying
with the EN 62196 series, protective measures against d.c. fault current shall be taken, except
where provided by the EV charging station. The appropriate measures, for each connection
point, shall be as follows:
– RCD type B; or
– RCD type A and appropriate equipment that ensures disconnection of the supply in case of
d.c. fault current above 6 mA.
RCDs shall comply with one of the following standards: I.S. EN 61008-1, I.S. EN 61009-1,
I.S. EN 60947-2 or I.S. EN 62423.
NOTE 1 Requirements for the selection and erection of RCDs in the case of supplies using d.c.
vehicle connectors according to the I.S. EN 62196 series are under consideration.
NOTE 2 The manufacturer of the EV and associated equipment should be consulted to determine
the level of DC fault current.
722.531.2.1
RCD shall disconnect all live conductors.
7
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
722.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent

Add the following:
722.533.101 Each connecting point shall be supplied individually by a final circuit protected
by an overcurrent protective device complying with I.S. EN 60947-2,
I.S. EN 60947-6-2 or I.S. EN 61009-1 or with the relevant parts of the I.S. EN 60898 series or
the I.S./S.R. EN 60269 / HD 60269 series.
NOTE 1 The overcurrent protective device may be part of the switchboard, the fixed installation or the electric
vehicle supply equipment.
NOTE 2 The electric vehicle supply equipment may have multiple connecting points.
722.536 Coordination of protective devices

722.536.3 Selectivity between RCDs
Add a new first paragraph as follows:
Where required for service reasons, selectivity shall be maintained between the RCD protecting
a connecting point and an RCD installed upstream.
722.538 Monitoring devices

Add the following:
722.538.1.101 Insulation monitoring devices for IT systems (IMDs)

For circuits in IT systems that are intended to supply energy for electric vehicles, for example
by an isolating transformer or a battery system, an insulation monitoring device (IMD) according
to I.S. EN 61557-8 shall be provided.
An IMD may not be necessary for a circuit that uses automatic disconnection of supply at the
first fault.
It is recommended to install an IMD with the following two response values:

– Pre-warning
If the insulation resistance falls below 300 Ω/V an optical and/or acoustical signal should be
issued to the user. An ongoing charging session may continue but a new charging session
shall not take place.
– Alarm
If the resistance falls below 100 Ω/V an optical and/or acoustical signal should be issued to
the user. The charging circuit may shut down within 10 s.
722.538.2.101 Equipment for insulation fault location in IT systems

For circuits described in 722.538.1.101, and if more than one electric vehicle is supplied from
the same unearthed supply, it is recommended to use an insulation fault location system (IFLS)
according to I.S. EN 61557-9 to detect the faulty circuitry within the shortest possible time.
722.543 Protective conductors

Add the following:
722.543.101 Control signals on the protective conductor (PE) shall not flow into the fixed
electrical installation; equipment shall be selected accordingly.
NOTE This requirement can be achieved by using a galvanic separation of the control electronics.
The requirements of 7.5.2 of I.S. EN 61140:2002 shall apply.
Such signals, and the related devices, shall not impair the correct functioning of the devices
installed to provide the protective measure of automatic disconnection of supply (e.g. RCD).
8
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
722.55 Other equipment

Add the following:
722.55.101 Socket-outlets and vehicle connectors

722.55.101.1 Each connecting point shall be provided with one socket -outlet or vehicle
connector complying with an appropriate standard, e.g. I.S. EN 60309-1 or I.S. EN 62196-1,
where interchangeability is not required, and I.S. EN 60309-2, I.S. EN 62196-2 or
I.S. EN 62196-3 where interchangeability is required.
NOTE 1 Interchangeability is required where the socket outlet or vehicle connector is publicly
accessible. Interchangeability is not specifically required in the context of private access.
NOTE 2 All publicly accessible vehicle charging points are subject to the related criteria set out in
Directive 2014/94/EU from 18 November 2017
Socket-outlets with a rated current not exceeding 16 A accor ding to the national standard may
also be used.
Except where electrical separation is used, each socket -outlet shall have an earthing contact
connected to the protective conductor (PE).
722.55.101.2 Every socket-outlet or vehicle connector shall be located as close as practicable to

the EV parking place to be supplied.
722.55.101.3 Portable socket-outlets are not permitted.
One socket-outlet or vehicle connector shall supply only one electric vehicle.
9
ET 101:2008/A3:2018
Bibliography
IEC 60050-691:1973, International Electrotechnical Vocabulary – Chapter 691: Tariffs for electricity
IEC 60309-4, Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes – Part 4: Switched socket-
outlets and connectors with or without interlock
NOTE 1 Harmonized as EN 60309-4.
IEC 60364-5-51:2005, Electrical installations of buildings – Part 5-51: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment – Common rules
NOTE 2 Harmonized as HD 60364-5-51:2009 (modified).
IEC 60884-1, Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes – Part 1: General
requirements
IEC 61439-7, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 7: Assemblies for specific
applications such as marinas, camping sites, market squares, electric vehicles charging stations
IEC 61851 (series), Electric vehicle conductive charging system
NOTE 3 Harmonized in EN 61851 series.
IEC 61851-1, Electric vehicle conductive charging system – Part 1: General requirements
NOTE 4 Harmonized as EN 61851-1.
IEC 61851-1:2010, Electric vehicle conductive charging system – Part 1: General requirements
NOTE 5 Harmonized as EN 61851-1:2011 (not modified).
IEC 62196 (series):, Plugs, socket-outlets, vehicle connectors and vehicle inlets – Conductive charging
of electric vehicles
NOTE 6 Harmonized in EN 62196 series.
IEC TR 62350, Guidance for the correct use of residual current-operated protective devices (RCDs) for
household and similar use.
10
National Standards Authority of Ireland
NSAI is the state standardization body set up under the National Standards Authority of
Ireland Act 1996 to publish Irish Standards.
Revisions
Irish Standards are updated by amendment or revisions from time to time. Users of Irish
Standards should make sure that they possess the latest versions.
NSAI’s Tailored updating service is designed to meet your precise needs and is therefore
the most efficient and cost-effective way of keeping ahead. For more details on the
tailored updating service see:
Standards.ie
Tel.: +353 1 857 6730/1
Buying standards
NSAI and International publications can be accessed:
⎯ at standards.ie
⎯ by tel: +353 1 857 6730/1 or
⎯ email: info@standards.ie.
Feedback on Standards
NSAI welcomes any comments on standards whether proposing an amendment, correcting
an error or identifying an ambiguity. Please use the “About NSAI” and then “Contact us”
buttons on the NSAI.ie home page to explain your comment.
Participation in developing Standards

NSAI Standards, whether of National, European or International origin, are drawn up by
panels of experts. Persons with expert knowledge in any field where standardization work
is taking place and who are interested in contributing to the work of the panels are
welcome to make themselves known to NSAI. Please note that conditions apply. Click on
the “Get involved in Standards Development” button in NSAI.ie

ETCI Nat Rules 2008 _ 2013 (2016).qxp_Layout 1 11/05/2016 15:39 Page 1
NATIONAL RULES
FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
FOURTH EDITION
ET 101: 2008
(Incorporating Amendment No. 1: ET101:2008/A1:2011

and Amendment No. 2: ET 101:2008/A2:2016)
ELECTRO-TECHNICAL COUNCIL OF IRELAND
2016

Fourth Edition 2008
(Incorporating Amendment No. 1: ET101:2008/A1:2011

and Amendment No. 2: ET 101:2008/A2:2016)
and other minor additions/corrections.
Published by the Electro-Technical Council of Ireland
© The Electro-Technical Council of Ireland 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, transmitted or stored in paper, electronic (including,
but not limited, to any online service, any database or any part of the internet), CD-Rom
or other off-line product or in any other format in any way whatsoever without the
prior written permission of the Electro-Technical Council of Ireland Limited.
Electro-Technical Council of Ireland Limited,

Unit H12,
Centrepoint Business Park,
Oak Road,
Dublin 12.
Telephone: (01) 4290088

Fax: (01) 4290090
E-mail: info@etci.ie
Website: http://www.etci.ie
CONTENTS
LIST OF DIAGRAMS
FOREWORD
THE ELECTRO-TECHNICAL COUNCIL OF IRELAND
TECHNICAL COMMITTEE NO. 2 (TC/2)
INTRODUCTION
THE PLAN OF THE RULES EXPLAINED
STANDARDS FOR EQUIPMENT AND OTHER REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
PART 1: SCOPE, OBJECT AND FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

Chapter 11: Scope

Chapter 12: Object
Chapter 13: Fundamental principles
PART 2: DEFINITIONS
PART 3: GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Chapter 30: Assessment of general characteristics

Chapter 31: Purposes, supplies and structure of an installation
Chapter 32: Classification of external influences
Chapter 33: Compatibility
Chapter 34: Maintenance
Chapter 35: Safety services
Chapter 36: Continuity of service
Chapter 37: Voltage bands
PART 4: PROTECTION FOR SAFETY
Chapter 40: Application of protective measures

Chapter 41: Protection against electric shock
Chapter 42: Protection against fire and harmful thermal effects
Chapter 43: Protection against overcurrent
Chapter 44: Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances
Chapter 45: Void
Chapter 46: Isolation and switching
PART 5: SELECTION AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT
Chapter 51: Common rules and external influences

Chapter 52: Wiring systems
Chapter 53: Equipment for protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring
Chapter 54: Earthing arrangements, protective conductors and equipotential bonding
Chapter 55: Other equipment
iii
PART 6: VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION
Chapter 61: Initial verification and testing

Chapter 62: Periodic inspection and testing
Chapter 63: Certification
PART 7: REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS OR LOCATIONS
701: Locations containing a bath or shower basin

702: Swimming pools and paddling pools
702A: Fountains
703: Locations containing a hot air sauna
704: Construction and demolition site installations
705: Agricultural and horticultural premises
706: Conductive locations with restricted movement
707: Reserved
708: Caravan parks and similar locations
709: Marinas and similar locations
710: “Medical locations” was prepared by Technical Committee No.10 “Electrical Equipment in Medical Practice”.
711: Exhibitions, shows and stands
712: Solar photo-electric installations
713: Reserved
714: Outdoor lighting installations
715: Extra-low voltage lighting installations
716: Reserved
717: Mobile or transportable installations
721: Caravans and motor caravans
729: Operating or maintenance gangways
740: Temporary installations for structures, amusement devices and booths at fairgrounds, amusement parks and
circuses
753: Floor- and ceiling- heating systems
ANNEXES
INDEX
iv
LIST OF DIAGRAMS
Fig. 31.1: TN-C-S system: Neutral and protective conductors combined in a single conductor in part of a system.
Normal supply from network
Fig. 31.2: TN-C-S system: Supply from proprietor’s transformer or generator: Neutral and protective conductors
combined in a single conductor in a part of a system.

Fig. 31.3: TN-S system: Supply from proprietor’s transformer or generator: Separate neutral and protective conductors
throughout.
Fig. 31.4: TN C system: Special cases only
Fig. 31.5: TT system: Not normally available
Fig. 31.6: IT system. Special cases only.
Fig. 44.1: Stress voltages in substations.
Fig. 44.2: Tolerable fault-voltage due to an earth fault in the higher -voltage system.
Fig. 53.1: Protective conductor and MRCB
Fig. 53.2: Main overcurrent device mounted in a standard meter

Fig. 53.3: Schematic diagram: Installation of SPDs.
Fig. 54.1: Explanatory diagram: Earthing, protective conductors and bonding.
Fig. 54.2: Earthing and equipotential arrangement in multi-occupancy
Fig. 61.1a: Erroneous connection test
Fig. 61.1b: Erroneous connection test: Ring final circuits
Fig. 61.2: Measurement of earth-electrode resistance
Fig. 61.3: Measurement of wall and floor impedance: Test electrode 2.
Fig. 701.1: Bathroom equipotential bonding system – all-metal pipe-work and bath.
Fig. 701.2: Bathroom equipotential bonding system – all plastic pipe-work
Fig. 701.3: Examples of bathroom zone dimensions – plan views.
Fig. 701.4: Examples of bathroom zone dimensions – elevation views
Fig. 701.5: Prefabricated shower unit.
Fig. 702.1: Zone dimensions for swimming-pools and paddling-pools (elevation).
Fig. 702.2: Zone dimensions for swimming-pool basin above ground.
Fig. 702.3: Zone dimensions for swimming-pool with fixed partitions of height at least 2.5m – plan view.
Fig. 702A.1: Zone dimensions for a fountain.(example)
Fig. 703.1: Zone dimensions of locations with sauna heaters
Fig. 705.1: Equipotential plane (grid) in milking parlours.
Fig. 705.2: Retrofit equipotential plane (grid) in milking parlours
Fig. 708.1: Schematic diagram: Caravan park installations.
Fig. 709.1: Schematic diagram: Marina installations.
Fig. 710.1: Example of patient environment
Fig. 712.1: Schematic diagram Solar PV installation
Fig. 717.1: Mobile installation: Schematic diagram TN
Fig. 717.2: Mobile installation: Schematic diagram TT
Fig. 740: Line diagram: Installation in fairground.
v
FOREWORD
The Fourth Edition of the National Rules for Electrical Installations was prepared by Technical Committee No. 2.
“Electrical Installations” and its Working Group WG 2/101, of the Electro-Technical Council of Ireland.
Drafts of the various chapters were circulated for public comment during the period from November 2005 to January
2007. Comments received were given due consideration, and the drafts were discussed with public and private bodies.
In particular, consultations were held with the Health & Safety Authority and the Department of the Environment,
Heritage & Local Government to ensure that the Rules were in harmony with statutory regulations. Their assistance
is gratefully acknowledged.
Section 710: “Medical Locations” was prepared by Technical Committee No. 10 “Electrical Equipment in Medical
Practice”.
Incorporated in this reprint are the following: Amendment No. 1: ET101:2008/A1:2011, and Amendment No. 2: ET
101:2008/A2:2016. The First Amendment and the Second Amendment to the Fourth Edition which were published in
2011 and 2016 respectively, contained changes that were necessary for a number of reasons, e.g. changes to the
certification system under CER, new requirements for micro-generators and the connection of mobile generators,
recent CENELEC decisions, changes in the original requirements for switches and socket-outlets introduced by the
Dept. of the Environment, and the need to revise the Rules in order to take into account subsequent developments in
the area of electrical safety.
This reprint also includes necessary corrigenda and errata.
The Rules are not intended to take the place of a particular specification or to instruct untrained persons.
vi
ELECTRO-TECHNICAL COUNCIL OF IRELAND
MEMBER ORGANISATIONS
Association of Consulting Engineers of Ireland

Association of Electrical Contractors (Ireland)

Association of Electrical Wholesalers
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
Dublin City Council

Dublin Institute of Technology
Eircom
Electrical Contractors Association
Electrical Manufacturers and Distributors Association
Electricity Supply Board

Engineers Ireland
Health and Safety Authority
Information & Communications Technology (ICT) Ireland

Institution of Engineering & Technology
Irish Cable Makers Association
Irish Engineering Enterprise Federation
National Irish Safety Organisation
Radio Telefis Eireann
Technical Engineering & Electrical Union
MEMBERSHIP OF INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS
The Electro-Technical Council of Ireland in partnership with the National Standards Authority of Ireland represents
Ireland at the:
- European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardisation (CENELEC)
- International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
The Electro-Technical Council of Ireland is the Irish Member of:
- International Social Security Association (ISSA) Electrical Section
vii
TECHNICAL COMMITTEE NO. 2: “ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS”
Membership 2016
Chairman: D O’Rourke Electro-Technical Council of Ireland

Secretary: K Sunderland Dublin Institute of Technology
Technical
Advisor: J A O’Doherty Consultant and (former TC-2 Secretary)
Members:
J Clare Register of Electrical Contractors of Ireland
C Clarke Office of Public Works
P Delaney Health and Safety Authority
N Dunne Association of Electrical Wholesalers
P Dunne Dublin City Council
G Eastwood Institute of Engineering and Technology
B Hickey Association of Electrical Contractors of Ireland
M Keogh Electrical Manufacturers and Distributors Association

M Mc Kenna Enterprise Ireland
M Moran Electrical Contractors Association
B Moran Electrical Contractors Standards and Safety Association
D Richardson Electricity Supply Board
V Spain Solas Further Education and Training Authority
viii
INTRODUCTION
The structure of the Rules is based on the restructured Plan of IEC Publication 60364, in accordance with a decision
of CENELEC TC 64.
The Rules implement the relevant technical content of the Harmonization Documents issued by the European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC), which comprises the national electrotechnical
committees of most European countries.
CENELEC issues European Standards (ENs) which must be published as national standards in each country, and
Harmonization Documents, the technical content of which must be implemented by each country.
The Harmonization Documents (HDs) on which the Rules are based are listed in the foreword to each chapter.
CENELEC HDs are generally based on the corresponding IEC Publication 60364.
In certain cases these Rules contain Special National Conditions (SNCs), i.e. variations, which were sanctioned for
Ireland. These are particular rules which were considered necessary to be retained for safety reasons for installations
in Ireland. The Rules will be amended from time to time to take account of developments in safety measures,
technology and materials.
Installation rules for the following area are contained in a separate publication:
National Rules for Electrical Installations in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres. ET 105.
ix
THE PLAN OF THE RULES EXPLAINED
The plan of the Fourth Edition of the National Rules follows in general that of IEC Publication 60364: “Electrical
Installations of Buildings”. It consists of seven parts as follows:
PART 1: SCOPE, OBJECT AND FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

PART 2: DEFINITIONS
PART 3: GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Here are stated the main characteristics that must be taken into consideration when commencing the design of an
installation.
PART 4: PROTECTION FOR SAFETY
This part specifies the safety measures that must be employed to protect persons, livestock and property against specific
hazards that arise from the use of electricity, namely electric shock, burns, fire, and injury from electrically-actuated
mechanical equipment.
Chapters 41 to 46 inclusive contain the requirements for the basic safety measures.
PART 5: SELECTION AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT
This part deals with the practical implementation of the safety measures of Part 4. In particular, limitations on the use
of materials and equipment for reasons of safety are stated, for example maximum temperatures. Detailed requirements
for the erection of wiring systems are included.
PART 6: VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION
This part specifies the inspection and testing procedures that are to be carried out after the completion of the erection
of an installation. The required certification procedure is also laid down.
PART 7: REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS OR LOCATIONS
This part deals with installations and locations where the normal Rules are either inadequate or not appropriate in
certain respects. The requirements of Part 7 must be used in conjunction with those of the preceding parts; details are
given in the introduction to Part 7.
ANNEXES:
The annexes give supplementary information and explanations for specific items in the Rules, for example the detailed
values of current-carrying capacities of cables. Annexes may be “normative”, i.e. containing essential information, or
“informative”, i.e. giving general information.
INDEX:
A comprehensive index is provided to facilitate readers, who are strongly advised to make use of it, so that they can
ascertain the full extent of the requirements and information relevant to an item.
x
STANDARDS FOR EQUIPMENT AND OTHER REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Reference is made in these Rules to standards for electrical equipment and other items in the relevant text. Unless
otherwise stated, the current issue of the standard or other reference document applies.
Reference documents cited are:

ETCI Publications
Irish Standards, identified by the prefix I.S.,
British Standards, identified by the prefix B.S.,
German standard identified by the prefix DIN or VDE.,
French standards, identified by the prefix UFC.,
European Standards issued by CENELEC and identified by the prefix EN and published in each European country as
a national Standard, e.g. in Ireland with the prefix I.S. EN. These are regional standards.
IEC Publications published by the International Electrotechnical Commission. These are international standards.
European Standards are mainly based on IEC Publications. In many cases, the two are technically identical, but in some
cases CENELEC modifies them for regional purposes.

There are some items for which only IEC publications exist.
Where a standard contains requirements, e.g. for installations that may be in conflict with these Rules, the Rules shall
prevail.
Reference is also made to national legislation and the relevant technical documents issued by government departments.
The Council has published and will continue to publish, from time to time, Codes of Practice and Guides that clarify
and amplify the Rules.
xi

PART 1
SCOPE, OBJECT, AND

FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES
CONTENTS
Foreword
Chapter 11: Scope
Chapter 12: Object
Chapter 13: Fundamental principles
FOREWORD
This Part implements Part 1 of CENELEC HD 60364-1: 2007
Chapter 11: Scope
These Rules specify the requirements for the design, erection and proper functioning of electrical installations. The
Rules are intended to provide for the safety of persons, livestock and property against dangers and damage that may
arise in the reasonable use of electrical installations.
11.1 These Rules apply to the design, erection and verification of electrical installations such as those of:
a) residential premises
b) commercial premises
c) public premises
d) industrial premises
e) agricultural and horticultural premises
f) prefabricated buildings
g) caravan sites and similar sites
h) construction sites, exhibitions, fairs and other temporary installations
i) marinas
j) outdoor lighting and similar installations
k) medical locations
l) mobile or transportable units
m) photovoltaic systems
n) low-voltage generating sets.
The additional requirements for installations in potentially explosive atmospheres are covered by ETCI Publication
ET 105.
Note: “Premises” covers the land and all facilities including buildings.
1
11.2 These Rules cover:
a) circuits supplied at a nominal voltage up to and including 1000V a.c. or 1500 V d.c.
b) for a.c., circuits supplied at a nominal frequency of 50Hz. The use of other frequencies for special purposes is not
excluded
c) circuits other than the internal wiring of apparatus, operating at voltages exceeding 1000V and derived from an
installation having a voltage not exceeding 1000V a.c. r.m.s. e.g. discharge lighting, electrostatic precipitators
d) wiring systems and cables not specifically covered by the standards for appliances
e) consumer installations external to buildings
f) fixed wiring for information and communication technology, signalling systems, control and such like (excluding
internal wiring of apparatus)
g) the extension or alteration of an installation and parts of the existing installation affected by the extension or
alteration.
11.3 These Rules do not apply to:
a) electric traction equipment (including rolling stock and signalling equipment)

b) electrical equipment of automobiles (including electric cars)

c) electrical installations on board ships, mobile and fixed offshore platforms
d) electrical installations in aircraft
e) public lighting installations operated by the DSO
f) installations in mines and quarries
g) radio interference suppression equipment, except insofar as it affects safety of the installation
h) lightning protection systems for buildings
Note: Atmospheric phenomena are covered, however, insofar as effects on the electrical installation are concerned (e.g. with respect to selection
of lightning arresters).
i) certain aspects of lift installations

j) electrical equipment of machines complying with I.S. EN 60204: Safety of machinery; Electrical equipment of
machinery.
11.4 These Rules are not intended to apply to:
- public or private supply systems for the distribution of electricity to customers, or

- power generation and transmission for such systems.
11.5 These Rules apply only to the selection, installation and application of electrical equipment and assemblies
complying with the relevant standards. They do not apply to the internal wiring of such equipment or assemblies.
Chapter 12: Object
12.1 These Rules specify the requirements for the design, erection and testing of electrical installations so as to
provide safe and proper functioning for their intended use..
12.2 Chapter 13 of these Rules states the fundamental principles on which these Rules are based. It does not include
detailed technical requirements which are covered by Parts 3 to 7 inclusive.
Chapter 13: Fundamental Principles

Contents
131 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY

131.1 General
131.3 Protection against harmful thermal effects
131.4 Protection against overcurrent
131.5 Protection against fault currents
131.6 Protection against overvoltage
131.7 Protection against power supply interruption
2
132 DESIGN
132.1 General
132.2 Characteristics of available supply or supplies
132.3 Nature of demand
132.4 Safety supply or supplies
132.5
External influences
132.6 Cross-sectional areas of conductors
132.7 Type of wiring and methods of installation
132.8 Protective equipment
132.9 Emergency switching and stopping
132.10 Isolation
132.11 Prevention of mutual detrimental influence
132.12 Accessibility of electrical equipment
132.13 Documentation of electrical installation
133 SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

133.1 General
133.2 Characteristics
133.3 Conditions of installation
133.4 Prevention of harmful effects
134 ERECTION AND INITIAL VERIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

134.1 Erection
134.2 Initial verification
134.3 Periodic inspection and testing
131 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY

131.1 General
The principles stated below are intended to ensure the safety of persons, livestock and property against dangers and
damage that may arise in the reasonable use of electrical installations.
Note: In electrical installations the following major types of risk exist:
- shock currents,
- excessive temperatures likely to cause fires burns, or other injurious effects,
- physical injury caused by electrically driven mechanical equipment,
- ignition of potentially explosive atmospheres, which are not in the scope of these Rules, and for which see ET 105,
- undervoltages, overvoltages and electromagnetic influences likely to cause or result in injury or damage,
- power supply interruptions and/or interruption of safety services,
- arcing likely to cause blinding effects, excessive pressure, and/or toxic gases.
131.2.1 Basic protection (protection against direct contact)

Persons and livestock shall be protected against dangers that may arise from contact with live parts of the installation.
This protection can be achieved by one of the following methods:
- preventing a current from passing through the body of a person or livestock,

- limiting the current that can pass through a body to a value lower than the shock current.
131.2.2 Fault protection (protection against indirect contact)
Persons and livestock shall be protected against dangers that may arise from contact with exposed conductive parts in
case of a fault.
3
This protection may be achieved by one of the following methods:
- preventing a fault current from passing through the body of a person or livestock,
- limiting the fault current that can pass through a body to a value lower than the hazardous shock current,
- limiting the duration of the fault current to a safe period.
Note: For protection against indirect contact, the application of the method of automatic disconnection of the supply along with equipotential
bonding is one of the important measures for safety.
131.3 Protection against harmful thermal effects
The electrical installation shall be so arranged that there is no hazard of ignition of flammable materials due to high
temperature or electric arc or spark. In addition, during normal operation of the electrical equipment, there shall be no
hazard of burns to persons or livestock.

Persons and livestock shall be protected against injury, and property shall be protected against damage, due to excessive
temperatures or electromechanical stresses caused by overcurrents likely to flow in live conductors.
This protection is achieved by one of the followed methods:
i) automatic disconnection on the occurrence of an overcurrent before it attains a dangerous value taking into
account its duration;
ii) limiting the maximum overcurrent to a safe value and duration.
131.5 Protection against fault currents
Apart from the live conductors, other parts intended to carry a fault current shall be capable of carrying that current
without attaining an excessive temperature.
Electrical equipment and conductors, shall where necessary, be provided with mechanical protection against
mechanical stresses caused by fault currents, to prevent injury to persons or livestock or damage to property.
Live conductors shall be protected against overcurrents arising from faults, in accordance with the methods specified
in 131.4.
Note: Particular attention should be given to earth fault currents and leakage currents.
131.6 Protection against voltage disturbances and measures against electromagnetic influences
131.6.1 Persons and livestock shall be protected against injury, and property shall be protected against any harmful
effects resulting from a fault between live parts of circuits supplied at different voltages.
131.6.2 Persons and livestock shall be protected against injury, and property shall be protected against damage
resulting from overvoltages such as those originating from atmospheric events or from switching.
Note: For protection against direct lightning strikes, see IS EN 61024.
131.6.3 Persons and livestock shall be protected against injury and property shall be protected against damage
resulting from undervoltage and any subsequent voltage recovery
131.6.4 The installation shall have an adequate level of immunity against electromagnetic disturbances so as to
function correctly in the specified environment. The installation design shall take into consideration the anticipated
electromagnetic emissions generated by the installation or the installed equipment, which shall be suitable for the
current-using equipment used with or connected to the installation.
131.7 Protection against power-supply interruption
Where danger or damage is expected to arise due to an interruption of the supply, including voltage fluctuations and
voltage dips, suitable provisions shall be made in the installation or installed equipment.
4
132 DESIGN
132.1 General
In the design of the electrical installation, provision shall be made for:

- the protection of persons, livestock and property in accordance with 131,

- the proper functioning of the electrical installation for the use intended.
The information required as a basis for design is listed in 132.2 to 132.5 inclusive. The requirements with which the
design should comply are stated in 132.6 to 132.12 inclusive.
132.2 Characteristics of available supply or supplies
132.2.1 Nature of current: a.c. and/or d.c.
132.2.2 Nature and number of conductors:

for a.c.: phase/line conductor (s)

neutral conductor
protective conductor
for d.c.: positive conductor

negative conductor
mid-wire conductor
protective conductor
132.2.3 Values and tolerances:
- voltage and voltage tolerances,

- voltage interruptions ,voltage fluctuations and voltage dips,
- frequency and frequency tolerances,
- maximum current allowable,
- prospective short-circuit currents,
- earth fault loop impedance upstream of the origin of the installation.
Note: Details of these values and tolerances should be obtained from the DSO where appropriate.
132.2.4 Protective measures inherent in the supply, e.g. earthed neutral, mid-point earthing.
132.2.5 Particular requirements of the DSO.
132.3 Nature of demand
The number and type of circuits required for lighting, heating, power, control, signalling, telecommunication, etc. are
determined by the following:
- location of points of power demand,

- loads to be expected on the various circuits,
- daily and yearly variation of demand,
- any special conditions,
- requirements for control, signalling, telecommunication, etc.
- anticipated future demand.
132.4 Safety supply or supplies
- source of supply (nature, characteristics),

- circuits to be supplied by the safety source.
132.5 External influences
The design of the electrical installation shall take into account the external influences to which it will be subjected.
Note: See Chapter 51 and Annex 51D.
5
The cross-sectional areas of conductors shall be determined according to:
- their admissible maximum temperatures,

- the admissible voltage drop,
- electromechanical stresses likely to occur due to short-circuits,

- other mechanical stresses to which the conductors may be exposed,
- the maximum impedance with respect to the functioning of the earth fault and short-circuit protection,
- the method of installation.
Note: The above-listed items concern primarily the safety of electrical installations. Cross-sectional areas greater than those required for safety
may be desirable for economic reasons.
132.7 Type of wiring and methods of installation
The choice of the type of wiring and the methods of installation depend on:
- the nature of the locations,

- the nature of the walls or other parts of the building supporting the wiring ,
- accessibility of wiring to persons and livestock,
- voltage,
- the electromechanical stresses likely to occur due to earth faults and short-circuits,
- electromagnetic interference,
- other stresses to which the wiring can be exposed during the erection of the electrical installation or in service.
132.8 Protective equipment
The characteristics of protective equipment shall be determined with respect to the needs of the installation, which may
be, e.g. protection against the effects of the following:
- overcurrent (i.e. overload or short-circuit,)

- earth-fault current,
- overvoltage,
- undervoltage and no-voltage
The protective devices shall operate at values of current, voltage and time that are appropriate for the characteristics
of the circuits and to the possibilities of danger.
132.9 Emergency switching and stopping
Where in case of danger there is need for immediate interruption of supply, a suitable device shall be installed in such
a way that it is readily accessible, easily recognisable, and can be effectively and rapidly operated.
132.10 Isolation
Disconnection devices shall be provided for isolation of the electrical installation, circuits or individual items of
apparatus as required for maintenance, testing, fault detection or repair.
132.11 Prevention of mutual detrimental influence
The electrical installation shall be arranged in such a way that no mutual detrimental influence will occur:
- between different electrical installations, or

- between an electrical and a non-electrical installation.
Note: See CENELEC Report R064-004.
132.12 Accessibility of electrical equipment
The electrical equipment shall be arranged so as to afford:
- sufficient space for the initial installation and later replacement of individual items of electrical equipment,
- accessibility for operation, testing, inspection, maintenance and repair.
6
132.13 Documentation of electrical installation
Every electrical installation shall be provided with appropriate documentation.
133 SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

133.1 General
Every item of electrical equipment used in electrical installations shall comply with the following: where appropriate:
- European/Irish Standards (I.S. EN),

- Irish Standards (I.S.)
- in the absence of the above, IEC or ISO Standards or the national standard of a CENELEC member country.
Where there are no applicable standards, the item concerned shall be selected by special agreement between the person
specifying the installation and the installer.
133.2 Characteristics
Every item of electrical equipment selected shall have suitable characteristics appropriate to the values and conditions
on which the design of the electrical installation is based and shall, in particular, fulfil the following requirements.
133.2.1 Voltage
Electrical equipment shall be suitable for the maximum sustained voltage (r.m.s. value for a.c.) likely to be applied.
Such equipment shall be suitable for overvoltages anticipated.
Note 1: For certain equipment, it may be necessary to take account of the lowest voltage likely to occur.
Note 2: Overvoltage categories are specified in CENELEC HD 625.1.S1:1996: Insulation co-ordination for equipment within low voltage systems:
Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests.
133.2.2 Current
All electrical equipment shall be selected for the maximum sustained current (r.m.s. value for a.c.) which it has to carry
in normal service. Account shall be taken of the current likely to be carried in abnormal conditions and the period (e.g.
operating time of protective devices if any) during which it may be expected to flow.
133.2.3 Frequency
If frequency has an influence on the characteristics of electrical equipment, the rated frequency of the equipment shall
correspond to the frequency likely to occur in the circuit.
133.2.4 Power characteristics
Electrical equipment selected on the basis of its power characteristics shall be suitable for the duty demanded of the
equipment, taking into account the load factor and the normal service conditions.
133.3 Conditions of installation
Electrical equipment shall be selected so as to withstand safely the external influences characteristic of its location to
which it may be exposed. If, however, an item of equipment does not have by design the properties corresponding to
its location, it may be used on condition that adequate additional protection is provided as part of the completed
electrical installation.
133.4 Prevention of harmful effects
Electrical equipment shall be selected so that it will not adversely affect other equipment or impair the supply during
normal service including switching operations. In this context factors that can have an influence include:
- power factor,
- inrush current,
- asymmetrical load,
- harmonics,
- transient overvoltages generated by equipment in the installation.
7
134 ERECTION AND VERIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
134.1 Erection
134.1.1 For the erection of an electrical installation, good workmanship by competent persons shall be ensured, and
proper materials shall be used. Electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the equipment.
134.1.2 The characteristics of the electrical equipment, as determined in accordance with 133 shall not be impaired
in the process of erection.
134.1.3 Conductors shall be identified by colours or numerals, in accordance with Chapter 51. Where identification
of terminals is necessary, they shall be identified in accordance with IEC 60445.
134.1.4 Connections between conductors and between conductors and other electrical equipment shall be made in
such a way that safe and reliable contact is ensured.
134.1.5 Electrical equipment shall be installed in such a manner that the designed heat-dissipation conditions are not
impaired.
134.1.6 Electrical equipment likely to cause high temperatures or electric arcs or sparks shall be placed or guarded
so as to eliminate the risk of ignition of flammable materials. Where the temperature of exposed parts of electrical
equipment could cause injury to persons, those parts shall be located or guarded so as to prevent accidental contact
therewith.
134.1.7 Where necessary for safety purposes, suitable warning signs and/or notices shall be provided.
134.1.8 Where an installation is erected by using new materials, inventions or methods leading to deviations from
these Rules, the resulting degree of safety of the installation shall be not less than that obtained by compliance with
these Rules.
134.1.9 In the case of an addition or alteration to an existing installation, it shall be determined that the rating and
condition of existing equipment, which will have to carry any additional load is adequate for the altered circumstances.
Furthermore, the earthing and bonding arrangements, if necessary for the protective measure applied for the safety of
the addition or alteration, shall be effective.
134.2 Initial verification
Electrical installations including modifications and extensions shall be tested and inspected before being placed in
service, in order to verify compliance with these Rules.
Note: See Chapter 61 for details.
134.3 Periodic inspection and testing
It is recommended that every electrical installation be inspected and tested periodically as appropriate to the use and
the external influences to ensure that it complies with these Rules.
Note: See Chapter 62 for details.
8
PART 2
DEFINITIONS
9
INTRODUCTION
The following definitions apply for the purposes of these Rules. For the definitions of other items, reference should
be made to IEC Publication 50 “International Electrotechnical Vocabulary” and IEC Publications dealing with the
particular subjects concerned. The definitions are given in alphabetical order. Definitions relating to fire protection
properties are given in an addendum to these definitions.
Accessory: A device, other than current-using equipment, associated with such equipment or with the wiring of an
installation.
Ambient Temperature: The temperature of the air or other medium where the equipment is to be used.
Appliance: Any device that utilises electricity for a particular purpose, excluding a luminaire or an independent
motor.
Arm’s Reach: A zone extending from any point on a surface where persons usually stand or move about, to the limits
which a person can reach with the hand in any direction without assistance.
Note: See Figure 2.1
Authorised Person: A person who is competent for the particular purposes of these Rules in relation to which the
expression is used and who is also either the occupier, or a contractor who is for the time being under contract with
the occupier, or a person employed, appointed or selected by the occupier or such contractor, to carry out work or duties
incidental to the generation, transformation, conversion, switching, controlling, regulating, storage, transmission,
distribution or use of electrical energy.
Auxiliary Circuit: A circuit associated with a main circuit which performs functions other than the power supply
to equipment.
Barrier: A part providing protection against direct contact from any usual direction of access.
Basic Insulation: Insulation applied to live parts to provide basic protection against electric shock.
Note 1: Basic insulation does not include insulation used exclusively for functional purposes.
Note 2: Basic insulation will normally need supplementary measures in order to complete the protection against electrical shock.
Bonding: See Equipotential Bonding
Breaking Capacity: A value of current that a protective device is capable of breaking at a specified voltage and under
prescribed conditions of use and operation.
Building Void: A space within the structure or components of a building, which may be accessible at certain points.
Bunched Cables: Two or more cables contained within a single conduit, duct, ducting or trunking or, if not enclosed,
not separated from each other.
Cable: An insulated conductor with an outer protective covering against external influences.
Cable Brackets: Horizontal cable supports fixed at one end only, spaced at intervals, on which cables rest.
Cable Channel: An enclosure for cables above or in the ground or floor, ventilated or closed, having dimensions
that do not allow entry of persons, but allow access to the cables throughout their length. It may form part of the
building construction.
Cable Coupler: A means enabling the connection, at will, of two flexible cables. It consists of a connector and a
plug.
Cable Ducting: A duct exclusively for cable.
Cable Ladder: A cable support consisting of a series of transverse supporting elements rigidly fixed to main
longitudinal supporting members.
10
Cable Tray: A cable support consisting of a continuous base with raised edges and no covering.
Note: A cable tray may be perforated or non-perforated.
Cable Trench: A temporary opening in the ground to permit the burial of a cable.
Cable Trunking System: A factory-made system for enclosing cables and insulated wires, normally of
rectangular cross-section, one side of which can be removed, and forming part of the wiring system.
Cable Tunnel: An enclosure or corridor containing appropriate supporting structures and/or enclosures for cables,
and having dimensions allowing persons to pass freely throughout the entire length.
Caravan Parks: See Clause 708-2.
Circuit: Part of an electrical installation supplied from the same origin and protected against overcurrents by a
single protective device.
Circuit Breaker: A mechanical device capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under normal circuit
conditions and also capable of making, carrying for a specified time, and breaking currents under specified abnormal
circuit conditions such as those of short-circuit.
Class I Equipment: Equipment having basic insulation throughout, and depending on the earthing of exposed
conductive parts for protection against indirect contact in the event of failure of the basic insulation.
Class II Equipment: Equipment having double insulation or reinforced insulation, or a combination of these
throughout, and whose intermediate parts are protected by supplementary insulation so that there is no risk of indirect
contact in the event of failure of basic insulation.
Note: Class II equipment is marked with the symbol .
Class III Equipment: Equipment that will not give rise to electric shock because it is designed for supply from
SELV, and in which voltages higher than extra-low voltage are not generated.
Note: This equipment is normally not earthed, but in special cases Class III equipment may have earthing facilities in which event it would be
supplied by PELV (q.v.)
Clamps: Supports, spaced at intervals, which mechanically retain a cable or a conduit.
Conductive Part: A part capable of conducting current, but not necessarily used for carrying service current.
Conduit: A system of tubing intended to enclose cables and wires in order to protect them from mechanical damage,
and to allow them to be drawn-in and withdrawn.
Contactor (mechanical): A mechanical device having only one position of rest, operated electromagnetically and
capable of making, carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions, including overload operations.
Note: A contactor is usually intended to operate frequently.
Control gear: A combination of switching devices and associated control, measuring, protective, and regulating
equipment, also assemblies of such devices and equipment with associated interconnections, accessories, enclosures,
and supporting structures, intended in principle for the control of electrical energy consuming equipment.
Conventional Operating Current (of a protective device): A specified value of the current which causes the
protective device to operate within a specified time, designated conventional time.
Conventional Touch Voltage Limit (symbol UL): The maximum value of the touch voltage permissible to be
maintained indefinitely in specified conditions of external influences.
Current-Carrying Capacity (of a conductor): The maximum current that can be carried continuously by a
conductor under specified conditions without its steady-state temperatures exceeding a specified value.
Current-Using Equipment: Equipment intended to convert electrical energy into another form of energy, for
example, light, heat or motive power.
11
Danger: Risk to health, life or limb from shock, burn, or injury from mechanical movement of electrically driven
equipment or from fire attendant upon the use of electrical energy.
Dedicated Circuit or Device: A circuit or device intended or designed solely for a specific function.
Design Current (of a circuit): The current intended to be carried by a circuit in normal service.
Direct Contact: Contact of persons or livestock with live parts.
Distribution Board: An assembly of protective devices, including two or more fuses or circuit breakers, arranged
for the distribution of electrical energy to final circuits or to other distribution boards.
Distribution Circuit (of buildings): A circuit supplying a distribution board, an item of switchgear, or an item of
control gear.
Double Insulation: Insulation comprising both basic safety insulation and supplementary insulation.
Note: See also Class II equipment.
DSO: The distribution system operator
Duct: A passageway carrying cables, which does not form part of the electrical installation. It may be underground
or form part of a structure, and may or may not be accessible to persons.
Earth: The conductive mass of the earth, the electric potential of which at any point is conventionally taken as
equal to zero.
Earth Electrode: A conductive part or a group of conductive parts in intimate contact with, and providing an
electrical connection with, earth.
Earth-Fault Current: A fault current that flows to earth either directly or through a protective conductor.
Earth Leakage: See “Leakage current”.
Earthing: The connection of the exposed conductive parts of an installation to the main earthing terminal or bar.
Earthing Conductor: A conductor connecting the main earthing terminal or bar to the earth electrode.
Earthing Resistance: The resistance between the main earthing terminal and earth.
Electric Shock: Physiological effect resulting from an electric current passing through a human or animal body
(see also shock current).
Electrical Equipment: Any item used for such purposes as generation, conversion, transmission, distribution or
utilisation of electrical energy, such as machines, transformers, apparatus, measuring instruments, protective devices,
equipment for wiring systems and appliances.
Electrical Installation: An assembly of associated electrical equipment to fulfil a specific purpose or purposes and
having co-ordinated characteristics.
Electrical Operating- Area: An area used essentially to contain electrical apparatus, and to which access is restricted
to certain categories of persons defined in Regulations or National Rules.
Electrical Operating- Enclosure: An electrical operating area where access is further restricted to certain categories
of persons.
Electrically- Independent Earth Electrodes: Earth electrodes located at such a distance from one another that the
maximum current likely to traverse one of them does not significantly affect the potential of the others.
Electrode Boiler: Equipment for the electrical heating of water by the passage of an electrical current between
electrodes immersed in the water.
Emergency: An unexpected occurrence or condition that could cause danger and requires immediate action.
12
Emergency Switching: An operation intended to remove as quickly as possible, danger that may have occurred
unexpectedly. This includes emergency stopping.
Enclosure: A part providing an appropriate degree of protection of equipment against certain external influences and
a defined degree of protection against direct contact with live parts.
Equipotential Bonding: Electrical connections intended to maintain exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts at the same or approximately the same potential, but not intended to carry current in normal service.
Equipotential Bonding Conductor: A protective conductor for ensuring equipotential bonding.
Exposed Conductive Part: A conductive part of electrical equipment, which can be touched and is not normally
live, but may become live under fault conditions.
Note: A conductive part of electrical equipment which can only become live under fault conditions through an exposed conductive part, is not
considered to be an exposed conductive part, for the purposes of these Rules.
External influence: Any influence external to an installation which affects the design or safety of the installation.
Extra-Low Voltage: A nominal voltage not exceeding 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c. between conductors or between a
conductor and earth.
Extraneous Conductive Part: A conductive part, not forming part of the electrical installation, liable to introduce
a potential, generally the earth potential.
Note: Examples are: Structural metal work of a building, metal gas pipes, water pipes and heating tubes, etc. non-electrical apparatus (radiators,
gas or coal-fired cooking ranges, metal sinks, etc.).
Fault: Contact of a live part with exposed or extraneous conductive parts which is caused by accident or failure of
insulation.
Fault Current: A current resulting from an insulation failure or the bridging of insulation.
Fault Loop Impedance: The impedance of the fault current loop (phase to earth loop) starting and ending at the point
of earth fault.
Note: See Annex 61C for a description of the constituent parts of a fault current loop.
FELV: Extra-low voltage that does not satisfy the safety requirements of SELV or PELV.
Final Circuit: A circuit connected directly to current-using equipment or to socket-outlets.
Fire- Fighting Equipment: Permanently-installed equipment provided for automatic operation or use by firemen
in the event of a fire, e.g. fire pumps, fireman’s lifts, smoke extraction fans, and sprinkler systems.
Fire-fighters’ Switch: An isolating device provided for the purpose of isolating circuits of high-voltage discharge
lighting equipment.
Fixed Equipment: Equipment fastened to a support or otherwise secured at a specific location.
Fixed Wiring or Cable: Wiring or cable mounted on a fixed support so that its position does not change.
Flammable: Capable of being easily ignited.
Flexible Wiring or Cable: Wiring or cable that may be moved in normal service between its points of
termination.
Foundation earth electrode: A conductive part buried in the soil under a building foundation or embedded in
concrete of a building foundation, generally in the form of a closed loop.
Fuse: A device that, by the fusing of one or more of its specifically designed and proportioned components, opens
the circuit in which it is inserted by breaking the current when this exceeds a given value for a sufficient time. The
fuse comprises all the parts that form the complete device.
13
Fusing Current: The minimum value of current flowing through a fuse, which will cause the fuse to interrupt that
current in stated conditions.
Hand-Held Equipment: Portable equipment intended to be held in the hand during normal use, in which the motor,
if any, forms an integral part of the equipment.
Hazardous Live Part: A live part which can under certain conditions give an electric shock.
Note: The degree of hazard depends on the external influences.
Hot-Air Sauna: A room or location in which air is heated, in service, to high temperatures, where the relative
humidity normally is low, rising only for a short period of of time when water is poured over the oven.
IMD: Insulation- monitoring device
Indirect Contact: Contact of persons or livestock with exposed conductive parts or extraneous conductive parts,
which have become live under fault conditions
Inspection: Examination of an electrical installation using all the senses in order to ascertain the correct selection
and proper erection of electrical equipment.
Insulated conductor: A conductor having only basic protection against shock consisting of a covering of insulation.
Insulation: Non-conducting material enclosing, surrounding or supporting a live part.
Intermediate part: An inaccessible conductive part which is not live in normal operation, but which may become
live under fault conditions.
Isolating switch: A mechanical switching device that, in the open position, complies with the requirements specified
for the isolating function
Isolating Transformer: A transformer, the input winding of which is electrically separated from the output winding
by insulation at least equivalent to double insulation or reinforced insulation.
Isolation (isolating function): Function intended to cut off the supply from all or a discrete section of the installation
by separating the installation or section from every source of electrical energy for reasons of safety.
Leakage Current (in an installation): A current that flows to earth or to extraneous conductive parts in an
electrically undamaged circuit
Note: This current may have a capacitive component including that resulting from the deliberate use of capacitors.
Line conductor: a) For a.c. circuits see “phase conductor”

b) For d.c. circuits the positive or negative conductor
Live Part: A conductor or conductive part intended to be energised in normal use, including a neutral conductor,
but not a PEN conductor.
Note: This term does not necessarily imply a risk of electric shock – See “hazardous live part”.
Low Voltage: A nominal voltage exceeding 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c., but not exceeding 1000 V a.c. or 1500 V d.c.
Luminaire: Apparatus that distributes, filters or transforms the light transmitted from one or more lamps and
includes all the parts necessary for supporting, fixing and protecting the lamps and where necessary, circuit auxiliaries
together with the means for connecting them to the supply. It does not include the lamps themselves.
Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: A terminal or bar provided for the connection of protective conductors, main
equipotential bonding conductors and conductors for functional earthing if any, to the means of earthing.
Main isolating switch: A switching device provided at the main supply point for the purpose of isolating an
installation.
14
Main Supply Point (origin of an installation): The point at which the supply is connected to an installation.
Maintenance Area: An area situated inside an electrical operating area or an electrical operating enclosure to which
access is necessary primarily for maintenance of electrical apparatus
MRCD: Modular RCD with external sensor.

Nominal Voltage: A voltage by which an installation, or part of an installation, is designated.
Normal Supply: An electricity supply taken from the supply authority or alternatively from the proprietor’s own
generating plant.
Neutral Conductor (symbol N): A conductor connected to the neutral point of a system for the purpose of
transmitting electrical energy.
Note: In some cases, an earthed neutral conductor may, under specified conditions, also serve as a protective conductor. See PEN conductor
Obstacle: A part preventing unintentional direct contact, but not preventing direct contact by deliberate action.
Operating Area: An area to which access is necessary for use of an electrical installation (for example
monitoring, operating, regulating, controlling).
Origin of a Circuit: The point at which electrical energy is delivered to a circuit.
Overcurrent: Any current exceeding the rated value. For conductors, the rated value is the current-carrying capacity.
Overcurrent Detection: A function establishing that the value of current in a circuit exceeds a predetermined value
for a specified length of time.
Overload Current (of a circuit): An overcurrent occurring in a circuit in the absence of an electrical fault.
Overvoltage: Any voltage exceeding the nominal voltage of the installation.
PEL Conductor: In a d.c. circuit, a conductor combining the functions of a line conductor and a protective
conductor.
PELV: Any voltage not exceeding 50V a.c. or 120V d.c. between conductors at any point of a circuit which is
separated from circuits with higher voltages by insulation at least equivalent to that for Class II or which has equivalent
protective means, and where one point in the circuit is connected to earth for functional purposes.
PEM conductor: In a d.c. circuit, a conductor combining the functions of a mid-point conductor and a protective
conductor.
PEN Conductor: An earthed conductor combining the functions of both protective conductor and neutral conductor.
Note: The acronym PEN comes from the combination of the symbols PE for the protective conductor and N for the neutral conductor.
Phase Conductor: A conductor of an a.c. system, other than a neutral conductor, intended for the transmission of
electrical energy (also called “line conductor”)
Point (in wiring): A termination of the fixed wiring intended for the connection of current-using equipment.
Portable Equipment: Equipment that is designed to be moved while in operation or moved easily from one place
to another while connected to the supply.
Prospective Short Circuit Current: The value of short-circuit current that would flow if the current-limiting device
were replaced by a conductor of negligible impedance
Prospective Touch Voltage: The highest touch voltage liable to appear in the event of a fault of negligible impedance
in the electrical installation.
15
Protective Conductor (symbol PE): A conductor required for certain measures of protection against electric shock
which electrically connects any of the following parts:
– exposed conductive parts,

– extraneous conductive parts,
– main earthing terminal
– earthed point of the source or artificial neutral.
Protective limitation of steady-state current and charge: Protection against electric shock by circuit or equipment
design such that under normal and fault conditions the steady-state current and charge are limited to below a hazardous
level.
Radial Final Circuit: A final circuit (q.v.) that serves two or more points including socket-outlets.
Rated Current (of a circuit): The maximum value of current for which the circuit is intended.
Rated Current (of a protective device): The value of current for which the operating conditions of the protective
device are determined.
Note: For adjustable protective devices, the current setting is considered to be the rated current.
RCD: See Residual current protective device. The term RCD is used throughout the text for this device.
RCM: Residual-current monitor that does not interrupt the circuit.
Reduced Extra-Low Voltage: A nominal voltage not exceeding 25V between conductors and supplied from an
isolating transformer of the double-wound type the centre-point of its secondary winding being connected to earth.
Reduced Low Voltage: A nominal voltage not exceeding 125V a.c. r.m.s. between conductors and supplied from
an isolating transformer of the double-wound type the centre-point of its secondary winding being connected to earth.
Reinforced Insulation: A single insulation system applied to live parts, which provides the same degree of protection
against electric shock as double insulation.
Residual Current: The algebraic sum of the instantaneous values of current flowing through all live conductors of
a circuit at a point.
Residual current device (RCD): A mechanical switching device intended to disconnect a circuit when the residual
current attains a stated value under specific conditions.
Residual current - operated circuit-breaker (RCCB): A mechanical switching device designed to make, carry and
break currents under normal service conditions and to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual current
attains a stated value under specified conditions.
Residual current operated circuit-breaker with integral overcurrent protection (RCBO): A residual current -
operated circuit-breaker designed to perform the functions of protection against overloads and/or short circuits.
Residual Operating Current: Residual current value that causes the residual current device to operate under
specified conditions.
Restrictive Conductive Location: A location comprising mainly conductive surrounding parts wherein a person is
restricted in his/her movements and wherein a substantial portion of his/her body may come into contact with those
conductive parts and where the possibility of interrupting this contact is limited, e.g. boiler drums, tanks.
Ring Final Circuit: A final circuit arranged in the form of a ring connected to a single point of supply.
Safety Service: An engineering service primarily intended to provide for the safety of persons within or around
premises in the event of a fire, other contingency, or the failure of other services; it may in addition include provision
for fire-fighting.
Note: Examples are fire alarms, emergency lighting, smoke control, fire pumps, sprinkler systems.
16
Safety Supply: An electricity supply that is intended to be available, in the event of a failure of the normal supply,
for the operation of safety services.
Safety Transformer: A transformer, the input winding of which is electrically separated from the output winding
by insulation at least equivalent to double insulation or reinforced insulation, and which is designed to supply SELV
circuits.
Sauna: See Hot-air sauna.
SELV: A voltage not exceeding 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c. between conductors at any point of a circuit which is separated
from circuits with higher voltages and from earth by insulation at least equivalent to that for Class II or which has
equivalent protective means.
Service Short-Circuit Breaking Capacity (of a circuit breaker): A breaking capacity for which the prescribed
conditions according to a specified test sequence include the capability of the circuit-breaker to carry its rated current
continuously.
Note: See also “Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity”.
Shock Current: A current passing through the body of a person or animal and having characteristics likely to cause
physiological effects.
Short-Circuit Current: An overcurrent resulting from a fault of negligible impedance between live conductors
having a difference in potential under normal operating conditions.
Simultaneously Accessible Parts: Conductors or conductive parts that can be touched simultaneously by a person or,
where applicable, by livestock.
Note: Simultaneously accessible parts may be:

- live parts,
- exposed conductive parts,
- extraneous conductive parts,
- protective conductors,
- earth electrodes
Space Factor: The ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of cables
(including insulation and any sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the conduit or other cable enclosure in
which they are installed. The effective overall cross-sectional area of a non-circular cable is taken as that of a circle
of diameter equal to the major axis of the cable.
Spur: A branch from a ring final circuit.
Standby Supply: An electricity supply intended to be available in the event of the failure of the normal supply. This
supply is primarily intended to ensure the continuity of operations normally carried out in the premises.
Stationary Equipment: Fixed equipment or equipment not provided with a carrying handle and having such a mass
that it cannot easily by moved.
Examples: The value of this mass is > 18kg. in standards relating to household appliances.
Supplementary colour marking: Means of identification which is affixed to equipment or wiring by the installer
in order to achieve compliance with these Rules.
Note: This applies mainly to cores of cables (See 514.3)
Supplementary Insulation: Independent insulation provided in addition to the basic safety insulation in order to
ensure protection against electric shock in the event of failure of the basic safety insulation (usually associated with
Class II equipment).
Supply Point: A point at which electrical energy is delivered.
Switch (mechanical): A mechanical switching device capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under
normal circuit conditions which may include specified operating overload conditions and also carrying for a specified
time currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short-circuit.
17
Switchgear: Equipment provided to be connected to an electrical circuit for the purpose of carrying out one or more
of the following functions: protection, control, isolation, switching.
Note: See also “control gear”.
Testing: Implementing of measures in an electrical installation by means of which its effectiveness is proved. It
includes ascertaining values by means of appropriate measurements, said values not being detectable by inspection.
Touch Voltage: Voltage appearing between simultaneously accessible parts, during an insulation fault.
Note 1: By convention, this term is used only in connection with protection against indirect contact.
Note 2: In certain cases, the value of the touch voltage may be appreciably influenced by the impedance of the person in contact with these parts.
Trench: See Cable Trench.
Trunking: See Cable Trunking System.
Ultimate short-circuit Breaking Capacity (of a circuit breaker): A breaking capacity for which the prescribed
conditions according to a specified test sequence do not include the capability of the circuit-breaker to carry its rated
current continuously.
Note: See also “Service short-circuit breaking capacity”
Undervoltage: Any voltage less than the nominal voltage of the installation.
Wiring System: An assembly made up of cables or busbars and the parts that secure, and if necessary enclose, the
cables or busbars.
ADDENDUM
The following definitions are taken from the Technical Guidance Document B to the Building Regulations.
Non-combustible Materials
A17 Non-combustible materials are defined in Table A8 either as listed products, or in terms of performance when
tested to BS476: Part 4: or Part II:.
Only these materials may be used where there is a provision for non-combustibility and also for the specific application
in the elements listed in Table A8. Non-combustible materials may be used whenever there is a requirement for
materials of limited combustibility.
Fire Resistance
3.0.2 The fire resistance of an element of construction is a measure of its ability to withstand the effects of fire in
one or more ways:
– resistance to collapse, i.e. the ability to maintain load-bearing capacity (which applies to load-bearing members
only);
- resistance to fire penetration, i.e. an ability to maintain the integrity of the element (which applies to fire-separating
elements);
- resistance to the transfer of excessive heat, i.e. an ability to provide insulation from high temperatures (which applies
to fire-separating elements).
18
FIGURE 2.1: ZONE OF ARMS’ REACH
19
PART 3
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Contents
FOREWORD
CHAPTER 30: ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
CHAPTER 31: PURPOSES, SUPPLIES AND STRUCTURE OF AN INSTALLATION
311: Maximum demand and diversity
312: Supply conductor arrangement and system earthing
313: Supplies
314: Arrangement of circuits
CHAPTER 32: CLASSIFICATION OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
CHAPTER 33: COMPATIBILITY
CHAPTER 34: MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 35: SAFETY SERVICES
CHAPTER 36: CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
CHAPTER 37: VOLTAGE BANDS
20
Foreword
This Part implements Part 3 of CENELEC HD 60364-1: 2007
Chapter 30: Assessment of general characteristics

For the design and erection of an installation an assessment shall be made of the following:
- the purposes for which the installation is intended, its supplies and structure (Chapter 31),
- the external influences to which it is likely to be exposed (Chapter 32, Chapter 51),
- compatibility, including the possible effects of the equipment on the supply or on other equipment (Chapter 33),
- the frequency and quality of the maintenance that may be expected (Chapter 34).
The above characteristics shall be taken into account in the choice of methods of protection for safety and in the
selection and erection of equipment.
Note: For telecommunications installations account should be taken of the regulations of the Minister for Communications, and of European
Standards.
Chapter 31: Purposes, supplies and structure of an installation
311 MAXIMUM DEMAND AND DIVERSITY
311.1 For economic and reliable design of an installation within thermal and voltage-drop limits, a determination of
maximum demand is essential. In determining the maximum demand of an installation, or part thereof, diversity may
be taken into account.
311.2 The maximum load demand shall be assessed. Account shall be taken of the physical distribution of the power
demand, and the manner in which it may vary daily, weekly and yearly.
311.3 In determining the maximum demand of an installation or part thereof, account may be taken of diversity in
the demand of individual circuits.
Note: The application of diversity is a matter for the judgement of the technically qualified person responsible for the design of the installation. It
requires detailed knowledge of local conditions and the particular use of the premises concerned.
312 SUPPLY CONDUCTOR ARRANGEMENT AND SYSTEM EARTHING
The following characteristics shall be assessed:
- arrangements of current-carrying conductors under normal operating conditions,
- types of system earthing

312.1 Current-carrying conductors
The following systems of live conductors are normally used:
a.c. systems: d.c. systems:
Single-phase 2-wire 2 - wire

Single-phase 3-wire 3 - wire
Two-phase 3-wire
Three-phase 3-wire
Three-phase 4-wire.
By definition, a PEN conductor is not a live conductor, but a conductor that carries an operating current.
21
312.2 Types of system earthing
The types of system earthing listed below are recognised for the purposes of these Rules:
The code used is as follows:
First letter: Relationship of the supply system to earth

T = Direct connection of one point to earth.
I = All live parts isolated from earth, or one point connected to earth through an impedance.
Second letter: Relationship of the exposed conductive parts of the installation to earth.
T = Direct electrical connection of exposed conductive parts of the installation to earth, independently of the earthing
of any point of the supply system;
N = Direct electrical connection of the exposed conductive parts to the earthed conductor of the supply system. In a.c.
systems, the earthed conductor is normally the neutral conductor;.
Third letter: Relationship of the neutral conductor to the protective conductor.
S = Separate neutral and protective conductors;
C = Neutral and protective functions combined in a single conductor (PEN)
312.2.1 TN systems (neutral connected to earth)
In TN power systems, one pole, usually the neutral, is directly earthed at the origin. The exposed conductive parts of
the installation are connected to that pole by a protective conductor (e.g. the main protective conductor). Three types
of TN earthing system are recognised, according to the arrangement of neutral and protective conductors as
follows:
a) TN-C-S: Neutral and protective conductor functions are combined in a single conductor in part of the system.
(Figures 31.1 and 31.2).
b) TN-S: Separate neutral and protective conductors run throughout the system (Figure 31.3).
c) TN-C: Neutral and protective conductors functions are combined in a single conductor throughout the system. (The
TN-C system is not normally used in installations in Ireland). (Figure 31.4).
Where the installation is supplied from more than one source, account shall be taken of operating currents that may
flow through unintended paths and which might cause fire, corrosion or electromagnetic interference.
312.2.2 TT systems (directly earthed)
In TT power systems, one pole (usually the neutral) is directly earthed, normally at the supply point. The exposed
conductive parts of the installation are connected to earth electrodes electrically independent of the earth electrodes
of the supply system. (Figure 31.5).
312.2.3 IT systems (neutral isolated or earthed through a resistance)
In IT power systems, all live parts are isolated from earth or one pole connected to earth through an impedance. The
exposed-conductive parts of the electrical installation are:
– earthed individually, or
– earthed in groups, or
– collectively earthed with a common earth electrode
Note: See Figure 31.6
22
312.2.4 D.C systems earthing
312.2.4.1 D.C TN-S system
The earthed line conductor, e.g. L – or the earthed mid-point conductor M, is separated from the protective conductor
throughout the installation.
312.2.4.2 D.C TN-C system
The functions of the earthed line conductor e.g. L – and of the protective conductor are either:
– combined in one single conductor termed PEL, throughout the installation, or
– the earthed mid-point conductor M and the protective conductor are combined in one single conductor termed PEM,
throughout the installation.
312.2.4.3 D.C TN-C-S system

This system may consist of one of the following:
a) The functions of the earthed line conductor, e.g. L – and the protective conductor are combined in one single
conductor PEL in a part the installation.
b) the functions of the earthed line conductor e.g. L – and the earthed mid-wire conductor M are combined in one single
conductor PEM in part of the installation.
312.2.4.4 D.C TT system
This system may consist of one of the following:
a) The earthed line conductor e.g. L – is connected to an individual earthing system and earth electrode, and the
exposed conductive parts are connected to the main earthing system and earth electrode.
b) The earthed mid-wire conductor is connected to an individual earthing system and earth electrode and the exposed
conductive parts are connected to the main earthing system.
313 SUPPLIES
313.1 General
The following characteristics of the available supply or supplies, from whatever source, and the normal range of those
characteristics where appropriate, shall be determined by calculation, measurement or inspection:
- nature of current (a.c. or d.c.) and frequency,

- nominal voltage,
- prospective short-circuit current,
- earth-fault loop impedance of the source or network,
- suitability for the requirements of the installation, including the maximum demand,
- the type and rating of the main overcurrent protective device at the origin of the installation.
These characteristics shall be obtained from the supply authority or determined in the case of a private source. These
requirements are equally applicable to main supplies, to safety services and to standby supplies.
313.2 Supplies for safety services and standby systems.
313.2.1 In general the characteristics of supplies for safety services or standby systems shall be assessed separately.
Such supplies shall have adequate capacity, reliability and rating and appropriate change - over times for the operation
specified.
Supplies for safety services shall comply with Chapter 35 and Chapter 56.
Supplies for standby systems shall comply with 551.
23
313.2.2 Supplies for safety services shall comply with statutory and the local authority requirements.
313.2.3 Where a generator is intended either to supply safety services, or for standby purposes in a premises normally
supplied from the public network, the DSO shall be consulted beforehand. Suitable interlocking arrangements shall
prevent unintended parallel operation of the two supplies.
Note: See 551
314 ARRANGEMENT OF CIRCUITS
314.1 Every installation shall be divided into several circuits as necessary in order to:
- avoid danger and minimise inconvenience in the event of a fault,
- facilitate safe inspection, testing and maintenance,

- take account of hazards that might arise from the failure of a single circuit, such as a lighting circuit,
- reduce the possibility of unwanted tripping of RCDs due to excessive protective conductor currents not due to a
fault,
- mitigate the effects of EMI,
- prevent the indirect energising of a circuit intended to be isolated.
314.2 Separate circuits shall be provided for parts of the installation that need to be separately controlled for
compliance with these Rules, so that failure of one circuit does not affect operation, safety, or reliability of the other
circuits.
Chapter 32: Classification of external influences

Note: See Chapter 51 and Annex 51D.
Chapter 33: Compatibility

33.1 Compatibility of characteristics
An assessment shall be made of any characteristics of equipment likely to have harmful effects upon other equipment
or other services or to impair the supply e.g. for co-ordination with concerned parties. These characteristics include:
- transient over-voltages,
- undervoltages,
- unbalanced loads,
- rapidly fluctuating loads,
- starting currents, particularly with rural networks,
- harmonic currents,
- d.c. feedback,
- high-frequency oscillations,
- earth- leakage currents,
- need for additional connections to earth,
- excessive protective -conductor currents not due to a fault (leakage currents).
Note: These items may require consultation and co-ordination with other parties.
33.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
All electrical equipment shall meet the appropriate electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements and shall be
in accordance with the relevant EMC standards.
24
Consideration shall be given by the planner and designer of the electrical installation to measures reducing the effects
of induced voltage disturbances and electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Note: Measures are specified in Chapter 44.

Chapter 34: Maintenance

An assessment shall be made of the frequency and quality of maintenance that the installation can reasonably be
expected to receive during its intended life. Where appropriate, those responsible for maintenance shall be consulted.
The assessment shall be taken into account when applying the requirements of these Rules, so that:
- any periodic inspection, testing or maintenance can be readily and safely carried out,
- the effectiveness of the protective measures for safety is ensured, and

- the reliability of equipment for the safety and proper functioning of the installation is appropriate for the intended
life of the installation.

Note: See also Chapter 56: Safety services.
351 GENERAL
351.1 Where the safety of persons or property depends on the continuity of supply to certain services called “safety
services”, measures shall be taken to ensure a supply thereto in the event of failure of the main supply.
The requirements for safety services are normally regulated by statutory authorities.
351.2 A supply for safety services may be:
- a storage battery,
- primary cells,
- a generator set independent of the normal supply,
- a separate feeder from the supply network independent of the normal feeder.
352 CLASSIFICATION
352.1 A safety service is either:
- a non-automatic supply, the starting of which is initiated by an operator, or
- an automatic supply, the starting of which is independent of an operator.
352.2 An automatic supply is classified as follows according to the change-over time:
- no-break: an automatic supply which can ensure a continuous supply within specified conditions,
- very short break: an automatic supply available within 0.15 s,
- short break: an automatic supply available within 0.5 s,
- medium break: an automatic supply available within 15 s,
- long break: an automatic supply available in more than 15 s.
25
Chapter 36: Continuity of service

An assessment shall be made for each circuit of any need for continuity of service considered necessary during the
intended life of the installation. The following characteristics shall be taken into consideration:
- selection of the system earthing,
- selection of the protective device in order to achieve discrimination,
- number of circuits,
- multiple power supplies,
- use of monitoring devices.
Chapter 37: Voltage bands

For the purpose of protection against electric shock, the voltage range for installations covered by these Rules is
divided into bands in accordance with Table 37A:
26
27
28
PART 4
PROTECTIVE MEASURES FOR SAFETY

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 40: APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE MEASURES
CHAPTER 41: PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
CHAPTER 42: PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE AND HARMFUL THERMAL EFFECTS
CHAPTER 43: PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT
CHAPTER 44: PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES AND ELECTROMAGNETIC

DISTURBANCES
CHAPTER 45: VOID
CHAPTER 46: ISOLATION AND SWITCHING
29
Chapter 40: Application of Protective Measures

400.1 Protective measures shall be applied in every installation or part of an installation and to equipment, in
accordance with this chapter.
400.2
The choice and application of protective measures shall take account of the external influences.
400.3 Protection shall be provided by:
- the equipment itself, or

- application of a protective measure as part of a process of erection, or
- a combination of the above.
as required by these Rules.
400.4 Protective measures may be applicable to an entire installation, to a part thereof, or to an item of equipment.
400.5 In certain cases, supplementary measures may be necessary to achieve compliance.
400.6 Provision shall be made to avoid any detrimental influence between different protective measures applied in
the same installation or part of an installation.
400.7 The order in which the protective measures are specified in these Rules does not imply any relative importance.
Chapter 41: Protection against electric shock

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FOREWORD
410 SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
411 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: BASIC INSULATION WITH AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY

INCLUDING EARTHING
412 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: DOUBLE OR REINFORCED INSULATION
413 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: BASIC INSULATION WITH ELECTRICAL SEPARATION
414 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: PROTECTION BY EXRA LOW VOLTAGE PROVIDED BY SELV AND PELV
415 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: BASIC INSULATION WITH REDUCED LOW VOLTAGE
416 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION
LIST OF ANNEXES FOR CHAPTER 41
30
INTRODUCTION
Each section of this chapter deals with a particular type of protective measure for protection against both direct contact
and indirect contact.
411 deals with basic protection against direct contact combined with automatic disconnection of supply with earthing.
This measure is used in all installations.

The other sections deal with types of protection used for special purposes which are normally confined to a part of the
installation.
412 deals with double insulation,

413 deals with electrical separation,
414 deals with SELV and PELV,
415 deals with reduced low-voltage.
416 deals with additional protective measures that are applicable generally.
For TN systems, disconnecting time of 5 sec no longer applies for circuits for fixed equipment up to 32A rating; the
time is now 0.4 sec or less according to Table 41A.
Annex 41A deals with insulation and enclosures that provide basic protection against direct contact. This is applicable
in all installations.
Annex 41B and 41C deal with special protective measures that are relevant only to certain types of installation, e.g.
industrial. Annex 41B deals with partial protection against direct contact, such as barriers and enclosures, or placing
out of reach. Annex 41C deals with special protective measures against indirect contact, e.g. isolated circuits and
earth-free locations.
FOREWORD
This chapter implements CENELEC HD 60364-4-41: 2007

410.1 Scope
This chapter specifies the essential requirements for protection of persons against electric shock, including basic
protection (protection against direct contact) in normal service, and protection in case of a fault (protection against
indirect contact. In Part 7, the protective measures are modified or extended to deal with specific circumstances, e.g..
external influences such as damp or outdoors locations.
The additional protective measures in 416 are applicable in association with 411.
410.2 General requirements
In these Rules, the following specifications apply to voltages:
- a.c. voltages are r.m.s.

- d.c. voltages are ripple-free.
“Ripple-free” is conventionally defined as d.c. with a sinusoidal ripple content of not more than 10% r.m.s.,with an
overall peak value not exceeding140V for a nominal 120V ripple-free system, and 70V for a nominal 60V ripple-free
d.c. system.
410.2.1 Protection against electric shock shall consist of either:
- an appropriate combination of basic protection against direct contact in normal service and an independent provision
for protection against a fault, or
- an enhanced protective measure that provides both basic protection and fault protection.
Additional protection shall be applied where appropriate to the conditions of external influences and in certain locations
in accordance with Part 7.
31
410.2.2 The protective measure basic protection with automatic disconnection of supply in accordance with 411 shall
be applied in every installation.
The measures specified in 412, 413, 414 and 415 are applicable for specific purposes in parts of the installation.
The additional protective measures specified in 416 are applicable in conjunction with those in 411.
410.2.3 For special installations or locations, the particular protective measures in the corresponding clauses of Part
7 shall be applied.
410.2.4 The protective measures specified in Annex 41B for basic protection against electric shock by the use of
obstacles or by placing out of reach, may be applied only in areas where entry is restricted to authorized persons.
410.2.5 The special protective measures specified in Annex 41C for protection in case of a fault may be applied
only in special cases where there is supervision by competent persons, e.g. in industrial, research or medical processes.
410.2.6 Where certain conditions of a protective measure cannot be achieved, supplementary measures shall be
applied in order to achieve the equivalent degree of safety.
410.2.7 Provision shall be made to avoid any mutual detrimental influence between protective measures in an
installation, and failure of one protective measure shall not impair any other protective measure.
410.2.8 Omission of protection against electric shock in case of a fault.
Protection against electric shock in case of a fault may be omitted for the following equipment:
- overhead line insulator wall brackets and metal parts connected to them (overhead line fittings) if they are outside
arm’s reach,
- short lengths of metal conduit protecting cables without metal sheaths,
- steel reinforced concrete poles in which the reinforcement is not accessible,
- exposed conductive parts which, owing to their reduced dimensions, (approximately 50 mm x 50 mm) and
disposition, cannot be gripped or come in contact with a part of the human body.
Note: This exemption applies, for example, to bolts, rivets, nameplates and cable clips for non-metal items.
- metal tubes or other metal enclosures protecting equipment in accordance with 412 (Class II or double-insulated
equipment).
411 BASIC PROTECTION WITH AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY

INCLUDING EARTHING
411.1 General
This measure consists of:
- basic protection (protection against direct contact) provided by basic insulation of live parts or enclosures in
accordance with 411.2, and
- protection in case of a fault (protection against indirect contact) by automatic disconnection of the supply with
protective earthing and equipotential bonding, in accordance with 411.3
Note: This particular measure is to be applied in every installation – see 410.2.2
411.2 Basic protection (protection against direct contact)
Basic protection (protection against direct contact) shall be provided for all electrical equipment, and shall consist of
either basic insulation of live parts, or barriers or enclosures, in accordance with Annex 41A.
32
Partial protection against direct contact by means of obstacles or by placing out of reach in accordance with Annex
41B may be used only in special situations where there is adequate supervision.
411.3 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault (indirect contact)
411.3.0 General
This protective measure comprises the following:
- protective earthing (411.3.1)

- equipotential bonding (411.3.2
- automatic disconnection of supply (411.3.3).
Note 1: This protective measure depends on the type of system earthing – TN, TT, or IT.
Note 2: This protective measure necessitates co-ordination of the type of system earthing, the characteristics of the protective devices and in TN
systems, the fault loop impedances.
411.3.1 Protective earthing

Exposed conductive parts shall be connected to a protective conductor under the specific conditions for each type of
system earthing.
Simultaneously accessible exposed conductive parts shall be connected to the same earthing system, individually, in
groups or collectively.
A protective conductor shall be provided for each circuit, and connected to the relevant main earthing terminal.
Conductors for protective earthing and equipotential bonding shall comply with Chapter 54.
411.3.2 Equipotential bonding (for protective purposes)
In each building the main bonding system shall comprise connections between the main earthing terminal and the
following extraneous conductive parts:
- metal pipes supplying services within the building, such as gas, oil, water, air,
- structural metal parts,
- central heating and air conditioning systems,
- main metal reinforcement of reinforced concrete structures where practicable.
Extraneous conductive parts originating outside the building shall be bonded as close as practicable to their points of
entry into the building.
Metal sheaths of telecommunication cables may be connected to the main bonding system, taking account of the
requirements of the owners or operators of such cables.
Note: For supplementary bonding, see 411.3.3.4 and 544.2.
411.3.3 Automatic disconnection of supply
411.3.3.1 If in a circuit or equipment a fault of negligible impedance occurs between a phase/line conductor and a
protective conductor, a protective device shall automatically disconnect the supply thereto.
Disconnection shall ensure that a prospective touch voltage exceeding 50V a.c. r.m.s or 120 V d.c does not persist for
a duration resulting in a risk of harmful physiological effects in a person in contact with simultaneously accessible
conductive parts.
Note 1: Higher values of disconnecting time and voltage are admissible in systems for electric power generation and distribution up to the origin of
the installation.
Note 2: Lower values of disconnecting time and voltage are required for special installations or locations according to the relevant sections of Part 7.
Note 3: In IT earthing systems, automatic disconnection is not usually required on the occurrence of a first fault.
Note 4: The values of touch voltage (50 V a.c. r.m.s and 120 V d.c.) are conventional.
33
411.3.3.2 Automatic disconnection shall comply with:
- for TN earthing systems: 411.4,

- for TT earthing systems: 411.5.
411.3.3.3 For systems with a nominal voltage exceeding 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c. automatic disconnection within the
times specified is not required if, in the event of a fault, the output voltage of the source is reduced in not more than
5s to not more than 50 V a.c. or 120 V d.c.; nevertheless, disconnection may be required for reasons other than shock
protection.
411.3.3.4 Where automatic disconnection in accordance with 411.4 or 411.5 cannot be achieved within the specified
time, supplementary bonding shall be provided in accordance with 416.2.
411.3.4 Additional protection against direct contact.
Additional protection against direct contact shall comply with 416.1. Additional protection against direct contact shall
be provided on circuits for socket-outlets having a rated current not exceeding 32 A and on circuits for portable or
movable equipment with a current rating not exceeding 32 A, except where otherwise permitted by these Rules.
Note: See 554 for details. Some types of socket-outlet circuits are exempt from this requirement.
411.4 TN systems
411.4.1 In a TN earthing system the exposed conductive parts shall be connected by a protective conductor to the
earthed pole of the supply. The arrangement shall comply with either a) or b) below, whichever is appropriate:
a) Low voltage supply from the Distribution System Operator (DSO):
In this situation, the earthing system shall be TN-C-S and, the protective conductor shall be connected to the neutral
pole of the supply in accordance with 543.4.
b) Low voltage supply from the proprietor’s equipment:
Where the installation is supplied from the proprietor’s generator or transformer, the earthed pole of the supply shall
be connected to the protective conductor system at one of the following:
- the main distribution point of the installation,

- a sub-distribution point of the installation,
- the generator or transformer.
Note 1: In large installations where other effective earth connections exist it is recommended that the protective conductor system be connected
to such points wherever possible. Earthing at additional points, distributed as evenly as possible, may be necessary to ensure that the
potentials of the protective conductor system remain, even under fault conditions, as near as possible to earth.
Note 2: In large buildings such as high rise buildings, additional earthing of protective conductors is not possible for practical reasons. See 544.1.
411.4.2 A single conductor serving both as a protective conductor and as a PEN conductor shall comply with 543.5.
411.4.3 The overcurrent protective device for each circuit shall be selected and installed so that, if a fault of negligible
impedance occurs between a line conductor and a protective conductor or an exposed conductive part, automatic
disconnection of the supply will take place in accordance with the following:
ZL x Ia ≤ Uo
where
ZL is the impedance in ohms of the fault loop comprising the source, the line conductor up to the point of the fault,
and the return path between the point of the fault and the source.
Ia is the current in amperes (A) causing automatic disconnection of the circuit within the time specified in Table 41A.
When a RCD is used, this current is the residual current providing disconnection in the time specified in Table 41A.
Uo is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. or d.c. voltage in volts between line conductors and earth.
Note: In special cases where additional protection against indirect contact is provided by an RCD in accordance with 411.4.5, the disconnection
times in accordance with Table 41A relate to prospective residual fault currents significantly higher than the rated residual operating current
of the RCD (typically 5 IΔn).
34
411.4.4 The maximum disconnection times specified in Table 41A shall apply to all final circuits with a nominal
rating not exceeding 35 A.
TABLE 41A: MAXIMUM DISCONNECTION TIMES FOR TN SYSTEMS

Uo Volts Disconnection times seconds

a.c. systems d.c. systems
> 50 - 120 0.8 -
> 120 - 230 0.4 5
> 230 - 400 0.2 0.4

> 400 0.1 0.1
Note 1: For voltages that are within the tolerances stated in EN 50160 the disconnection time appropriate to the nominal voltage applies, e.g. for
230V, the Note
time is
1:0.4
Fors..
voltages that are within the tolerances stated in EN 50160 the disconnection time
appropriate to the nominal voltage applies, e.g. for 230V, the time is 0.4 s..
Note 2: Disconnection may be required for reasons other than protection against electric shock.
Note 2: Disconnection may be required for reasons other than protection against electric
shock.
In TN systems a disconnection time not exceeding 5 s is permitted for distribution circuits and for circuits not covered
by 411.4.4.
In TN systems a disconnection time not exceeding 5 s is permitted for
411.4.5 Ifdistribution circuits
the conditions and forcannot
of 411.4.3 circuitsbenot covered
fulfilled bybyovercurrent
411.4.4. devices, supplementary local bonding shall
be applied in accordance with 416.2. If this is impracticable, protection by automatic disconnection of supply shall be
provided byIfmeans
the conditions of 411.4.3 cannot be fulfilled by overcurrent devices,
of an RCD.
supplementary local bonding shall be applied in accordance with 411.3.2.2
411.4.6 In TN earthing systems, the following protective devices may be used for fault protection (protection against
If this is impracticable, protection by automatic disconnection of supply shall be
provided by means of an RCD.
indirect contact):
4 In TN earthing systems, the following protective devices may be used for fault
- overcurrentpprotective devices
- RCDs, except in TN- C systems

- overcurrent or indevices
protective TN-C-S systems upstream of the connection between the neutral and protective
conductors.
411.5 TT systems
- RCDs, except in TN- C systems or in TN-C-S systems upstream of the
connection between the neutral and protective conductors.
411.5.1
4 InTTa TT system, all exposed conductive parts collectively protected by the same protective device shall be
systems
connected by protective conductors to an earth electrode common to all those parts. Where several protective devices
are utilizedInin aseries,
TT system, all exposedapplies
this requirement conductive parts to
separately collectively protected
all the exposed by the same
conductive parts protected by each device.
protective device shall be connected by protective conductors to an earth
The neutralelectrode common
or mid-point to allgenerator
of each those parts. Where several
or transformer of protective
the power devices are
supply system shall be earthed; where no
neutral pointutilized
exists,ina series, this requirement
line conductor applies separately to all the exposed
shall be earthed.
conductive parts protected by each device.
411.5.2 The protective device shall be an RCD. The following two conditions shall be fulfilled:
The neutral or mid-point of each generator or transformer of the power supply
a) Ra x Idsystem
≤ 50shall
V be earthed; where no neutral point exists, a line conductor shall be
earthed.
where
The protective device shall be an RCD. The following two conditions shall be
Ra is the sumf of the resistances in ohms of the earth electrode and the protective conductor for the exposed conductive
parts
i) Ra x Id
Id is the rated residual
where operating current in amperes of the RCD.
b) The disconnection times

Ra is the sumspecified in Tablein41B
of the resistances ohmsshall apply
of the earthtoelectrode
final circuits
and thenot exceeding 35 A.
protective conductor for the exposed conductive parts
Id is the rated residual operating current in amperes of the RCD

35
The disconnection times specified in Table 41B shall apply to final circuits
not exceeding 32 A.
TABLE 41B: MAXIMUM DISCONNECTION TIMES FOR TT SYSTEMS
Uo Volts Disconnection time seconds

a.c. systems d.c. systems
> 50 - 120 0.3 -
> 120 - 230 0.2 0.4
> 230 - 400 0.07 0.2
> 400 0.04 0.1
Note: For voltages that are within the tolerances specified in I.S. EN 50160, the disconnecting time appropriate to the nominal voltage applies
N
For the purpose of discrimination,
disconnecting timeRCDs withtodelayed
appropriate operation
the nominal may be used in series with general types; their
voltage applies
operating times shall comply with Table 41B.
411.5.3 IninTT
F
systems
series a disconnection
with general timeoperating
types; their not exceeding 1s is comply
times shall permitted forTable
with distribution
41B circuits and for circuits
not covered by 411.5.2 b).
411.5.4 Notwithstanding
In TT systems a411.5.2,
disconnection
where an time not exceeding
overcurrent 1s is permitted
protective device is for
used the following condition shall be
fulfilled: distribution circuits and for circuits not covered by 411.5.1 ii).
Zs x Ia ≤ Uo
where Notwithstanding 411.5.2, where an overcurrent protective device is used the
following condition shall be fulfilled:
Zs is the impedance in ohms of the fault loop comprising:
ZS x Ia
- the source,
w conductor up to the point of the fault,
- the phase/line
- the protective conductor,
Zs is the impedance in ohms of the fault loop comprising:
- the earthing conductor,
- the earth electrode of the installation,
- the source,
- the earth electrode of the source.
- the phase/line conductor up to the point of the fault,
- the protective conductor,
Ia is the current -inthe
amps causing
earthing automatic operation of the protective device in the time specified in Table 41B.
conductor,
- the earth electrode of the installation,
Uo is the nominal a.c.earth
- the r.m.s.electrode
or d.c voltage
of the in volts between line conductors and earth..
source.
Note: This method is not normally applicable in Ireland due to high earth resistances.
Ia is the current in amps causing automatic operation of the protective device
411.6 IT systems
in the time specified in Table 41B.
Uo is the nominal voltage to earth.

Note: The use of IT earthing systems in Ireland is strictly limited to special situations e.g. industrial or research. They are not used by the DSO.
411.6.1 In IT systems the live parts shall be insulated from earth or connected to earth through a sufficiently high
N due to high earth resistances.
impedance. This connection may be made either at the neutral point of the system or at an artificial neutral point. The
IT systems
latter may be connected directly to earth if the resulting zero- sequence/impedance to earth is sufficiently high at the
system frequency. Where no neutral exists a line conductor may be connected to earth through an impedance.
In the event of a single fault
industrial to earth,They
or research. or to
arean
notexposed conductive
used by the DSO part or to a protective conductor, disconnection is
not necessary provided the installation complies with 411.6.2.
In IT systems the live parts shall be insulated from earth or connected to earth
through a sufficiently high impedance. This connection may be made either at
Measures shall be taken to avoid risk of harmful physiological effects on a person in contact with simultaneously
the neutral point of the system or at an artificial neutral point. The latter may be
accessible exposed conductive parts in the event of two faults on separate conductors occurring simultaneously.
connected directly to earth if the resulting zero- sequence/ impedance to earth
is sufficiently high at the system frequency. Where no neutral exists a line
Where earthing is provided
conductor may be through impedances
connected to earth or artificial
through neutral points, their characteristics shall be appropriate
an impedance.
to the requirements of the installation in order to reduce overvoltage
In the event of a single fault to earth, or to an exposed conductive or to damp oscillation.
part or to a
411.6.2 Exposed conductive parts shall be earthed individually, in groups or collectively.
36
The following condition shall be fulfilled:
Ra x Id ≤ 50 V
where
Ra is the sum of the resistances in ohms of the earth electrode and the protective conductor for the exposed conductive
parts
Id is the fault current in amperes of the first fault of negligible impedance between a line/phase conductor and an
exposed conductive part. The value of Id takes account of leakage currents and the total earthing impedance of the
electrical installation.
411.6.3 In IT systems, the following monitoring devices and protective devices may used:
- insulation-monitoring devices (IMDs),

- residual- current monitoring devices (RCMs),
- insulation-fault location systems,

- overcurrent protective devices,
- residual-current protective devices (RCDs).
Note: Where a residual-current protective device (RCD) is used, tripping of the RCD in the event of a first fault could be caused by capacitive
leakage currents.
411.6.3.1 In cases where an IT system is used for reasons of continuity of supply, an IMD shall be provided to
indicate the occurrence of a first fault from a live part to exposed conductive parts or to earth. This device shall initiate
an audible and/or visual signal. If there are both audible and visual signals, it is permissible to cancel the audible
signal but the visual signal shall continue for as long as the fault persists.
Note 1: It is recommended that a first fault be eliminated without delay.
Note 2: An insulation - monitoring device may be necessary also for other purposes.
411.6.3.2 Except where a protective device is installed to interrupt the supply in the event of a first earth fault, an
RCM or an insulation fault location system may be provided to indicate the occurrence of a first fault from a live part
to exposed conductive parts or to earth. This device shall initiate an audible and/or visual signal it is permissible to
cancel the audible signal but the visual signal shall continue for as long as the fault persists.
Note: It is recommended that the first fault be eliminated without delay
411.6.3.3 After the occurrence of a first fault, conditions for automatic disconnection of supply in the event of a
second fault occurring on a different live conductor shall be as follows:
a) Where exposed conductive parts are interconnected by a protective conductor, the conditions of a TN system apply
and the following conditions shall be fulfilled:
- in a.c. systems where the neutral conductor is not distributed and in d.c. systems where the mid-point conductor is
not distributed:
2 Ia. ZS ≤ U
- where the neutral conductor or mid-point conductor respectively is distributed:
2 Ia Z’s ≤ Uo
where
Uo is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. or d.c. voltage in volts between line conductors and the neutral conductor or mid-point
conductor, whichever is appropriate;
U is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. or d.c. voltage in volts between line conductors,
Zs is the impedance in ohms of the fault-loop impedance comprising the line conductor and the protective conductor
of the circuit,
37
Z’s is the impedance in ohms of the fault loop comprising the neutral conductor and the protective conductor of the
circuit;
Ia is the current in amperes causing automatic disconnection within the time specified for TN systems in Table 41A,
regardless of whether the neutral conductor is distributed or not.
Note 1: The factor 2 in both formulae takes into account the possibility of two faults occurring in different circuits.
Note 2: For Zs the most onerous condition should be taken into account e.g. a fault on the line conductor at the source and a simultaneous second
fault on the neutral conductor of the circuit under consideration.
b) Where exposed conductive parts are earthed, in groups or individually, the conditions of a TT system apply and
the following condition shall be fulfilled:
Ra x Ia ≤ 50V
where
Ra is the sum of the resistances of the earth electrode and the protective conductor to the exposed conductive parts,
Ia is the current causing automatic disconnection within the time specified for TT systems in 411.5.2 or 411.5.3,
whichever is appropriate.
Note: If compliance with b) is provided by an RCD, compliance with the disconnection times may require residual currents significantly higher
than the rated residual operating current of the RCD (typically 5 IΔn )
411.7 Functional extra-low voltage (FELV)
Note: In this measure, ELV is used for functional (as opposed to safety) reasons and does not have the protection of SELV against intrusion by
higher voltages such as 230 V, therefore it is subject to measures similar to those needed for low voltage circuits.
411.7.1 General
Where for functional reasons, a nominal voltage not exceeding 50V a.c. or 120V d.c. is used but all the requirements
of 414 relating to SELV or PELV are not fulfilled, and where SELV or PELV is not necessary, the supplementary
measures specified in 411.7.2 and 411.7.3 shall be applied. This combination of measures is known as FELV.
411.7.2 Basic protection (protection against direct contact)
Basic protection shall be provided by basic insulation or by barriers or enclosures in accordance with Annex 41A.
411.7.3 Protection in case of a fault. (protection against indirect contact)
The exposed conductive parts of the equipment of the FELV circuit shall be connected to the protective conductor of
the primary circuit of the source, and the primary circuit shall be protected in accordance with 411.3.
411.7.4 Sources
The source of the FELV system may be either a transformer with at least simple separation between windings, an
autotransformer, a potentiometer or semi-conductor devices in which case the output circuit is deemed to be an
extension of the primary circuit and to depend on the protective measure of the primary circuit. Alternatively, the
source may be a safety transformer complying with 414.3.
411.7.5 Plugs and socket-outlets
Plugs and socket-outlets for FELV systems shall comply with each of the following:
a) Plugs shall not be capable of insertion in socket-outlets of other systems.
b) Socket-outlets shall not admit plugs of other voltage systems.

c) Socket-outlets shall have a terminal for connection to the protective conductor.
Note: See also Chapter 55: 554.5.
38
412 PROTECTION BY DOUBLE OR REINFORCED INSULATION
412.1 General
412.1.1 Double or reinforced insulation is a protective measure that shall be achieved by either of the two following
methods:
i) basic protection (protection against direct contact) provided by basic insulation together with fault protection
(protection against indirect contact) provided by supplementary insulation.
ii) basic and fault protection provided by reinforced insulation between live parts and intermediate conductive parts.
Note: This protective measure is intended to prevent the appearance of dangerous voltage on the intermediate conductive parts of electrical
equipment.
412.1.2 This protective measure is applicable in all situations subject to limitations specified in Part 7 of these Rules.
412.1.3 Where this protective measure is used in a part of an installation or in a single circuit intended to consist
entirely of equipment with double insulation or reinforced insulation, it shall be ensured that the part of the installation
or circuit concerned will be under effective supervision in normal use. This protective measure shall not be applied to
any circuit that includes a socket-outlet or where a user might change items of equipment without authorization.
Note: See also 412.4.2 for the usual circuit arrangement.
412.2 Electrical equipment
412.2.1 Electrical equipment shall be of the following types:
- electrical equipment having double or reinforced insulation (Class II equipment) complying with the appropriate
Irish or European Standards, or
- equipment declared in the relevant product standard as equivalent to Class II such as factory-built assemblies of
electrical equipment having total insulation complying with I.S. EN 60439-1.
Note: Such equipment is identified by the symbol
412.2.2 Electrical equipment having basic insulation only with supplementary insulation applied during the process
of erection of an installation providing a degree of safety equivalent to that specified in 412.2.1 and complying with
412.3 is deemed to comply with this measure.
Note: The symbol “do not earth” should be affixed in a visible position on both the interior and exterior of the enclosure.
412.2.3 Electrical equipment having uninsulated live parts shall have reinforced insulation applied in the process of
erecting the electrical installation, providing a degree of safety equivalent to electrical equipment according to 412.2.1
and complying with 412.2.2 and 412.3. Such insulation is admissible only where it is manifestly impracticable to
apply double insulation.
Note: The symbol “do not earth” should be fixed in a visible position on the interior and exterior of the enclosure.
412.3 Enclosures
412.3.1 After completion of the process, all conductive parts separated from live parts by basic insulation only shall
be contained in an insulating enclosure affording at least the degree of protection IP 2X.
412.3.2 The insulating enclosure shall not be traversed by conductive parts likely to transmit a potential. The
insulating enclosure shall not contain any screws or other means of fixing insulating material in position, the
replacement of which by metal screws or other fixing means could impair the insulation provided by the enclosure.
Where the insulating enclosure must be traversed by mechanical joints or connections (e.g. for operating handles of
built-in apparatus) these should be arranged in such a way that protection against shock in case of a fault is not
impaired.
39
412.3.3 Where lids or doors in the insulating enclosure can be opened without the use of a tool or key, all conductive
parts that are accessible when the lid or door is open shall be behind an insulating barrier providing a degree of
protection IP 2X which prevents persons from coming unintentionally in contact with those conductive parts. This
insulating barrier shall be removable only by the use of a tool or key.
412.3.4 Conductive parts enclosed in the insulating enclosure shall not be connected to a protective conductor.
However, provision may be made for connecting protective conductors that necessarily run through the enclosure in
order to serve other items of electrical equipment the supply circuit of which also runs through the enclosure. Inside
the enclosure, any such conductors and their terminals shall be insulated as though they were live parts, and these
terminals, if any, shall be marked PE.
Exposed conductive parts and intermediate parts shall not be connected to a protective conductor unless specific
provision for this is made in the specifications for the equipment concerned.
412.3.5 The enclosure shall not adversely affect the operation of the equipment protected in this way.
412.4 Installation
412.4.1 The installation of equipment complying with 412.2. (fixing, connection of conductors etc.) shall be effected
in such a way as not to impair the protection afforded by compliance with the equipment specification.
412.4.2 Except where 412.1.3 applies, a circuit supplying items of Class II equipment shall have a circuit protective
conductor run to, and terminated at, each point in the wiring and at each accessory.
Note: This requirement is intended to take account of the possible replacement by the user of Class II equipment by Class I equipment.
412.5 Wiring systems
Wiring systems installed in accordance with Chapter 52 of these Rules are considered to comply with this protective
measure if:
i) the rated voltage of the wiring system is not less than the nominal voltage of the supply and at least 300/500V, and
ii) adequate mechanical protection is provided by one or more of the following:
- non-metal sheath of the cable, or
- non-metal trunking or ducting complying with the I.S.EN 50085 series or equivalent national standard, or non-
metal conduit complying with the I.S. EN 50086 series or equivalent national standard.
Such a wiring system shall not be identified by the symbol nor by the symbol .
413 PROTECTION BY BASIC INSULATION WITH ELECTRICAL SEPARATION

Note: This protective measure should only be used in locations where there is adequate supervision and regular maintenance.
413.1 General
413.1.1 In this protective measure, protection against electric shock shall be provided by basic insulation with
protective electrical separation of the circuits from other circuits and earth.
Electrical separation of an individual circuit shall prevent shock currents through contact with exposed conductive parts
that may become energized through a fault in the basic insulation of the circuit.
Note 1: This measure is intended for supplies to equipment that is intended to remain operational and safe in case of one fault. It has a limited
application and requires a high level of maintenance.
Note 2: When this protective measure is used, it is particularly important to verify compliance of the basic insulation with the product standard.
413.1.2 Except as permitted by 413.1.3, this protective measure shall be limited to the supply of one item of current-
using equipment supplied from one unearthed source with simple separation.
40
413.1.3 Where more than one item of current-using equipment is supplied from an unearthed source with simple
separation, the requirements of Annex 41C apply.
413.2 Requirements for basic protection (protection against direct contact)
All electrical equipment shall either have basic protection in accordance with 411.2 or comply with the protective
measures in 412 (double or reinforced insulation).
413.3 Requirements for protection in case of a fault (protection against indirect contact)
413.3.1 Protection by electrical separation shall be ensured by compliance with sub-clauses 413.3.2 to 413.3.6.
413.3.2 The source of supply for the circuit shall be a separation source e.g.
- an isolating transformer,
- a source of current providing a degree of safety equivalent to that of the isolating transformer specified above, e.g.
a motor generator with windings providing equivalent isolation.
The voltage of the separated circuit shall not exceed 500V.
413.3.3 Live parts of the separated circuit shall not be connected at any point of another circuit or to earth or to a
protective conductor. To ensure electrical separation, arrangements shall be such that basic insulation is achieved
between circuits.
Note: To avoid the risk of a fault, particular attention shall be given to the insulation of such parts from earth, especially for flexible cables or
cords.
Arrangements should ensure electrical separation not less than that between the input and output windings of an isolating transformer. In
particular, the electrical separation should be ensured between the live parts of electrical equipment such as relays, contactors, auxiliary
switches, and any part of any other circuit.
413.3.4 Flexible cables and cords shall be visible throughout any part of their length liable to mechanical damage.
413.3.5 For separated circuits, the use of separate wiring systems is recommended. If separated circuits and other
circuits are in the same wiring system, multi-core cables without metal covering, insulated conductors in insulating
conduit, insulated ducting or insulated trunking shall be used provided:
i) the rated voltage is not less than the highest nominal voltage; and
ii) each circuit is protected against overcurrent.
413.3.6 The exposed conductive parts of the separated circuit shall not be connected either to the protective conductor
or to earth.
Note: If the exposed conductive parts of the separated circuit are liable to come into contact, either intentionally or fortuitously, with the exposed
conductive parts of other circuits, protection against electric shock no longer depends solely on protection by electrical separation but on
the protective measures to which the latter exposed conductive parts are subject.
414 PROTECTION BY EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE PROVIDED BY SELV OR PELV

414.1 General
414.1.1 This protective measure consists of two different extra-low voltage systems:
SELV and PELV. This protective measure requires:
- limitation of voltage in the SELV or PELV system to 50V a.c or 120V d.c., and
- protective separation of the SELV or PELV system from all circuits other than SELV and PELV circuits, and basic
insulation between the SELV or PELV system and other SELV or PELV systems, and
- for SELV systems only, basic insulation between the SELV system and earth.
414.1.2 SELV or PELV may be used as a protective measure in all situations.
Note: In certain situations a value lower than 50V a.c. or 120V d.c may be prescribed in Part 7.
41
414.2 Basic protection and protection in case of a fault
Basic protection (protection against direct contact) and protection in case of a fault (protection against indirect contact)
is deemed to be provided when:
- the nominal voltage cannot exceed 50V a.c. or 120V d.c., and
- the supply is from a source complying with 414.3, and
- the conditions of 414.4 are fulfilled.
Note 1: If the conditions of this clause are not fulfilled, the system is deemed to be FELV and must comply with 411.
Note 2: If the system is supplied from a higher voltage system by equipment which provides at least simple separation between that system and
the extra-low voltage system, but which does not meet the requirements for SELV and PELV sources in 414.3, the requirements for FELV
may be applicable.
Note 3: D.C voltages for ELV circuits generated by a semiconductor convertor require an internal a.c. voltage circuit to supply the rectifier. This
internal a.c .voltage exceeds the d.c. voltage for electrical reasons .This internal a.c. circuit is not to be considered as a higher voltage circuit
within the meaning of this clause. Between internal circuits and external higher voltage circuits, protective separation is required.
Note 4: In d.c. systems with batteries the charging voltage may exceed the nominal battery voltage but should not exceed 75V a.c. or 150V d.c.
414.3 Sources for SELV and PELV
The following sources may be used for SELV and PELV systems:
414.3.1 A safety isolating transformer complying with I.S. EN 60742.
414.3.2 A source of current providing a degree of safety equivalent to that of a safety isolating transformer (e.g. a
motor-generator with windings providing equivalent isolation).
414.3.3 An electrochemical source (e.g. a battery) or another source independent of a higher voltage circuit (e.g. an
engine-driven generator).
414.3.4 Certain electronic devices complying with appropriate standards where measures have been taken in order
to ensure that, even in the case of an internal fault, the voltage at the output terminals cannot exceed 50V a.c. or 120V
d.c. However, a higher voltage at the output terminals is admissible provided that, in the case of contact with live
parts, or of a fault, this higher voltage is reduced to 50V a.c. r.m.s. or 120V d.c.
Note 1: Examples of such devices are insulation-testing equipment and monitoring devices.
Note 2: Where a higher voltage exists at the output terminals, compliance with this clause may be assumed if the voltage at the output terminals
is within the limits specified in 414.1.1 when measured with a voltmeter having an internal resistance of at least 3000 ohms.
414.3.5 Mobile sources supplied at low voltage e.g. safety isolating transformers or motor - generators, shall be
selected or erected in accordance with 412.
414.4 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits
414.4.1 SELV and PELV circuits shall have:
- basic insulation between live parts and other SELV or PELV circuits, and
- protective separation from live parts of circuits not being SELV or PELV, provided by double or reinforced insulation
or by basic insulation and protective screening for the highest voltage present.
SELV circuits shall have basic insulation between live parts and earth.
PELV circuits and/or exposed conductive parts of equipment supplied by the PELV circuits may be connected to earth.
Note 1: In particular, protective separation is necessary between the live parts of electrical equipment such as relays, contactors, auxiliary switches
and any part of a higher voltage circuit or a FELV circuit.
Note 2: The earthing of PELV circuits may be achieved by a connection to earth or to an earthed protective conductor within the source itself.
42
414.4.2 Protective separation of wiring systems of SELV and PELV circuits from the live parts of other circuits,
which have at least basic insulation, may be achieved by one of the following:
- SELV and PELV circuit conductors enclosed in a non-metal sheath or insulating enclosure in addition to basic
insulation,
- SELV and PELV circuit conductors separated from conductors of circuits at voltages higher than 50V a.c. or 120V
d.c. by an earthed metal sheath or earthed metal screen,
- circuit conductors at voltages higher than 50V a.c. or 120V d.c .contained in a multi-core cable or other grouping of
conductors provided the SELV and PELV conductors are insulated for the highest voltage present,
- wiring systems complying with 412.5,
- physical separation.
414.4.3 Plugs and sockets in SELV and PELV systems shall comply with the following:
a) plugs shall not be capable of insertion in socket-outlets of other systems.
b) socket-outlets shall not admit plugs of other systems.
c) plugs and sockets in SELV systems shall not have contacts for protective conductors.
Note: See also 554.5.
414.4.4 Exposed conductive parts of SELV circuits shall not be connected to earth, or to protective conductors or to
exposed conductive parts of another circuit.
Note: If the exposed conductive parts of SELV circuits are liable to come into contact, either fortuitously or intentionally, with the exposed
conductive parts of other circuits, protection against electric shock no longer depends on SELV, but also on the protective measure to
which the latter exposed conductive parts are subject.
414.4.5 If the nominal voltage exceeds 25V a.c. or 60V d.c., or if the equipment is immersed, basic protection
(protection against direct contact) shall be provided for SELV and PELV circuits by:
- insulation in accordance with 411.2. and Annex 41A1, or
- barriers or enclosures in accordance with 411.2. and Annex 41A2.
Basic protection need not be provided in normal dry conditions for
- SELV circuits where the nominal voltage does not exceed 25V a.c. or 60V d.c.,
- PELV circuits where the nominal voltage does not exceed 25V a.c. or 60V d.c. and exposed conductive parts and/or
the live parts are connected by a protective conductor to the main earthing terminal.
In other cases, basic protection is not required if the nominal voltage of the SELV or PELV system does not exceed
12V a.c. or 30V d.c.
415 PROTECTION BY BASIC INSULATION WITH REDUCED LOW – VOLTAGE
415.1 General
Where required by the Safety, Health and Welfare legislation, portable and transportable apparatus shall be supplied
by a reduced low- voltage system either directly or through plugs and socket-outlets. These Rules apply to fixed
installations only.
415.2 Sources for reduced low- voltage
415.2.1 The nominal voltage of a reduced low- voltage system shall not exceed 110V a.c. r.m.s. between phases. The
voltage between phase and earth shall not exceed:
43
- for single-phase systems, 55V a.c. between phase and the earthed mid-point of the output winding,
- for three-phase systems, 63.5 V to the earthed neutral pole of the supply.
415.2.2 The source of a reduced low- voltage supply shall consist of one of the following:
- a double-wound isolating transformer,
- a generator having windings providing isolation equivalent to that provided by the windings of an isolating
transformer,
415.3.1 Basic protection (protection against direct contact) shall comply with 411.2.
415.3.2 Protection in case of a fault (protection against indirect contact) shall consist of earthing of exposed
conductive parts by connection to a protective conductor.
Note: Equipment having double or reinforced insulation in accordance with 412.1.1 may be used on reduced low - voltage systems but this does
not obviate the need for the protective requirements specified in this section.
415.4 Plugs and socket-outlets
Plugs and socket-outlets for reduced low- voltage circuits shall comply with the following:
- plugs shall not be capable of insertion in socket-outlets of other systems, and
- socket-outlets shall not admit plugs of other systems.
- socket-outlets shall have contacts for the protective conductor.
Note: See 554.
416 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION

416.1 Additional protection for basic insulation (protection against direct contact) by RCDs
Additional protection against direct contact in the event of failure of basic protection or of carelessness by users, shall
be provided where specified in these Rules by means of RCDs with a rated residual operating current not exceeding
30mA.
The use of RCDs is not recognized as a sole means of protection against direct contact and does not obviate the need
to apply one of the protective measures specified in 411, 412, 413, 414 or 415.
Note: Additional protection applies in particular e.g. to circuits for socket-outlets (411.3.4), circuits in bathrooms (701) and in agricultural
installations (705).
416.2 Additional protection for fault protective measures (protection against indirect contact) by
supplementary equipotential bonding
Note 1: Supplementary equipotential bonding is regarded as an addition to the normal fault protection.
Note 2: The use of supplementary equipotential bonding does not obviate the need to disconnect the supply for other reasons, e.g. protection
against fire.
Note 3: Supplementary equipotential bonding may involve a location, an item of equipment, a part of an installation, and even (rarely) the entire
installation.
Note 4: This type of additional protection is necessary in certain types of locations – see Part 7.
416.2.1 For compliance with 411.3.3.4, supplementary equipotential bonding shall include all simultaneously
accessible exposed conductive parts of fixed equipment and extraneous conductive parts including where practicable
the main metal reinforcement of constructional reinforced concrete. The equipotential bonding system shall be
connected to the protective conductor.
44
416.2.2 Where doubt exists regarding the effectiveness of supplementary equipotential bonding, it shall be verified
that the resistance R between simultaneously accessible conductive parts fulfils the following condition:
for a.c: R x Ia ≤ 50V
for d.c: R x Ia ≤ 120V

where
R is the resistance in ohms,
Ia is the operating current in amperes of the protective device:
- for RCDs, the rated residual operating current Id,

- for overcurrent protective devices, the 5s operating current.
416.2.3 Conductors and arrangements for supplementary bonding shall comply with 544.2.
Annexes for Chapter 41:
Annex 41A: Measures for basic protection against electric shock

Annex 41B: Measure for basic protection in certain types of location
Annex 41C: Special measures for protection in case of a fault for applicaiton only where the installation is controlled
or under supervision by authorised persons.
45
Chapter 42: Protection against fire and harmful thermal effects
CONTENTS
FOREWORD
421 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE CAUSED BY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
422 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE WHERE PARTICULAR HAZARDS OR DANGERS EXIST
423 PROTECTION AGAINST BURNS
424 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING OF EQUIPMENT

FOREWORD
This chapter combines the content of Chapter 42 and 482 of the Third Edition of these Rules, and implements
CENELEC HD 60364-4-42 S2.

420.1 Scope
This Chapter applies to electrical installations and equipment with regard to measures for protection of persons,
livestock and property:
- against harmful thermal effects caused by electrical equipment, and
- against flames and smoke in case of a fire hazard being propagated from electrical installations to other fire
compartments segregated by barriers which are in the vicinity, and
- against the impairment of the safe functioning of electrical equipment.
Note: See also section 527: Selection and erection of wiring systems to minimize the spread of fire, and Chapter 56: Safety services
420.2.1 Persons, livestock, fixed equipment and materials, especially combustible materials adjacent to electrical
equipment, shall be protected against harmful effects of heat developed by electrical equipment in electrical
installations by taking into account the requirements of these Rules and the instructions of equipment manufacturers.
The heat generated by electrical equipment shall not cause danger or harmful effects to adjacent fixed material or
foreseeable material in proximity to such equipment.
In particular, this measure shall prevent:
- burns to persons or livestock,

- combustion, ignition or degradation of materials,
- impairment of the safe functioning of installed equipment
Note: Damage or ignition may be caused by:

- heat accumulation, heat radiation, hot elements,
- failure or defects in protective devices or in fire- sealing,
- overcurrent,
- insulation faults or arcs,
- harmonic currents,
- lightning strikes,
- inappropriate selection of equipment,
- overvoltages (see 443 for faults caused by overvoltages).
46
420.2.2 Adequate ventilation shall be provided where heat is generated in normal operation in order to maintain
operating temperatures below the specified limits
Note: Account should be taken of the influence that temperature may have on the operation or characteristic values of the electrical equipment,
when de-rating may be necessary.
421 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE CAUSED BY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
421.1 Electrical equipment shall not present a fire hazard to adjacent materials. Any relevant instructions of the
manufacturer shall be observed in addition to the requirements of these Rules.
Account shall be taken of the requirements of the statutory authorities which are appropriate to the location.
Note 1: In particular, account shall be taken of the current Building Regulations and associated Technical Guidance Documents.
Note 2: The following terms apply in this section:

Flammability: The ability of a material to burn with a flame under specified test conditions.
Ignitability: The measure of the ease with which a specimen can be ignited due to the influence of an external source, under specified test
conditions
421.2 Where the surface temperature of fixed equipment could be a fire hazard to adjacent materials, the equipment
shall:
- be mounted on or within materials that will withstand such temperatures and have a low thermal conductance, or
- be screened from combustible building materials by materials that will withstand such temperatures and have a low
thermal conductance, or
- have a low thermal conductance, or
- be mounted at a sufficient distance from any material on which such temperatures could have harmful thermal effects,
so as to allow the safe dissipation of heat; any means of support shall have low thermal conductance.
Note 1: Tungsten-filament lamps, radiant heaters and infra-red lamps are examples of such equipment.
Note 2: Restriction of heat- dissipation from equipment can result in high temperatures in the equipment itself.
421.3 Where arcs or sparks may be emitted by permanently-connected equipment in normal service, the equipment
shall :
- be totally enclosed in arc-resistant material, or
- be screened by arc-resistant material from combustible building materials on which they could have harmful thermal
effects, or
- be mounted at a sufficient distance from combustible building materials on which the arc or sparks could have
harmful effects.
Arc-resistant material used for this protective measure shall be non-combustible, of low thermal conductivity, and of
adequate thickness to provide mechanical stability.
Note: A sheet made of fibre-glass silicone of 20 mm thickness may be considered as arc-resistant. In general, metal sheet is not considered to
be arc-resistant.
421.4 Fixed equipment causing a concentration of heat shall be mounted at a sufficient distance from any fixed
object or building materials so that the object or material, in normal conditions, is not subjected to a dangerous
temperature.
421.5 Where electrical equipment in a location contains flammable liquid in sufficient quantity, precautions shall
be taken to prevent the liquid and the products of combustion of the liquid (flame, smoke, toxic gases) spreading to
other locations.
47
Note 1: Examples of such precautions are:

- a drainage pit to retain leakages of liquid and ensure their extinction in the event of a fire, or
- installation of the equipment in a chamber of adequate fire resistance, and the provision of sills or other means of preventing burning liquid
spreading to other parts of the building, the chamber being ventilated solely to the external atmosphere.
Note 2: The generally accepted lower limit for a significant quantity is 25 litres. For less than 25 litres, it is generally sufficient to take precautions
to prevent the escape of liquid.
Note 3: The fire authority should be consulted about switching off the supply to the premises in case of fire (see also 539 and Chapter 56). It may
be desirable to switch off the supply to equipment automatically at the onset of fire.
421.6 Materials arranged around items of electrical equipment, including site-built assemblies, shall be non-
combustible, and shall be capable of withstanding the highest temperature likely to be attained by the electrical
equipment.
422 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE WHERE PARTICULAR HAZARDS OR

DANGERS EXIST
422.1 General
Where appropriate, the requirements of this section shall be observed in addition to those of 421. This section applies
to installations in premises where there may be increased fire hazards due to the nature of processed or stored materials,
or the presence of combustible building structures.
This section does not apply to:
- locations where there is a danger due to potentially explosive atmospheres of gas, vapour or dust, or
- escape routes.
Note: Account should be taken of the current Building Regulations and associated Technical Guidance documents.
422.1.1 Electrical equipment shall be restricted to that necessary for use in these locations, with the exception of
wiring systems complying with 422.2.2.2.
422.1.2 Electrical equipment shall be so selected and erected that its temperature in normal operation and its
foreseeable temperature rise in the event of a fault, is unlikely to cause a fire, taking due account of external influences.
This may be achieved by an adequate construction of equipment or by additional protective measures during
installation. Special measures are not deemed to be necessary where the surface temperature of equipment is unlikely
to cause ignition of nearby combustible materials.
422.1.3 Thermal cut-out devices shall have manual resetting only.
422.1.4 Radiant heaters shall be mounted so that, in the direction of radiation, a clearance of at least 2m from
flammable parts or materials is ensured.
Note: Particular care should be taken where halogen-type heaters are used.
422.2 Locations with fire hazards due to the nature of processed or stored materials
422.2.0 Scope
Such locations include those where there is manufacturing, processing or storage of combustible materials, or where
there is the likelihood of the accumulation of combustible dust or fibres, such as in agriculture, woodworking and the
processing of foodstuffs, textiles, paper and solid fuels.
422.2.1 General
422.2.1.1 Electrical equipment shall be appropriate for the location. Where dust or fibres may be present, enclosures
shall provide a degree of protection of at least IP5X
422.2.1.2 Switchgear for protection, control and isolation shall be installed outside such locations, unless it is
provided with an enclosure providing a degree of protection appropriate for such a location, but at least IP 4X, and at
least IP 5X where dust or fibres may be present.
48
422.2.1.3 Electrical equipment shall be so selected and erected that its normal temperature rise, and its foreseeable
temperature rise during a fault cannot cause a fire. Measures shall be taken to prevent an enclosure of equipment such
as a heater or a resistor from exceeding the following temperatures:
90 ºC under normal conditions, and

115 ºC under fault conditions.
These arrangements may be effected by the construction of equipment or by its conditions of installation.
422.2.1.4 Heating- appliances mounted close to combustible processed or stored materials shall be provided with
appropriate barriers that prevent the ignition of materials. Heat-storage appliances shall be of a type that prevents
ignition of combustible dust or fibres by the heating core.
Special measures are not necessary where the temperatures of surfaces are unlikely to cause combustion of nearby
substances.
Where the accumulation of materials such as dust or fibres on enclosures of electrical equipment could cause a fire
hazard, adequate measures shall be taken to prevent enclosures from exceeding the temperatures stated above.
422.2.1.5 Every circuit shall be provided with a means of isolation, in accordance with 537, which isolates all live
conductors of the supply, including the neutral.
422.2.2 Wiring systems
This clause applies, in addition to Chapter 52, to wiring systems in areas of fire- hazard.
422.2.2.1 Wiring not completely embedded in non-combustible material such as plaster, concrete, or otherwise not
protected from fire, shall have flame-retardant characteristics complying with I.S. 201: PVC- insulated cables.
Bare conductors shall not be used.
Note: Where the risk of flame propagation is high, e.g. in long vertical runs or bunched cables, the cables should meet the flame-retardant
characteristics specified in IEC 60-332-3 for bunched cables. See also 527.
422.2.2.2 Wiring systems that traverse locations with fire hazard, but which are not intended for electrical supply
within the location, shall satisfy each of the following :
- they have no connection along the wiring route inside the location;
- they are protected against overcurrent in accordance with 422.2.2.3 below;
- each connection is placed in an enclosure fulfilling the appropriate fire test of the relevant product standard.
Note: See also 526.
422.2.2.3 Overcurrent protective devices protecting wiring systems, supplying or traversing the location, against
overload and short-circuit, shall be placed outside the location.
422.2.2.4 Wiring systems, except mineral-insulated cable and busbar- trunking systems, shall be protected against
insulation fault- currents by one of the following measures:
a) In TN and TT systems, RCDs with a rated residual- operating current not greater than 300mA. Where resistive
faults may cause a fire e.g. from overhead- heating with heating- film elements, the rated residual operating current
of the device shall be not greater than 30mA.
b) In an IT system, by insulation-monitoring devices (IMDs) with both audible and visible signals. After the
occurrence of a first fault, conditions for disconnection of the supply in the event of second fault shall comply with
411.6.
Note: Adequate instruction should ensure manual disconnection as soon as possible after a first fault. A second fault is a fault on another pole
of the circuit
49
422.2.2.5 PEN conductors shall not be used within the location except in wiring systems traversing that location.
422.2.2.6 For flexible wiring, cables selected shall be suitable for heavy duty. Alternatively, wiring shall be
mechanically protected.
422.2.3 Electric Motors

Motors shall be selected and installed in accordance with 552, and with this sub-clause. Motors shall be protected
against excessive temperatures by an overload protective device with manual resetting or device. Motors with star-delta
starting shall be protected also against excessive temperatures in the star connection.
422.2.4 Luminaires
This clause applies, in addition to 559 and 715, to luminaires in areas of fire hazard.
422.2.4.1 Every luminaire shall:
- be appropriate for the location, and

- be provided with an enclosure providing a degree of protection of at least IP4X, or where dusts or fibres are present,
IP 5X, and
- comply with the relevant parts of I.S. EN 60598, with a limited surface temperature in accordance with I.S.EN
60598-2-24, and
- be of a type that prevents lamp components from falling from the luminaire.
422.2.4.2 Luminaires shall be installed at an adequate distance from combustible materials. If no information is
given by the manufacturer, spotlights and similar luminaires shall be separate from combustible materials by a
minimum distance in accordance with the rating of:
≤ 100W: 0.5 m
> 100W ≤ 300W: 0.8 m
> 300W ≤ 500W: 1 m.
Note: Particular care should be taken where halogen-type heaters are used.
422.2.4.3 In locations where there may be fire hazards due to dust or fibres, luminaires shall be so constructed and
installed that dusts or fibres cannot accumulate in dangerous amounts on their surfaces.
422.2.4.4 Lamps and other components of luminaires shall be protected against foreseeable mechanical stresses.
Protective means mounted on lamp-holders shall form an integral part of the luminaire construction. Such protection
shall not consist of a modification by the installer.
Luminaires that could eject flammable materials in case of a fault shall be provided with safety protective shields
forming an integral part of the item.
422.2.4.5 Luminaires marked F in accordance with I.S.EN 60598-1 are deemed to be suitable for mounting on
surfaces of flammable materials.
422.2.4.6 Care shall be taken to avoid contact of recessed luminaires with thermal insulation, unless the luminaire
is specifically designed for this condition.
422.2.5 SELV
In circuits supplied at SELV, in addition to the requirements of 414, live parts shall be:
- contained in enclosures affording the degree of protection IP2X, or
- provided with insulation capable of withstanding a test voltage of 500V for 1 min.
regardless of the nominal voltage of the circuit.
Note: See also 715: ELV lighting installations
50
422.2.6 Electrical appliances
In forced-air heating installations, the air-intake shall be outside locations where combustible dusts or fibres are present.
422.3 Buildings with combustible constructional materials
422.3.1 Precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of any part of a building structure by electrical equipment.
These include:
- proper design, selection and erection of electrical equipment,

- prevention of fire caused by faults,
- prevention of fire cause by overheating of equipment.
422.3.2 If no information is given by the manufacturer, luminaires shall be separated from combustible constructional
materials or components by a minimum distance of:
≤ 100 W: 0.5m
> 100 W ≤ 300 W: 0.8m

> 300 W ≤ 500 W: 1m
> 500 W: greater distances where necessary.
Lamps and other components of luminaires shall be protected against foreseeable mechanical stresses. Such protective
means shall form an integral part of the luminaire.
A luminaire with a lamp that could eject flammable materials in case of a breakdown shall be provided with a safety
protective shield for the lamp in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
422.4 Selection and erection of electrical equipment in or on hollow walls and partitions
Note 1: Hollow walls are in general of frame construction covered with sheets of plasterboard, timber or metal and may be factory-made or
constructed on site. They include walls containing combustible thermal or sound - insulating material.
Note 2: Metal stud partitions must be bonded, see 544.2. See also 522.8.14
422.4.1 Electrical equipment e.g. accessories, junction boxes, and distribution boards installed within a combustible
hollow wall shall have an enclosure of non-flammable material complying with appropriate European or Irish
standards. Current-using equipment shall not be installed within a hollow combustible wall.
422.4.2 Cables and cords shall comply with 527.1. Conduit and trunking shall comply with 527.1.
422.4.3 Connections in junction boxes in a hollow combustible wall shall comply with 526 and shall in addition be
provided with a means of strain-relief.
422.4.4 In order to avoid the effects of dust and solid foreign objects, boxes and enclosures installed in hollow walls
shall have a minimum degree of protection IP3X.
422.5 Fire-propagating structures
In addition to the requirements of 527, in trunking, troughs, ducting and similar enclosures, precautions shall be taken
to prevent the spread of fire (e.g. “chimney effect”).
Note: Fire detectors may be provided for preventing the spread of fire, e.g. by closing fire-proof shutters in trunking, ducting or troughs.
422.6 Installations in locations containing items or assets of significant value or importance
Note: Such locations include national monuments, museums, art galleries, heritage buildings, areas of public significance.
Included also are airports, railway stations, computer centres, certain laboratories, and storage facilities of historical, legal, commercial or
industrial significance.
In such locations, in addition to the requirements stated in 422.1, the following measures shall be considered and
applied as appropriate:
- wiring systems complying with I.S.EN 60702,
51
commercial or industrial significance.
applied as appropriate:
- wiring systems complying with I.S.EN 60704
- wiring systems with improved fire-resistant characteristics in areas of fire hazard

- wiring systems with improved fire-resistant characteristics in areas of fire hazard,
- wiring systems installed in non-combustible solid walls, ceilings and floors
- wiring systems installed in non-combustible solid walls, ceilings and floors,
wiring systems installed in areas with constructional partitions having a fire-resisting capability
- wiring systems installed in areas
for a time with constructional
specified partitions having a fire-resisting capability for a time specified
by the fire authority.
by the fire authority.

Accessible parts of electrical equipment within arms reach shall not attain a temperature likely to cause burns to
persons, and such temperatures shall not exceed the appropriate limits specified in Table 42A. All parts of the
installation likely in normal service to attain, even for short periods, temperatures exceeding those limits shall be
equipment complying with Irish or
guarded so as to prevent accidental contact.
E
The temperature limits specified in Table 42A do not apply to equipment complying with Irish or European Standards
and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
TABLE 42A : TEMPERATURE LIMITS IN NORMAL SERVICE FOR

TABLEACCESSIBLE
42A : TEMPERATURE LIMITS
PARTS OF IN NORMAL
EQUIPMENT SERVICE
WITHIN ARMS FOR
REACH
ACCESSIBLE PARTS OF EQUIPMENT WITHIN ARMS REACH
Materials of
Accessible parts accessible surfaces Maximum temperature
0
C
Hand-held means of operation Metal 55
Non-metal 65
Parts intended to be touched but Metal 70
not hand-held Non-metal 80
Parts that need not be touched Metal 80
for normal operation Non-metal 90
424 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING OF EQUIPMENT

PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING
Where a heating appliance does not comply as a whole with relevant Irish or European Standards, protection against
(e.g. a thermal cut-out).
overheating shall consist of an appropriate non-self-resetting device that functions independently of any thermostat
(e.g. a thermal cut-out).
The installation of a heating appliance, e.g. for forced air- heating, for producing hot water or
steam,
The installation of or for space-
a heating heating shall
appliance, be installed
e.g. for in heating,
forced air- accordance
for with the manufacturer’s
producing instructions
hot water or steam, or for space-
and these Rules.
heating shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and these Rules.
52
Chapter 43: Protection against overcurrent
CONTENTS
FOREWORD
431 REQUIREMENTS ACCORDING TO THE NATURE OF THE CIRCUITS
432 NATURE OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
433 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERLOAD CURRENTS
434 PROTECTION AGAINST SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENTS

435 CO-ORDINATION OF OVERLOAD AND SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION
436 LIMITATION OF OVERCURRENT BY CHARACTERISTICS OF SUPPLY
ANNEX FOR CHAPTER 43
FOREWORD
This chapter implements CENELEC HD 60364-4-43: S2
430.1 Scope
This chapter specifies the methods for protecting live conductors by one or more devices for automatic disconnection
of the supply in the event of overload and short-circuits.
Measures for co-ordination between overload protection and short-circuit protection are specified in 435.
Note 1: Live conductors protected against overload in accordance with 433 are considered to be protected also against faults likely to cause short-
circuit currents of a similar magnitude.
Note 2: Overcurrent protection of flexible cables in fixed installations is included in these Rules. Flexible cables connecting equipment by plugs
and socket-outlets to fixed installations are not in the scope of this chapter and are not thereby protected against overcurrent; protection
in this case is provided by the fuse in a plug complying with IS 411.
Note 3: Protection of the conductors does not necessarily protect any equipment connected thereto.
Note 4: Disconnection required by this chapter does not necessarily mean isolation as required by 462.
Note 5: 431.2, 432.2, 432.3, 433.2, 433.3, 433.4, 434.2, 434.3, and 434.4 are normally not applicable in domestic and similar installations.
Protective devices shall be provided to break any overcurrent, whether short-circuit or overload, flowing in the circuit
conductors before such a current could cause a danger due to thermal or magnetic effects detrimental to insulation,
joints, terminations or surroundings of the conductors.
Note: An overcurrent device may protect a circuit against overload or short-circuit, or it may protect against both. General purpose fuses and
circuit-breakers normally combine overload and short-circuit protection in the same device – see 533 for details.
53
430.3 Position of overcurrent protective device
An overcurrent device or devices ensuring protection against overload and short-circuit currents shall be provided at
the origin of every circuit and at each point where a reduction occurs in the current-carrying capacity of a conductor.
except where otherwise permitted in accordance with 430.4, 430.5, 433 or 434.
430.4 Position of main overcurrent device

A main overcurrent protective device shall be provided in every installation as follows:
i) at the main supply point in accordance with 533.3.5; or
ii) within 3m of the supply point provided the conductors upstream of the device:
- are installed in such a manner as to reduce the risk of a short circuit to a minimum e.g. by suitable mechanical
protection, and
- are installed in such a manner as to reduce to a minimum the risk of fire or danger to persons e.g. by ensuring that
they are not placed near combustible material, and
- have no branch connections.

Note: In domestic and similar installations, these conductors are usually referred to as “meter tails”.
430.5 Omission of overcurrent protection
Protection against overcurrent is not necessary where the current is limited in accordance with 436. The omission of
protection against overload is permissible only in the conditions specified in 433.3. The omission of protection against
short-circuit protection is permissible only in the conditions specified in 434.3.
431 REQUIREMENTS ACCORDING TO THE NATURE OF THE CIRCUITS

431.1 Overcurrent protection of line/phase conductors
Means for detecting overcurrents shall be provided for each line/phase conductor and shall cause the disconnection
of the conductor in which the overcurrent is detected, but not necessarily the other live conductors. Where, however,
disconnection of a single phase might cause danger, as for example in the case of a three-phase motor, appropriate
precautions shall be taken.
In TT or TN systems for circuits supplied between phases and in which the neutral conductor is not distributed,
overcurrent protection need not be provided for one of the line/phase conductors provided the following conditions
are simultaneously fulfilled:
a) There exists in the same circuit or upstream, differential protection intended to effect disconnection of all the phase
conductors.
b) the neutral conductor is not distributed from the artificial neutral of the circuits situated downstream of the
differential protective device stipulated in a) above.
431.2 Overcurrent protection of the neutral conductor
431.2.1 TN or TT systems
Where the cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor is smaller than that of the line/phase conductors, overcurrent
detection shall be provided for the neutral conductor, appropriate to the cross-sectional area of that conductor; this
detection shall cause the disconnection of the phase conductors, but not necessarily of the neutral conductor.
The neutral conductor shall be protected in every case against short-circuit currents. This protection may be achieved
by the overcurrent protective devices in the line/phase conductors, in which case it is not necessary to provide either
overcurrent detection or a disconnecting device for the neutral conductor.
Where the current in the neutral conductor is expected to exceed the value in the phase conductors, its protection shall
comply with 431.2.3 below.
The requirements for a neutral conductor are also valid for a PEN conductor.
Note: See also 524.
54
431.2.2 IT systems
In IT systems, the neutral conductor shall not be distributed except in cases where this is unavoidable. In such cases,
overcurrent detection shall be provided for the neutral conductor of every circuit, which will cause disconnection of
all the phase conductors of the corresponding circuit, including the neutral conductor.
This measure is not necessary if:
- the particular neutral conductor is effectively protected against short-circuits by a protective device placed upstream,
for example at the origin of the installation, in accordance with 434.5, or
- the particular circuit is protected by an RCD with a rated residual current not exceeding 0.20 times the current-
carrying capacity of the corresponding neutral conductor. This device shall disconnect all the live conductors, including
the neutral, of the corresponding circuit, and it shall have a sufficient breaking- capacity for all poles.
431.2.3 Harmonic currents
Overcurrent detection shall be provided for the neutral conductor in a three-phase circuit where the harmonic content
of the phase currents is such that the current in the neutral conductor is expected to exceed that in the line conductors.
This detection shall cause disconnection of the line conductors, but not necessarily the neutral conductor. Where
disconnection of the neutral is required, 431.3 applies.
431.3 Disconnection and reconnection of the neutral conductor
Switching of a neutral conductor shall be such that it is never disconnected before the phase conductors and never
reconnected later than the phase conductors.
432 NATURE OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

432.1 Devices providing protection against both overload and short-circuit current
A protective device shall be capable of breaking any overcurrent up to and including the prospective short-circuit
current at the point where the device is installed. Where the device is a circuit-breaker, it shall also be capable of
making such overcurrents. It shall satisfy the requirements of both 433 and 434. Devices shall be selected and installed
in accordance with 533.
Such devices may be:
- circuit-breakers incorporating magnetic and overload releases, e.g. circuit-breakers complying with I.S.EN 60947-2
or MCBs complying with I.S.EN 60898,
- fuses having gC characteristics complying with I.S. EN 60269-2 or I.S. EN 60269-3,
- suitable circuit-breaker-fuse combinations.
Note 1: A fuse comprises all the parts that form the complete protective device.
Note 2: A protective device having a breaking capacity lower than the value of the prospective short-circuit current at its place of installation may
be used subject to the requirements of 434.5.1.
Note 3: This clause does not exclude the use of other protective devices provided 433 and 434 are fulfilled.
432.2 Devices ensuring protection against overload current only
Overload protective devices shall comply with the requirements of 433.
Note 1: These are usually inverse-time lag protection devices, the interrupting capacity of which may be lower than the value of the prospective
short-circuit current at the point of their installation.
Note 2: Fuses type aM do not protect wiring against overload.
432.3 Devices ensuring protection against short-circuit current only
Devices for short-circuit protection only shall comply with the requirements of 434. Such devices shall be installed
only where overload protection is achieved by other means or where an exemption is permissible in accordance with
433.3.
The devices shall be capable of breaking short-circuit currents up to and including the prospective short-circuit currents.
Note : Such devices may be fuses, or circuit breakers with a short-circuit release mechanism.
55
433 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERLOAD CURRENTS
433.1 Co-ordination between conductors and protective devices
The operating characteristics of a device protecting a cable against overload shall satisfy the following two
conditions :
1) IB ≤ In ≤ Iz
2) I2 ≤ 1.45 x Iz
where
IB is the current for which the circuit is designed
Iz is the continuous current-carrying capacity of the cable according to 523

In is the rated current of the protective device, or the current-setting if adjustable
I2 is the current ensuring effective operation in the conventional time of the protective device, and is generally
given in the product standard.
Note 1: Protection in accordance with this clause does not ensure complete protection in certain cases, for example, against sustained overcurrent
less than I2 nor will it necessarily result in an economical solution. Therefore it should be ensured that the circuit is so designed small
overloads of long duration will not occur frequently. Such overloads may cause premature ageing of the insulation Protection may be
achieved by selecting a larger cable size.
Note 2: Ring final - circuits complying with Annex 55A are deemed to be protected against overload.
433.2 Alternative position of separate overload protective device
Where compliance with 430.3 is impracticable, it is permissible to place a separate overload protective device at
another point in the conductor subject to the following:
i) protection against short-circuits is provided for the conductor length upstream of the device in accordance with 434; or
ii) the conductor length upstream of the device:
- is not greater than 3 m in length,
- has no branch circuits or socket-outlets, and
- is carried out in such a manner as to reduce the risk of short-circuit to a minimum, and
- is installed in such a manner as to reduce to a minimum the risk of fire or danger to persons.
Note: Cables and insulated conductors in conduit and bare conductors on ceramic insulators are considered to comply with this latter requirement
433.3 Omission of devices for protection against overload
433.3.1 TN and TT systems
It is permissible to omit devices for protection against overload in any of the following situations, provided the location
is not an area of fire risk:
i) where effective protection of a conductor is afforded by a protective device located upstream;
ii) where:
- short-circuit protection of a conductor is provided in accordance with 434.2.2, and
- there are no branch circuits or socket-outlets, and;
- equipment supplied by the conductor is not likely to cause overload.
56
iii) installations for telecommunication, control, signalling, and similar purposes;
iv) where overloading of the circuits will not cause danger, in distribution circuits comprising cables laid in the
ground, or in overhead lines.
433.3.2 IT systems
433.3.2.1 The provisions in 433.2 and 433.3 for an alternative position or omission of devices for protection against
overload are not applicable to IT systems unless: each circuit not protected against overload is protected by one of the
following means:
i) compliance with 412 (double or reinforced insulation); or
ii) protection of each circuit by an RCD that will operate immediately in the event of a second fault occurring in
another live conductor; or
iii) for permanently-supervised systems only, the use of an insulation-monitoring device (IMD) that initiates an
audible and/or a visible signal, complies with 411.6.3 and is selected and installed in accordance with 538.
433.3.2.2 In IT systems without a neutral conductor the overload protective device may be omitted in one of the phase
conductors if an RCD is provided on each circuit.
433.3.3 Omission of devices for overload protection for safety reasons
Where the unexpected disconnection of a circuit could cause danger or damage, the omission of overload protection
is admissible and shall be given due consideration.
Examples of such cases are :
- exciter circuits of rotating machines,

- supply circuits of lifting magnets,
- secondary circuits of current transformers,
- circuits supplying safety services (e.g. intruder alarms, gas alarms, sprinkler systems etc).
Note: In such cases consideration should be given to the provision of an overload monitoring- or other alarm- device.
433.4 Overload protection of conductors in parallel
Where a single device protects several conductors connected in parallel, there shall be no branch circuits, connections
or isolating devices in the parallel conductors.
Note 1: See Annex 43A
Note 2: See also 434.4: Short-circuit protection of conductors in parallel.
433.4.1 Equal current-sharing between parallel conductors
When a single device protects several conductors in parallel, carrying equal currents, the value of Iz to be used in
433.1 is the sum of the current-carrying capacities of the various conductors. Current - sharing may be deemed to be
equal where compliance with 523.7 is ensured. This requirement does not preclude the use of ring final circuits
complying with Annex 55A.
433.4.2 Unequal current-sharing between parallel conductors
Where the currents in parallel conductors are unequal, the design currents and overload device ratings shall be
considered individually.
Note 1: Currents in parallel conductors are considered to be unequal if the difference between any currents is more than 10% of the design
current for each conductor.
Note 2: Parallel conductors are prohibited in radial final circuits - see 551.3 and 559.
57
434 PROTECTION AGAINST SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENTS

Note: These Rules only take account of cases of short-circuit anticipated between conductors belonging to the same circuit.
434.1 Determination of prospective short-circuit current

The prospective short-circuit current at every relevant point of the installation shall be determined by calculation or
by measurement.
Note: After completing the installation the fault-loop impedance of every circuit must be measured in accordance with 613.13.
434.2 Alternative position of short-circuit protective device
Where compliance with 430.3.1 is impracticable, it is permissible to place a short-circuit protective device at another
point in the conductor provided it complies with either 434.2.1 or 434.2.2 below.
434.2.1 A device may be placed at another point in the conductor provided the part of the conductor upstream of the
device is such that :
a) Its length does not exceed 3m.
b) It is protected mechanically or otherwise so that the risk of short circuit is reduced to a minimum.
c) It is not placed close to combustible materials.
d) It is not installed in locations where a risk of fire or explosion may be present.
434.2.2 A protective device may be placed at another point in the conductor where a preceding device affords short-
circuit protection for the part of the circuit upstream from that point.
434.3 Omission of protective devices for short-circuit protection
Devices for protection against short-circuit need not be provided for the following:
i) conductors connecting generators, transformers, rectifiers, or accumulator batteries to the associated control panels,
the protective devices being placed in these panels;
ii) circuits where disconnection could cause danger, e.g. as specified in 433.3.3;
iii) certain measuring circuits, provided the following three conditions are fulfilled:
a) The wiring is carried out in such a way as to reduce the risk of a short-circuit to a minimum, as specified in
434.2.1.
b) the wiring is installed in such a manner as to reduce to a minimum the risk of fire or danger to persons.
c) the wiring is not placed close to combustible material.
434.4 Short-circuit protection of conductors in parallel
434.4.1 A single protective device may be used to protect several conductors in parallel against the effects of short
circuit provided the operating characteristic of the device ensures effective operation in the case of a fault occurring
at the most onerous position in one parallel conductor. Account shall be taken of the sharing of short-circuit currents
between parallel conductors.
Note: A fault may be fed from either end of a parallel conductor.
434.4.2 If effective operation of a single protective device is not ensured, one or more of the following measures
shall be taken :
a) The wiring shall be carried out in such a way as to reduce the risk of a short-circuit in any parallel conductor to
a minimum, e.g. by mechanical protection, and conductors shall be installed in such a manner as to reduce to a
minimum the risk of fire or danger to persons.
58
b) For two conductors in parallel, short-circuit protective devices shall be provided at the supply end of each parallel
conductor.
c) For more than two conductors in parallel, short-circuit protective devices shall be provided at both ends of each
parallel conductor.
Note: Applying measure b) or c) needs careful consideration, and may give rise to problems. See Annex 43A.
434.5 Characteristics of short-circuit protective devices
Each short-circuit protective device shall meet the following conditions:
434.5.1 Its breaking- capacity shall be not less than the prospective maximum short-circuit current at the place of
its installation except in the case of the following:
A lower breaking capacity is admissible if another protective device having the necessary breaking capacity is installed
upstream. In this case, the characteristics of the two devices shall be coordinated so that the energy let-through by the
device upstream does not exceed that which can be withstood without damage by the device downstream and by the
conductors protected by those devices.
Note: In certain cases, other characteristics may need to be taken into account, such as dynamic stresses and arcing energy for the device
downstream. Details of the characteristics needing co-ordination should be obtained from the manufacturers of the devices concerned.
434.5.2 A circuit shall be so designed and installed that, when a short-circuit occurs at any point, the current is
interrupted before the conductor exceeds the admissible temperature limit for the insulating material e.g. as specified
in Table 43A.
For short-circuits of duration up to 5s, the admissible duration t of the current may be calculated from the formula
t ≤ (k.S/I)2
where
t is the duration in seconds
S is the cross-sectional area in mm2
I is the effective short-circuit current, in amperes r.m.s
k is a factor dependent on the conductor materials, insulation and other parts, and on the initial and final temperatures.
For the usual types of insulation the values of k for phase conductors are shown in Table 43A.
For very short durations (< 0.1 s) where asymmetry of the current is of importance and for current-limiting devices,
k2.S2 shall be greater than the value of the let-through energy (I2 t) stated by the manufacturer of the protective device.
Note 1: The formula applies to conductors of at least 10 mm2 cross-sectional area. For smaller sizes, and for times exceeding 5 s, the cable
manufacturer should be consulted
Note 2: The rated current of the short-circuit protection device may be greater than the current- carrying capacity of the cable.
Note 3: Other methods of calculation are permissible.
59
TABLE
TABLE 43A
43A : VALUES
: VALUES OFOF
k kFOR
FORPHASE
PHASECONDUCTOR
CONDUCTORFOR
FORFORMULA
FORMULAININ434.5.2
434.5.2
Installation Material Temperature ºC Material of conductor

0
Insulation material Temperature C Material of conductor
Copper Aluminium
Initial Final k k
Thermoplastic
(PVC) 70 0C 70 160/140 * 115/103* 76/68*
Thermoplastic
(PVC) 90 0C 90 160/140* 100/86* 66/57*
Thermosetting
(EPR, XLPE) 90 250 143 94
90 0C
Rubber 60 0C
60 200 141 93
Silicon rubber
180 350 132 89

Mineral + PVC 70 160 115 -
Mineral bare 105 250 135 -
• The lower values apply to conductors with cross-sectional area greater than 300 mm2
434.5.3 For busbar- trunking systems complying with I.S.EN 60439-2, and Powertrack systems complying with
I.S.EN 61534, one of the following requirements shall apply:
a) The rated short-time withstand current Icw and the rated peak withstand current of the busbar trunking system or
Powertrack system shall not be lower than the prospective short-circuit current r.m.s. value, and the prospective short-
circuit peak current value, respectively. The maximum time for which the Icw is defined for the busbar trunking system
shall be higher than the maximum operating time of the device. Icw is defined for the busbar trunking
s the device.
b) The rated conditional short-circuit current of the busbar trunking system or Powertrack system associated with a
specific protective device shall not be lower than the prospective short-circuit current.
associated with a specific protective device shall not be lower than the
p current.
435 COORDINATION OF OVERLOAD AND SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION
COORDINATION OF OVERLOAD AND SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION
435.1 Protection afforded
Protection by one
afforded bydevice
one device
When an overload protective device complies with 433 and has a breaking capacity not less than the prospective short-
circuit current at its point of installation, it is deemed to protect the conductor downstream against short-circuit currents
as well as overloads.
435.2 Protection afforded

Protection by separate
afforded devicesdevices
by separate
The requirements of 433 and 434 apply respectively to the overload protective device and the short-circuit device. The
characteristics of the devices shall be coordinated so that the energy let-through by the short-circuit device does not
T can be withstood without damage by the overload device.
exceed that which
436 LIMITATION OF OVERCURRENT BY CHARACTERISTICS OF SUPPLY

LIMITATION OF OVERCURRENT BY CHARACTERISTICS OF
S
Protection against overcurrent is not required where the conductors are supplied from a source inherently incapable
of supplying a current exceeding the current-carrying capacity of the conductors.
ANNEX FOR CHAPTER 43:
Annex 43A: Short-circuit protection of conductors in parallel.

Short-circuit protection of conductors in parallel.
60
Chapter 44: Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic

disturbances
CONTENTS
440: SCOPE
441: RESERVED
442: PROTECTION OF LOW-VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS AGAINST FAULTS BETWEEN HIGHER-

VOLTAGE SYSTEMS AND EARTH
443: PROTECTION AGAINST OVERVOLTAGES OF ATMOSPHERIC ORIGIN OR DUE TO SWITCHING
444: MEASURES AGAINST ELECTROMAGNETIC INFLUENCES (Future)

445: PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE.
440 SCOPE
This chapter specifies measures for the safety of electrical installations in the event of voltage disturbances and
electromagnetic disturbances that occur for the various reasons specified in this chapter.
This chapter is not intended to apply to systems for the distribution of energy to the public, or power generation and
transmission of such systems, although such disturbances may be conducted into or between electrical installations
through such supply systems.
442 PROTECTION OF LOW VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS AGAINST FAULTS

BETWEEN HIGHER-VOLTAGE SYSTEMS AND EARTH
FOREWORD
This section implements CENELEC HD 60364-4-442.
This section applies to installations incorporating substations with low -voltage and higher -voltage systems, where
the low-voltage system has either a TN or a TT earthing system. IT earthing systems are not normally used in Ireland,
and in such cases, the relevant CENELEC HD should be consulted.
This section is intended to determine whether the normal insulation resistance in the substation will be adequate when
a fault occurs on the higher - voltage side.
The term “higher voltage” in this section means any voltage higher than low voltage.
442.1 Scope and object
The Rules of this section provide requirements for the safety of a low- voltage installation in the event of:
- a fault between the higher-voltage system and earth in the transformer sub-station that supplies the low- voltage
installation,
- loss of the supply- neutral in a low-voltage system (442.3),
- short-circuit between a line conductor and neutral.
The requirements for the earthing arrangement of the transformer sub-station are given in I.S.EN 50179.
Other suitable arrangements may be used.
Note: These Rules do not apply to the public electricity supply network.
61
442.1.1 General
The following information concerning the higher-voltage installation shall be obtained by the designer and the
installer of the sub-station:
- the quality of the system earthing,

- the maximum level of earth fault current,
- the resistance of the earthing arrangements.
The severest temporary overvoltages are usually due to the following causes:
- a fault between the higher-voltage system and earth (442.2),
- the loss of the neutral in a low-voltage system (442.3),

- a short-circuit in the low-voltage installation (442.5).
442.1.2 Symbols
The following symbols are used in the figures 44.1 and 44.2 of this section :
IE is that part of the earth fault current in the higher-voltage system that flows through the earthing arrangement of
the transformer sub-station.
RE is the resistance of the earthing arrangement of the transformer sub-station.
RA is the resistance of the earthing arrangement of the exposed conductive parts of the equipment of the low-voltage
installation.
RB is the resistance of the earthing arrangement of the low-voltage system neutral, for low- voltage systems in which
the earthing arrangement of the transformer sub-station of the low-voltage system neutral are electrically independent.
Uo is the line-to-earth voltage of the low-voltage system.
Uf is the voltage which appears in the low-voltage system between exposed conductive parts and earth for the duration
of the fault.
U1 is the power-frequency stress-voltage in the low-voltage equipment of the transformer substation during the fault.
U2 is the power-frequency stress-voltage in the low-voltage equipment of the low-voltage installation during a fault.
Note 1: The power- frequency stress voltage (U1 and U2) is the voltage that appears across the insulation of low- voltage equipment and across
surge-protective devices connected to the low-voltage systems.
Note 2: The value of RE and RB may be influenced by the impedance to earth of the main equipotential bonding and of other earth electrodes.
An earthing arrangement may be considered to be electrically independent of another earthing arrangement if a rise in potential with
respect to earth in one earthing arrangement does not cause an unacceptable rise of potential in the other earthing arrangement.
442.2 Overvoltages in low-voltage systems during a higher-voltage earth fault.
442.2.0 In the case of a fault to earth on the higher-voltage side of the installation, the following types of overvoltage
may affect the low-voltage installation:
- power- frequency fault voltage Uf,

- power- frequency stress voltages U1 and U2.
The relevant methods of calculation for the different types of overvoltages are given in Table 44A.
62

Figure 44.1: Representative schematic sketch for connections to earth in sub-station and LV-Installation and occurring
over voltages in case of faults.
Figure 44.2: Tolerable fault-voltage due to an earth-fault in the HV system.
63
Figure 44.1: Stress- voltages in sub-stations in case of faults
T
TABLE 44A: POWER-FREQUENCY STRESS-VOLTAGE AND POWER - FREQUENCY FAULT -
VOLTAGE IN THE LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM
P FAULT -
VOLTAGE IN THE LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM
Type of
system Type of earth U1 U2 Uf
earthing connections
TT RE and R A connected Uo R E . I E + Uo 0
TT RE and RA separated RE . IE + Uo Uo 0
TN RE and RB connected Uo Uo RE . I E
TN RE and RB separated RE . IE + Uo Uo 0
TheisIT
The IT system notsystem
used inisdistribution
not used in systems
distribution systems in Ireland
in Ireland
Note 1:for
Note 1: The requirements TheU1requirements for U1 from the
and U2 are derived aredesign
derived from the
criteria for design criteria
insulation for insulation
of low-voltage of low-voltage
equipment equipment
with regard with
to temporary
power-frequency regard to temporary
overvoltage power-frequency overvoltage (Table 44B).
(Table 44B).
Note 2: In a system whose neutral is connected to the earthing arrangement of the transformer sub-station, such temporary power-frequency
Note
overvoltage 2: Intoabe
is also system whose
expected neutral
across is connected
insulation that is to
notthe
in earthing arrangement
an earthed of the the
enclosure when transformer
equipment sub-station, suchbuilding.
is outside the
temporary power-frequency overvoltage is also to be expected across insulation that
Note 3: In TT and TN systems the terms “connected” and “separated” refer to the electrical connection between RE and RB.is not in an earthed
enclosure when the equipment is outside the building.
442.2.1 Magnitude
Note 3:and
In TTduration of power-frequency
and TN systems the terms “connected”fault -voltage refer to the electrical connection between
and “separated”
RE and R B
The magnitude and duration of the fault- voltage Uf which appears in the low-voltage installation between exposed
Magnitude and duration of power-frequency fault -voltage
conductive parts and earth shall not exceed the values given for Uf by the curve of Figure 44.2 for the duration of the
fault. If the PEN conductor of the low-voltage system is connected to earth at more than one point, it is
permissible to double
i the value given in Figure 44.2. the values
given for Uf
Note: The curve shown above is taken from IEC 61936-1. On the basis of probabilistic and statistical evidence this curve represents a low level
conductor of the low-voltage system is connected to earth at more than one point, it is
of risk for the simple worst case where the low-voltage system neutral conductor is earthed only at the transformer sub-station earthing
arrangements. permissible to double the value given in Figure 44.2.
442.2.2 Magnitude and duration of power-frequency stress-voltages
The magnitude and the duration of the power-frequency stress-voltage of the low-voltage equipment in the low-voltage
installation due to an earth fault in the higher-voltage system shall not exceed the values of Table 44B.
TABLE 44B: PERMISSIBLE POWER-FREQUENCY STRESS-VOLTAGE

Figure 44.2: Tolerable fault-voltage due to an earth-fault in the higher-voltage system
Duration of the fault only

in the Permissible power-frequency
arrangements. stress-voltage
this curve represents a low level of risk for the simple worst case where the low-voltage system neutral
higher- voltage system in equipment in low-voltage installations

conductor is earthed at the transformer sub-station earthing
(s) U r.m.s
>5 Uo + 250
≤5 Uo + 1200
Magnitude and duration of power-frequency stress-voltages
In systems without a neutral conductor, Uo is the phase-to-phase voltage (or line voltage).
Note 1: The first line of the table relates to higher-voltage systems having long disconnection times, for example isolated neutral and resonant
earthed higher-voltage systems. The second line relates to higher- voltage systems having short disconnection times, for example low-
impedance earthed higher-voltage systems.
Both lines together are relevant design criteria for insulation of low-voltage equipment with regard to temporary power-frequency over
voltage (see IEC 60664 -1).
Note 2: In a system where the neutral is connected to the earthing arrangement of the transformer sub-station, such temporary power-frequency
over voltage is also to be expected across insulation which is not in an earthed enclosure when the equipment is outside a building.
442.2.3 Requirements for calculation of limits
In every case, full compliance with the power-frequency stress voltage limit provided in Table 44B shall be achieved.
In every case, full compliance with the power- frequency fault voltage limit given in Figure 44.2 shall be achieved.
To fulfil the above requirements, co-ordination between the higher-voltage system operator and the low- voltage
system installer is necessary. Compliance with the above requirements mainly falls into the responsibility of the sub-
64
station owner/operator who needs also to fulfil requirements provided by IEC 61936-1. Therefore the calculation for
U1 U2 and Uf is normally not necessary for the low-voltage system installer.
Possible measures to fulfil the above requirements are e.g.:
- separation of earthing arrangements between low- voltage and higher- voltage systems,
- change of low-voltage system earthing,
- reduction of the earth resistance RE.
442.3 Power-frequency stress-voltage in case of loss of the neutral conductor in a TN or TT system
Account shall be taken of the fact that, if the neutral conductor in a three-phase TN or TT system is interrupted, basic,
double and reinforced insulation as well as components rated for the voltage between line and neutral conductors can
be temporarily stressed with the line-to-line voltage.
Note: The stress voltage U can reach √ 3 Uo.

442.4 Power frequency stress-voltage in case of a short-circuit between a line conductor and the neutral
conductor
Account shall be taken of the case of a short-circuit between a phase conductor and the neutral conductor where the
voltage between the other line conductors and the neutral conductor can reach the value of 1.45 x Uo for a time up to
5s.
443 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERVOLTAGES OF ATMOSPHERIC ORIGIN OR

DUE TO SWITCHING
INTRODUCTION
Voltage surges may be caused by atmospheric phenomena such as keraunic activity i.e. lightning strikes direct and
indirect, or switching surges generated within the installation or imported from the supply network. In general,
switching surges are lower than overvoltages that can appear at the origin of the installation, and therefore the
requirements regarding protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin normally cover protection against
switching overvoltages.
This section does not apply in case of overvoltages due to direct or nearby lightning. This section does not cover
overvoltage through data-transmission systems.
Keraunic activity is relatively low in Ireland, compared with the European mainland. The capacity for damage
contained in these surges is extremely high due to the enormous energy involved. The test waveform used to portray
this form of surge is referred to as a “10/350 wave” that is, a 10μS wave front on a 350μS wave tail to half maximum
value.
However, switching surges are far more common, and are referred to as an “8/20 wave”, that is an 8 μS wave front on
a 20 μS wave tail to half maximum value. They contain far less energy, but can nevertheless cause serious damage to
unprotected electronic equipment. Most switching surges are generated within the installation, and a simple action such
as switching fluorescent lighting may result in this form of voltage disturbance.
The two principal methods of protection against voltage surges are:
1. Selecting equipment that is insulated to a sufficiently high level to withstand anticipated surges.
2. Selecting special devices that will protect the equipment, known as “surge protective devices or “SPDs”.
The application of this section will normally require risk assessment and a knowledge of the equipment used in the
installation.
Where protection against the effects of lightning is being considered, factors such as keraunic activity levels may be
ascertained from MET Eireann.
It is important to note that in most instances protective devices for switching surges will not protect the installation
from the resulting effects of a lightning surge.
65
FOREWORD
This section implements CENELEC HD 60364-4-443:2004.
443.1 General
Protection shall be provided against voltage-surges likely to occur, whether from within the installation or from external
sources such as switching- surges transmitted by the supply. Consideration shall be given to the likelihood and
frequency of voltage- surges from the supply caused by lightning and the appropriate means of protection.
Protection against voltage- surges is provided by the following methods:
- inherent control provided by the level of insulation resistance of the equipment,
- surge protective devices (SPDs).
443.2 Impulse-withstand categories
443.2.1 Explanation
The impulse-withstand voltage (overvoltage category) is used to classify equipment energised directly from the supply
network.
A manufacturer will assign a rated impulse withstand voltage to the equipment. Rated impulse- withstand voltage
values indicate the relative levels of reliability of equipment subjected to voltage surges.
By suitable selection and co-ordination of rated impulse-withstand voltages, the installer can reduce the rate of failure
of equipment, and the consequences, to an acceptable level.
443.2.2 Impulse-withstand categories
For the purposes of this section, all electrical equipment is classified in four categories, which are based on rated
impulse- withstand voltages. The categories are as follows:
Category IV: Equipment with a rated impulse withstand voltage of 6 kV. This is the highest category, and is intended
for equipment at or near the origin of the installation. Examples are metering equipment, current transformers, etc.
where a very high degree of reliability is required.
Category III: Equipment with a rated impulse-withstand voltage of 4 kV. This is intended for equipment in the fixed
installation downstream of, and including, the main distribution board, where a high degree of reliability is required.
Examples are circuit breakers, wiring systems including busbars and accessories, stationary motors.
Category II: Equipment with a rated impulse-withstand voltage of 2.5 kV. This is intended for the fixed installation
downstream of, and including, the main distribution board where a normal degree of reliability is required. Domestic
and similar appliances are included in this category.
Category I: Equipment with a rated impulse-withstand voltage of 1.5 kV. This does not resist voltage surges to any
significant extent, and requires separate protection such as SPDs to limit voltage surges to a specific level. Such
equipment should not have a direct connection to the supply system. Examples are IT equipment, TVs, PCs.
443.3 Overvoltage control
443.3.1 Inherent overvoltage control
Installations supplied by underground cables, and installations in areas where the likelihood of lightning is low, are
deemed to be protected by inherent control. Installations supplied by overhead conductors in areas where the incidence
of voltage surges caused by lightning is significant, should be protected by suitable SPDs installed at the origin of the
installation.
Note: A suspended cable having insulated conductors with an earthed metal screen is considered to be the equivalent of an underground cable
for the purposes of this clause.
Voltage surges may be generated by switching within the installation, or they may be transmitted by the supply system
from an external source.
66
Equipment complying with Category II, III, or IV is deemed to be protected against damage caused by voltage surges
due to switching. However, in cases where voltage surges might exceed the relevant impulse- voltage- withstand
levels, protection by suitable SPDs should be provided in accordance with 443.5.
Equipment having an impulse-voltage- withstand level in accordance with Category I, and equipment not having a
designated impulse-voltage-withstand level should be protected by an SPD which may form part of a fixed socket -
outlet or a portable socket- outlet.
443.3.2 Protective overvoltage control
Consideration regarding protection against transient overvoltages shall be given to equipment with an impulse-
withstand voltage according to Category I.
443.3.2.1 Protective overvoltage control based on risk assessment.
The need for protection against overvoltage shall be evaluated in relation to the following:
a) Consequences for human life, e.g. safety services, medical equipment in hospitals.
b) Loss of services in places of public resort e.g. IT centres, museums, art galleries.
c) Consequences for commercial, industrial or agricultural activity.
Note: SPDs may be necessary in such situations.
In the case of large residential buildings, schools, offices churches and domestic residences the consequences of
overvoltages are normally not as serious as for the foregoing.
443.3.2.2 Protective overvoltage control based on voltage surges of atmospheric origin (lightning)
Installations supplied by underground cables and installations in areas where the likelihood of lightning is low, are
deemed to be protected by inherent overvoltage control (443.1).
Installations supplied by overhead conductors in areas where the incidence of voltage- surges caused by lightning is
significant shall be protected by suitable SPDs installed at the origin of the installation.
The protection level of the SPD shall be at least that of overvoltage Category IV.
443.4 Required impulse-withstand voltage of equipment
Equipment shall be selected so that its rated impulse withstand voltage is not less than the required impulse voltage
in accordance with Table 44 C.
TABLE 44C: REQUIRED IMPULSE-WITHSTAND VOLTAGES FOR EQUIPMENT
Required impulse-withstand voltage kV
Equipment Equipment of Specially -

at origin of distribution Appliances protected
Nominal Voltage the and final Category II equipment
installation circuits Category I
Category IV Category III
230/400 V 6 4 2.5 1.5
Note: The impulse-withstand voltage is applied between live conductors and earth
67
443.5 Selection of surge protective devices (SPDs)
Note: See 534 in Chapter 53.
SPDs are classified in IEC Publication 61643 as follows:

Class I: For protection against incoming lightning partial currents. It is suitable for use with Category IV equipment
(DIN/VDE Class B is equivalent).
Class II: For voltage surge protection at distribution level, i.e. distribution boards, wiring systems including
accessories. It is suitable for use with Category III equipment (DIN/VDE Class C is equivalent).
Location: Distribution board.
Class III-IV: For protection of current-using equipment and IT equipment. (DIN/VDE Class D is equivalent)
Location: At socket outlets or terminals of the equipment.

444 MEASURES AGAINST ELECTROMAGNETIC INFLUENCES (Future)
445 PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE
445.1 Where a drop in voltage, or the loss and subsequent restoration of voltage, could cause danger to persons,
property or livestock, suitable protective measures shall be taken. In addition, precautions shall be taken where
equipment or a part of the installation may suffer damage due to a drop in voltage unless such damage is considered
an acceptable risk and no danger is caused to persons.
445.2 The operation of undervoltage protective devices may be delayed if the nature or use of the appliance protected
allows without danger a brief interruption or loss of voltage.
445.3 Where contactors are used which have intentional delays in their operation, it shall be ensured that this
feature does not impede instantaneous disconnection by control or protective devices.
Note: The protective devices having time-delay facilities should permit the starting of motors where the supply voltage exceeds 85% of rated
voltage and continued operation where the voltage is within 10% of the rated voltage.
445.4 The characteristics of the undervoltage protective device shall be compatible with the requirements of the
appropriate standards for the starting and use of equipment.
445.5 Where the reclosure of a protective device is likely to cause a dangerous situation, reclosure shall not be
automatic.
68
Chapter 46: Isolation and switching

CONTENTS
461 GENERAL
462 ISOLATION
463 SWITCHING-OFF FOR MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE
464 EMERGENCY SWITCHING AND EMERGENCY STOPPING
465 FUNCTIONAL SWITCHING AND CONTROL
461 GENERAL
461.1 Installations shall be provided with devices for non-automatic isolation and switching that prevent or remove
hazards associated with those installations, and with electrically-activated equipment and machines. Such devices
shall be selected and installed in accordance with 537.
461.2 In TT earthing systems, devices shall isolate all live conductors, including the neutral. In TN earthing systems,
devices shall isolate all phase/line conductors, but the neutral conductor need not be isolated or switched provided the
system conditions are such that the neutral conductor is reliably at earth potential. For the purposes of this clause, the
neutral is deemed to be reliably at earth potential in a TN system supplied by the DSO.
A PEN conductor shall not have any provision for isolation or switching.
Note 1: Notwithstanding the above, switching of the neutral is necessary in certain special cases, e.g. fire-risk areas.
Note 2: Protective conductors must not have any provision for isolation or switching – see Chapter 54.
461.3 The moving contacts of all poles of multiple- switching devices shall be so coupled mechanically that they
break and make substantially together, except that contacts solely intended for the neutral conductor may close before,
and open after, the other contacts.
461.4 The measures specified in this chapter shall not be deemed to be alternatives to the protective measures
specified in Chapters 41 to 44 inclusive.
462 ISOLATION
462.1 Every circuit shall be capable of being isolated from all live conductors of the supply except where provided
for in 461.2. Devices shall be selected and installed in accordance with 537.2.
462.2 A main isolating switch shall be provided for every installation, located within 2m of the main supply point.
Where a premises contains two or more installations their means of isolation shall comply with the requirements of
539.2. Where the main isolating switch is located in a switch room, it shall comply with 539.3.
Note. An installation is defined as one requiring a completion certificate in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 63
462.3 Where an installation extends to more than one building, an isolating switch shall be provided at, and located
within 2m of the point of entry of the supply in each building.
462.4 Every distribution board and switchgear assembly shall be provided with an isolating switch for the purpose
of disconnecting that equipment from the supply.
462.5 Where necessary, suitable means shall be provided for the discharge of stored electrical energy.
69
463 SWITCHING- OFF FOR MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE
Means of switching- off shall be provided where maintenance of electrically- activated equipment might otherwise
involve a risk of physical injury. Devices shall be selected and installed in accordance with 537.3.
464 EMERGENCY SWITCHING AND EMERGENCY STOPPING

464.1 Means shall be provided for emergency switching of any part of an installation where necessary so as to
prevent or remove danger. Devices shall be selected and installed in accordance with 537.4.
Note: Emergency switching may consist of switching off or switching on a circuit
464.2 Means for emergency stopping shall be provided where electrically-produced movements may give rise to
danger.
464.3 The arrangement of emergency switching shall be co-ordinated with the other emergency procedures so that
its operation does not introduce a further danger or interfere adversely with the overall procedure necessary to remove
danger.
465 FUNCTIONAL SWITCHING (CONTROL)
465.1 A functional switching device shall be provided for each part of a circuit that is controlled independently of
other parts of the installation. Devices shall be selected and installed in accordance with 537.5.
465.2 In general, current-using apparatus shall be controlled by an appropriate switching device. A single functional
switching device may control two or more associated items of apparatus.
70
PART 5
SELECTION AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 51: COMMON RULES AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
CHAPTER 52: WIRING SYSTEMS
CHAPTER 53: EQUIPMENT FOR PROTECTION, ISOLATION, SWITCHING, CONTROL AND

MONITORING
CHAPTER 54: EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR AND EQUIPOTENTIAL

BONDING.
CHAPTER 55: OTHER EQUIPMENT
CHAPTER 56: SAFETY SERVICES
71
Chapter 51: Common rules and external influences
CONTENTS
FOREWORD
510: GENERAL
511: COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
512: OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
513: ACCESSIBILITY
514: IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING

515: PREVENTION OF MUTUAL DETRIMENTAL INFLUENCES
LIST OF ANNEXES FOR CHAPTER 51
FOREWORD
This Chapter implements CENELEC HD 60364-5-51: 2006. It includes Special National Conditions (SNCs) approved
by CENELEC for Ireland and indicated in the text below by the acronym SNC. It also includes requirements for
conductors for d.c. circuits.
510 GENERAL
510.1 Equipment shall be selected and erected so as to comply with:
- the measures for safety specified in Part 4,

- the requirements for proper functioning for the intended use of the installation,
- the requirements appropriate to the external influences foreseen,
- the appropriate requirements of other chapters of these Rules.
511 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
511.1 Equipment shall comply with the appropriate European Standard published as I.S. EN, or CENELEC
Harmonization Document, or with the equivalent Irish Standard, or in the absence thereof, with the appropriate Irish
Standard.
Equipment for which none of the above standards exist shall comply with the appropriate ISO or IEC standard.
Where no applicable standard exists, equipment shall be selected by special agreement between the person purchasing
or designing the installation and the installer. In such a case, the equipment when installed shall satisfy the requirements
of Part 4 of these Rules, and the relevant requirements of Part 5.
512 OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
512.1 Operational conditions
512.1.1 Voltage
Electrical equipment shall be suitable for the nominal voltage (r.m.s. value for a.c.) of the installation.
In installations having IT system earthing where the neutral conductor is distributed, equipment connected between
phase and neutral shall have insulation appropriate to the line voltage.
Note: For certain equipment it may be necessary to take account of the highest and/or lowest voltage likely to occur. See also Chapter 44 for
overvoltage protection.
72
512.1.2 Current
Equipment shall be selected for the design current (r.m.s. value for a.c) that it is expected to carry in normal service.
Equipment shall also be capable of carrying currents likely to flow in abnormal conditions for such periods of time as
are determined by the characteristics of the protective devices. Account shall be taken of starting currents and
harmonics likely to occur.
512.1.3 Frequency
If frequency has an influence on the characteristics of equipment, the rated frequency of the equipment shall correspond
to the frequency of the current in the circuit concerned.
512.1.4 Power
Equipment selected for its power characteristics shall be suitable for the normal operational conditions taking account
of load conditions.
512.1.5 Compatibility
Unless other suitable precautions are taken during erection, equipment shall be selected so that it will neither adversely
affect other equipment nor impair the supply during normal service, including switching operations.
512.1.6 Impulse - voltage withstand level
Equipment shall be selected so that its rated impulse-voltage withstand level is at least equal to the prospective
overvoltage at the point of installation, in accordance with 443.
512.2.1 Equipment shall be selected and erected having regard to all external influences to which it may be subjected
so as to ensure the effectiveness of the protective measures specified in Part 4 and the correct functioning of the
equipment.
Note 1: Examination of the appropriate standards and/or the manufacturer’s information should establish whether the equipment concerned is
suitable for the external influences of its location See Annex 51D: IEC Classification of external influences .
Note 2: Equipment in areas of fire hazard should comply also with 422.2.
512.2.2 If equipment does not, by its construction, have the characteristics appropriate to the external influences of
its location, it may be used on condition that it is provided with appropriate additional protection forming part of the
completed installation. Such protection shall not adversely affect the operation of the equipment protected.
Note: In these Rules, the classification system for the protection of enclosures against ingress of dust, other solid bodies and moisture is that of
I.S. EN 60529 “Classification of degrees of protection for enclosures, i.e. the IP system. See Annex 51C.
512.2.3 Where two or more external influences exist concurrently, the respective protective measures shall be
compatible with each other.
512.2.4 Equipment shall be selected with respect to external influences not only for its proper functioning, but also
to ensure the reliability of the measures of protection for safety in accordance with Part 4 of these Rules. Measures of
protection afforded by the construction of equipment are valid only for the given conditions of external influence if
the corresponding equipment specification tests are made in these conditions of external influence.
513 ACCESSIBILITY
513.1 General
Electrical equipment, including wiring, shall be arranged so as to facilitate operation, erection, inspection and
maintenance, and access to its connections. Such facilities shall not be significantly impaired as a result of mounting
equipment in enclosures or compartments.
In commercial, industrial and similar installations where distribution boards (switchgear assemblies) are installed
artificial lighting shall be provided to give an adequate degree of illumination to ensure that persons can work safely
during the operation or maintenance of the electrical equipment. See also Section 539.
73
514 IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING

514.1 General
Labels or other suitable means of identification shall be provided to indicate the purpose of switchgear and control gear,
except where there is no possibility of confusion. Where the functioning of switchgear or control gear cannot be
observed by the operator and this might cause a danger, suitable indicators complying with I.S. EN 60073 and I.S. EN
60447 shall be provided in a position visible to the operator.
Note: See I.S EN 60073: “Man-machine interface for general guidance”, and I.S. EN 60446: Basic safety principles for man-machine interface,
marking and identification of conductors by colours or numerals.
Wiring shall be so arranged or marked that it can be identified for inspection, testing, repairs or alteration to the
installation.
514.3 Identification of conductors

514.3.1 General
The identification of conductors shall be in accordance with I.S EN 60446: “Basic and safety Principles for man-
machine interface, marking and identification - identification of conductors by colours or numerals”, except where
stated otherwise below in this clause. This sub-clause does not apply to cables used solely for control circuits
The identification of conductors in multi-core cables for a.c. circuits shall comply with 514.3.6.
The identification of single-core cables and insulated wires for a.c. circuits shall comply with 514.3.7.
The identification of conductors for d.c. circuits shall comply with 514.3.8.
514.3.2 Neutral or mid-point conductor
A neutral or mid-point conductor shall be identified by the colour blue throughout its length.
Note 1: Supplementary colour marking may not be applied to a blue core or conductor except in the case of a PEN conductor in accordance with
514.3.4.
Note 2: Cores of cables having six or more cores and cores of mineral-insulated cables are not subject to this requirement – see 514.3.6.
Note 3: The colour blue may be used only for a neutral or mid-point conductor – see 514.3.6 (b) and 514.3.7 d) below.
514.3.3 Protective conductor
Except where 514.3.9 applies, protective conductors shall be identified by the bi-colour combination green-and-yellow.
This colour combination shall not be used for any other purpose.
514.3.4 PEN conductor
A PEN conductor shall, where insulated, be identified by the colour blue throughout its length with, in addition, green-
and-yellow markings at its terminations, or, where this is impracticable, by the bi-colour green-and-yellow throughout
its length with, in addition, blue markings at its terminations.
514.3.5 Other conductors
Other conductors shall be identified by colours or numerals in accordance with 514.3.6 or 514.3.7 for a.c. circuits and
514.3.8 for d.c. circuits.
514.3.6 Identification of conductors in multi-core cables for a.c. circuits
Multi-core fixed cables, flexible cables and cords having from two-to- five conductors used for a.c. circuits shall
comply with the following:
a) Line/phase conductors shall be identified throughout their length by the colours brown, black or grey.
b) A conductor identified by the colour blue shall be used only as a neutral or mid- point conductor.
[SNC]
Notwithstanding this requirement, in SWA cables not having a protective conductor identified by the bi-colour
green/yellow throughout its length, a conductor identified by the colour blue may be used as a protective
conductor provided that its terminations have supplementary colour marking of green/yellow applied in
accordance with 514.3.10.
c) A conductor identified by the bi-colour green-and-yellow shall be used only as a protective conductor
74
Where more than one conductor in a multi-core cable is supplied from the same phase, each core shall be identified
by the relevant phase colour, using supplementary colour marking at the terminals where necessary.
Conductors in cables having six or more conductors shall be identified by colours, or by numerals in accordance with
I.S.EN 60446. Conductors identified by numerals and used as neutral or protective conductors shall have blue or
green-and-yellow markings respectively at their terminations.
Identification by colour is not required for cables having insulation materials that cannot be identified by colour, e.g.
mineral-insulated cable.
In such cables, neutral and protective conductors shall be marked at their terminations by the colours blue and the bi-
colour green-and-yellow respectively.
TABLE 51A: COLOUR CODE FOR MULTI-CORE CABLES AND CORDS FOR A.C. CIRCUITS
Function Identifying colour

Earthing, protective, bonding Green-and-yellow
First phase Brown
Second phase Black
Third phase Grey
Neutral Blue
Mid-point c.p.e. Blue
PEN conductor Blue, with green-and-yellow at the

terminations
514.3.7 Identification of sheathed single-core cables and insulated conductors for a.c. circuits
Sheathed single-core cables and insulated conductors shall comply with the following:
a) Line/phase conductors shall be identified throughout their length by the colours brown, black or grey.
In multi-phase installations, line/phase conductors shall be distinguished from one another by the colours brown, black
and grey corresponding to the respective phases, in accordance with Table 51A. [SNC].
Notwithstanding this requirement, the use of one of those colours for all line/phase conductors in a circuit is permitted
only for conductors having a cross-sectional area exceeding 120 mm2 copper. [SNC].
The colours green or yellow shall not be used.
b) In single-phase circuits, the line/phase conductor shall be brown. Notwithstanding this requirement, where single-
phase circuits are supplied directly from a three-phase distribution board, the appropriate phase colours may be
extended into the single-phase circuits supplied from that phase. [SNC]
Note: This would normally apply only in a large industrial or commercial installation.
c) The colour blue shall be used only for a neutral or mid-point conductor. Notwithstanding this requirement, sheathed
single-core cables and insulated conductors not having blue insulation are permitted where they have a cross-sectional
area exceeding 120 mm2 copper. In such cases, neutral and mid-point conductors shall be marked at their terminations
by the colour blue in accordance with 514.3.10.
Note: The use of green-and yellow insulated conductors is not permitted in this case, see 514.3.3.
514.3.8 Identification of conductors in d.c circuits
In d.c. circuits, conductors shall be identified by the following colours:
75
a) With the negative pole earthed:

Positive: Brown
Negative: Blue (PEL)
b) With the positive pole earthed:

Positive: Blue (PEL)
Negative: Grey
c) With neither pole earthed:

Positive: Brown
Negative: Grey
Mid-point: Blue (which may be earthed PEM).
Note: See Part 2 and Part 3, sub-clause 312.2.4 for the terms PEL and PEM. PEL: earthed d.c. conductor + or - . PEM: mid-point d.c. conductor.
514.3.9 Omission of identification

For cables where identification of a conductor is not practicable, but where its function is evident, identification by
colour is not required, e.g. in the following cases:
- concentric conductor of cables,

- metal sheath or armour used as a protective conductor,
- bare conductors where a permanent indication is not possible due to external influences e.g. atmospheric pollution,
- bare overhead conductors.
514.3.10 Supplementary colour marking
Supplementary colour marking at conductor terminations, shall consist of sleeving or tape complying with I.S EN
60454: Pressure-sensitive adhesive tapes for electrical purposes, or other equivalent standard. The sleeving or tape shall
cover the insulation for a minimum length as close as possible to the terminal connections as follows:
Conductor size S Length of core sleeving
S ≤ 6 mm2 25 mm
6 < S ≤ 16 mm2 50 mm
S > 16 mm2 150 mm
Supplementary colour marking may be applied only where it complies with 514.3.6.
514.4 Protective devices
Protective devices shall be arranged and identified so that the circuits protected may be easily recognized; where
practicable they shall be grouped in distribution boards.
514.5 Diagrams
514.5.1 Records of the installation such as test-record sheets, diagrams, charts and tables where appropriate shall be
provided, indicating in particular:
- types of wiring,
- points served,
- size of conductors,
- rating of protective device,
- information necessary for the identification of devices performing the functions of protection,
- isolating and switching and their locations.
514.5.2 The symbols used shall be chosen from a suitable standard
Note: A selection of graphical symbols is given in Annex 51B.
76
515 PREVENTION OF MUTUAL DETRIMENTAL INFLUENCES
515.1 Electrical and non-electrical installations
515.1.1 Equipment shall be so selected and erected as to avoid any harmful influences between the electrical
installation and non-electrical installations.
515.1.2 Equipment not provided with a back-plate shall not be mounted on a building- surface unless the following
requirements are satisfied:
- a voltage transfer to the building surface is prevented, and

- fire segregation is provided between the equipment and a combustible building surface.
If the building surface is of metal, it shall be bonded to the protective conductor or to an equipotential bonding
conductor in accordance with Chapter 54.
If the building surface is combustible, the equipment shall be separated from it by a suitable intermediate layer of
insulating material having a flammability rating of FH1 according to I.S. EN 60707.
Note: For the purpose of this clause, the following are examples of suitable materials:
- plaster board with the appropriate fire-rating,

- hardwood such as beech, oak, teak, elm and mahogany,
- phenolic resin-bonded paper laminated sheets for electrical applications having a thickness of at least 0.75 mm, or
other lamination having at least the same degree of resistance to fire.
515.2 Electrical equipment for different types of voltage or current
Where electrical equipment carrying currents of different types or at different voltages is grouped in a common
assembly, all the equipment belonging to any one type of current or voltage shall be effectively segregated wherever
necessary to avoid mutual detrimental influences.
515.3 Electromagnetic compatibility: immunity and emission levels
515.3.1 The immunity levels of equipment shall take into account the electromagnetic influences that can occur when
it is connected and erected for normal use, and the intended level of continuity of service necessary for the application.
Note: See Annex 51D
515.3.2 Equipment shall be chosen with sufficiently low emission levels so that it cannot cause electromagnetic
interference by electrical conduction or propagation in the air with other equipment inside or outside the building. If
necessary, measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of the emission. This is achieved by compliance with the
I.S.EN 61000 series.
Annex 51A: Statutory regulations concerning electrical equipment

Annex 51B: Recommended graphical symbols
Annex 51C: IP Classification system for enclosures
Annex 51D: Classification system for external influences
Annex 51E: The identification of cores in multi-core cable
77
Chapter 52: Wiring systems
CONTENTS
520
SCOPE AND GENERAL
521 TYPES OF WIRING SYSTEMS
522 SELECTION AND ERECTION IN RELATION TO EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
523 CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITIES OF CONDUCTORS
524 CROSS-SECTIONAL AREAS OF CONDUCTORS
525 VOLTAGE DROP IN CONSUMERS’ INSTALLATIONS

526 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
527 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS TO MINIMIZE THE SPREAD OF FIRE
528 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DETRIMENTAL EFFECTS FROM ADJACENT SERVICES
529 SELECTION AND ERECTION TO TAKE ACCOUNT OF MAINTENANCE INCLUDING CLEANING
ANNEXES FOR CHAPTER 52
520 SCOPE AND GENERAL
520.1 Scope
This chapter deals with the selection and erection of wiring systems, including power-track systems.
520.2 General
In the selection and erection of wiring systems consideration shall be given to the application of the fundamental
principles of Part 1:
- to cables and conductors,

- to their termination and/or jointing,
- to their associated supports or suspensions, and
- to their enclosures or methods of protection against external influences.
In particular, wiring systems and associated equipment shall be selected and erected so that the installation complies
with the appropriate measures specified in Part 4 of these Rules.
520.3 Areas of particular fire risk or hazard
In areas where there is a particular fire risk or hazard, wiring systems shall also comply with Chapter 42, sub-clause
422.2.2.
521 TYPES OF WIRING SYSTEMS
521.1 Wiring systems shall comply with Table 52A, excluding busbar systems covered by 521.4, taking into account
all external influences to be expected. Other methods are admissible provided they fulfil the requirements of this
Chapter. Account shall be taken of external influences according to 522.
Note: See Annex 52D for information.
78
521.2 Cables with aluminium conductors shall not be used in domestic or similar installations.
521.3 Reserved
521.4 Busbar trunking systems

Busbar trunking systems shall comply with I.S EN 60439-2.

Powertrack systems shall comply with I.S.EN 61534-1.
Such systems shall be installed in accordance with the relevant requirements of this Chapter and with the
manufacturer’s instructions, taking account of external influences.
521.5 A.c circuits – electromagnetic effects
521.5.1 Cables entering a ferromagnetic enclosure shall be arranged such that the conductors are not
individually surrounded by ferromagnetic material.
521.5.2 Single-core cable armoured with steel wire or tape shall not be used for a.c. circuits. Conductors of a.c.
circuits installed in a ferromagnetic enclosure shall be arranged so that the conductors of all phases and the neutral
conductor, if any, and the associated protective conductor of each circuit, are contained in the same enclosure.
Note: The steel wire or tape armouring of a single-core cable is regarded as a ferromagnetic enclosure. Armouring of non-magnetic material is
permissible.
521.6 Conduit systems, ducting and trunking systems, cable-tray and ladder systems
521.6.1 Conduit systems shall comply with I.S. EN 50086 or equivalent national standard.
521.6.2 Trunking systems shall comply with I.S. EN 50085-1 or equivalent national standard.
521.6.3 Several circuits in the same conduit, ducting or trunking system are admissible provided all conductors are
insulated for the highest nominal voltage present.
521.6.4 The capacity of a conduit or trunking system shall not exceed the values permitted by Annex 52A.
521.6.5 Cable-ladder and cable-tray systems shall comply with I.S. EN 61537.
521.7 Multi-core cables
Several circuits are allowed in the same cable provided all conductors are insulated for the highest voltage present.
Note 1: Attention should be given to the need for care in the design and installation of more than one circuit in a cable.
Note 2: See also Chapter 41 - 414 concerning SELV circuits.
521.8 Circuit arrangements
521.8.1 Conductors of a circuit shall not be distributed over different multi-core cables, conduits, cable ducting
systems or cable trunking systems. This is not required where a number of multi-core cables, forming one circuit, are
installed in parallel. When multi-core cables are installed in parallel, each cable shall contain one conductor of each
phase. Single- core sheathed cables and non-sheathed insulated conductors of a circuit, including the protective
conductor, shall follow the same route.
521.8.2 The use of a common neutral conductor for more than one main circuit is not permitted except as follows:
Single-phase a.c. circuits may be formed from one phase/line conductor and the neutral conductor of one multi-phase
a.c. circuit, i.e. using the one neutral conductor, provided the arrangement of the circuits remains recognizable. This
multi-phase circuit shall be switched by means of an isolating device complying with 537.2.2, which disconnects all
live conductors.
Note: For the allocation of a common protective conductor for several circuits see 543.1.4.
521.8.3 Where several circuits are terminated in a single junction box, the terminals for each circuit shall be separated
by insulating partitions except for modular connecting devices complying with IEC 60998 or IEC 60999, or terminal
blocks complying with I.S. EN 60947-7.
79
Where there is a difference in voltage of 400V between conductors, a notice shall be affixed stating “400V present”
or similar wording.
Note: See also 411, 526.5 and 528.1

TABLE 52A : SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
TYPE OF WIRING PERMISSIBLE METHODS OF INSTALLATION
Non-sheathed insulated conductors In conduit, ducting or trunking only
Sheathed cable without metal screen or 1. On horizontal surfaces with or without fixings
armouring e.g. PVC/PVC, NYM
2. Fixed directly to a surface or in conduit or trunking
3. Embedded in solid walls or in hollow walls or partitions

and protected by metal conduit.
4. Embedded in solid walls as follows:
a) within 150 mm of room edges or in a horizontal or

vertical run going directly to a point or accessory, and
b) protected by PVC conduit or by a suitable sheath

against harmful substances in concrete or plaster, and
c) not less than 50 mm from the reverse side of the wall
5. Installed in hollow walls or partitions:
As 4. above, except that protection by conduit against chemical

attack is not needed where wiring is not in contact with e.g.
expanded polystyrene thermal insulation.
6. In building voids, cavity walls and under flooring
7. On brackets, cable tray or ladder
8. On catenary wire supports
9. Enclosed in a pipe or duct buried in the ground
Cables with metal sheath or armouring e.g. 1. Any situation where cables without metal sheath or armouring
NYCY, armoured cable (SWA) are permissible, but not normally in conduit or trunking.
2. Embedded in solid walls; in hollow walls/partitions
3. Buried directly in the soil
Mineral-insulated cable 1. Fixed directly to the surface
2. Embedded in solid walls, in cavity walls, or in voids
3. Supported by brackets, trays ,or ladders
1. 24V SELV
Bare conductors 2. On rigid insulators in busbar trunking
3. Overhead conductors
Note: See Annex 52D for details of standard cables and the relevant CENELEC codes.
80
521.9 Use of flexible cables or cords
521.9.1 Flexible cables may be used for fixed wiring provided they meet the requirements of this chapter.
521.9.2 Equipment intended to be moved in use shall be connected by flexible cables or cords, except equipment
supplied by contact rails.
521.9.3 Stationary equipment that may be moved temporarily for the purpose of connecting, cleaning etc. e.g. cookers
or flush-mounting units for installations in false floors shall be connected only by flexible cables or cords.
521.9.4 Flexible insulated- conductors for such equipment shall be protected by flexible conduit.
521.10 Non-sheathed insulated conductors
Non-sheathed insulated conductors shall be enclosed in conduit, trunking or ducting. This requirement does not apply
to protective conductors complying with 543.
Note: Non-sheathed insulated conductors are distinct from sheathed single-core cables which are not covered by this clause.
522 SELECTION AND ERECTION IN RELATION TO EXTERNAL INFLUENCES

522.0 General
Wiring systems shall be adequately protected, either by construction or by supplementary measures, against excessive
temperatures, moisture, ingress of solid foreign bodies, corrosive or polluting substances, impact, vibration and other
mechanical stresses. The installation method selected shall be such that protection against the expected external
influences is ensured in all appropriate parts of the wiring system. Particular care shall be taken at changes of direction
and where wiring enters equipment. Where wiring passes through partitions it shall be protected against mechanical
damage. Wiring in areas of fire-risk shall also comply with 422.2.2.
Note: The letters in brackets are a classification explained in Annex 51D
522.1 Ambient temperature (AA)
522.1.1 Wiring systems shall be suitable for the highest and lowest ambient temperatures. It shall be ensured that
the limiting temperatures in normal operation indicated in Table 52C and the limiting temperatures in case of a fault
indicated in Table 43A of Chapter 43 will not be exceeded.
522.1.2 Wiring system components including cable and wiring accessories shall be handled and installed only at
temperatures within the limits stated in the relevant product specification or as stated by the manufacturers.
522.1.3 Where cables having different temperature limits are installed in the same enclosure, the temperature limit
for the cables shall be that of the cable having the lowest temperature limit.
522.2 External heat sources (AA)
522.2.1 In order to avoid harmful effects of heat from external sources one or more of the following methods or an
equally effective measure shall be used to protect wiring systems:
- thermal shielding material,

- placing sufficiently far from the source of heat,
- selecting a system suitable for the additional temperature rise that may occur,
- local reinforcement or substitution of the insulating material e.g. by heat- resisting sleeving.
Note 1: Heat from external sources may be radiated, convected or conducted e.g.
- from heating apparatus

- from hot-water systems
- from plant, appliances and luminaires
- through heat-conducting materials
- from solar radiation or solar gain either directly or indirectly
- from manufacturing processes.
Note 2: Cable insulation types suitable for high temperatures include butyl rubber, silicone rubber, glass- fibre, mineral.
81
522.3 Presence of water (AD) or high humidity (AB)
522.3.1 Wiring systems shall be selected and erected so that no harmful effects are caused by the ingress of water
or condensation. The completed wiring system shall provide a degree of ingress-protection appropriate to the particular
location.
Note 1: Tracking of current across insulation is an example of a harmful effect.

Note 2: In general, the sheaths and insulation of cables for fixed installations may be regarded, when intact, as proof against penetration by moisture.
Special considerations apply to cables liable to frequent splashing, immersion or submersion.
Note 3: The risk of corrosion due to moisture is dealt with in 522.5.
522.3.2 Where water may collect or condensation may form in wiring systems, provision shall be made for its escape,
e.g. by suitable drainage outlets.
522.3.3 Where wiring systems may be subjected to waves, protection against mechanical damage shall be afforded
by one or more of the methods of 522.6, 522.7 or 522.8.
522.4 Presence of solid foreign bodies including dust (AE)

522.4.1 Wiring systems shall be selected and erected so as to minimize the danger arising from the ingress of solid
foreign bodies. The completed wiring system shall provide a degree of protection appropriate to the particular location.
Note: All unused conduit and trunking entries should be closed off and all removable covers should be secured so as to complete the enclosure.
522.4.2 In a location where dusts or similar substances in significant quantity are present, additional precautions shall
be taken to prevent their accumulation in quantities that could adversely affect the heat dissipation from the wiring
system.
Note: A wiring system that facilitates the removal of dust may be necessary (see 529).
522.5 Presence of corrosive or polluting substances (AF)
522.5.1 Where the presence of corrosive or polluting substances, including water, is likely to cause corrosion or
deterioration, parts of the wiring system likely to be affected shall be suitably protected, or manufactured from a
material resistant to such substances.
Note: Suitable methods of supplementary protection for application during erection include protective tapes, paints or grease.
522.5.2 Dissimilar metals liable to initiate electrolytic action shall not be placed in contact with each other unless
special arrangements are made to avoid the consequences of such contact.
522.5.3 Materials liable to cause mutual or individual deterioration or hazardous degradation shall not be placed in
contact with each other.
522.5.4 Where harmful substances are present, wiring likely to be affected shall be suitably protected e.g. by
enclosure in conduit or trunking, or, alternatively, manufactured from materials resistant to such substances.
In particular, measures shall be taken to protect wiring from corrosive substances such as expanded polystyrene thermal
wall insulation, creosote and harmful substances in concrete or plaster.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent corrosion at conductor terminations.
Note 1: The installer should ensure that the correct material is selected for the installation. Information concerning the resistance of cables to
harmful substances should be obtained from the manufacturer or supplier.
Note 2: Protection against mechanical damage is also necessary – see 522.6 and 522.8.
Note 3: See also 526.
522.6 Impact (AG)

Note: This clause must be read in conjunction with 522.8.
522.6.1 Wiring systems shall be selected and erected so as to avoid damage arising from mechanical stress due to
impact, penetration or compression during installation, use and maintenance.
82
522.6.2 In fixed installations where impacts of medium severity (AG2) or high severity (AG3) can occur, protection
shall be afforded by one or more of the following:
- the mechanical characteristics of the wiring system,

- the location selected,
- the provision of additional local or general mechanical protection.
Note: Examples are areas where the floors likely to be penetrated and areas used by forklift trucks.
522.6.3 After the erection of the wiring system, it shall be verified that the mechanical protection provided for the
wiring system has not been impaired.
522.6.4 Wiring embedded in solid walls
Wiring embedded in solid walls or in unbattened dry-lined walls shall be protected by an earthed metal screen,
armouring, metal conduit or trunking, against damage by impact or penetration by drills or nails except where the
following two conditions apply:
a) The distance measured horizontally between the wiring and the reverse side of the wall is not less than 50 mm.
b) The wiring is installed:
- in a straight vertical or horizontal run going directly to a point, accessory or switchgear mounted on a wall, or
- within a vertical distance of 150 mm from a ceiling, or
- within a horizontal distance of 150 mm from a corner formed by two adjoining walls.
Note: Embedded wiring must also be protected against harmful substances present in plaster or concrete – see 522.5.3
522.6.5 Wiring concealed in hollow walls or partitions
Wiring concealed in hollow walls and partitions shall be protected by an earthed metal screen, armouring, metal
conduit or trunking, against damage by penetration or impact by nails or drills except where the following two
conditions apply:
a) The distance measured horizontally between the wiring and the reverse surface of the wall is not less than 50mm.
b) The wiring is installed:
- in a straight vertical or horizontal run going directly to a point, accessory or switchgear mounted on a wall or partition,
or
- within a vertical distance of 150 mm from a ceiling, or
- within a horizontal distance of 150 mm from a corner formed by two adjoining walls.
522.6.6 Wiring in building voids and cavity walls
Wiring in building voids and cavity walls does not require additional mechanical protection provided it is free to
move.
Note 1: Wiring traversing or concealed in metal stud partitions must comply with 522.8.14.
Note 2: Unarmoured and unscreened cables must also be protected e.g. by conduit against contact with e.g. expanded polystyrene thermal insulating
materials – see 522.5.4.
522.6.7 Wiring embedded in or below floors
522.6.7.1 Wiring systems embedded in floors shall be protected by earthed metal screen, armouring or conduit
except where it is unlikely to suffer damage by impact or penetration. The foreseeable use of the floor shall be taken
into account.
522.6.7.2 In industrial and commercial premises, cables emerging from the floor shall be provided with
supplementary mechanical protection within a vertical distance of 1.25 m from the floor.
Note: This is intended to protect the cable from impact by vehicles and mobile machinery
83
522.6.7.3 During the supplementary

Note: This period of construction, cablesis installed
mechanical protection inany
in addition to pre-cast concrete
armouring floors shall be provided with
or conduit.
supplementary mechanical protection before further work or activity such as pouring of concrete is carried out.
During the period of construction, a cable emerging from the floor, and not fixed, shall be protected
against impact
Note: This supplementary by suitable
mechanical protectionmeans such to
is in addition asany
flexible conduit.
armouring or conduit.
During the period of construction, a cable emerging from the floor, and not fixed, shall be protected against impact
by suitable means such as flexible conduit.
522.6.7.4 Cables
Cables buried
placed in the
under ground
flooring shall be provided with suitable mechanical protection or placed in such a
position that they are not likely to be damaged.
Cables buried in the ground shall be protected, against impact and other mechanical damage, by:
522.6.8 Cables buried in the ground
- suitable mechanical protection, and
522.6.8.1 Cables buried in the ground shall be protected, against impact and other mechanical damage, by:
- installation at an adequate depth in the ground in accordance with Table 52B.
- suitable mechanical protection, and
Where there is a high risk of damage, or where future excavation or similar activity is likely,
- installation at an adequate
additional depth shall
measures in thebe
ground
taken,insuch
accordance
as : with Table 52B.
Where there is-asupplementary

high risk of damage, or where
mechanical future excavation
protection consisting or
of similar activityslabs
tiles, concrete is likely, additional
or metal measures shall
covers,
be taken, such as:
- installation at a depth greater than that specified above.
- supplementary mechanical protection consisting of tiles, concrete slabs or metal covers,
approximately 300 mm
- installation at a depth below
vertically greaterthe
than that specified
completed above.
surface, or at half the buried depth, whichever is the lesser.
522.6.8.2 Suitable indication shall be provided above a buried cable at a distance of approximately 300 mm vertically
below the completed surface, or at half the buried depth, whichever is the lesser.
522.6.8.3 Where cables buried in the ground are enclosed in ducting of other thandeflection
degree
concrete material, this ducting
in accordance with shall
be coloured red and shall have a high resistance to impact. For ducts or pipes of material other than concrete, e.g.
polythene, the minimum degree of resistance to impact shall be a 750 N load rating for 5 per cent deflection in
accordance with I.S.EN 50086-2-4.
TABLE 52B : MINIMUM DEPTH M
TABLE 52B: MINIMUM DEPTH MM OF CABLES BURIED IN THE GROUND
Location SWA or NYCY cable laid Non-armoured cable in a SWA or NYCY cable in
directly in the soil pipe in the soil (1) (2) high-impact resistant
pipe in the soil (1)
Agricultural 600 600 600

Industrial and 450 450 250
commercial
Domestic gardens, 450 300 250

paths, drives
Urban pathways 450 300 250
Vehicular traffic- 750 750 750

bearing areas
Grass 600 600 600

margins(roadside) and
footpaths
(1) Acceptable types of piping are : High Density polythene pipe to IS 135 Class B, PVC
(1) Acceptable types of piping are: High Density polythene pipe to IS 135 Class B, PVC pipes having a high impact-resistance, and
pipes having a high impact-resistance, and concrete pipe. Thin-wall PVC pipe is not acceptable.
concrete pipe. Thin-wall PVC pipe is not acceptable.
(2) Concrete(2)
pipes shouldpipes
Concrete be spigotted.
should be spigotted.
522.6.8.4 Cable runs shall be marked on plans, and where appropriate, on site.
522.6.9 Wiring in ducts
Wiring in ducts shall consist of cables having suitable sheaths, and where necessary, additional mechanical protection.
84
522.6.10 Overhead conductors
Overhead conductors shall have a vertical clearance from the ground of at least 5.5 m.
Note: Greater clearances may be required for thoroughfares such as roads, railways and waterways.
522.7 Vibration (AH)

522.7.1 Wiring systems supported by, or fixed to, equipment or structures subject to vibration of medium severity
(AH2) or high severity (AH3) shall be suitable for such conditions, particularly where connections are concerned.
Note: Special attention should be paid to connections to vibrating equipment. Local measures may be adopted such as flexible wiring systems
522.7.2 Suspended current-using equipment, e.g. luminaires, shall be connected to the fixed installation by flexible
cable.
522.8 Other mechanical stresses (AJ)

Note: These stresses include those in the wiring system itself and those not included in 522.6.
522.8.1 Wiring systems shall be selected and erected so as to avoid, during installation, use or maintenance, damage
to the sheath and insulation of cables and insulated conductors and their terminations.
522.8.2 When buried in the structure, conduits or cable ducting systems, other than pre- wired conduit specifically
designed for the installation, shall be completely erected between access points before any insulated conductor or
cable is drawn in.
522.8.3 The radius of every bend in a wiring system shall be such that conductors and cables do not suffer damage
and terminations of switchgear or control gear are not subjected to stress.
Note: See Annex 52B-1
522.8.4 Where the conductors or cables are not supported continuously due to the method of installation, they shall
be supported by suitable means at appropriate intervals in such a manner that the conductors or cables do not suffer
damage by excessive tensile stress e.g. due to their own weight.
Note 1: See Annex 52B-2

Note 2: Manufacturers’ instructions should be observed.
522.8.5 Wiring systems shall be installed so that excessive tensile stress on the conductors and connections is
avoided.
Where a permanent tensile stress is applied to the wiring system (e.g. by its own weight in vertical runs) a suitable type
of cable or conductor with appropriate cross-sectional area and method of mounting shall be selected and erected in
such a manner that the conductors or cables will not do not suffer damage due to their own weight.
522.8.6 Conduit and cable trunking systems shall have adequate means of access to facilitate the drawing in or out
of cables or insulated conductors.
522.8.7 Wiring systems embedded in floors shall be sufficiently protected to prevent damage that may be caused by
the intended use of the floor. Wiring systems embedded in floors where penetration and impact may occur shall comply
with 522.6.7.1.
Note: The installer is advised to consult the Technical Documents of the Building Regulations.
522.8.8 In attic spaces care shall be taken to lay wiring in an orderly manner and in such a way as to minimize the
risk of damage to wiring.
Note: Protection against degradation of the cable by expanded polystyrene must be provided – see 522.5.4.
522.8.9 Reserved.
522.8.10 Cables buried in the ground shall comply with 522.6.8.
522.8.11 Cable supports, entries and enclosures including conduit and trunking, shall not present sharp or rough
edges that might damage wiring.
85
522.8.12 Care shall be taken to avoid damage to cables by the fixing means.
522.8.13 Cables and other electrical conductors that pass across expansion joints shall be so selected and erected that
the anticipated movement does not cause any damage to electrical equipment. This may be achieved by the use of a
flexible wiring system.
522.8.14 Openings in metal stud partitions and other building elements traversed by wiring shall be fitted with
suitable conduit, sheaths, grommets or bushings that prevent damage to the wiring.
Note: Metal partitions concealing or traversed by wiring are deemed to be extraneous conductive parts which must be bonded to the nearest
protective conductor in accordance with 544.2.
522.8.15 No wiring system shall penetrate an element of building construction which is intended to be load -bearing
unless the integrity of the load-bearing element can be assured after such penetration.
522.8.16 Supports for catenary- wire systems shall:

- provide uniform support,
- be made of galvanized steel or other material equally resistant to corrosion,
- be securely fixed, and
- be capable of withstanding mechanical stresses likely to occur, in particular those due to wind or ice.
Note: A support wire may form part of a cable, in which case it should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
522.9 Presence of flora and/or mould growth (AK)
Where flora or mould growth could constitute a hazard the wiring system shall be selected accordingly or special
protective measures shall be adopted.
Note 1: An installation method that facilitates the removal of such growths may be necessary (see 529).
Note 2: Possible preventive measures are closed types of installation (conduit or trunking), maintaining distances to plants, and regular cleaning
of the relevant wiring system.
522.10 Presence of fauna (AL)
Where the presence of fauna (including vermin and insects) could constitute a hazard, the wiring system shall be
selected accordingly or special protective measures shall be adopted, e.g.:
- suitable wiring systems having the necessary mechanical characteristics,
- selection of the location,
- the provision of additional local or general mechanical protection,
- any combination of the above measures.
522.11 Solar radiation and ultra-violet radiation (AN)
Where exposed to sunlight, a wiring system suitable for the conditions shall be selected, or adequate shielding shall
be provided. Where significant solar radiation or ultra-violet radiation is experienced or expected, a wiring system
suitable for the conditions shall be installed, or alternatively, adequate shielding shall be provided. Where ionizing
radiation may be present, special precautions may need to be taken.
Note: See also 522.2.1 which deals with ambient temperature - rise.
522.12 Seismic effects (AP)
522.12.1 The wiring system shall be selected and erected with due regard to the seismic hazards of the location of
the installation.
86
522.12.2 Where seismic hazards exist, particular attention shall be paid to the following:
- the fixing of wiring systems to the building structure,
- the flexibility of connections between the fixed wiring and all items of essential equipment, e.g. safety services.
Note: This requires co-ordination with the building design.
522.13 Wind (AR)
See 522.7 “Vibration”, and 522.8.
522.14 Nature of processed materials (BE)
See 422 and 527.
522.15 Building design and structural movement

522.15.1 Where hazards due to structural movement exist, wiring systems affected shall be capable of permitting
relative movement so that conductors and cables are not subjected to excessive mechanical stress.
Note: An expansion joint in a building is an example.
522.15.2 For flexible structures or structures subject to movement, flexible wiring systems shall be used.
Note: See 522.7 and 522.8.
523 CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITIES OF CONDUCTORS
523.0 Introduction
The Rules in this section are intended to ensure a satisfactory operating life for cables and insulated conductors, having
regard to the ambient and the conductor temperatures.
This section applies to the following types of conductors:
- insulated conductors and unarmoured cables,

- armoured cables,
- cables with metal screen or sheath,
- flexible cables,
- mineral-insulated cables with copper sheath
Other considerations affecting the size of conductor are dealt with elsewhere in these Rules, for example fault- loop
impedance, protection against overcurrents, voltage drop, motor starting currents and limiting temperatures for
terminals or equipment to which conductors are connected.
523.1 General
The maximum operating temperature of an insulated conductor, or the copper sheath of a mineral-insulated cable shall
not exceed the value specified in Table 52C for a sustained period during normal operation. The appropriate value of
current shall be:
- selected in accordance with 523.2, or
- determined in accordance with 523.3.
87
- selected in accordance with 523.2, or
- determined in accordance with 523.3.
TABLE 52C: MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE TEMPERATURES FOR TYPES OF INSULATION

MAXIMUM STEADY-STATE TEMPERATURES FOR TYPES OF INSULATION
Type of insulation Temperature limit

Thermo-plastic (PVC) At conductor: 70oC
Thermosetting (XLPE) and At conductor: 90oC

Ethylene propylene compound (EPR)
Mineral with copper sheath (PVC covered) or bare, exposed At sheath: 70oC
to touch
Mineral with copper sheath bare not exposed to touch and At sheath: 105oC
not in contact with flammable material
Note 1: Where a conductor is operated at a temperature exceeding 70ºC the equipment connected to the conductor must
N be suitableafor the resulting
conductor temperature
is operated at the connection.
at a temperature exceeding 70o
connected to the conductor must be suitable for the resulting temperature at the
Note 2: For certain types of cable e.g. mineral-insulated, higher operating temperatures may be permissible depending
connection.
on the temperature rating of the cable, its terminations, the environmental conditions, and other external
influences.
Note 2: For certain types of cable e.g. mineral-insulated, higher operating temperatures may be
permissible depending on the temperature rating of the cable, its terminations, the
523.2 Determining the current-carrying capacities of cables

environmental conditions, and other external influences.
The requirement of 523.1 is deemed to be satisfied if the current for insulated conductors and cables does not exceed
the value Determining
selected fromtheAnnex 52C subject to
current-carrying any applicable
capacities correction factors. Account shall be taken of the
of cables
characteristics of the load, and for buried cables, the effective thermal resistance of the soil.
Note: The current-carrying capacities in Annex 52C are provided for guidance. It is recognised that there will be some variation in the current-
carrying capacities depending on the actual environmental conditions and the precise construction of the cables.
523.3 Alternative methods for determining current-carrying capacities of cables

thermal resistance of the soil.
N The current-carrying capacities in Annex 52C are provided for guidance. It is

The appropriaterecognised
value ofthat there will be somecapacity
current-carrying variation inmay
the current-carrying capacities
also be determined by any of the following methods:
depending on the actual environmental conditions and the precise construction of the cables.
- according to IEC 60287,

Alternative methods for determining current-carrying capacities of cables
- a suitable test,
- calculation, using a suitable
The appropriate valuemethod, provided thecapacity
of current-carrying method may
is stated.
also be determined by any of the following
methods::
Account shall be taken of the characteristics of the load, and for buried cables, the effective thermal resistance of the
- according
soil. Account to IEC
shall also 60287,
be taken of information provided by the cable manufacturer.
Note: The methods specified above should be used only by a person having the necessary competence and experience
523.4 Ambient temperature
523.4.1 The ambient temperature is deemed to be the temperature of the surrounding medium when the cable(s) or
insulated conductor(s) under consideration are not loaded.
523.4.2 Where the value of current-carrying capacity is selected in accordance with Annex 52C, the reference
ambient temperatures to be assumed are as follows:
- for insulated conductors and cables in air, for all methods of installation: 30ºC,
- for cables buried directly in the soil or in ducts in the ground: 20ºC.
523.4.3 Where the Annexes for this section are used, and the ambient temperature in the intended location of the
insulated conductors or cables differs from the reference ambient temperature, the appropriate temperature correction
factor from Annex 52C, Table A52-G1 or A52-G2, shall be applied.
88
523.4.4 Where insulated conductors or cables are subject to solar or other infra-red radiation, the current-carrying
capacity shall be derived by a suitable method, e.g. as specified in IEC 60287.
Note: The ambient temperature- correction factors in Annex 52C do not take account of increases due to solar or other infra-red radiation see
522.11.
523.4.5 Soil thermal conductivity

The current-carrying capacities in Annex 52C for cables in the ground are based on a soil thermal conductivity of 0.4
W/K.m, and the appropriate correction factor in Table A52-G2 shall be applied where the soil conductivity differs from
that value.
Note 1: The current-carrying capacities in Annex 52C reference method D for buried cables apply only to cable runs in and around buildings.
Note 2: K (Kelvin) is the absolute ambient temperature, m is metres, W is watts.
523.5 Groups containing more than one circuit
523.5.1 For the purposes of this section, a single circuit is deemed to comprise the following loaded conductors, either
separate or in the one cable:
- two conductors of a single-phase circuit,

- three conductors of a three-phase circuit.
A three-phase circuit with unbalanced loading in a four-core cable is deemed to be a single circuit except where 523.6.2
applies, in which case it shall be deemed to be two circuits.
523.5.2 The group reduction factors in Annex 52C Table A52-G1 are applicable to groups of insulated conductors
or cables having the same maximum operating temperature.
For groups containing insulated conductors or cables having different maximum operating temperatures the current-
carrying capacity of all the insulated conductors or cables in the group shall be based on the lowest operating
temperature of any cable in the group together with the appropriate group reduction factor.
If, due to known operating conditions, a cable or insulated conductor is expected to carry a current not greater than
30% of this grouped rating, it may be ignored for the purpose of obtaining the reduction factor for the rest of the
group.
523. 6 Conductors to be considered as carrying current
523.6.1 Only those conductors that carry current in normal operation need be taken into account. PEN conductors
shall be considered as neutral conductors. Where conductors in polyphase circuits are expected to carry balanced
currents, the associated neutral conductor need not be taken into consideration.
Note: Under these conditions, a four- or five -core cable will have the same current-carrying capacity as a three-core cable having conductors
of the same size. This does not apply where third harmonics or multiples thereof are present.
523.6.2 Where the neutral conductor in a multi-core cable carries current as a result of an unbalance in the phase/line
currents, it is deemed that the temperature-rise due to the neutral current is counterbalanced by the reduction in heat
generated in the phase/line conductors. In such cases, the conductor size shall be selected on the basis of the highest
phase/line current. In all cases, it shall be ensured that the cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor affords
compliance with 523.1.
523.6.3 Where the neutral conductor carries current without a corresponding reduction in load of the phase
conductors, the neutral conductor shall be taken into account in ascertaining the rating of the circuit. If the harmonic
content is greater than fifteen per cent of the load current, the cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor shall not
be smaller than that of the phase conductors. The neutral conductors shall also comply with 524.4.
The corresponding reduction factors for thermal effects are given in Annex 52C.
Note: See also 524 for minimum cross-sectional areas of current-carrying conductors.
89
523.7 Conductors in parallel
Where two or more live conductors are connected in parallel in a system, they shall share the load current equally. This
shall be achieved by one of the following methods:
a) They shall be of the same material, have the same cross-sectional area, be effectively the same length, and have
no branch circuits along the length.
b) The design shall ensure that the current in each conductor complies with 523.1.
This sub-clause does not apply to ring final circuits with or without spur connections.
Where adequate current-sharing cannot be achieved or where there is a need for four or more conductors to be
connected in parallel, the use of busbar trunking shall be considered
Note 1: The arrangement of the conductors should keep to a minimum the reactance unbalance between them, for example by a trefoil arrangement
or the use of multi- core cable.
Note 2: Care should be taken so that conductor terminations have effectively equal conductivity.
523.8 Variation of installation conditions along a route
Where the cooling conditions and/or heat dissipation differ from one part of the route to another, the current-carrying
capacity shall be determined so as to be appropriate for the part of the route having the most adverse conditions.
The following are exempt from this requirement:
- parts of the route not exceeding 0.2 m in length, e.g. where it passes through a wall,
- parts of the route protected by conduit not exceeding 1m in length, in free air or mounted on a wall.
524 CROSS - SECTIONAL AREAS OF CONDUCTORS
524.1 The cross-sectional area of phase conductors in a.c. circuits and of live conductors in d.c. circuits shall be not
less than the values given in Table 52D below:
Note: This is for reasons of mechanical strength.
524.2 The cross-sectional area of a neutral conductor shall be equal to that of the phase conductor except in the case
of a polyphase circuit complying with 524.3.
Where the current in the neutral conductor can exceed the current in a phase conductor, e.g. in a polyphase power factor
control system, the cross-sectional area shall be determined accordingly in order to comply with 523.1.1
Note: Information should be sought from the manufacturer of the equipment.
524.3 For polyphase circuits where the phase conductor(s) have a cross-sectional area greater than 16 mm2 copper
or 25 mm2 aluminium, the neutral conductor may have a smaller cross-sectional area than that of the phase conductors
if the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled :
- the expected maximum current including harmonics, if any, in the neutral conductor in normal service is not greater
than the current-carrying capacity of the reduced cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor.
Note: The load carried by the circuit under normal conditions should be practically equally distributed between the phases.
- the neutral conductor is protected against overcurrents according to 431.2,
- the size of the neutral conductor is at least equal to 16 mm2 in copper or 25 mm2 in aluminium.
90
N The load carried by the circuit under normal conditions should be practically equally distributed between the phases.
- the neutral conductor is protected against overcurrents according to 431.2
- the size of the neutral conductor is at least equal to 16 mm2 25 mm2
TABLE52D:
TABLE 52D:MINIMUM
MINIMUMCROSS-SECTIONAL
CROSS-SECTIONALAREAS
AREASOF
OFCONDUCTORS
CONDUCTORS
Type of wiring system Use or purpose of the Conductor material Cross-

circuit sectional
area mm2
Fixed installations: Cables Power and lighting Copper 1.5

and insulated conductors circuits Aluminium 10
Signalling and control Copper 0.5

circuits
Electronic equipment Copper 0.1
Bare conductors Power circuits Copper 10

Aluminium 16
Signalling and control Copper 4

circuits
Flexible wiring Ceiling rose to Copper 0.5

lampholder
Other appliances etc. Copper 0.75
Multi-core flexible Copper 0.5

cables with 7 or more
cores
Note:
N See 715 for ELV lighting installations.
Conductors connecting the electricity meter to the customer’s main distribution board in installations with a supply
rating not exceeding 100A shall have a minimum cross-sectional area complying with Table 52E.
TABLE 52E: CROSS-SECTIONAL AREAS OF CONDUCTORS FROM METER
Rating of main fuse A Cross-sectional area of

conductor (copper) mm2
63 16
80 25
100 35
524.4 Cross-sectional
Cross-sectionalarea
areaofofaaneutral
neutralconductor
conductorcarrying
carryingharmonic
harmoniccurrents
currents
In the absence of precise information concerning currents, including harmonics, the following shall apply:
In the absence of precise information concerning currents, including harmonics, the following shall
524.4.1 apply:
The cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor, if any, shall be at least equal to that of the phases:
- in single-phase circuits witharea

The cross-sectional two of
conductors,
the neutral conductor, if any, shall be at least equal to that of the phases:
- in multi-phase circuits where

- in single-phase the cross-sectional
circuits area of phase conductors is not greater than 16mm2 copper or 25mm2
with two conductors;
aluminium,
- in multi-phase circuits where the cross-sectional area of phase conductors is not greater than 16 mm2
- in three-phase circuits likelyaluminium;
to carry third, and odd multiples of 3, harmonic currents where the harmonic level is
between 15% and 33%.
- in three-phase circuits likely to carry third, and odd multiples of 3, harmonic currents where the
Note: Such harmonic levels are likely in e.g. lighting circuits feeding fluorescent and discharge-type luminaires.
harmonic level is between 15% and 33%.
N circuits feeding fluorescent and discharge-type luminaires. 91
Where the third, and odd multiples of 3, harmonic current level is greater than 33%, the neutral
conductor cross-sectional area shall be determined as follows:
524.4.2 Where the third, and odd multiples of 3, harmonic current level is greater than 33%, the neutral conductor
cross-sectional area shall be determined as follows:
a) For multi-core cables, where the phase and neutral conductors are equal in size, the cross-sectional area of the
neutral conductor shall be chosen so that it can carry 1.45 times the design current IB of the circuit.
b) For single-core cables, the cross-sectional area of the phase conductors may be smaller than that of the neutral
conductor provided the neutral conductor can carry 1.45 times the design current IB of the circuit.
524.4.3 For multi-phase circuits where the cross-sectional area of the phase conductors is greater than 16mm2 copper
or 25 mm2 aluminium, the neutral conductor may have a smaller cross-sectional area than that of the phases provided
all the following conditions are fulfilled:
a) The load carried by the circuit in normal service is expected to be balanced equally between the phases.
b) Where the third, and odd multiples of 3, levels of harmonic currents in a phase conductor do not exceed 15%
c) The neutral conductor is protected against overcurrents in accordance with 431.2.
d) The cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor is not less than 16mm2 copper or 25mm2 aluminium.
Note: The reduced neutral conductor section should be not lower than 50% of the phase conductor section in this case.
525 VOLTAGE DROP IN CONSUMERS’ INSTALLATIONS
525.1 Under normal service conditions, the voltage at the terminals of any current-using equipment shall be not less
than the lower limit specified by the manufacturer.
Note: I.S. EN 50160 deals with supply- voltage characteristics.
525.2 The cross-sectional area of every current-carrying conductor shall be such that the drop in voltage between
the main supply point and any point in the installation is not more than the following when the conductors are carrying
full load current:
- 4% of nominal voltage in installations and parts of larger installations rated not greater than 80A, circuits at extra-
low voltage excepted,
- in other installations, a voltage appropriate to the safety and correct functioning of the associated equipment in
normal service.
Note: A greater voltage drop is admissible for motors during starting periods and for other equipment with high inrush-currents, provided it is
ensured that the voltage variations remain within the limits specified for the equipment.
525.3 The following temporary conditions are excluded from the requirements of this section:
- voltage transients,
- voltage variations due to abnormal operation.
526 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
This section applies to electrical connections such as:
- terminations of external wiring at equipment,

- joints in conductors,
- branch connections.
526.1 General
Connections between conductors and between conductors and equipment shall provide durable electrical continuity
and adequate mechanical strength, and protection against direct contact and external influences.
92
526.2 Connection methods
526.2.1 Methods of connection shall take account as appropriate of:
- the material of the conductor and its insulation,

- the number and shape of the wires forming the conductor,
- the cross-sectional area of the conductor,

- the number of conductors to be connected together.
Note 1: The use of soldered connections should be avoided in power wiring. Where used the connections should be designed to take account of
creep and mechanical stresses and temperature- rise under fault conditions. See also 522.6, 522.7 and 522.8.
Note 2: Connectors used to terminate aluminium conductors should have been tested and certified for the purpose.
Note 3: Terminals with the marking r (rigid), f (flexible), or s (solid) are suitable only for the connection of certain types of conductors.
526.2.2 Connections shall be so made that no loosening is likely as a result of vibration, deformation of materials,
or temperature variations to which the connections are likely to be subjected in normal service.
526.2.3 Wiring connections shall not be made inside trunking.

Note: Proprietary wiring systems forming part of a trunking design are exempt from this requirement.
526.3 Accessibility of connections
526.3.1 All connections shall be accessible for inspection, testing and maintenance except for the following:
- joints in cables buried in the ground,
- compound-filled or encapsulated joints,
- connections between a cold tail and the heating element as in ceiling- heating, floor- heating and trace-heating
systems,
- a joint forming part of the equipment complying with the appropriate standard.
526.3.2 Connections made in suitable boxes located under floorboards are deemed to be accessible.
Note: Where practicable, their locations should be indicated.
526.3.3 In the case of conduit systems, connections shall be enclosed in suitable inspection boxes forming part of
the conduit system.
Note: Inspection elbows or tees are not deemed suitable for enclosures for connections.
526.3.4 Connections that are not accessible shall be made by special means that prevent loosening, such as
brazing, welding, exothermal heating or crimping.
526.4 Temperature-rise
Where necessary, precautions shall be taken so that the temperature attained by connections in normal service does
not impair the effectiveness of the insulation of conductors connected to them or supporting them.
526.5 Conductor terminations in equipment
Note: See also 521.8.2
526.5.1 Connections of conductors to equipment shall be made in suitable enclosures that provide adequate
mechanical protection, e.g.
- connection boxes,
- outlet-boxes,
- equipment where the manufacturer has made provision for this purpose, such as fixed connection devices or facilities
for the installation of connection devices.
93
526.5.2 Adequate electrical conductance shall be provided between metal sheaths or armouring of cables and the
earthing terminals of equipment.
Note 1: This requires proper design or a proprietary method.
Note 2: For metal screens, the traditional method of twisting the screen to facilitate connection is permissible.
526.5.3 Cores of sheathed cables from which the sheath has been removed, and insulated conductors emerging from
conduit or trunking, shall be enclosed so as to have mechanical protection equivalent to the sheath, conduit or trunking
respectively.
526.5.4 The insulation on a conductor shall not be removed any further than is necessary for the connection.
526.5.5 Unless it is suitably designed, a cable lug shall not be used to terminate more than one conductor.
526.6 Strain-relieving
Adequate means of supporting cables shall be provided close to conductor terminations to prevent excessive stresses
on terminals and connections.
Strain- relief devices shall be designed so as to avoid any mechanical damage to cables or conductors.
Note: Examples are:

- glands and clamps at terminal boxes of rotating machines and switchgear,
- cord grips and clamps at flexible cable outlet plates and ceiling roses.
526.7 Enclosures
Enclosures for connections shall provide adequate protection against ingress of dust and moisture.
Where the connections do not have a degree of protection against direct contact of at least IP2X, the opening or
removal of doors or covers shall require the use of a tool
526.8 Connection of stranded conductors
526.8.1 A terminal shall securely contain all the strands of a conductor. This shall be achieved by the use of suitable
ferrules or terminals, or alternatively, the conductor ends shall be suitably treated.
526.8.2 Soldering (tinning) of the whole conductor end of stranded conductors is not permissible if screw terminals
are used.
526.8.3 Soldered (tinned) conductor ends on fine- stranded and very- fine stranded wire conductors are not
permissible at connection and junction points which are subject in service to a relative movement between the soldered
and the non-soldered part of the conductor.
Note: “Fine wire” and “very fine wire” are defined as Class 5 and Class 6 respectively in IEC Publication 60228.
526.9 Flexible cables
526.9.1 Joints shall not be made in flexible cables.
Note: Connections of flexible cables must be made with suitable cable-couplers, see 554.7
526.9.2 The connection of a flexible cable to fixed wiring shall be made with screwed terminals in a suitable box.
526.10 Proximity to thermal insulating materials
Adequate clearance shall be maintained between connections to equipment and adjacent metal layers of thermal
insulating materials, e.g. in attics.
527 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS TO MINIMISE THE

SPREAD OF FIRE
527.1 Precautions within a fire-segregated area
94
527.1.1 The risk of spread of fire shall be minimized by the selection of appropriate materials and erection in
accordance with this section.
527.1.2 Wiring systems shall be selected and installed so that the overall structural performance and fire- safety of
the building is not impaired.
527.1.3
The following may normally be installed without any special precautions:
- cable having flame- resistant requirements complying with I.S. 201,
- conduit or trunking having a fire resistance complying with I.S EN 50086-1 or I.S.EN 50085-1 respectively, or
equivalent standard.
Note: In installations where a specific risk is identified, cables complying with the more onerous tests in IEC 60332 -3 – 24 may be necessary.
527.1.4 Cables not complying, as a minimum, with the flame- resisting and propagation requirements of I.S. 201
shall, if used, be limited to short lengths for the connection of appliances to permanent wiring parts of wiring systems
and, in any event, shall not pass from one fire-segregated area to another.
527.2 Sealing of penetrations of fire barriers
527.2.1 Where a wiring system penetrates a building element such as a floor, a wall a ceiling, a partition or barrier,
the resulting aperture shall be sealed to the degree of fire resistance prescribed (if any) for the respective building
element before penetration.
527.2.2 Conduit, trunking or similar wiring enclosures that penetrate a building element shall be sealed internally
to the same degree of fire-resistance as that of the building element except where otherwise permitted in 527.2.4.
Sealing shall be effected by the use of the appropriate building material or by a proprietary sealing system which has
been type-tested.
527.2.3 Internal sealing of wiring enclosures need not be provided where the following conditions apply:
a) The materials of the wiring enclosure comply with 527.1.2.
b) The internal cross-sectional area does not exceed 710 mm2 (30 mm diameter).
c) Trunking and similar enclosures do not have gaps exceeding 2.5 mm.
d) Terminations of the wiring enclosure have a degree of protection equivalent to IP 33.
527.2.4 It shall be ensured that the external sealing arrangements for a wiring system penetrating parts of a building,
which are intended to prevent the spread of fire or products of combustion, are not subjected to undue mechanical stress
by the wiring system.
No wiring system shall penetrate an element of building construction that is intended to be load bearing unless the
integrity of the load-bearing element can be assured after such penetration.
This requirement is satisfied if:
- cable clamps or cable supports are installed within 750 mm of the seal, and are able to withstand the mechanical load
expected following the collapse of the supports on the fire side of the seal to the extent that no strain is transferred to
the seal, or
- the design of the sealing system provides adequate support.
527.2.5 All sealing arrangements used in accordance with 527.2.1 and 527.2.2 shall comply with the following
requirements:
a) They shall resist external influences to the same degree as the wiring system involved.
b) They shall provide the same resistance to the products of combustion as that required for the building element
involved.
c) They shall provide the same degree of protection from water penetration as that required for the building element
involved.
95
The seal and the wiring system shall be protected from dripping water that might travel along the wiring system or
might otherwise collect around the seal, unless the materials used in the seal are all resistant to moisture when finally
assembled for use.
Note: During erection of a wiring system, temporary sealing arrangements may be required. After alteration work, sealing should be reinstated
as quickly as possible.
527.3 Harmful products of combustion
Table 52H (From the 5th September 2017 the following cables will no longer be permissible)
CODE STANDARD U.K. / GERMAN RATING V mm2 CONSTRUCTION

CODE
H03VVH2-F I.S. 201 0.5 – 0.75 Twin flat PVC/PVC/Cu

2195/Y 300/300
BS 6500 Circular PVC/PVC/Cu flexible
cord 2 - 5 core
H05VV-F I.S. 201 0.5 – 4.0 Twin Flat PVC/PVC/Cu

3183/Y 300/500
BS 6500 flexible cord
N05VVH2-U I.S. 201 6192/Y 300/500 1 – 2.5 Twin Flat PVC/PVC/Cu solid
BS 6004 conductor
N05VVH2-R I.S. 201 6242/Y 300/500 1 - 16 Twin Flat PVC/PVC Cu

BS 6004 stranded conductor
N05VVH4-U I.S. 201 1 - 16 Twin & earth Flat

6242/Y 300/500
BS 6004 PVC/PVC
Cu solid conductor
I.S. 201 1 - 16 Twin & earth flat

N05VVH4-R 6242/Y 300/500
BS 6004 PVC/PVC/Cu
stranded conductor
528 PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DETRIMENTAL EFFECTS FROM ADJACENT

SERVICES
528.0 General
Precautions shall be taken to avoid detrimental effects in adjacent equipment:
- between different types of electrical services,
- between electrical and non-electrical services.
528.1 Proximity to electrical services
528.1.1 Low voltage and extra-low voltage circuits shall not be contained in the same wiring system unless
at least one of the following methods is adopted:
a) Every cable is insulated for the highest voltage present.
b) Each conductor of a multi-core cable is insulated for the highest voltage present in the cable.
c) The cables are insulated for their system voltage and installed in a separate compartment or cable ducting or cable
trunking system.
d) The cables are installed on a cable- tray system where physical separation is provided by a partition
e) A separate conduit or trunking system is employed.
SELV and PELV systems shall in addition comply with 414.4.2
Note: Special considerations of electrical interference, both electromagnetic and electrostatic, may apply to telecommunication circuits, data
transfer circuits and similar circuits.
96
528.1.2 No cable shall be run in a lift shaft unless it forms a part of the lift installation.
528.2 Proximity of communications cables
In the event of crossing or proximity of underground telecommunication cables and underground power cables, or the
following requirements according to a) or b) or c) shall be fulfilled:
a) A fire- retardant partition shall be provided between the cables, e.g. bricks, cable-protecting caps (clay or concrete),
shaped blocks (concrete), protective conduit or troughs made of fire-proof materials.
b) For crossings, mechanical protection between the cables shall be provided, e.g. ferrous cable protection , metal or
synthetic cable conduit, concrete cable - protecting caps or shaped blocks.
c) A minimum clearance of 100 mm shall be maintained.
528.3 Proximity to non-electrical services
528.3.1 Wiring systems shall not be installed in the vicinity of services that produce heat, smoke or fumes likely to
be detrimental to the wiring, unless they are protected from harmful effects by shielding. Shielding shall not
significantly affect the dissipation of heat from the wiring.
In areas not specifically designed for the installation of cables, e.g. service shafts and cavities, the cables shall be laid
so that they are not exposed to any harmful influences by the continuous operation of the adjacent installations (e.g.
gas, water or steam lines).
528.3.2 Where a wiring system is situated below services liable to cause condensation, (such as water, gas or steam
services), precautions shall be taken to protect the wiring system from harmful effects.
528.3.3 Where electrical services are installed close to non-electrical services, they shall be so arranged that any
foreseeable operation carried out on the other services will not cause damage to the electrical services or vice-versa.
Note: This may be achieved by suitable spacing between the services or the use of mechanical or thermal shielding.
528.3.4 Where an electrical service is located in close proximity to non-electrical services, wiring systems shall be
suitably protected against hazards likely to arise from the presence of the other services in normal use.
Metal services are deemed to be extraneous conductive parts which are required to be bonded to the main equipotential
bonding system in accordance with 411.3.2 and 544.1.
529 SELECTION AND ERECTION TO TAKE ACCOUNT OF MAINTENANCE

INCLUDING CLEANING
529.1 The likely use of the installation shall be taken into account in the selection and erection of the wiring system.
529.2 Where it is necessary to remove temporarily a protective measure in order to carry out maintenance, provision
shall be made to ensure that the protective measure can be fully reinstated without reducing the existing level of
protection.
529.3 Provision shall be made for safe and adequate access to all parts of the wiring system that may require
maintenance.
Note: In some situations, it may be necessary to provide permanent means of access by ladders, walk-ways, etc.
Annexes for Chapter 52
Annex 52A: Cable-capacities of conduit and trunking

Annex 52B: Cable bending radii and cable support spacings
Annex 52C: Current-carrying capacities for cables and insulated conductors
Annex 52D: Standard types of cables and insulated conductors
Annex 52E: Voltage-drop values for cables with copper conductors
Annex 52F: Summary of the Rules for wiring concealed in walls or partitions.
97
Chapter 53: Equipment for protection, isolation, switching, control and

monitoring
CONTENTS
530
SCOPE, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
531 DEVICES PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK BY AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF THE

SUPPLY
532 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST THE RISK OF FIRE.
533 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT
534 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES AND ELECTROMAGNETIC

DISTURBANCES
535
DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE
536 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
537 DEVICES FOR ISOLATION AND SWITCHING
538 MONITORING DEVICES
539 ISOLATION OF A PREMISES IN AN EMERGENCY
LIST OF ANNEXES
530 SCOPE, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

530.1 Scope
This chapter deals with general requirements for the selection and erection of equipment for protection, isolation,
switching, control and monitoring in order to achieve compliance with the measures of protection for safety in Part 4
of these Rules
The requirements of this chapter are supplementary to the common rules in Chapter 51.
Note: Attention is drawn to the Building Regulations Technical Guidance M which deals with switches, outlets and controls in buildings and
dwelling. These have been taken into account in this Chapter and Chapter 55.
Equipment shall provide compliance with:
- the measures of protection for safety,

- the proper functioning for the intended use, and
- the requirements appropriate to the external influences foreseen.
Every item of equipment shall therefore be selected and erected in accordance with the requirements of this section
and the relevant requirements of other parts of these Rules.
530.2.1 In multi-phase circuits, the moving contacts of all poles of multi-pole devices shall be so coupled
mechanically that they make and break substantially together, except that contacts solely intended for the neutral may
close before, and open after, the other contacts.
530.2.2 Single-pole switching or protective devices shall not be inserted in the neutral conductor. Notwithstanding
this requirement, single-pole switches may be installed in the neutral conductor, but only for the purpose of control
or functional switching.
Note: See 537.5.
98
530.2.3 A device embodying more than one function shall comply with all the requirements appropriate to each
separate function.
Note: In certain cases additional requirements may be necessary for combined functions.
530.3 Fixing of equipment

530.3.1 Connections between wiring and equipment shall not be subjected to undue stress or strain resulting from
normal use of the equipment. Account shall be taken of relevant manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: See 526.5 for details.
530.3.2 Equipment shall have a suitable enclosure, or be installed in a suitable mounting box or enclosure, and
shall be fixed in position.
530.4 Distribution boards (switchgear assemblies)
Distribution boards (switchgear assemblies) shall comply with the appropriate parts of I.S. EN 61439. Part 1: Type-
tested and partly type tested assemblies.
530.5 Erection of distribution boards
530.5.1 A distribution board shall be adequately protected against adverse environmental conditions such as dust,
moisture, corrosive or polluting substances, excessive temperatures, impact, vibration and other mechanical stresses.
530.5.2 A distribution board shall be suitably located or protected so as to avoid possible damage arising from a fault
in another service or in the course of maintenance thereto. This may be achieved by supplementary measures such as
barriers or separation.
530.5.3 A distribution board shall be located in a location where it is readily accessible. A distribution
board located in a switch room shall comply with 539.
A wall-mounted distribution board shall be mounted at a height not greater than 2.25m measured from the floor to the
top surface of the board.
In addition, where a wall-mounted distribution board is mounted at a height less than 1.4m measured from the floor
to the bottom surface of the distribution board, it shall be accessible only by authorized persons.
Note 1: The intention of the third paragraph is to prevent ready access by young children (i.e. in areas with External Influence Classification BA2
in accordance with Annex 51D).
Note 2: This sub-clause does not apply in situations where an alteration consists of the replacement of an existing distribution board without
alterations to associated wiring terminating there.
530.5.4 A distribution board shall not be installed in the following locations:
- storage or airing cupboards,

- under timber staircases,
- where it may be covered by garments or similar articles..
- in a bathroom, washroom or WC.
A distribution board shall not be mounted over a cooking or heating appliance.
A distribution board installed in areas of increased fire hazard shall in addition comply with 422.2.1
530.5.5 A distribution board shall not be located in an escape route such as a stairway or corridor,
unless supplementary fire protective measures are provided. This requirement does not apply to single occupancy
buildings and similar premises outside the scope of the fire authority’s requirements.
530.5.6 A distribution board shall not be located within 400 mm in any direction from a gas meter or a gas appliance.
This shall not apply where the gas meter is located within a separate gas-tight enclosure.
530.5.7 A distribution board not provided with a back-plate shall comply with 515.1.
530.5.8 Unsheathed insulated conductors entering a distribution board shall be shielded from contact with flammable
material (e.g. a mounting-board) by conduit or similar means.
99
530.5.9 The phase conductors of each two- or three- phase circuit shall be connected to the same way in a multi-way
distribution board.
530.5.10 Neutral and protective conductors shall be arranged in the same sequence as the corresponding phase
conductors.
530.5.11 Distribution boards containing equipment for currents of different types or at different voltages shall
comply with 515.2.
530.5.12 Identification and marking shall be in accordance with 514.1; in particular, each outgoing circuit shall be
suitably identified.
Note: See also 462 and 704.
530.6 Position of control devices.

Wall-mounted switches and control devices shall be mounted at a height as follows:
i) switches for permanently-connected appliances: Between 400mm and 1200mm above floor level;
ii) switches for lighting equipment:

- in dwellings, between 400mm and 1200mm above floor level,
- in public and similar buildings, between 900mm and 1200mm above floor level. In such cases, switches shall be
capable of being operated easily and without effort.
The above requirements do not apply to certain control devices, such as for thermostatic control,
for which the manufacturer’s instructions shall be observed.
Note: Attention is drawn to the Building Regulations Technical Guidance M which deals with the positions of switches, outlets and controls in
buildings. These are taken into account in this Chapter and 554.
531 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK BY AUTOMATIC

DISCONNECTION OF THE SUPPLY
531.1 General
531.1.1 The device for additional protection against electric shock in normal service (direct contact) in accordance
with 416.1 shall be an RCD, selected and installed in accordance with 531.2.3
Note: This applies mainly to socket-outlet circuits.
531.1.2 Devices for protection against electric shock in case of a fault (indirect contact) by automatic disconnection
of the supply in accordance with 411.3.3 shall consist of:
- for TN and IT systems overcurrent protective devices selected and installed in accordance with 533, and RCDs
selected and installed in accordance with 531.2.2.6.1
- for TT systems, RCDs selected and installed in accordance with 531.2.2.6.2
Note: In Ireland, overcurrent protective devices are not acceptable for protection against electric shock in TT systems – see Chapter 41.
In IT systems, in the event of a second fault, an overcurrent protective device shall disconnect all live conductors,
including the neutral conductor, if any.
531.2 Residual-current protective devices (RCDs)
531.2.1 Selection of RCDs
531.2.1.1 Suitable RCDs shall be selected for protection in case of a fault (indirect contact), in accordance with
411.3, and for additional protection against direct contact in accordance with 416.1.
RCDs shall comply with one of the following standards:
i) residual-current-operated circuit-breakers (RCCB): I.S.EN 61008;
ii) residual current-operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection (RCBO): I.S. EN 61009;
iii) modular residual-current devices with external sensor (MRCD): I.S. EN 60947-2;
iv) type B residual current devices: I.S.EN 62423 ed 2.0.
100
531.2.1.2 RCDs may be of the following types:
i) RCDs whose operation is independent of line voltage or auxiliary supply voltage (electromagnetic type);
ii) RCDs whose operation is dependent on the line voltage (electronic type);
iii) RCDs whose operation is dependent on an auxiliary supply voltage.

Note: The line voltage is not considered to be an auxiliary source.
531.2.1.3 Account shall be taken of the possible presence of d.c. components in a circuit protected by an RCD
that could affect the operation of the RCD, and a suitable type shall be chosen as follows:
i) where no significant d.c. component is present: Type AC;
ii) where equipment produces pulsating direct currents: Type A;
iii) where equipment produces smooth direct currents: Type B.

Note: Type B RCDs should not be confused with Type B MCBs (533).
531.2.1.4 Where required, e.g. where RCDs are installed in series, an RCD with time delay shall be chosen in
accordance with these Rules.
531.2.2.1 RCDs shall ensure the disconnection of all live conductors in the circuit protected. In TN-S systems, and
in TN-C-S systems after the neutral and protective conductors are separated, the neutral conductor need not be
disconnected if the supply conditions are such that it can be considered to be reliably at earth potential.
For the purpose of this sub-clause the neutral conductor is considered to be reliably at earth potential in the DSO TN
system.
Where an RCD is intended to form part of fire -protective measures, it shall disconnect all live conductors, including
the neutral, in the circuits concerned.
Note: See 532.
531.2.2.2 RCDs shall be installed so that the test-device is easily accessible. In addition to any marking on the RCD,
a notice to the effect that the test-device should be operated regularly by the user shall be given on a label, and placed
on the RCD or in the vicinity of the RCD. This notice shall be clearly visible to the user.
Note: See 530.5.3 for accessibility requirements of distribution boards.
531.2.2.3 For an MRCD having an external residual-current sensor, no protective conductor shall pass through its
magnetic circuit, except where this is unavoidable, in which case the protective conductor shall be passed through the
magnetic circuit a second time and in the reverse direction. The protective conductor shall be insulated and shall not
be earthed between its first and second passages throughout the magnetic circuit. See Figure 53.1
Live conductors
PE conductor
Magnetic sensor
Figure 53.1: Protective conductor and residual current sensor.
101
531.2.2.4 RCDs with variable or multiple settings shall not be installed in domestic and similar premises, or in other
premises where there is not a competent person responsible for electrical maintenance.
531.2.2.5 RCDs depending on an auxiliary source are permissible only in premises where there is a competent person
responsible for electrical maintenance.
531.2.2.6 RCDs protecting wiring or equipment exposed to severe external influences that could cause deterioration
of the insulation shall have a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
531.2.3 Selection of RCDs for protection in case of a fault (indirect contact)
Note: This sub- clause does not apply to circuits serving socket-outlets or other circuits that require only additional protection against direct
contact in accordance with 416.1, where the system earthing is type TN. See 531.2.4
531.2.3.1 RCDs used for protection in case of a fault shall comply with the appropriate requirements of Chapter
41 for disconnection of the supply.
Note: This is mainly applicable to TT earthing systems, and disconnecting times are given in 411.5.2 Table 41B.
531.2.3.2 RCDs used for protection in case of a fault shall be capable of operation on a supply voltage Un in the
range:
- 1.1 Un to 85V a.c. for protecting single-phase circuits,
- 1.1 Un to 0.7 Un for protecting multi-phase circuits,
where Un is the rated operating voltage of the RCD.
Note: Three- and four- pole RCDS should not be used on single-phase circuits unless they comply also with the requirements for single-phase
RCDs.
531.2.3.3 Type AC RCDs shall not be used on circuits supplying electrical equipment that produces residual pulsating
direct currents or residual smooth direct currents.
531.2.3.4 On circuits supplying electrical equipment that produces residual pulsating direct currents or smooth
direct currents under fault conditions, RCDs shall be type A or Type B, whichever is appropriate.
Note 1: Information concerning d.c. leakage and d.c. fault currents should be obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment.
Note 2: Methods of minimising leakage currents include the use of Class II equipment, electrical separation (i.e. using isolating transformers) or
the use of a protective device that monitors the residual current values and the d.c. components.
531.2.3.5 Reserved.
531.2.3.6 RCDs and the type of system earthing
RCDs provided for the purpose of protection in case of a fault (indirect contact) shall be installed as follows, depending
on the type of system earthing:
531.2.3.6.1 TN system earthing
If for certain equipment or for certain parts of an installation, one or more of the conditions of 411.4.3 cannot be
satisfied by an overcurrent protective device, those parts shall be protected by an RCD
Note: In such cases, the exposed conductive parts are connected to a separate earth-electrode independent of the TN system earth electrode, and
this part of the installation is regarded as a local TT system. This earth electrode should have a resistance to earth which is appropriate for
the RCD operating characteristics.
531.2.3.6.2 TT system earthing
In TT systems, RCDs shall
- comply with 411.5.2.

- be installed at the origin of the installation,
- have a minimum residual operating -current not exceeding 500mA, except where 531.2.3.4 is applicable.
Note 1: The operating times of RCDs, including S types (time-delay), must comply with Table 41B of Chapter 41.
Note 2: Selectivity is necessary between RCDs in series – see 536.3.
102
531.2.3.6.3 IT system earthing
RCDs used in installations with IT system earthing shall comply with 411.6, and any relevant instructions of the
manufacturer of the RCD shall be observed.
RCDs complying with I.S.EN 60947-2 and marked with the symbol ITX shall not be used.
Where disconnection following a first fault is not desired, the rated residual operating current of the RCD shall be at
least twice the value of the expected fault current flowing to earth.
Where disconnection following a first fault is desired, the rated residual operating current of the RCD shall be lower
than the value of fault current expected to flow to earth and 2.5 times higher than the expected normal leakage currents
downstream of the RCD.
Where exposed conductive parts are collectively earthed, in case of a double fault, a separate RCD shall be provided
for each circuit, and the operating characteristics shall comply with Table 41B of Chapter 41.
Where exposed conductive parts are not collectively earthed, in case of a double fault, a separate RCD shall be provided
for each exposed conductive part or group of exposed conductive parts.
531.2.4 Selection of RCDs for providing additional protection against direct contact
RCDs providing additional protection against direct contact in accordance with 416.1 shall have a rated residual
operating current not exceeding 30mA.
For general applications, e.g. in domestic and similar installations where equipment does not produce significant
pulsating d.c or smooth d.c. currents, RCDs used for this purpose may be Type AC.
531.2.5 Continuity of supply and avoidance of unwanted operation of RCDs.
531.2.5.1 Equipment protected by RCDs shall be so arranged and the electrical circuits so subdivided that any earth
leakage currents that may occur during normal operation will not cause nuisance tripping of a device or prevent the
correct functioning of a device.
In order to avoid unwanted tripping of RCDs caused by leakage currents, measures shall be taken to ensure that the
accumulated leakage current on the load side of an RCD does not exceed 40 per cent of its rated residual current.
Note 1: In such cases, and in particular where RCDs with rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA are used, two or more RCDs should
be used and the circuits subdivided accordingly among them. Consideration should also be given to the number of socket-outlets and the
type of equipment likely to be connected to them, in particular where data- processing equipment is concerned,
Note 2: RCDs with a time - delay, e.g. type S, may be effective in cases where the leakage currents are of short duration.
531.2.5.2 An RCD shall be resistant to unwanted operation due to electromagnetic interference where it is installed.
RCDs complying with I.S.EN 61008 and I.S.EN 61009 are deemed to comply with this requirement.
531.2.5.3 Where RCDs may be subject to unwanted tripping due to transient currents resulting from overvoltages
of atmospheric origin, they shall preferably have a time- delay.
Note: In such conditions, surge-protective devices (SPDs) may be required, for which see 443 and 534.
531.2.5.4 Where several circuits may be protected by one RCD, consideration shall be given to the need for
continuity of service for essential items such as data-processing equipment and deep-freezing units.
Note: In such cases, a solution is to use a discrete RCD, or better still, provide a permanent i.e. switched- outlet connection.
531.2.6 Overload protection of RCDs
The required rated current-carrying capacity of the RCD shall be determined taking into account the rated current of
the upstream overcurrent protective device, and where applicable, diversity factors.
531.2.7 Selective operation of RCDs
Selective operation of RCDs in series shall be in accordance with 536.3.
103
532 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE RISK
532.1 An RCD for circuits in areas of fire risk shall be selected and installed in accordance with 422.2.2.4. It shall
comply with 531.2, and with the following:
a) It shall disconnect all live conductors of the circuit, including the neutral.
b) The rated residual operating current shall not exceed 300mA.
c) It shall be installed at the origin of the circuits to be protected.
Alternatively, where there is adequate supervision, circuits may be continuously monitored by IMDs complying with
538 which initiate an alarm when an insulation fault occurs.
Note 1: Other devices may be used in addition to those described above e.g. optically-operated devices, arc-detection devices, thermistors, smoke-
detection devices.
Note 2: For locations with risk of explosion due to potentially explosive atmospheres, ET 105 applies.
533 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT
533.1 General Requirements
Overcurrent protective devices shall be selected and installed so as to ensure compliance with Chapter 43.
Devices for protection against overcurrent shall comply with one or more of the following standards as may be
appropriate:
Fuses: I.S. EN 60269 –1, -2, or -3

MCBs: I.S.EN 60898 - 1 or - 2
Circuit breakers: I.S.EN 60947-2
Switch – fuse combinations: I.S.EN 60947 - 3
RCBOs: EN 61009-1
Other devices: I.S.EN 60947 - 4 -1,I.S. EN 60947 - 6 - 1, I.S.EN 60947 - 6 - 2.
Note: I.S. EN 60947: Low voltage switchgear and control gear.
533.1.1 Fuses
533.1.1.1 A fuse base using screw-in fuses shall be installed so that its centre-contact is connected to the conductor
from the supply and the shell contact is connected to the conductor going to the load.
533.1.1.2 Fuse bases for plug-in fuse carriers shall so arranged so as to prevent a fuse carrier’s accidentally making
contact between conductive parts of the other two adjoining phases.
533.1.1.3 The electrical characteristics of fuses shall comply with the appropriate requirements of I.S.EN 60269,
taking into account the type of overcurrent protection required. The dimensional and mechanical properties of fuses
shall comply with any of the following standards:
DIN 0636 Part 31 (Neozed or DO type)

BS 88 parts 1,2 and 4
BS 1361 type I and II
BS 1362
NFC 63-20
NFC 63-210
533.1.1.4 In domestic premises, and in other locations where there is no competent person responsible for electrical
maintenance, fuses shall comply with the dimensional and constructional requirements of I.S. EN 60269-3 or VDE
0636 Parts 3 and 4 (Neozed type). There shall be no possibility of inadvertent replacement by a fuse having the
intended nominal current but a higher fusing factor than that intended.
Note: For screw-in fuses the correct gauge ring to suit the fuse rating must be inserted in the fuse base.
104
533.1.1.5 Fuses and combination units containing fuses shall be installed in such a manner that it is ensured that the
fuses can be removed and replaced without danger of unintentional contact with live parts.
Note: In multi-phase systems, additional measures may be needed, e.g. an all-pole switch on the supply side to prevent unintentional contact with
live parts on the load side.
533.1.2 Circuit-breakers
Circuit breakers with variable overcurrent characteristic settings not requiring the use of a tool for access thereto shall
be used only in installations where there is a competent person available for electrical maintenance.
Note: See 533.3 for requirements for selection of short-circuit protective devices.
533.2 Selection of devices for protection of wiring systems against overloads
533.2.1 The nominal current or current-setting of the protective device shall be selected in accordance with 433.2
(Chapter 43), i.e.
Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz and
I2 ≤ 1.45 x IZ
where
Ib is the current for which the circuit is designed,

In is the nominal current or current-setting of the protective device,
IZ is the continuous current-carrying capacity of the cable,
I2 is the current ensuring effective operation of the overload protective device within
the conventional time stated in the product standard.
In the case of a cyclic load the values of In and I2 shall be chosen on the basis of values of Ib and Iz for the thermally
equivalent constant load.
Note 1: In certain cases, to avoid unintentional operation of the device, the peak value of the load current should be taken into consideration.
Note 2: A conductor may be loaded with a current exceeding its current-carrying capacity for a limited period provided the temperature limits in
523 and Annex 52C are not exceeded.
533.2.2 Additional requirements against overload with the presence of harmonic currents.
An overload device shall operate correctly under the presence of harmonic currents and shall comply with the
requirements of 433.1.
Overload detection shall be provided for the neutral conductor in a three-phase circuit where the harmonic content of
the line currents is such that the current in the neutral conductor is expected to exceed its current-carrying capacity.
This detection shall cause the disconnection of the line conductors but not necessarily of the neutral conductor. Where
the neutral can be disconnected, the requirements of 431.1 apply.
Note: Other means, such as filters and increasing the size of neutral conductors may be used to mitigate the effects of harmonic currents, for which
see 523.6 and 524.4.
533.3 Selection of devices for protection of wiring systems against short-circuits.
533.3.1 The application of the rules of Chapter 43 for short-circuits of duration up to 5s shall take into account both
minimum and maximum short-circuit conditions.
533.3.2 A circuit breaker may be selected on the basis of its rated ultimate short-circuit capacity appropriate to the
prospective short-circuit current at its point of installation, except where otherwise specified in 533.3.3 and 533.3.5.
533.3.3 A circuit-breaker that may be expected to trip on fault several times during its lifetime shall be selected on
the basis of its rated service short -circuit breaking capacity.
Note 1: See I.S.EN 60947-2.

Note 2: See Part 2: Definitions: for definitions of “service short-circuit breaking capacity” and “ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity”.
533.3.4 MCBs and RCBOs shall be selected so as to be suitable for the duty intended.
For final circuits MCBs and RCBOs shall have Type B overcurrent characteristics.
For circuits where high inrush currents of the order of 5 - 10 In may occur MCBs and RCBOs shall have Type C
overcurrent characteristics.
105
For circuits where very high inrush currents of the order of 10 - 20 In may occur MCBs and RCBOs shall have Type
D overcurrent characteristics.
Notwithstanding 533.1 above, for special applications, other types of MCBs or RCBOs are permissible provided they
comply with the national standard of a CENELEC member country, and the requirements of Chapter 43, and for TN
systems, Chapter 41 sub-clause 411.4.4, are fulfilled.
Note 1: An RCBO is a device combining residual current protection and overcurrent protection. See 531.2
Note 2: In is the rated current of the device.
Note 3: Type B RCDs must be distinguished from Type B MCBs.
533.3.5 Main overcurrent device.
The main overcurrent protective device shall comply with 430.4. A circuit-breaker provided as a main overcurrent
protective device shall be selected on the basis of its rated service short-circuit breaking capacity, i.e. it shall be capable
of multiple operation under short-circuit conditions.
A main overcurrent protective device may be located within a standard meter cabinet, in which case it shall comply
with the following requirements:
a) The protective device shall be an MCB.

b) In the case of installations having a maximum import capacity (MIC) less than 50kVA, the MCB shall have a rated
short-circuit breaking capacity of at least 9kA.
c) The MCB shall be located in a weatherproof enclosure having a degree of protection IP55 and made of non-
conducting self-extinguishing material (750ºC).
d) A hinged transparent cover shall provide access for operating the MCB. Access to live terminals shall be only by
means of a tool or key.
e) The enclosure shall be mounted only at the bottom right-hand side of the meter cabinet, and sufficient space shall
be allowed for mounting additional equipment by the DSO as the need may arise.
Note: IP 55 applies to this enclosure regardless of any protection provided by the meter cabinet, and includes the hinged cover.
Figure 53.2: Main overcurrent device mounted in a standard meter cabinet.
534 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES AND

ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES.
534.1 Scope and general
This section covers the means for limiting voltages in order to achieve the insulation- coordination specified in 443.
This section specifies the requirements for the selection and erection of surge protective devices (SPDs) for the purpose
of:
- limiting transient overvoltages of atmospheric origin transmitted by the supply network,
- protection against switching overvoltages generated by equipment within the installation.
106
534.2 Installation of surge protective devices (SPDs)
534.2.1 Where required in accordance with 443, SPDs shall be installed at the main supply point of the installation
or in the main distribution board or boards.
Note 1: In some special cases, additional SPDs not within the scope of this section may be necessary.
Note 2: Surge devices located in other parts of the installation may also provide sufficient protection.
534.2.2 For compliance with 443, SPDs shall be installed between the phase/line conductors and the main earthing
terminal or bar.
In addition, in an installation where the neutral conductor is not earthed at or near the main supply intake, an SPD shall
be installed between the neutral conductor and the main earthing terminal or bar.
534.2.3 Selection of surge protective devices (SPDs)
534.2.3.1 The maximum continuous rated operating voltage Uc of an SPD shall be:
- for TN system earthing, at least 1.1 Uo ,

- for TT system earthing, at least 1.5 Uo
where Uo is the voltage between phase/line and earth.
534.2.3.2 SPDs shall withstand safely temporary overvoltages in accordance with 443.3.
534.2.3.3 For SPDs installed at the main supply point or main distribution board, the rated discharge current shall
be not less than 5kA.
Note: In severe conditions, a higher- rated discharge current may be necessary. Where there is a lightning protection installed, an SPD with a
higher-rated discharge current will be required.
534.2.3.4 The protection level of an SPD shall be determined in accordance with 443.3.2.
Note 1: Account may need to be taken of the surge-withstand level of equipment.

Note 2: Additional SPDs may be necessary closer to sensitive equipment unless they are already provided in the equipment.
534.2.3.5 Where SPDs are installed downstream of that the main supply point, for the purpose of protecting
equipment incorporating sensitive electronic circuitry, mutual coordination of SPDs shall be ensured, taking into
account the manufacturer’s instructions
534.2.4 Installation of SPDs
SPDs shall not be installed in areas of fire-risk (BE2) or explosion risk (BE3) without appropriate additional protective
measures.
Note: See Chapter 42 and ET 105.
534.2.5 Protection of SPDs against overcurrent and fault currents
Where failure of SPDs might affect the availability of the supply, protective means against overcurrent and fault
currents shall be provided, either in the equipment or in series with it, unless indicated otherwise in the manufacturer’s
instructions.
534.2.6 Protection in case of a fault (protection against indirect contact)
Protection in case of a fault in accordance with Chapter 41, 411.3 shall remain effective even in case of failure of SPDs.
Note 1: With TN system earthing, this may be achieved by an overcurrent protective device located upstream of the SPD.
Note 2: With TT system earthing, this may be achieved by an RCD located upstream of the SPD.
534.2.7 RCDs used in conjunction with SPDs
An RCD installed upstream of an SPD shall be Type S and capable of withstanding surge currents of at least 3kA
(8/20μ).
534.2.8 Lightning protection and SPDs
Where a lightning protection system is installed, the necessary additional measures shall be taken, e.g. by selecting
SPDs with a higher rated discharge current than that specified in 443.3.2 and 534
107
534.2.9 Failure of SPDs
In the event of failure of an SPD to provide overvoltage protection, suitable means of indication of this condition shall
be provided.
Note: Indication of failure may be contained in the SPD or provided separately.
534.2.10 Connecting conductors for SPDs

Conductors for SPDs shall be as short as practicable, and preferably not greater than 0.5m for their total length.
Note: Connecting conductors for SPDs are those from the phase/line conductor to the SPD, and those from the SPD to the main earthing terminal.
534.2.11 Earthing conductors of SPDS.
Earthing conductors for SPDs shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of at least 4mm2 copper.
Note: Where a lightning protection system exists, a cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm2 Cu may be necessary.
535 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE

Devices for protection against undervoltage shall comply with 445. Consideration shall be given to the matters affecting
safety resulting from undervoltages and the method of operation of the devices.
Note 1: Examples of protective devices for protection against undervoltage are:

- undervoltage relays or releases operating a switch or a circuit-breaker
- non-latching contactors.
Note 2: Matters to be considered include the operating voltage, need for time- delay, and choice of manual resetting or automatic re-closing of the
device.
536 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

536.1 Introduction
Co-ordination of various protective devices may consist of selectivity and/or back-up protection.
Selectivity between protective devices depends on the coordination of the operating characteristics of two or more
protective devices such that, on the incidence of fault currents within stated limits, the device intended to operate
within these limits does so, while the other devices do not.
Figure 53.3: Schematic diagram: Installation of SPDs.

108
Back-up protection between two protective devices is a coordination of two protective devices in series where the
protective device is on the upstream side:
- provides the necessary protection in the event of failure of the protective device downstream, and
- prevents excessive stress on the protective device downstream in the event of a fault.
Note: See 434.5.1.
536.2 Selectivity between overcurrent protective devices
Selectivity between overcurrent protective devices may be achieved either by reference to the manufacturer’s
instructions or by compliance with the following:
536.2.1 To ensure selective operation of overcurrent protective devices in series account shall be taken of overloads
and of short-circuit currents.
536.2.2 Selective operation for overloads shall be confirmed by comparison of the respective operating characteristics
of the devices concerned.
536.2.3 Selective operation of short-circuit protective devices is considered to be achieved when

the following criteria are met:
- for fuses, the pre-arcing energy of the larger fuse is greater than the total energy-let through of the smaller fuse,
- for circuit breakers, the unlatching time of the main circuit breaker is greater than the total operating time of the
subordinate circuit-breaker,
- for a fuse and a subordinate circuit-breaker the pre-arcing time of the fuse is greater than the total operating time of
the subordinate circuit breaker,
- for a circuit breaker and a subordinate fuse, the unlatching time of the circuit breaker is greater than the total operating
time of the fuse,
- for a fuse and a subordinate circuit breaker the pre-arcing time of the fuse is greater than the total operating time of
the circuit breaker.
536.3 Selectivity between RCDs
536.3.1 Where RCDs are installed in series and continuity of supply is required for safety or other reasons, in the
event of a fault selective operation of the devices shall ensure continuity of supply to those parts of the installation not
involved in the fault.
536.3.2 To ensure selective operation of RCDs in series the following conditions shall be satisfied:
a) the operating time-current characteristic of the device located upstream shall lie completely above the operating time-
current characteristic of the device located downstream, and
b) the rated residual operating current of the device located upstream shall be at least twice that of the device located
downstream.
Alternatively, the device located upstream shall have a time-delay facility e.g. a Type S RCD.
536.4 Back-up protection
In the event of failure of a protective device on a final circuit, a protective device located upstream shall disconnect
the supply within such a time as to prevent danger.
Reference shall be made to the manufacturer’s information, including operating characteristics for the devices
Note: Technical data for the selection of protective devices for the purpose of back-up protection are published by the manufacturer of the device
to be protected.
536.5 Association of switching devices with overcurrent protective devices
Switching devices, including motor starters, shall be protected against overcurrent.

Switching devices without integral overcurrent protection shall be associated with, or provided with, appropriate
overcurrent protective devices.
109
The rated current and the characteristics of the short-circuit protective devices shall be in accordance with those
specified by the manufacturer of the switching devices.
537 DEVICES FOR ISOLATION AND SWITCHING
537.1 Scope and General

537.1.0 Scope
This section deals with the selection and installation of non-automatic local and remote isolation and switching
measures that prevent or remove dangers associated with electrical installations or electrically-driven equipment or
machines, for compliance with Chapter 46.
539 deals with the isolation of premises in an emergency, main isolators and switch rooms.
537.1.1 According to its function(s) every device provided for isolation or switching shall comply with 461.2 and
with the relevant requirements of this section.
537.1.2
A PEN conductor shall not have any provision for isolation or switching.
Note: In TN-S and TN-C-S earthing systems, the neutral conductor need not have provision for isolation or switching. See Chapter 46, clause
461.2.
537.2 Isolation
537.2.1 General
537.2.1.1 For compliance with 462, an isolating switch shall effectively isolate the circuit concerned from the supply,
subject to the provisions of 537.1.2.
Provision shall be made for the isolation of a group of circuits by a common isolating switch, if the service conditions
permit this.
537.2.1.2 Suitable means shall be provided to prevent any equipment from being unintentionally energised.
Note 1: Such precautions may include one or more of the following:
- locking devices
- location within a lockable enclosure
- warning notices, but only as an addition to other measures.
Note 2: This applies in particular to stand-by generating sets – see 551.6.2.
537.2.1.3 Where an item of equipment or enclosure contains live parts connected to more than one supply, a warning
notice shall be placed in such a position that any person gaining access will be warned of the need to isolate those parts
from the various supplies unless an interlocking arrangement is provided to ensure that all the circuits concerned are
isolated.
537.2.1.4 Where necessary, suitable means shall be provided for the discharge of stored electrical energy.
537.2.1.5 Where an isolating switch for a particular circuit is placed remotely from the equipment to be isolated,
provision shall be made for securing the switch in the open or OFF position. Where this position takes the form of a
lock or removable handle, the key or handle shall not be interchangeable with any others used for a similar purpose
within the premises.
537.2.2 Isolating switches
537.2.2.1 Isolating switches shall isolate all live supply conductors from the circuit concerned, subject to the
provisions of 462 and 537.1.2. Semiconductor devices shall not be used for the purpose of isolation.
Isolating switches shall be selected according to the requirements that are based on the overvoltage categories
applicable to their point of installation.
Equipment of Categories I and II according to 443 shall not be used for isolation.
Note: The overvoltage Categories I to IV are explained in Chapter 44 - 443. Equipment of Categories I and II has a low withstand level and is
not suitable for installation at the origin of the installation or in parts of installation where means of isolation is required.
110
537.2.2.2 The open and closed positions of an isolating switch shall be clearly and reliably indicated by OFF and
ON markings respectively. Such indications shall occur only when the device is fully open or closed.
Note: The marking required by this sub-clause may be achieved by the use of the symbols “O” and “I” to indicate the open and closed positions
respectively, where the use of such symbols is permitted by the relevant equipment standard.
537.2.2.3
Isolating switches shall be designed and/or installed so as to prevent unintentional closure

Note: Such closure might be caused, for example, by impact or vibration.
537.2.2.4 Provision shall be made for securing off-load isolating switches against inadvertent or unauthorised
closure.
Note: This may be achieved by locating the switch in a lockable space or enclosure or by padlocking. Alternatively, the off-load device may be
interlocked with a load-breaking one
537.2.2.5 A single isolating switch shall disconnect all poles of the supply except as otherwise provided for TN
systems in 461.2. Notwithstanding this requirement, single-pole switches situated adjacent to one another are
permissible in a premises where there is supervision by authorized persons.
Note: In industrial and similar installations isolation may also be achieved, for example, by means of
- fuses,
- links,
- special terminals that do not require the removal of a conductor.
537.2.2.6 Every isolating switch shall be clearly identified, for example by marking, to indicate the circuit it
isolates.
Note: See Section 514 - Identification.
537.3 Switching off for mechanical maintenance
537.3.1 General
For compliance with 463, devices for switching- off for mechanical maintenance shall be provided in accordance with
the following except in the case of electrically-powered equipment complying with I.S.EN 60204.
537.3.1.1 Means for switching off shall be provided where mechanical maintenance may involve a risk of physical
injury.
Note 1: Electrically-powered mechanical equipment may include rotating machines as well as heating and electromagnetic equipment.
Note 2: Examples of equipment where switching-off is needed are:
- cranes,
- lifts,
- escalators,
- machine tools,
- pumps.
Note 3: Systems powered by other means, e.g. pneumatic, hydraulic or steam, are not covered by these Rules. In such cases, switching off any
associated supply of electricity may not be a sufficient measure.
537.3.1.2 Suitable means shall be provided to prevent equipment from becoming unintentionally reactivated in error
during mechanical maintenance unless the means of switching-off is under the control of a person performing such
maintenance.
Where the device is remote from the equipment it controls, means shall be provided for securing it in the open or
OFF position.
Note: Such means may include one or more of the following measures:
- location within a lockable space or enclosure,

- padlocking,
- warning notices only as an addition to other measures.
537.3.2 Switches for disconnection for mechanical maintenance
537.3.2.1 Switches provided for the purpose of disconnection for mechanical maintenance shall be capable of
interrupting the full-load current of the relevant part of the installation. They need not interrupt all live conductors.
111
Interruption of a control circuit, e.g. of a drive, may be used only when a condition equivalent to the direct interruption
of the supply is achieved by either:
- supplementary safeguards such as mechanical restrainers, or

- arrangements complying with the appropriate standards.
Note: Switching-off for mechanical maintenance may be achieved, for example, by means of:
- multiple switches,
- circuit breakers,
- control switches operating contactors.
537.3.2.2 Switches for disconnection for mechanical maintenance, or their control- devices, shall require manual
operation.
The open and closed positions of a switch shall be visible or be clearly and reliably indicated by OFF and ON markings
respectively. Such indications shall occur only when the device is fully open or closed.
Note 1: The marking required by this sub-clause may be achieved by the use of the symbols “O” and “I” to indicate the open and closed positions
respectively where the use of such symbols is permitted by the relevant equipment standard.
Note 2: Such means may include locking devices and lockable enclosures. Warning notices alone are not sufficient, and may be used only as an
addition to the other measures.
537.3.2.3 Switches for disconnection for mechanical maintenance shall be designed and/or installed so as to
prevent unintentional closure.
Note: Such closures might be caused, for example, by impact or by vibration.
537.3.2.4 Switches for disconnection for mechanical maintenance shall be placed and marked so as to be readily
identifiable and convenient for their intended use.
537.4 Emergency switching
537.4.1 General
This clause deals with emergency switching in general. The particular requirements for isolation of a premises in case
of a fire are specified in 539.
537.4.1.1 For compliance with 464, means for emergency switching or stopping shall be provided for any part of
the installation where it may be necessary to control the supply to remove an unexpected danger.
537.4.1.2 Where a risk of electric shock is involved, the emergency switching device shall interrupt all live
conductors subject to the provisions of 461.
537.4.1.3 Means for emergency switching, including emergency stopping, shall act as directly as possible on the
appropriate supply conductors.
537.4.2 Emergency switching devices
537.4.2.1 Switches for emergency switching shall be capable of breaking the full load current of the relevant parts
of the installation, taking account of motor currents under stalled conditions where appropriate.
537.4.2.2 Means for emergency switching shall consist of:
- one switch that is capable of directly disconnecting the appropriate supply, or
- a combination of equipment requiring a single action, for example by means of a push button in the control circuit,
to actuate a remote switch.
Plugs and socket-outlets shall not be provided for use as a means for emergency stopping.
Note 1: For emergency stopping, retention of the supply may be necessary in some cases, for example for the braking of moving parts.
Note 2: Emergency switching may be achieved, for example, by means of

- switches in the main circuit push-buttons and similar arrangements in the control (auxiliary) circuit
537.4.2.3 Hand -operated switches for direct interruption of the main circuit shall be selected where practicable.
Circuit breakers, contactors and relays operated by remote control shall open on de-energization of coils. Alternatively,
other equivalent fail-to- safe techniques may be employed.
112
537.4.2.4 The means of operation such as handles or push-buttons for emergency switching shall be clearly
identified and coloured RED with a yellow background.
Note: This does not apply in domestic and similar locations.
537.4.2.5 The means of operation shall be so placed as to be readily identifiable and accessible at places where
danger might occur, and at any additional remote position from which the device may need to be operated in the case
of emergency.
537.4.2.6 The emergency switch shall be capable of latching, or being restrained, in the OFF or STOP position.
This may not be necessary where the means of operation for emergency switching and for re-energizing are under the
control of the same person.
The release of an emergency switch shall not re-energise the relevant part of the installation. Emergency switches
shall require to be reset manually before supply can be restored.
537.4.2.7 Devices for emergency switching, including emergency stopping, shall be so placed and marked as to be
readily identifiable and convenient for their intended use.
537.5 Functional switching (control)
537.5.1 General
537.5.1.1 For compliance with 465, a functional switching device shall be provided for each part of a circuit that may
be required to be controlled independently of other parts of the installation.
537.5.1.2 Functional switching devices need not necessarily control all live conductors of a circuit. Switching of the
neutral shall be in accordance with 530.2.2.
537.5.1.3 In general, all current-using apparatus shall be controlled by an appropriate functional switching
device.
A single functional- switching device may control several items of apparatus intended to operate simultaneously.
537.5.2 Functional switching devices
537.5.2.1 Functional switching devices shall be suitable for the most onerous duty they may be required to perform.
537.5.2.2 Functional switching devices may control the current without necessarily opening the corresponding poles.
Note 1: Semi-conductor switching devices are examples of devices capable of interrupting the current in the circuit but not opening the
corresponding poles.
Note 2: Functional switching may be achieved, for example by means of:

- switches,
- semi-conductor devices,
- circuit breakers,
- contactors,
- relays,
- plugs and socket-outlets having ratings of up to 32A.
Note 3: The type of loading, the frequency of operation, and the anticipated number of operations should be taken into account when assessing
the duty.
Systems of duty classification are to be found in the standards for the equipment concerned or in manufacturer’s information. See I.S.
EN 60947-3
537.5.2.3 Disconnectors, fuses or links shall not be used for functional switching.
537.5.2.4 Functional switching devices controlling sustained loads shall be selected for uninterrupted duty as
specified in I.S. EN 60947-3.
537.5.2.5 A functional switching device controlling a load with a significantly low power-factor shall be subject to
an appropriate de-rating factor, except where the device has been designed for the purpose. De-rating factors shall be
applied as follows:
- for discharge lighting, including fluorescent lighting: 0.8,

- for power-factor correction equipment: 0.5.
113
537.5.2.6 A functional switching device controlling a sustained load such as heating shall be subject to a de-rating
factor of 0.8.
537.5.3 Control circuits (auxiliary circuits)
Control circuits shall be designed, arranged and protected to limit the dangers resulting from a fault between the
control circuit and other conductive parts liable to cause a malfunction (e.g. inadvertent operation) of the controlled
apparatus.
537.5.4 Motor control

Note: See 552.
537.5.5 Wall -mounted switches
Wall-mounted switches shall be mounted in suitable boxes or enclosures of metal or other non- flammable material,
which may form part of the switch assembly. The box or enclosure shall contain an earthing terminal for connection
to a protective conductor.
Switches shall be mounted at a height in accordance with 530.6.

A wall-mounted switch-assembly connected to more than one circuit shall be provided with an appropriate permanent,
indelibly-marked warning notice, which may be affixed inside the enclosure.
Note: Attention is drawn to the Building Regulations 2000: “Access for people with Disabilities”. Electric-light switches must be mounted
between 900 mm and 1200 mm above floor level.
538 MONITORING DEVICES
Monitoring devices may be:
- insulation-monitoring devices (IMDs) used in IT earthing systems (538.1),

- equipment for insulation- fault location in IT systems (538.2),
- insulation-monitoring for normally de-energised equipment (538.3).
- residual-current monitoring devices (RCMs) (538.4).
538.1 Insulation- monitoring devices (IMDs) for IT earthing systems
538.1.1 IMDs shall be provided for IT earthing systems in compliance with 411.6, and shall comply with I.S.EN
61557-8 or equivalent standard. Instructions shall be provided indicating that when the IMD detects a fault to earth,
the fault shall be eliminated, in order to restore normal operating conditions as soon as possible.
Note: IMDs are not intended to provide protection against electric shock.
538.1.2 Installation of IMDs
IMDs shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Such devices shall be installed as close as
practicable to the origin of the system.
538.1.3 Adjustment of an IMD
IMDs installed in locations where ordinary persons have access to their use, shall be designed or installed in such a
way that it is impossible to modify the settings except by the use of a key, a tool or a password.
538.1.4 Passive insulation monitoring devices
In some particular d.c. IT installations including only two conductors, passive IMDs without injections in the system
may be used, provided:
- the insulation of all live distributed conductors is monitored, and

- all exposed-conductive parts of the installation are interconnected, and
- circuit conductors are selected and installed so as to reduce the risk of earth fault to a minimum.
538.2 Equipment for insulation fault location in IT earthing systems
Equipment for insulation-fault location shall comply with I.S.EN 61557-9.
114
538.3 Insulation monitoring devices (IMDs) for normally de-energised equipment
Where required, an IMD shall be provided for circuits serving safety equipment that is energised only in the event of
an emergency.
The IMD shall be de-activated automatically when the equipment is energised.
The reduction of the insulation level shall be indicated locally by a visual or audible signal with the choice of remote
location.
The measuring circuit shall be automatically disconnected when the equipment is energised.
538.4 Residual current monitors (RCM)
538.4.1 Where it is necessary or expedient to monitor leakage current, e.g. to alert the user to an incipient insulation
fault, an RCM complying with I.S.EN 62020 shall be provided for the circuits concerned.
Where an RCD is installed upstream of the RCM, the RCM shall preferably have a rated residual- operating current
not higher than 0.33 times the rated residual operating current of the RCD.
In all cases, an RCM shall have a rated residual operating current not higher than the first fault- current level to be
detected.
Note: An RCM is intended to alert the user of the installation before the protective device is activated.
538.4.2 In IT systems where interruption of the supply in case of a first insulation fault to earth is not required, or
not permitted, an RCM may be installed to facilitate the location of a fault. RCMs shall preferably be installed at the
origin of the outgoing circuits.
538.5 Monitoring of harmonic distortion.
In installations where current-using equipment is liable to produce a high level of harmonic currents, suitable equipment
for monitoring harmonic distortion in current and in voltage up to the 15th harmonic may be provided.
The table below gives guidance on the adverse effects associated with harmonic levels.
Harmonic levels Foreseeable effects

THDu < 5% and THDi < 10% None
5% = or < THDu < 8% and 10% = or <THDi<50% Significant pollution, nuisance effects
8% = or < THDu and 50% = or < THDi Heavy pollution, disfunction
Magnitude of harmonics current 3 > 50 Significant current in neutral conductor
Note: THDu = Total harmonic distortion for voltage, THDi = Total harmonic distortion for current.
539 ISOLATION OF PREMISES IN AN EMERGENCY

Note: THDu = Total harmonic distortion for voltage, THDi = Total harmonic distortion for current.
Introduction
ISOLATION OF PREMISES IN AN EMERGENCY
This section deals with the switching facilities required for isolating a premises in the event of a fire or other emergency.
In particular, it deals with situations where more than one electricity supply is laid on to a premises. These requirements
are applicable in addition to the corresponding clauses of 537 Installers should take account of the requirements of the
fire authority and of other parties involved e.g. insurance companies. Aesthetic and similar considerations should also
be taken into account when dealing with listed buildings. the corresponding clauses of
5
539.1 Main isolating switch
A main isolating switch intended for operation in case of a fire or other emergency shall consist of either:
Main isolating switch
- switch that can disconnect the electricity supply directly,
- a device such as a push-button arranged
A main isolating so asintended
switch to activate
foraoperation
remote switch that
in case of causes disconnection
a fire or other of the supply. In
such cases, the wiringemergency
from the push-button to the switch
shall consist of either: shall comply with 563.3: Areas of fire hazard.
Note: See also 551.6.2 of 551: LV generating sets

- switch that can disconnect the electricity supply directly,
115
- a device such as a push-button arranged so as to activate a remote switch
that causes disconnection of the supply. In such cases, the wiring from the
push-button to the switch shall comply with 563.3: Areas of fire
Note: See also 551.6.2 of 551: LV generating sets

539.2 Isolation of premises
Definition: Electrical installation: For the purposes of this clause, an electrical installation requiring a completion
certificate in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 63.
In premises containing a single electrical installation the main isolating switch shall comply with 462.2. Premises
containing more than one electrical installation shall comply with the following:
539.2.1 A premises having two units, each with an individual electrical installation, such as a
shop or office with separate overhead residential accommodation, shall have:
- where there is a common entrance, a single common main isolating switch located within 2m of
the main doorway.
- where there are separate entrances, a main isolating switch for each unit located within 2 m of
the main doorway.
539.2.2 A commercial premises containing separate units, each with an individual electrical installation, shall have
a main isolating switch located within 2m of each unit entrance.
539.2.3 A shopping mall containing separate units, each with an individual electrical installation and centralised
metering, shall have a main isolating switch, the operation and control of which shall be at a point located within 2m
of each main entrance.
539.2.4 An apartment block having a single entrance shall have a main isolating switch located with 2m of the main
entrance.
539.2.5 An apartment block having a separate entrance for each unit shall have an individual main isolating switch
for each apartment located within 2m of the main entrance to each apartment.
539.3 Switch rooms

Where a main switch room is provided, it shall comply with the following:
a) The main incoming supply shall be capable of isolation at its point of entry.
b) The supply cable within the switch room shall not exceed 3m in length.
c) The remote control devices for the main isolating switch shall be located within 2m of each main entrance to the
building.
d) A switch room located within the main building shall have at least one external wall containing a door providing
easy access directly from outdoors.
e) A switch room located in a separate building shall be provided with means for easy access for authorized persons.
f) Adequate lighting shall be provided in switch rooms in accordance with Section 513.1. In addition, emergency
lighting shall be provided which shall be designed, installed and maintained to provide an adequate degree of
illumination in the event of failure of the normal electricity supply. Where emergency lighting is provided it shall be
designed, installed and maintained in accordance with current Irish standards.
539.4 Fire- fighter’s switch for high -voltage discharge-lighting circuits
Note 1: See also 559.14: High-voltage discharge-lighting installations.

Note 2: The term “high voltage” used in this clause refers to a rated voltage exceeding 1000V. In other parts of the Rules e.g. Chapter 44, the term
“medium voltage” is used for voltages exceeding 1000V.
539.4.1 A fire- fighter’s switch shall be provided for the purpose of disconnecting all poles of the supply to outdoor
high - voltage discharge-lighting installations.
The fire- fighter’s switch shall be located outside the building, in a conspicuous position adjacent to the discharge-
lighting equipment and shall be accessible to fire- fighters. Where this is impracticable, a notice indicating the location
of that switch shall be placed adjacent to the discharge-lighting equipment.
The arrangement shall have the agreement of the fire authority.
116
539.4.2 Where more than one fire- fighter’s switch is installed on a building, each switch shall be permanently
labelled to indicate the part of the equipment that it controls. The arrangement shall have the agreement of the fire
authority.
Note: Unless it is impracticable, all outdoor high -voltage discharge-lighting equipment should be controlled by a single switch.
539.4.3 Indoor high- voltage discharge-lighting equipment shall be controlled by a fire- fighter’s switch or switches
located at each entrance. In addition, an isolating switch shall be provided for, and adjacent to, each discharge- lighting
assembly.
539.4.4 A fire- fighter’s switch shall consist of either:
- a switching device that disconnects the supply directly, or

- a device such as a push-button that actuates a remote switching device effecting disconnection of the supply.
539.4.5 A fire- fighter’s switch shall:

- be coloured red and have fixed on or near it a nameplate marked with the words “FIRE - FIGHTER’S SWITCH”.
The nameplate shall be 150 mm by 100 mm in size. The lettering shall be easily legible from a distance appropriate
to the local conditions, but shall be at least 13 mm high, and
- have its ON and OFF positions clearly indicated in lettering legible to a person standing on the ground at the position
of the switch, the OFF position being at the top.
Note: It is desirable that the name plate be marked with the name of the company that installed or (if different) maintains the installation.
539.4.6 A fire- fighter’s switch shall preferably be provided with a locking device that secures it in the OFF position.
Annex 53A: Residual current protective devices

Annex 53B: Protection of meter tails
117
Chapter 54: Earthing arrangements, protective conductors and equipotential

bonding
CONTENTS
FOREWORD
541 SCOPE
542 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS

542.2 Earth electrodes
542.3 Earthing conductors
542.4 Main earthing terminal or bar
543 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
543.1 Minimum cross-sectional areas

543.2 Types of protective conductor
543.3 Electrical continuity of protective conductors
543.4 Main protective conductor
543.5 PEN conductors
543.6 Combined protective and functional earthing
543.7 Arrangement of protective conductors
543.8 Reinforced protective conductors for leakage currents exceeding 10mA
544 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING CONDUCTORS
544.1 Main bonding arrangements

544.2 Supplementary and local bonding arrangements
LIST OF ANNEXES
FOREWORD
This chapter implements CENELEC HD 384.5.54: 2007. It includes Special National Conditions (SNCs) approved
by CENELEC for Ireland.
541 SCOPE
541.1 This chapter deals with the earthing arrangements, protective conductors and equipotential bonding needed
to satisfy the safety of the installation.
The equipment for these protective measures shall include the following:
- earth electrode (542.2),
- earthing conductor (542.3),
- main earthing terminal or bar (542.4),
- protective conductors (543),
- equipotential bonding conductors (544).
Note 1: For specific purposes, for example to prevent a build up of dangerous static electricity charges, separate earthing and bonding systems may
be required.
Note 2: See Figure 54.1
118
542 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS

542.1.1 Earthing arrangements may be used jointly or separately for protective and functional purposes according
to the requirements of the installation. The requirements for protective earthing shall, in all cases, take precedence over
functional earthing arrangements.
542.1.2 Where provided, earth electrodes within an installation shall be connected to the main earthing terminal or
bar, using an earthing conductor.
542.1.3 Where a supply is taken at a voltage higher than low voltage, protection from faults between the higher-
voltage system and earth shall be provided in accordance with 442.
542.1.4 The selection and erection of the equipment of the earthing arrangements shall be such that:
a) The connection with earth is suitable for the protective and functional requirements of the installation and can be
relied upon to remain effective.
b) Earth-fault currents and leakage currents can be carried without danger, particularly from thermal, thermo-
mechanical and electro-mechanical stresses, and provided:
- it is adequately robust or has additional mechanical protection appropriate to the assessed conditions of external
influences, and
- it is suitable for functional requirements, where relevant.
542.2 Earth electrodes
542.2.1 The materials and dimensions of the earth electrodes shall be selected to withstand corrosion and to have
adequate mechanical strength.
For large new buildings, consideration shall be given to the erection of a foundation earth electrode. Where this
electrode is embedded in concrete, measures shall be taken to avoid corrosion such as the following:
i) a certain quality of concrete where necessary; and
ii) a distance of at least 5 cm between the electrode and the surface of the concrete.
Where earth electrodes are buried in the soil, protection against mechanical damage and corrosion for commonly-
used materials may be deemed to be achieved by compliance with Annex 54A.
Note 1: Annex 54A contains information on commonly- used materials for earth electrodes from the point of view of corrosion and mechanical
strength.
Note 2: If a lightning protection system is present, IEC 61024 -1 applies.
542.2.2 Consideration shall be given to local soil conditions. One or more electrodes shall be selected, depending
on soil conditions and the maximum permissible value of impedance to earth.
542.2.3 The following types of earth electrodes may be used:
a) General:
- earth rods or pipes,

- earth tapes or wires,
- earth plates,
- electrodes embedded in foundations,
- earthing grids,
- metal reinforcement of concrete embedded in the ground,
- other suitable underground structures.
b) Small installations:
For installations with a supply rating not exceeding 250 A, a single earth electrode complying with the following is
deemed to be sufficient:
- a hot-dip galvanized- steel rod or pipe having a diameter of at least 16 mm driven vertically into the ground to a depth
of at least 1200 mm.
119
- a copper- bonded or copper-clad high- tensile steel rod having a diameter of at least 9 mm driven vertically into the
ground to a depth of not less than 1200 mm.
- a length of at least 4500 mm of a rod, strip or wire having a minimum cross-sectional area of 35mm2 copper or
100mm2 galvanized steel laid horizontally in the ground at a depth of at least 800 mm.
- any other arrangement providing a connection with earth at least as effective and reliable as the foregoing.
Note: The efficacy of an earth electrode depends on local soil conditions. More than one earth electrode may be required to achieve the required
minimum value of earth resistance, depending on the size of the installation and the type of earthing system (TN or TT).
542.2.4 The type of earth electrode and its embedded depth shall be such that soil drying or freezing is unlikely to
increase the earth resistance of the electrode above the required value that would impair the protective measures
against electric shock in Chapter 41.
Note: Below 800 mm large variations in the earth resistance are less likely to occur.
542.2.5 Account shall be taken of the possible effects of electrolytic corrosion when using different materials in an
earthing arrangement.
Note 1: See Annex 54A.

Note 2: Consideration should be given to the fact that foundation earth- electrodes made of steel embedded in concrete have an electrochemical
potential similar to that of copper in earth.
542.2.6 Metal pipe systems of other services such as water, gas, fuel supply and central heating systems shall not
be used as earth electrodes.
Note: Such systems must nevertheless be bonded to the main earthing terminal (See 544.1). This requirement does not preclude the protective
bonding of such pipes for compliance with Chapter 41
542.2.7 Underground structural metalwork embedded in foundations, and metal reinforcement of concrete which are
used as earth electrodes shall have a reliable connection between the earthing conductor and the structural metalwork
or reinforcement. The connection shall be made by welding or with suitable mechanical connectors. The point of
connection of the earthing conductor shall be accessible.
Note: See 542.3.3
542.2.8 Earth electrodes shall not be simply immersed in the water of a stream, river, pond, lake or similar situation.
Note: Earth electrodes directly in water may lead to the risk of shock to persons who may be in contact with the water during an electric fault.
542.3 Earthing conductors
542.3.1 An earthing conductor shall have a cross-sectional area complying with Table 54A. An earthing conductor
buried in the ground shall have a cross-sectional area complying with Table 54B.
An earthing conductor in an installation having a supply rating not exceeding 250A shall consist of insulated copper
conductor.
TABLE 54A: MINIMUM CROSS-SECTIONAL AREAS OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS
SE/2 SE/2
Note 1: The largest phase (or line) conductors are the “meter tails” in domestic and similar installations.
Note 2: k1 is the value of k for the phase (or line conductor) selected from Table 43A in Chapter 43 according to the materials of
the conductor and insulation. k2 is the value of k for the earthing conductor selected from Annex 54B.
120
ETCI Nat Rules 2008 _ 2013 (2016).qxp_Layout 1 43
11/05/2016 15:40 Page 133
Note 2: k1 k for the phase (or line) conductor selected from Table 43A in
Chapter according to the materials of the conductor and insulation.
k2 value of k for the earthing conductor selected from Annex 54B.
TABLE 54B
MINIMUM CROSS-SECTIONAL AREAS OF BURIED EARTHING CONDUCTOR

TABLE 54B: MINIMUM CROSS-SECTIONAL AREAS OF BURIED EARTHING CONDUCTOR
Minimum cross-sectional Minimum cross-sectional

Earthing conductor area mm2 protected against area mm2 not protected
mechanical damage against mechanical
damage
copper steel copper steel

Protected against 10 16 16 16
corrosion
Not protected against 25 50 25 50
corrosion
Where exposed to the likelihood of mechanical damage, the earthing conductor shall be suitably protected.
Note: The protection may consist of conduit or pipe, of metal or heavy-duty PVC. Where the mechanical protection against impact can withstand
5 J of impact energy or equivalent (e.g. a Heavy degree of protection for conduits according to I.S.EN 61386-1), the earthing conductor
is considered to be mechanically protected.
542.3.2 The connection

The protection may consist of conduit or pipe, of metal or heavy-duty PVC.
Where the of an earthing
mechanical conductor
protection against to an earth
impact electrode
can withstand 5 J shall have
of impact adequate electrical conductivity and
energy
or equivalent
shall be mechanically robust.(e.g. a Heavy
It shall be degree of protection
protected againstfor conduits according
corrosion by means to I.S.EN 61386-1),
of suitable protective tape, except where
the earthing conductor is considered to be mechanically protected.
exothermic welding is used.
Where a clamp
a is used, it shall not damage the electrode or the earthing conductor. Clamps shall be of a suitable type,
protected
and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The use of perforated metal
tape, except where exothermic welding is strip
used.for this
purpose is prohibited.
Note 1: See 542.2.7

Note 2: Connections or fittings that depend solely on solder do not provide reliable or adequate mechanical strength.
542.3.3 The connection of an earthing conductor to an earth electrode shall be enclosed in a suitable box having a
close-fitting cover, or by other means providing equally effective protection.
Note: This does not apply in the case of a multi-electrode earthing grid e.g. in a foundation earth electrode in a large installation.
542.3.4 The connection of an earthing conductor to an earth electrode shall be accessible for inspection.
Notwithstanding this requirement, in public places the connection need only be accessible for initial inspection and
testing after the completion of the installation.
542.3.5 A permanent label inscribed “SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION – DO NOT REMOVE” shall be
permanently affixed to the connection of an earthing conductor to an earth electrode.
542.3.6 Where an installation contains a main distribution board and associated distribution boards, a protective
conductor may also serve as an earthing conductor for each subordinate board.
542.4 Main earthing terminal or bar
542.4.1 In every installation a main earthing terminal or bar shall be provided and the following conductors shall be
connected to it:
- earthing conductors,
- protective conductors, including the main protective conductor,
- main equipotential bonding conductors,
- functional earthing conductors if required,
- lightning protection system, where required.
Note 1: It is not necessary to connect every individual protective conductor directly to the main earthing terminal where it is connected to this
terminal by other protective conductors.
Note 2: The main earthing terminal may, in general, be used for functional earthing purposes. For Information Technology equipment, it is then
regarded as the main connection point to the earth electrode network.
542.4.2 It shall be possible to disconnect each conductor individually from the main earthing terminal or bar, but only
by the use of a tool.
Note: Disconnection of the earthing conductor is necessary to permit the measurement of the resistance of the earth electrode.
121
543 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
543.1 Minimum cross-sectional areas
A protective conductor shall be provided for connection to all exposed conductive parts and to the earthing terminals
of equipment and accessories. The cross-sectional area of a protective conductor shall satisfy the relevant requirements
of Chapter 41, and shall be capable of withstanding the prospective fault-current.
The cross-sectional area of a protective conductor shall be either:
- selected in accordance with 543.1.1, or

- calculated in accordance with 543.1.2.
It shall not, in any case, be less than the minimum values specified in 543.1.3. Equipment terminals for protective
conductors shall be capable of accepting conductors having dimensions required by this sub-clause.
Note: Calculation in accordance with 543.1.2 may be necessary if the choice of cross-sectional areas of line/phase conductors has been determined
by considerations of short-circuit current.
543.1.1 Selection of cross-sectional area of a protective conductor
The cross-sectional area of a protective conductor shall comply with Table 54C
If the application of Table 54C produces a non-standard size, a conductor of at least the next larger size shall be
selected
TABLE 54C: MINIMUM CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR IN RELATION

TO THE CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA OF THE ASSOCIATED PHASE/LINE CONDUCTOR
Note 1: k1 is the value of k for the phase conductor selected from Table 43A in Chapter 43 according to the materials of
the conductor and insulation k2 is the value of k for the protective conductor selected from Annex 54B.
Note 2: Some sizes of cable armouring do not comply with Table 54C. Compliance with 543.1.2 must be verified in
some cases.
In TT systems, the cross-sectional area of protective conductors need not exceed:
- 25 mm2 copper
- 35 mm2 aluminium,
provided the earth electrodes respectively of the supply neutral and of the exposed conductive parts are electrically
independent.
543.1.2 Calculation of cross-sectional area of protective conductor
The cross-sectional area of a protective conductor shall be not smaller than the value determined either:
122
- in accordance with IEC 60949, or
- by the following formula applicable only for disconnection times not exceeding 5s:
___
S = √ I2 t
k
where:
S is the cross-sectional area in mm2.
I is the value of fault current in amperes (a.c. r.m.s) which can flow through the protective device for a fault of
negligible impedance.
t is the corresponding operating time in seconds of the disconnection device.
k is a factor dependant on the materials of the protective conductor, insulation and other parts, and on the initial and
final temperatures achieved as a result of a fault. The value of k shall be determined in accordance with Annex 54B
If the application of the formula produces a non-standard size of conductor, a conductor of the next larger size shall
be chosen.
Where metal coverings of cables consist of wire with a lead-alloy sheath, the conductance of that sheath may be taken
into account in assessing the value of the conductance.
Note 1: For the measurement of fault-loop impedance, see 613.6 and 613.13.
Note 2: Maximum permissible temperatures for connections should be taken into account.
Note 3: See also Chapter 43 concerning short-circuit protection.
Note 4: In potentially explosive atmospheres limitations apply - see ET 105
Note 5: Metal sheaths of mineral-insulated cable – calculation is not necessary since the sheath can carry a higher current than the line conductors
Note 6: Account should be taken of the effect of circuit impedance and the limiting capability (Joule Integral) of the protective device.
543.1.3 The cross-sectional area of a protective conductor that does not form part of the cable or which is not in a
common enclosure with the line conductor shall be not less than :
where protected against mechanical damage:
- circuits for lighting: 1.5 mm2 copper [SNC]

- other circuits: 2.5 mm2 copper,
where not protected against mechanical damage:
- circuits for lighting: 2.5 mm2 copper,

- other circuits: 4 mm2 copper.
543.1.4 Where a protective conductor is common to two or more circuits, its cross-sectional area shall be:
- at least equal to that of the largest line/phase conductor in those circuits, or
- calculated in accordance with 543.1.2 for the most onerous prospective fault-current and operating time encountered
in these circuits
543.2 Types of protective conductors
Note: See Chapter 52 regarding the selection and erection of protective conductors. See 514 for colour identification of protective conductors.
543.2.1 Protective conductors may consist of any of the following:
- conductors in multi-core cables,
- insulated conductors in a common enclosure with live conductors,
123
- fixed bare or insulated conductors,
- single-core cables,
- metal coverings of cables, e.g. sheaths, screens, armouring, wire-braid, concentric conductor, subject to the
requirements of 543.2.4,
- metal conduit, trunking and other metal enclosures of conductors, but excluding flexible conduit not specifically
designed for use as a protective conductor subject to, in addition, 543.2.4.
Note 1: A single-core cable used as a protective conductor with armoured cable need not be similarly protected in locations where there is no risk
of damage (522.6)
Note 2: See also 543.6
543.2.2 Where the installation contains equipment having metal enclosures such as low-voltage switchgear or control
gear assemblies complying with I.S.EN 60439-1, or busbar trunking systems complying with I.S.EN 60439-2, the
metal enclosures or frames may be used as protective conductors if they simultaneously satisfy the following three
requirements:
a) Their electrical continuity shall be assured by construction or by suitable connection against mechanical damage
and chemical or electrochemical deterioration.
b) They shall comply with 543.1 even when covers or lids are removed.
c) They shall have provision for the connection of other protective conductors at every predetermined tap-off point.
543.2.3 The following metal parts shall not be used as protective conductors:
- flexible metal conduit not designed for the purpose,

- flexible metal parts,
- cable trays and cable ladders,
- extraneous conductive parts, e.g.
- water pipes,
- pipes containing flammable gases or liquids,
- constructional parts,
- support wires,
Note: Extraneous conductive parts are required to be bonded nevertheless.
543.2.4 Metal coverings of cables, metal conduit and metal trunking used as protective conductors shall comply
with the following:
a) Protection against mechanical damage and chemical and electrochemical deterioration of connections and joints shall
be assured.
b) Their conductance shall comply with 543.1, and it shall be maintained even when covers or lids are removed.
c) Joints in metal trunking shall be made by substantial screw devices, mechanical clamps, straps or other suitable
means to ensure that the connections are electrically and mechanically sound.
543.3 Electrical continuity of protective conductors
543.3.1 Protective conductors shall be suitably protected against mechanical damage, chemical or electro-chemical
deterioration, electro-dynamic forces and thermodynamic forces.
543.3.2 Joints in protective conductors shall be accessible for inspection and testing except for the following:
- compound-filled joints,
- encapsulated joints,
- joints forming part of equipment complying with appropriate standards.
124
543.3.3 Switching devices shall not be installed in a protective conductor. Joints that can be disconnected only by
the use of a tool may be provided for the purposes of testing.
543.3.4 Where electrical monitoring of earthing continuity is used, the operating coils or other dedicated devices shall
not be connected in series in protective conductors.
543.3.5 Exposed conductive parts of apparatus shall not form part of a protective conductor except where permissible
according to 543.2.2.
543.4 Main protective conductor
543.4.1 In a TN-C-S earthing-system, a main protective conductor shall connect the main earthing-terminal or bar
to the neutral conductor of the supply in accordance with Chapter 41. The conductor shall comply with 543.1 except
that it shall have a cross-sectional area not less than 10 mm2 copper.
543.4.2 The connection of the main protective- conductor to the neutral pole of the supply shall be made at a point
specified by the DSO.
543.5 PEN conductor
543.5.1 A PEN conductor shall only be used in fixed electrical installations. For the purposes of mechanical strength,
it shall have a cross-sectional area not less than 10 mm2 copper or 16mm2 aluminium.
543.5.2 The PEN conductor shall be insulated for the nominal voltage of the system. Metal enclosures of wiring
systems shall not be used as PEN conductors, except in the case of busbar trunking complying with I.S.EN 60439-2.
543.5.3 If, from a point in an installation, the neutral and protective functions are provided by separate conductors,
those conductors shall remain separate beyond that point.
It is permissible to form more than one neutral conductor and more than one protective conductor from the PEN
conductor.
At the point of separation, separate terminals shall be provided for the protective and neutral conductors. In this case,
the PEN conductor shall be connected to the terminal intended for the protective conductor.
543.5.4 Extraneous conductive parts shall not be used as PEN conductors.
543.5.5 A PEN conductor shall not be used in final circuits.
543.6 Combined protective and functional earthing
543.6.1 Where a combined protective and functional earthing conductor is used, it shall satisfy the requirements for
a protective conductor. In addition, it shall also comply with the relevant functional requirements.
543.6.2 A d.c. return conductor PEL* or PEM* for a power supply to Information Technology equipment may
also serve as a combined functional earthing and protective conductor.
* Note: For d.c circuits, PEL means having one (line)pole earthed; PEM means having the mid- point earthed.
543.6.3 Extraneous conductive- parts shall not be used as PEL or PEM conductors.
543.7 Arrangement of protective conductors
When overcurrent protective devices are used for protection against electric shock, the protective conductor shall be
incorporated in the same wiring system as the live conductors or be located in their immediate proximity.
543.8 Reinforced protective conductors for leakage currents exceeding 10 mA
For current-using equipment intended for permanent connection and having a leakage current exceeding 10 mA,
reinforced protective conductors shall comply with one of the following:
a) The protective conductor shall have a cross-sectional area of at least 10mm2 copper, or 16 mm2 aluminium through
its total run.
125
b) A second protective conductor of at least the same cross-sectional area as required for protection against indirect
contact shall be laid up to a point where the protective conductor has a cross- sectional area not less than 10 mm2 copper
or16 mm2 aluminium. In this case, the equipment or appliance shall have a separate terminal for a second protective
conductor
Note 1: In TN-C system earthing, a PEN conductor leakage- current may be deemed to be part of the load current.
Note 2: RCDs may not be compatible with circuits with high leakage currents.
544 EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING CONDUCTORS
544.1 Main bonding conductors
544.1.1 Main bonding conductors shall connect extraneous conductive parts of the main engineering services in a
building such as pipe-work for gas, water and central heating and ducting for air conditioning, to the main earthing
terminal.
544.1.2 In each building, the main bonding system shall comprise connections between the following conductive
parts:
- main earthing terminal,

- metal pipes supplying services within the building, such as gas oil, water,
- structural metal parts,
- central heating and air- conditioning systems,
- main metal reinforcement of reinforced concrete structures, if practicable.
For conductive parts originating outside the building, the bonding connections shall be made as close as practicable
to their points of entry to the building.
544.1.3 Main bonding conductors provided for the main bonding system according to 411.3.2 shall have a
conductivity (i.e. equivalent cross-sectional area) at least half that of the largest protective conductor in the installation,
but shall not be less than:
- 10 mm2 copper [SNC], or

- 16 mm2 aluminium, or
- 50 mm2 steel.
Notwithstanding these requirements, in general, the cross-sectional area need not exceed 70 mm2 copper or the
equivalent values for other materials..
544.1.4 The connection of a main bonding conductor to a service pipe shall be made with a suitable clamp. The use
of perforated metal- strip for the purpose is prohibited.
544.1.5 A permanent label inscribed “SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION – DO NOT REMOVE” shall be
permanently affixed at each main bonding connection
544.1.6 In the case of mains gas services, the main electrical bonding connection shall be made on the consumer’s
side of the gas meter (and flexible pipe), but not in the meter box or enclosure.
Where the mains gas service is of metal and does not contain an insulating piece, a main bonding connector shall
interconnect the metal pipe - work on either side of the gas meter (and flexible pipe).
Note: When making this connection, the bonding conductor should first be connected to the customer’s side of the meter, and then connected to
the mains side
544.1.7 Multi-occupancy buildings
Where the metal engineering services are common to each unit in a multi-occupancy building, a bonding conductor
shall connect the metal pipe- work or ducting of each incoming engineering service to the main earthing terminal or
bar of the sub-distribution board serving that unit. The bonding conductor shall have a cross-sectional area of at least
2.5 mm2.
Note: See Figure 54.2.
126
544.2 Supplementary bonding conductors and local equipotential bonding
544.2.1 Supplementary equipotential bonding applied in a location shall connect all extraneous conductive- parts and
exposed conductive parts in a location.
544.2.2 Supplementary bonding conductors shall consist of insulated copper- conductors with a cross- sectional
area in accordance with 544.2.3 or 544.2.4, but not less than 2.5mm2 where mechanical protection is provided, or
4mm2 where mechanical protection is not provided.
544.2.3 A supplementary bonding conductor connecting two exposed conductive parts shall have a cross-sectional
area not less than that of the smaller protective conductor connected to the exposed conductive parts.
Conductors are deemed to be mechanically protected if they are laid in conduit, trunkings or mouldings, or protected
in a similar way.
544.2.4 A supplementary bonding conductor connecting an exposed conductive part to an extraneous conductive part
shall have a cross-sectional area not less than half the cross-sectional area of the corresponding protective conductor.
544.2.5 Supplementary bonding may be achieved by use of extraneous conductive parts of a permanent nature, such
as structural metalwork, or by supplementary conductors, or by a combination of those.
544.2.6 The connection of a supplementary bonding conductor to a metal pipe shall comply with 544.1.3 and
544.1.4.
544.2.7 A permanent label inscribed “SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE” shall be
permanently affixed at the supplementary bonding connection to each pipe.
544.2.8 In kitchens and utility rooms extraneous conductive parts shall be connected by supplementary bonding to
a local protective conductor. Metal sink draining boards may be bonded either:
- directly by a connection to a lug or fixing on the sink or draining board, or
- at connected pipe-work where adequate conductivity exists.
Where such items are not installed by the time the electrical installation is otherwise complete, a bonding conductor
shall be provided from a local protective conductor to a termination which is permanently fixed and enclosed in a
suitable box located in an appropriate position. The box shall be labelled: “BONDING CONDUCTOR FOR
SINK/DRAINING BOARDS”.
Annex 54A; Minimum sizes for earth electrodes of commonly-used materials from the point of view of corrosion and
mechanical strength
Annex 54B: Method of deriving the value of k.
Annex 54C: Recommendations for the earthing of IT installations
127
128
Fig. 54.1: Explanatory diagram: Earthing, protective conducttors and bonding.

Fig. 54.2: Earthing and equipotential arrangement in multi-occupancy buildings.
129
Chapter 55: Other Equipment

CONTENTS
551 LOW VOLTAGE GENERATING SETS

552
ELECTRIC MOTORS
553 TRANSFORMERS, REACTORS AND POWER-FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
554 PLUGS, SOCKET-OUTLETS AND CABLE COUPLERS
555 ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES
556 RESERVED
557 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR MACHINERY
558 RESERVED
559 LUMINAIRES AND LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
551 LOW-VOLTAGE GENERATING SETS

551.1 Scope and power sources
551.1. 1 Scope
This section applies to low-voltage and extra-low voltage installations that incorporate generating sets intended to
supply, either continuously or occasionally, all or part of the installation. The following supply arrangements are
considered:
- supply to an installation that is not connected to the supply network;

- supply to an installation as a standby to the supply network.
This section does not apply to self-contained items of extra-low voltage electrical equipment which incorporate both
the source of energy and the energy-using load and for which there is a specific product standard incorporating the
requirements for electrical safety.
Note 1: Particular requirements for supplies for safety services are given in Chapter 56.
Note 2: Requirements of the DSO should be ascertained before a generating set is installed in an installation connected to the supply network.
551.1.2 Power sources
Generating sets with the following power sources are included:

- combustion engines,
- turbines,
- micro-generators complying with I.S. EN50438,
- electric motors,
- solar photovoltaic cells,
- electrochemical accumulators,
- other suitable sources.
Note: See also 712: Solar photo-voltaic installations.
551.1.3 Electrical characteristics
Generating sets with the following electrical characteristics are included:

- mains-excited and separately-excited synchronous generators,
- mains-excited and self-excited asynchronous generators,
- mains-commutated and self-commutated static inverters with or without by-pass facilities,
- generating sets with other suitable electrical characteristics.
551.1.4 Purposes
Generating sets may be used for the following purposes:
130
- supply to permanent installations,

- supply to temporary installations,
- supply to portable equipment which is not connected to a permanent installation,
- supply to mobile units in accordance with 717.

551.2.1 The means of excitation and commutation shall be appropriate for the intended use of the generating set.
The safety and proper functioning of other sources of supply shall not be impaired by the generating set.
Note: See 551.7 for particular requirements where the generating set may operate in parallel with the supply network.
551.2.2 The prospective short-circuit current and prospective earth-fault current shall be assessed for each source
of supply or combination of sources. The short-circuit rating of protective devices within the installation, and where
appropriate, connected to the supply network, shall not be exceeded under any of the intended methods of operation
of the sources.
551.2.3 Where the generating set is intended to provide an independent or alternative supply to an installation, the
capacity and operating characteristics of the generating set shall be such that danger or damage to equipment does not
arise after the connection or disconnection of any intended load as a result of the deviation of the voltage or frequency
from the intended operating range.
Means shall be provided to automatically disconnect such parts of the installation as may be necessary if the capacity
of the generating set is exceeded.
Note 1: Attention should be given to the size of individual loads as a proportion of the capacity of the generating set, and to motor starting currents.
Note 2: Attention should be given to the power factor of the load .
Note 3: The erection of a generating set within an existing building or installation may change the conditions of external influence for the
installation, for example by the introduction of vibration, increased temperatures or noxious gases.
551.2.4 Means for isolation in accordance with 462 and 537.2 shall be provided for each source or combination of
sources of supply.
551.3 Protection against electric shock by SELV or PELV
Additional requirements for SELV and PELV systems where the installation is supplied from more than one source:
551.3.1 Where a SELV or a PELV system may be supplied by more than one source, the requirements of 414.3 shall
apply to each source. Where one or more of the sources is earthed, the requirements of 414.4 shall apply. If one or more
of the sources does not comply with 414.3, the system shall be deemed to be a FELV system which shall comply with
411.7.
551.3.2 Where it is necessary to maintain the supply to an extra-low voltage system following the loss of one or more
sources of supply, each source of supply or combination of sources of supply, which can operate independently of other
sources or combinations, shall be capable of supplying the intended load of the extra-low voltage systems.
Provision shall be made so that the loss of low voltage supply to an extra-low voltage system does not lead to danger
or damage to other extra-low voltage equipment.
Note: Such precautions may be necessary in supplies for safety services.
551.4 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault
551.4.1 Fault-protection shall be provided for the installation in respect of each source of supply or combination of
sources of supply that can operate independently of other sources or combinations of sources.
The fault protective measures shall be such that, where different fault-protective provisions within the installation are
provided for various sources of supply, those measures will remain effective in all situations.
Note: This may be achieved e.g. by the use of separate earthing systems.
551.4.2 The generating set shall be installed so that any protection within the installation by RCDs in accordance
with Chapter 41 remains effective for every combination of sources of supply.
131
551.4.3 Protection by automatic disconnection of supply
551.4.3.1 Protection by automatic disconnection of the supply shall be provided in accordance with section 411.3,
except as modified for particular cases by 551.4.2 or 551.4.3.
551.4.3.2 Additional requirements for installations where the generating set provides a switched alternative
to the supply network (stand-by systems).
Protection by automatic disconnection of supply shall not rely upon the connection to the earthed point of the supply
network when the generator is operating as a switched alternative to a TN system. A suitable earthing arrangement shall
be provided.
551.4.3.3 Additional requirements for installations incorporating static inverters.
551.4.3.3.1 Where protection against indirect contact for parts of the installation supplied by the static devices on
the supply side of the by-pass switch is not within the time required by 411.3, supplementary equipotential bonding
shall be provided between simultaneously accessible exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts on the
load side of the static inverter in accordance with 416.2.
The resistance of supplementary equipotential bonding conductors required between simultaneously accessible
conductive parts shall fulfil the following condition:
R ≤ 50 V
Ia
where
R is the resistance in ohms
Ia is the maximum earth fault current in amperes which can be supplied by the static inverter alone for a period of up
to 5s.
Note: Where such equipment is intended to operate in parallel with the supply network the requirements of clause 551.7 also apply.
551.4.3.3.2 Precautions shall be taken or equipment shall be selected so that the correct operation of protective
devices is not impaired by d.c. currents generated by a static inverter or the presence of filters.
551.4.3.3.3 A means of isolation shall be installed on both sides of a static inverter.
Note: Suitable connection arrangements may consist of plug and socket-outlets complying with I.S.EN 60309-1, and -2.
551.5.1 Where a device for detecting overcurrent is provided, it shall be located as near as practicable to the generator
terminals.
Note: The contribution to the prospective short-circuit current from a generating set, being time-dependent, may be much less than the contribution
from the supply network.
551.5.2 Where a generating set is intended to operate in parallel with the supply network or where two or more
generating sets may operate in parallel, circulating harmonic currents shall be limited so that the thermal rating of the
conductor insulation is not exceeded.
The effects of circulating harmonic currents may be limited by:
- the selection of generating sets with compensating windings,

- the provision of a suitable impedance in the connection to generator star points,
- the provision of switches that interrupt the circulatory circuit and are interlocked so that protection against indirect
contact is not impaired,
- the provision of equipment that limits harmonic currents,
- other suitable means.
Note 1: Account should be taken of the increased voltages that may be produced across equipment for limiting circulating harmonics.
Note 2: The level of harmonic disturbances may be measured by monitoring equipment complying with IEC 61557-12.
132
551.6 Additional requirements for installation where a generating set provides a standby supply to the network
supply or where connecting facilities are provided for portable or mobile generators:
551.6.1 Precautions shall be taken to prevent a standby generator operating in parallel with the main supply. This
shall be achieved by suitable mechanical and/or electro-mechanical interlocks between the respective switching
devices.
Such interlocks include:

- a system of locks with one key,
- a three-position break-before-make change-over switch,
- an automatic changeover switching device with a suitable interlock,
- other means providing equal security of operation.
551.6.2 Where automatic changeover is provided, isolation for maintenance shall in addition comply with the
following:
a) Isolation shall be effected by a single action.

b) Isolation shall prevent unintended operation of the standby generator.

c) All control units shall be de-energised e.g. control circuits of night storage installations.
Note 1: Isolation should include supplies to control circuits of the standby generator.
Note 2: See also 462 and 537.2.
551.6.3 For TN-S systems where the neutral is not switched, any residual current device shall be located to avoid
incorrect operation due to the existence of any parallel neutral earth path.
Note: It may be desirable in TN systems to disconnect the neutral of the installation from the supply network neutral to avoid disturbances such
as induced voltage surges caused by lightning.
551.6.4 Where provided, the facilities in a fixed installation for the connection of a portable or a mobile generator
shall include the following:
a) Precautions to prevent a portable or mobile generator operating in parallel with the normal supply by means of a
secure mechanical or electromechanical interlocking system, e.g.
- a system of locks with only one key, or

- a three-position break-before-make changeover switch.
b) A supply inlet consisting of a plug complying with I.S. EN 60369 Parts 1 and 2.
c) An isolating switch that switches all live conductors, mounted at a distance not exceeding 2m from the supply inlet.
d) A designated location for the generator, with adequate ventilation and means for the removal of exhaust gases, and
with devices for detecting carbon monoxide gas.
551.7 Additional requirements for installations where the generating set may operate in parallel with the
DSO’s network.
551.7.1 Where a generating set is used as an additional source of supply in parallel with the DSO network or other
source of supply, it shall be ensured that the installation is protected against harmful thermal effects in accordance with
Chapter 42, and against overcurrents in accordance with Chapter 43 in all situations.
Except where an uninterruptible power supply is provided to supply specific items of equipment within the final circuit
to which it is connected, such a generating set shall be installed on the supply side of all the protective devices for the
final circuits of the installation.
551.7.2 Notwithstanding the foregoing, a generating set may be installed on the load side of all protective devices
for a final circuit of the installation, provided the following additional requirements are fulfilled:
a) The conductors of the final circuit shall comply with the following:
IZ ≥ In + Ig
133
where:
IZ is the current-carrying capacity of the final circuit conductors,

In is the rated current of the protective device of the final circuit,
Ig is the rated output current of the generating set;
b) A micro-generator shall be connected to the installation in accordance with 551.9;

c) an RCD protecting the final circuit in accordance with 411.3 or 416.1 shall disconnect all live conductors, including
the neutral;
d) the phase and neutral conductors of the final circuit and of the generating set shall not be connected to earth.
Note: Except where the RCDs disconnect phase and neutral conductors, the disconnecting time is the sum of the disconnection time of the
protective device and the time taken for the output voltage of the generating set to fall to 50V a.c.
551.7.3 In selecting and using a generating set intended to run in parallel with the DSO’s network, care shall be
taken to avoid adverse effects on the network and on other installations.
The DSO shall be consulted about its requirements. For synchronization, the use of automatic systems shall be
considered.
551.7.4 Protection devices shall be provided to disconnect the generating set from the supply system in the event of
loss of that supply or deviation of the voltage or frequency at the supply terminals from values declared for normal
supply.
The type of protection devices and their sensitivity and operating times shall be compatible with the protection of the
supply network and shall be agreed with the DSO.
Where static inverters are installed, means of switching shall be installed on the load side.
551.7.5 Means shall be provided to prevent the connection of a generating set to the supply network if the voltage
and frequency of the supply are outside the limits of operation of the protection referred to in 551.7.2.
551.7.6 Measures complying with 462 and 537.2 shall be taken to enable the generating set to be isolated from the
supply network. The means of isolation shall be accessible to the supply authority.
551.7.7 Where the generating set may also operate as a switched alternative to the supply network, the installation
in that mode shall comply with 551.6.
551.8 Stationary electric batteries
551.8.1 Stationary electric batteries shall be installed so that they are accessible only to authorized persons.
Note: The battery should be installed in a secure location, or for small batteries, a secure enclosure.
551.8.2 Locations for batteries shall be adequately ventilated so as to prevent dangerous accumulations of toxic,
explosive or flammable gases.
551.8.3 Battery connections shall have basic protection by insulation or enclosures. Alternatively, bare conductive
parts with differing polarity exceeding 120V shall not be capable of being touched simultaneously by persons.
551.8.4 Where possible, the use of metal fixings and accessories shall be avoided in rooms containing batteries.
Where this is not possible, special measures, such as acid-resistant coatings, shall be taken to prevent corrosion of metal
parts.
551.8.5 Batteries installed in switch-rooms shall be of a totally enclosed type, and shall be used solely for the control
of the switchgear.
551.9 Additional requirements for installations having an additional supply from a micro-generator.
Note: Installers should check with DSO, the DoE and the local authority for any special conditions, e.g. planning.
551.9.1 The means for the connection of a micro-generator shall comply with I.S. EN 50438, having all necessary
ancillary equipment not already provided in the installation.
134
551.9.2 In the installation, a dedicated outlet shall be provided for the connection of the microgenerator. The outlet
shall be provided with the following:
i) An RCD, having a residual operating current not exceeding 30mA, that disconnects all live conductors of the
dedicated outlet. The RCD shall be type A or Type B, depending on the nature of the DC components in the system,
ii) An overcurrent protective device complying with the manufacturer’s instructions (I.S. EN 50438.4.1.2).
551.9.3 Before connecting the micro-generator to an existing installation, the installation shall be
inspected and tested in accordance with Chapter 61.
552 ELECTRIC MOTORS

The following requirements do not apply to equipment complying with I.S.EN 60204.
552.1 Motor control circuits
552.1.1 Means for the isolation and switching of electric motors shall comply with the appropriate clauses of 537.3
and 537.4 and in addition with this section.
552.1.2 In installations where equipment is remotely controlled, devices for stopping motors shall be provided at all
points where danger may occur..
552.1.3 Motor control circuits shall be designed so as to prevent any motor from restarting automatically after a
stoppage due to loss of voltage, if such restarting could cause danger.
552.1.4 Where reverse-current braking of a motor is provided, provision shall be made for the avoidance of reversal
of the direction of rotation at the end of braking if such reversal might cause danger.
552.1.5 Where safety depends on the direction of rotation of a motor, provision shall be made for the prevention of
reverse rotation, due to, for example, a reversal of phases.
Note: Attention is drawn to danger that may arise from the loss of one phase.
552.2 Protection of motors for safety
552.2.1 Where necessary to prevent danger, electric motors shall be protected against overload.
Note: See 422.2.3.
552.2.2 Where appropriate, allowances shall be made for the cumulative effect of frequent starting of motors upon
the temperature rise of equipment and associated wiring.
Note: Because of the relatively high currents that may be expected, the motor manufacturer’s instructions must be strictly observed in such cases.
552.2.3 Motors installed in areas of particular fire risk shall also comply with Chapter 42, 422.2.3.
553 TRANSFORMERS, REACTORS AND POWER-FACTOR CORRECTION

EQUIPMENT
553.1 Transformers and reactors
553.1.1 Transformers and reactors shall be installed in such a manner that they can be operated, maintained and
inspected without danger.
553.1.2 A transformer shall be protected against overcurrent by a device located on the supply side of the transformer.
553.2 Power-factor correction equipment
553.2.1 Switchgear, control gear and wiring for connection to power-factor correction equipment shall be suitable
for the highest voltage, current, and temperatures likely to occur.
Adequate means shall be provided to ensure the dissipation of heat from the equipment.
Note: Switchgear and control gear should be suitable for capacitive loads.
135
553.2.2 Where power-factor correction equipment is being installed, account shall be taken of harmonic distortions
of current. Where necessary, remedial measures shall be applied.
Note: Failure to take account of harmonic distortions may give rise to danger.
553.2.3 Power-factor correction equipment shall be provided with means for the safe discharge of stored energy and
with a warning notice with the following or similar wording
“MAKE SURE THAT CAPACITORS ARE COMPLETELY DISCHARGED BEFORE WORKING ON

EQUIPMENT”.
554 PLUGS, SOCKET-OUTLETS AND CABLE COUPLERS

554.0 Introduction
Plugs and socket-outlets for industrial and similar applications are standardized according to I.S. EN 60309 in
CENELEC member countries. They are obtainable with ratings of 16 A, 32A, 63 A and 125 A. They are also intended
for general use outdoors where rough usage is expected such as on construction sites and on farms.
Plugs and socket-outlets for general purposes indoors must comply with I.S. 411. Such socket-outlets may be installed
outdoors in domestic and similar locations provided they are contained in enclosures with a degree of protection IP
54, and provided they will not be subjected to harsh conditions or rough usage.
Non-standard types of plugs and socket-outlets are permissible for special applications (see 554.5). Circuits supplying
socket-outlets require protection by 30mA RCDs except where specifically exempted in 554.4. Such outlets are not
intended for general use e.g. for the connection of appliances.
For agricultural and horticultural installations (705), additional requirements for RCD protection apply.
554.1 General requirements for the installation of plugs and socket-outlets
554.1.1 A socket-outlet shall be so installed that it will not be subjected to undue mechanical stress or to damage in
normal service, and that a plug can easily be inserted and withdrawn without damage to the flexible cable or cord.
Socket-outlets for general purposes shall be mounted at a height not lower than 400mm and not higher than 1200mm
above floor-level. This requirement does not apply to the following:
i) Proprietary socket-outlet systems specifically designed for mounting on the floor, in skirting or on a pedestal and
normally intended for use in a commercial premises,
ii) Socket-outlets complying with 554.4.2,
iii) Socket-outlets providing dedicated connection for specific electrical appliances or equipment and normally not
accessible for general purposes. Such socket-outlets shall be mounted at a height not lower than 400 mm above floor
level.
Socket-outlets located outdoors shall be mounted at a height where they will not be affected by flooding.
554.1.2 A socket-outlet shall be so installed that the plug is not likely to become loose, nor to malfunction, due to
vibration or the weight of the flexible cable.
554.1.3 Socket-outlets shall be mounted in suitable boxes of metal or other non-flammable material.
Note 1: The box or enclosure may form part of the socket assembly.
Note 2: Attention is drawn to the risk of fire from contact of flammable materials, such as expanded polystyrene insulation, with exposed live parts
and in such cases it should be ensured that there is no gap between the socket face-plate and its box or enclosure.
554.1.4 A circuit supplying a socket-outlet shall be provided with additional protection against direct contact in
accordance with 416.1 by means of an RCD with a rated residual operating current not greater than 30mA, except in
the following cases:
- socket-outlets having a rating exceeding 32A,

- socket outlets complying with 554.4,
- socket-outlets associated with special protective measures according to 554.6.
Note: In some situations specified in Part 7, protection against indirect contact is required, by means of RCDs having rated residual operating
currents exceeding 30mA, e.g. as in 704.410.02 and 705.411.3.01
136
554.1.5 A socket-outlet having a rating greater than 16A shall be supplied by a dedicated circuit that does not supply
any other item.
554.1.6 The earthing contact of a socket-outlet assembly shall be connected to the protective conductor, except in
the case of SELV circuits. The metal enclosure of a socket-outlet shall also be connected to the protective conductor;
fixing screws shall not be used for this purpose.
Note: See also Chapter 54, 543.
554.2 Plugs and socket-outlets for industrial locations and severe environmental conditions
Plugs and socket outlets used in the following types of location shall comply with I.S. EN 60309: Part 1 and Part 2.
- industrial areas and outdoors generally,

- areas indoors where adverse conditions such as severe or rough usage may be expected,
- where there is excessive dust or moisture, or other severe environmental conditions.
Note 1: Such plugs and socket-outlets should be coloured for nominal voltages as follows: 400V: red, 230V: blue, 110V: yellow, 24V: mauve.
Note 2: On construction and demolition sites, socket-outlets with ratings exceeding 32A require protection by an RCD with a residual operating
current not exceeding 500mA (See 704).
554.3 Plugs and socket outlets for general purposes indoors and in domestic and similar locations
554.3.1 This clause applies to socket-outlets indoors and in domestic and similar premises and to those intended for
general use in locations other than those covered by 554.2.
554.3.2 Socket-outlets for general use, including installation in ring final circuits, shall comply with I.S .411.
554.3.3 Socket-outlets complying with I.S. 411, protected against external influences in accordance with I.S. EN
60309-1, and having a degree of protection IP 54 when the plug is in its inserted or withdrawn positions, are permissible
for installation outdoors in domestic and similar locations where they are unlikely to be subjected severe external
influences such as impact or rough usage.
554.3.4 Socket-outlets complying with I.S. 411 shall not be installed where they may be subjected to dripping or
splashing by liquid, e.g. under a valve.
554.3.5 A socket-outlet that is not readily accessible, e.g. under or behind an appliance or a kitchen unit, shall be
provided with a readily accessible means of isolation, e.g. an isolating switch mounted nearby and suitably labelled.
554.4 Socket-outlet circuits not requiring protection by an RCD
554.4.1 Circuits supplying socket-outlets for Information Technology equipment need not be protected by RCDs
provided effective measures have been taken to prevent their use for general purposes. Such measures include the
selection of non-standard socket-outlets, suitable location or the method of installation. A suitable warning notice shall
be provided at each location.
554.4.2 Circuits supplying socket-outlets provided for the isolation of fixed equipment in accordance with 537.2
need not be protected by RCDs, provided effective measures have been taken to prevent their use for general purposes.
A suitable warning notice shall be provided at each location.

Note: Such equipment includes motors and fluorescent lamps.
554.5 Non-standard socket-outlets for special applications
554.5.1 Socket-outlets intended solely for the connection of standard lamps or table lamps need not comply with
554.3 provided the circuit is controlled by a switch.
Note: RCD protection is required on such circuits.
554.5.2 In commercial and residential premises such as hotels and guest-houses, additional socket-outlets complying
with national standards of other countries (e.g. Continental Europe, USA), may be installed, provided:
- they comply with 554.1, and

- they are not installed on ring final-circuits.
137
554.5.3 Non-standard socket-outlets shall be provided for connecting information technology equipment where the
circuit is not protected by an RCD.
Note: See 554.4.1 above.
554.6 Plugs and socket-outlets associated with special measures of protection against electric shock
554.6.1 Plugs and socket-outlets associated with the following protective measures shall not be interchangeable
with each other or with plugs and socket-outlets complying with 554.3:
- SELV (414),
- PELV (414),
- FELV (411.7),
- reduced low- voltage (415),
- protection by non-conducting location (Annex 41C).
Note: Socket-outlets complying with I.S.EN 60309-2 with appropriate key arrangements may be used.
554.6.2 Socket-outlets in shaver outlets shall comply with I.S.EN 60742 – Chapter 2 Section 1.
554.7 Cable couplers
554.7.1 Cable couplers for industrial purposes and for outdoor locations shall comply with I.S.EN 60309.
554.7.2 Cable couplers for general use indoors shall comply with I.S.EN 60320.
554.7.3 Cable couplers shall be so arranged that the plug of the coupler is connected on the load side of the circuit.
555 ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES

555.1 General
555.1.1 The requirements of this section apply to the installation of permanently- connected electrical appliances.
Note: See 511 for compliance of appliances with standards.
555.1.2 Every appliance shall be provided with a separate isolating switch complying with 537.2 and capable of
interrupting the load current. The device shall be installed within 2m, at a height between 400mm and 1200mm above
floor level, and where it can be operated without danger.
Note 1: See 554.3.5 for isolation of certain socket-outlets.
Note 2: Attention is drawn to the Building Regulations Technical Guidance M which deals with the positions of switches, outlets and controls in
buildings and dwellings.
555.1.3 Parallel live conductors with a cross-sectional area less than 10mm2 shall not be used in final circuits
supplying appliances.
Note: A ring final circuit is not considered to have parallel conductors.
555.1.4 Appliances shall be installed in accordance with these Rules, taking into consideration the manufacturer’s
instructions.
555.1.5 Appliances shall comply with I.S. EN 60335 : Safety of household and similar electrical appliances Parts 1
and 2, and with the particular section of Part 2 where specified in these Rules.
555.2 Cooking appliances
555.2.1 In domestic and similar installations, an isolating device for a cooking appliance shall not be mounted either
directly above or behind the appliance.
Where the oven and hob are separate appliances, a common supply and isolator may be used provided:
- each appliance is within 2m of the switching device, and
- the fault-loop impedance value for each cable is sufficiently low to ensure the correct operation of the overcurrent
protective device in accordance with 411.3 and Chapter 61.
555.2.2 In commercial and similar installations, where provision for emergency isolation of cooking equipment is
required, the activator shall be within 2m of the equipment.
138
555.3 Water-heating appliances
555.3.1 A circuit supplying a water-heating appliance, e.g. an immersion heater or a shower unit, shall be protected
by an RCD having a rated residual operating- current not exceeding 30mA.
A separate RCD or RCBO shall be provided for each shower unit.

This requirement does not apply to immersion-heaters used for industrial or similar purposes.
Where simultaneous operation of shower units is not required, two units may be fed from the same circuit provided
only one unit is supplied at a time. This may be achieved by an arrangement of interlocked contactors
Note 1: The above requirements apply in all locations.

Note 2: See also 701 and Annex 55A.
555.3.2 A circuit supplying auxiliary equipment associated with water services and water systems (e.g. pumps) shall
be protected by an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA. This requirement does not apply
to equipment used for industrial and similar purposes.
555.3.3 It is permissible to supply auxiliary equipment associated with water services and water systems from the
circuit supplying a water-heating appliance.
Note: If a cable having a smaller cross-sectional area is used to supply this equipment, a suitable fuse- outlet must be provided to protect this
cable (Chapter 43).
555.4 Space-heating appliances
Where an appliance requires two or more supplies, e.g. in the case of a combined storage and direct heating appliance,
the respective isolating switches for these supplies shall be located adjacent to one another and shall bear the
appropriate labelling.
Note 1: Separate functional switching devices may also be provided downstream for each supply.
Note 2: Floor and ceiling heating systems are covered by 753.
555.5 Extraction fans
555.5.1 An extraction fan shall be provided with an isolating device in its vicinity which switches all phase/line
conductors.
555.5.2 Where a fan and a luminaire are controlled by the one switch (e.g. in a bathroom), the isolating device shall
be installed downstream of that switch.
555.5.3 Where a fan is provided with an automatic time-delay switching-off arrangement, the isolating device shall
have a visible means of ON and OFF indication, and shall switch all live conductors, including the neutral.
Note: This normally requires a three-pole switching device.
555.6 Electrical equipment and wiring in domestic- type airing cupboards
This clause applies to electrical equipment installed in a domestic-type airing cupboard containing a hot-water tank.
It does not apply to airing rooms and similar areas that permit access by persons.
555.6.1 Electrical equipment in domestic airing cupboards and similar enclosures shall be confined to the following:
- an immersion heater and its associated wiring, but excluding switches,

- auxiliary equipment associated with water-heating systems.
Such equipment shall also comply with 555.3.

Note: An airing cupboard opening directly to a bathroom must also comply with 701.
555.6.2 A switching device controlling an immersion-heater shall not be located inside an airing cupboard or other
similar enclosure.
Installation materials including the switching device shall be so selected, and installed that they will not attain excessive
temperatures.
139
555.6.3 Wiring in airing cupboards shall be resistant to heat and damage, and shall be so arranged and fixed that it
cannot be covered by clothing.
556 RESERVED
557 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR MACHINERY
557.1 Electrical machinery and assemblies of machines complying with I.S.EN 60204: Safety of machinery:
Electrical equipment of machines are not within the scope of these Rules.
Machine assemblies not within the scope of I.S.EN 60204 shall be installed either in compliance with the appropriate
standard or, where no standard exists, in accordance with these Rules.
Note: The cable core colours in I.S.EN 60204, except for protective and neutral conductors, do not necessarily comply with Chapter 51, 514.
557.2 Equipment shall be so selected and installed that its operation does not have detrimental effects, due to
harmonics, voltage surges, or frequency variations, on other equipment in the same installation or in other installations.
Note 1: Where there is any doubt, the agreement of the DSO must be obtained concerning the characteristics of the equipment.
Note 2: Attention is drawn to the requirements of Chapter 46 insofar as they apply to electrical machinery and equipment, and to 537 and 552 for
the requirements for switching devices. Attention is also drawn to 445: Protection against undervoltage.
558 RESERVED
559 LUMINAIRES AND LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
FOREWORD
This section implements CENELEC HD 60364-5-559:2005.
559.1 Scope
This section applies to the selection and erection of luminaires and lighting equipment intended to be part of the fixed
installation.
Requirements for specific types of lighting installations are covered in Part 7 (e.g. 714: Outdoor lighting; 715: Extra
Low Voltage Lighting; and 740: Temporary Installations: 740.559.05).
For protection against fire and other harmful thermal effects, selection and erection of luminaires shall also comply
with the relevant clauses of Chapter 42.
The requirements for wall-mounted switches for lighting- circuits are covered by 537.5.5 and 530.6.
559.2 Definitions
The following additional definition applies for the purposes of this section:
Display stands for luminaires: Permanent stands in sales rooms or parts of sales rooms, which are used to display
luminaires. This does not apply to temporary arrangements such as:
- trade fairs stands, in which luminaires remain connected for the duration of the fair,
- temporary exhibition panels with permanently-connected luminaires,
- exhibition panels with luminaires intended to be connected by means of a plug and socket.
140
559.3 General requirements for lighting installations
Luminaires shall comply with the appropriate parts of I.S EN 60598: Luminaires, and shall be selected and installed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and, where appropriate, with I.S.EN 60598.
Note: A luminaire installed in a pelmet should not adversely affect the operation of curtains or blinds and should not present a risk of fire or electric
shock in normal use.
559.4.1 Luminaires shall be so placed that they will not be subject to impact in normal use.
559.4.2 Luminaires installed outdoors shall have an appropriate degree of protection against ingress of moisture as
follows:
- where exposed to rain only: IPX3,
- where exposed to splashing: IPX4,
- where exposed to hosing: IPX5.
559.5 Protection against fire and other harmful thermal effects

559.5.1 Luminaires and their associated ancillary gear shall be so installed as not to cause undue temperature rise
in, or deterioration or ignition of, the materials on which they are mounted.
In particular, the following shall be taken into account:
- the maximum permissible energy dissipated by the lamps, and

- fire resistance of adjacent material at the point of installation, and in areas likely to be subjected to harmful thermal
effects, and
- the minimum distance from combustible materials, including those in a spotlight beam.
559.5.2 Luminaires marked in accordance with I.S.EN 60598 shall be installed in compliance with the marking.
Manufacturers’ instructions with respect to the fire resistance of materials affected by the luminaires shall be followed.
Only luminaires bearing the symbol F may be mounted directly on flammable materials.
Otherwise, luminaires shall be mounted on suitable heat-resistant material of appropriate thickness and size.
Note 1: It is recommended that an air space of 25 mm be provided between this material and flammable materials.
Note 2: Account should be taken of the highest rating of lamp likely to be used.
Note 3: Attention is drawn to the high temperatures that can be generated in luminaires. Cables with suitable insulation temperature ratings should
be selected.
The distance between incandescent spotlights and flammable materials shall not be less than the following:
Rating (w) Distance (m)

< 100 0.6
> 100 ≤ 300 1.0
> 300 1.8
559.5.3 In areas of particular fire risk or hazard, luminaires shall also comply with 422.2.4 (Chapter 42)
559.6.1 Connection to the fixed wiring
Wiring systems for luminaires shall be terminated in
- a box complying with the relevant part of I.S.EN 60670-1 or equivalent national standard, or
- a device for connecting a luminaire (DCL) complying with IEC 61995-1, or a similar device, mounted in a box, or
- electrical equipment of luminaires designed to be connected directly to a wiring system.
141
559.6.2 Fixing of a luminaire
Adequate means for fixing the luminaire shall be provided. The fixing means may consist of mechanical accessories
such as hooks or screws, boxes or enclosures that are capable of supporting luminaires, or supporting devices having
means for the connection of a luminaire.
In the case of a pendant luminaire, it and its fixing means shall in every case be capable of supporting a mass of not
less than 5 kg. Where the mass of a luminaire is greater than 5 kg, it shall be ensured that the fixing means is capable
of supporting it.
The fixing means shall be installed, where appropriate, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
The weight of a luminaire and its fixing means shall be compatible with the mechanical properties of the ceiling or
suspended ceiling on which it is installed.
It shall be ensured that the ceiling or suspended ceiling is a stable element of the structure.
Any cable or cord between the fixing means and the luminaire shall be installed so that any expected stresses in the
conductors and terminations will not impair the safety of the installation.
559.6.3 Ceiling roses

559.6.3.1 A ceiling rose shall not be used for the attachment of more than one flexible cord, unless it is specifically
designed for the purpose.
559.6.3.2 A ceiling rose shall contain an earthing terminal which shall be connected to a protective conductor.
559.6.4 Selection of cables and insulated conductors for lighting installations
A cable directly connected to a luminaire shall be selected in accordance with the temperature marking, if any, on the
luminaire, as follows:
a) For luminaires complying with I.S.EN 60598 but with no temperature marking, heat resistant cables are not required.
b) For luminaires complying with I.S.EN 60598 with temperature marking, cables suitable for the marked temperature
shall be used.
c) For luminaires not marked as complying with I.S.EN 60598, the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed.
Note: Alternatively, local thermal reinforcement of the insulation may provide the protection required.
Luminaires subjected to movement in normal use shall be connected by flexible cables or cords.
559.6.5 Parallel live conductors shall not be used in final circuits supplying luminaires.
559.6.6 Isolation of circuits

Groups of luminaires, which are divided between the phases of a three- phase system with only one common neutral
conductor, shall be provided with at least one device that disconnects all phase/line conductors simultaneously.
Note: Attention is drawn to the requirement in 461.1 for devices for non-automatic isolation and switching of circuits. Consequently, where
functional automatic switching of circuits is installed, a non-automatic isolating device complying with 462 and 537.2 must be provided. An MCB
may be used for this purpose.
559.6.7 Through-circuit wiring in luminaires
559.6.7.1 The installation of through-circuit wiring in luminaires is permissible only in luminaires specifically
designed for the purpose.
559.6.7.2 Cables for through-circuit wiring shall be selected in accordance with the temperature information on the
luminaire or the manufacturer’s instructions where provided, as follows:
- unless specified in the manufacturer’s instructions, for luminaires complying with I.S.EN 60598 but with no
temperature marking, heat- resistant cables are not required,
- for luminaires complying with I.S. EN 60598 but with temperature marking, cables suitable for the marked
temperature shall be used,
- in the absence of information, heat-resistant cables and/or insulated conductors type HO5SJ-K or those of an
equivalent type shall be used.
F
Note: The temperature marking indicates the maximum temperature according to I.S.EN 60598-1 Table 2 and is marked with the symbol
142
559.6.7.3 Supply cables shall be suitable for the location and shall meet the requirements of 559.6.7.2, or be thermally
protected at the location, or alternatively, the insulation shall be replaced by a suitable type of heat-resistant material.
If luminaires do not include devices for the connection to the supply, the connecting devices shall be:
- terminals used for the connection to the supply according to I.S. EN 60998, or
- devices for connecting a luminaire (DCL) according to IEC 61995-1, or

- installation couplers for the connection of the supply, according to IEC 61535, or
- other suitable and appropriate connecting devices.
559.6.7.4 Conductors of a three-phase circuit inside the luminaire shall be installed in the same space intended for
through-circuit wiring.
559.7 Independent lamp control gear, e.g. ballasts for discharge lighting
Only lamp control gear marked as suitable for independent use according to the relevant standard may be used outside
luminaires.
Only Class P thermally- protected ballasts or transformers, marked with the symbol F , or temperature- declared
thermally-protected ballasts or transformers, symbol … with a marked value equal to or less than 130ºC, or ballasts
or transformers marked … , may be mounted on flammable surfaces.
Note: The generally-recognised symbol is independent ballast.
559.8 Compensation capacitors for discharge lighting
Compensation capacitors having a total capacitance exceeding 0.5 μF shall be used only in conjunction with discharge
resistors.
Note: Capacitors, including their marking, should comply with I.S.EN 61048: Auxiliaries for lamps etc.
559.9 Protection against electric shock for display stands for luminaires
Protection against electric shock shall be provided on circuits by either:
- SELV, or
- an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
Note: See also 711: Exhibitions, shows and fairs
559.10 Stroboscopic effect
In the case of lighting for premises where machines with moving parts are in operation, consideration shall be given
to the avoidance of stroboscopic effects that can give the misleading impression of moving parts being stationary.
Such effects may be avoided in a three-phase system by equitable lamp distribution between the phases.
559.11 Lamp holders
Edison-screw (ES) lamp holders shall comply with I.S.EN 60238.

The outer contacts of Edison Screw (ES) lamp holders shall be connected to the neutral conductor only.
Bayonet-cap lamp holders shall comply with the appropriate standard.
Lampholders mounted on flammable materials shall comply with 559.5.2.
Lampholders marked T1, or otherwise not designed for incandescent lamps with a rated wattage exceeding 60W, shall
not be installed.
559.12 Movable luminaires outdoors
Movable luminaires outdoors, such as those used for illumination of gardens and patios, shall be supplied at SELV in
accordance with 414.
143
559.13 Circuits for hand-held lamps
Circuits for hand-held lamps intended for use:
- on building or construction sites, or

- in damp or confined locations, or
- in restrictive conductive locations,
shall be supplied at a voltage not exceeding 25V a.c. r.m.s. from a transformer of the double-wound type having the
centre-point of the output winding connected to earth or from a safety transformer (SELV) having a nominal voltage
not exceeding 12 a.c. r.m.s. or 30V d.c. (414).
A fluorescent luminaire with built-in double-wound transformer supplied at SELV having a nominal voltage not
exceeding 12V a.c. r.m.s. or 30V d.c. is permissible.
559.14 High-voltage discharge- lighting installations

Note: The term “high voltage” in this clause refers to voltages exceeding 1kV. Normally, the term “medium voltage” applies to voltages above
1kV up to 35kV.
559.14.1 This clause applies to high-voltage discharge- lighting equipment and associated wiring systems operating
at a voltage exceeding low voltage and supplied from a transformer connected to the low-voltage supply of the
installation.
559.14.2 High-voltage discharge- lighting installations shall comply with BS 559 except where otherwise specified
in these Rules.
559.14.3 Every circuit supplied from a transformer having a rated input exceeding 500W shall be provided with
means for the automatic disconnection of the supply in the event of a short-circuit, or of an earth-leakage current
exceeding twenty per cent of the normal current in the circuit.
559.14.4 The live conductors of the high- voltage circuit shall be electrically separated from the live conductors of
the low-voltage circuits. The respective protective conductors may be connected to a common earthing point.
Notwithstanding this requirement, a single-phase autotransformer may supply discharge- lighting equipment provided:
- the open-circuit voltage on the output side does not exceed 1.5 kV a.c. r.m.s, and
- isolation is provided on both poles of the supply.
559.14.5 A fire-fighter’s switch shall be provided for every high-voltage discharge-lighting installation in accordance
with 539.4.
559.14.6 In addition to the switch normally used to control the circuit, one of the following means shall be provided
for the isolation of every luminaire or group of luminaires of a high- voltage discharge-lighting installation:
- an interlock on a luminaire so arranged that the supply is automatically disconnected before access is possible to live
parts, or
- effective local means for the isolation of the circuit from the supply, or
- a switch that can only be operated by means of a key or tool, or is accessible only by means of a key or tool.
Chapter 56: Safety Services
CONTENTS
560 SCOPE
561 GENERAL
562 SOURCES FOR SUPPLIES TO SAFETY SERVICES
563 CIRCUITS OF SAFETY SERVICES
564 UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT
144
560 SCOPE
560.1 Safety services include:
- fire detection and alarm equipment complying with I.S. 3218,

- emergency lighting complying with I.S. 3217,
- fire extinguishing equipment,

- fireman’s lift,
- smoke control equipment.
560.2 This chapter does not apply to domestic and similar installations.
560.3 Mains-operated smoke alarms are not in the scope of this chapter.
561 GENERAL
561.1 Where the safety of persons depends on continuity of supply to safety services, measures shall be taken to
ensure a supply thereto in the event of failure of the main supply.
561.2 Equipment for safety services required to operate in fire conditions shall be provided, either by construction
or in the process of installation, with protection ensuring fire-resistance of adequate duration.
561.3 All equipment for safety services shall be adequately protected against damage that could adversely affect its
integrity.
Note: This may require a greater degree of protection against mechanical damage in normal conditions (as well as emergency conditions) than
that which would be required by the non-essential parts of the installation.
561.4 Equipment shall be arranged to facilitate periodic inspection, testing and maintenance.
561.5 A safety supply may be:
- a non-automatic supply, the starting of which is initiated by an operator, or

- an automatic supply, the starting of which is independent of an operator.
561.6 An automatic supply is classified as follows according to change-over time:
- no-break; an automatic supply that can ensure a continuous supply within specified conditions during the period of
transition, for example as regards variations in voltage and frequency,
- very short break; an automatic supply available within 0.15 sec,
- short break; an automatic supply available within 1.5 sec,
- medium-break; an automatic supply available within 15 sec,
- long break; an automatic supply available in more than 15 sec.
562 SOURCES FOR SUPPLIES TO SAFETY SERVICES

Note: This section does not apply to equipment with self-contained batteries.
562.1 The following sources for safety services are recognised:
- storage batteries,
- primary cells,
- generator sets independent of the normal supply.
562.2 Sources for safety services shall be installed as fixed equipment and in such a manner that they cannot be
adversely affected by failure or disconnection of the supplies to the normal services in the premises.
562.3 Sources for safety services shall be placed in a suitable location and shall be accessible only to authorised
persons.
562.4 The location of the sources shall be properly and adequately ventilated so that any exhaust gases, smoke or
fumes from the sources cannot infiltrate areas occupied by persons.
145
562.5 The location, housing or enclosure of a safety supply source shall protect it so that it will continue to function
for at least as long as the service is required.
562.6 A single source for supplies to safety services shall supply only equipment for or associated with those safety
services.
Where more than one source is available, the sources are permitted to supply other loads provided that, in the event
of failure of one source:
- automatic changeover with a suitable alarm is available, and

- the energy from the remaining source will be sufficient for starting and operating all safety services.
Note: This may require the off-loading of non-safety services.
562.7 For safety services the following shall be provided:
- an independent source such as a storage battery or a private generator, or

- an alternative network supply provided an assurance can be obtained that both supplies are unlikely to fail
concurrently.
562.8 Where required by the fire authority, circuits supplying safety services shall be taken from the network side
of the main electricity isolator. A notice shall be provided which warns that these circuits are not controlled by the main
electricity isolator.
562.9 Suitable means such as an audible or visible alarm shall be provided to announce the failure of a source for
safety services.
Alarm devices shall be clearly and individually identified.
Alarm devices for storage battery systems shall in addition comply with 562.10.
Note: An alarm should operate immediately, whether or not an emergency exists.
562.10 Alarm devices for storage battery systems shall announce a failure of:
- the incoming supply to the battery charger,

- the battery charger.
Note: A battery charger itself is not a safety source.
562.11 Escape routes, common passageways and public areas in buildings such as commercial premises and
apartment blocks shall be provided with an electrical supply for both normal and emergency lighting which is
independent of supplies to individual occupiers.
563 CIRCUITS OF SAFETY SERVICES

563.1 Circuits of safety services shall be independent of other circuits and shall comply with 563.1.1 and 563.1.2.
Note: This means that an electrical fault or any intervention or modification in one type of circuit should not affect the correct functioning of the
other.
563.1.1 Circuits of safety services shall be physically separated from other circuits by:
- distance, or
- barriers complying with 563.1.2, or
- use of mineral-insulated copper-sheathed cable.
Circuits of safety services shall not occupy a common multi-core cable or conduit with other circuits.
563.1.2 In ducting, trunking or similar enclosures separation of circuits for safety services from other circuits shall
be provided by fixed rigid barriers of fire-resistant insulating material or metal.
563.2 Circuits that do not serve areas with explosion hazard shall not pass through those areas
Note: Special rules apply to areas with explosive gas or dust, hazard, see ETCI Publication ET 105.
146
563.3 Areas of fire hazard
563.3.1 Where circuits of safety services pass through areas of fire hazard, the wiring system shall be resistant to
fire for the requisite period. Alternatively, it shall be enclosed in non-combustible building materials having the
equivalent resistance to fire for the requisite period.
563.3.2 Wiring systems for circuits of safety services in areas of fire hazard shall comply with the following standards
or their equivalent:
BS 6387 or VDE 0266 (Fire-resisting cables)

BS 6207 or VDE 0284 (Mineral-insulated, copper-sheathed cables)
and shall be selected to meet the assessed conditions.
Cable joints and terminations shall not impair the reliability or resistance to fire of the cables. Wiring support structures
and fixings shall have a resistance to fire at least equivalent to that of the wiring system selected.
Note: This requirement may involve additional fixings or reinforcement of supporting structures.
563.3.3 Wiring for safety circuits that are not required to continue to operate during a fire need not be fire-resistant
provided any area of fire hazard through which it passes is equipped with means for fire detection.
563.4 Protection against overload need not be provided for circuits of safety services.
Note: The fire authority may prohibit overload protection tripping on safety services.
563.5 Overcurrent protective devices shall be selected and erected so that an overcurrent in one circuit will not
impair the correct operation of other circuits of safety services.
Note: This requires adequate discrimination with upstream overcurrent devices such as a main fuse.
563.6 Switchgear and control gear for safety circuits shall be clearly identified so as to readily distinguish them
from other switchgear.
563.7 Switchgear and control gear for safety circuits shall be in locations accessible only to
authorized persons.
563.8 Devices for initiating alarms shall be clearly identified.
564 UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT
564.1 In equipment supplied by two different circuits, a fault occurring in one circuit shall not impair the protection
against electric shock or the correct operation of the other circuit. Such equipment shall be connected to the protective
conductors of both circuits, if necessary.
564.2 Fire-fighter’s Lift
The supply to a fire-fighter’s lift shall be taken from a safety supply by means of a final circuit used exclusively for
fire fighting services.
Where the fire-fighters’ lift normally operates as an ordinary lift, its control shall be so arranged that it can be changed
over to the fire-fighter’s control by means of a device located beside the lift entrance on the same floor as the fire-
fighting entrance.
Note: See also 539.
147
148
Part 6 & 7 2013 (2016).1.qxp_Layout 1 27/04/2016 09:14 Page 1
PART 6
VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 61: INITIAL VERIFICATION
CHAPTER 62: PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING
CHAPTER 63: CERTIFICATION
149
Chapter 61: Initial verification

CONTENTS
FOREWORD
GENERAL 611
INSPECTION 612
TESTING 613
FOREWORD
This chapter implements CENELEC HD 60364.6.61:2007
611 GENERAL
611.1 Every installation, including subsequent extensions and additions, shall be inspected and tested during erection
as far as is reasonably practicable, and on completion, inspected and tested before being put into service by the user
so as to verify as far as is practicable that the requirements of these Rules have been fulfilled.
611.2 All appropriate information including diagrams of connections, schematic diagrams, charts, tables, schedules
and equipment ratings shall be made available to the person or persons carrying out the verification.
611.3 Initial verification shall include comparison of the results with relevant criteria to confirm that the requirements
of the standard have been met.
611.4 Precautions shall be taken to ensure safety of persons and livestock and to avoid damage to property and
installed equipment, even if the circuit is defective, during inspection and testing.
611.5 It shall be verified that an extension, addition, or alteration to an existing installation complies with these
Rules, and that it does not impair the safety of that installation, and that the safety of the new installation is not impaired
by the existing installation.
611.6 Verification shall be carried out by persons having the necessary knowledge, experience and competence in
verification.
611.7 For every new installation, extension or major alteration or addition, a certificate shall be prepared in
accordance with Chapter 63.
612 INSPECTION
612.1 An inspection, using all the senses, shall be made of the completed installation in order to verify that it complies
generally with these Rules. Where inspection of certain parts would not be practicable in a completed installation, these
parts shall be inspected during the course of erection. Inspection shall precede testing and normally be carried out
before energizing the installation.
Note: See definition of “inspection”.
612.2 An inspection shall be made of permanently-wired electrical equipment in order to verify
i) compliance with relevant standards, with these Rules, and with manufacturer’s instructions;
Note: This may be ascertained by examination of marking or certification.
ii) correct selection and erection in accordance with these Rules taking into consideration the manufacturer’s
instructions;
iii) no evident damage that could impair safety.
150
612.3 Inspection of the installation shall include checking the following where relevant:
a) Protection against electric shock by use of SELV or PELV ( 414).

b) Protection against electric shock in normal conditions (i.e. from direct contact), by insulation or enclosure in
accordance with Annex 41A, and in locations where permissible, by obstacles, distance or clearance in accordance with
Annex 41B.
c) Protection against electric shock in fault conditions (indirect contact) by one or more of the following:
- automatic disconnection combined with earthing and bonding (411.3),
- supplementary insulation (412),
- electrical separation of circuits (413),
- reduced low-voltage (415).
The following in locations where they are permissible:

- non-conducting location (Annex 41C1),
- earth-free equipotential bonding (Annex 41C2).
d) Protection against fire hazard and thermal effects (Chapter 42).

e) Wiring systems (Chapter 52).

f) Distribution boards (530.7).
g) Isolating and switching devices (46, 537).
h) Presence and adequacy of protective and bonding conductors (Chapter 54).
i) External influences (512);
j) Accessibility of equipment where necessary (513).
k) Information (514).
Note: Further details are given in Annex 61A.
613 TESTING
613.1 General
The test methods specified in this chapter are reference methods. Other methods are not precluded provided they give
no less valid results.
The following tests shall be carried out where applicable and preferably in the following sequence:
a) Before the installation is energised:
- continuity of protective and bonding conductors (613.2.1),

- continuity of all conductors of final ring circuits (613.2.2),
- insulation resistance of the electrical installation (613.3),
- detection of erroneous connections between circuits (613.4),
- separation of circuits: SELV, PELV, electrical separation (613.5),
- conditions for protection by automatic disconnection of supply, earthing and equipotential bonding, (613.6),
- floor and wall resistance (613.7),
- polarity (613.8), - phase sequence (613.9),
- voltage drop (where desired) (613.10),
- electric strength tests for assemblies built or modified on site (613.11),
- functional tests (613.12).
b) After the installation is energised:
- fault-loop impedance measurement (613.13),

- verification of operation of RCDs (613.14).
Should the installation fail a test, that test and any preceding tests that might have been influenced by the fault indicated,
shall be repeated after the fault has been rectified.
Note: See definition of “testing”
613.2 Continuity of conductors
613.2.1 A continuity test shall be made in accordance with Annex 61B in order to verify that protective conductors
and bonding conductors are electrically sound and correctly connected.
151
613.2.2 A continuity test shall be made in accordance with Annex 61B in order to verify the continuity of all
conductors, including the protective conductor, of final ring circuits in the installation, in order to verify that they are
electrically sound and correctly connected.
613.3 Insulation resistance of the electrical installation
613.3.1 The insulation resistance between each live conductor and the protective conductor or earth or PEN
conductor shall not be less than those specified in Table 61A when the appropriate test- voltage is applied.
Table 61A shall be applied for a verification of the insulation resistance between non- earthed protective conductors
and earthed.
Note 1: A PEN conductor is not a live conductor.

Note 2: In fault –free systems (i.e. IT earthing) the measured insulation resistance values are usually much higher than those of Table 61A. When
measuring insulation values of final circuits, consideration should be given to evident differences of measured values.
613.3.2 For this measurement, all line and neutral conductors shall be connected together; however, large installations
may be sub-divided into sections and each section tested separately.
Note: Such sections should comprise a minimum of 50 circuits.
613.3.3 In a TN or a TN-C-S earthing system, the main protective conductor shall be disconnected from the main
earthing terminal during the measurement.
613.3.4 Fixed appliances, luminaires, electronic equipment, surge protective devices (SPDs) and other equipment
likely to be damaged or to affect the measurement, shall be disconnected, removed, or switched off before carrying
out an insulation resistance test.
Where it is not reasonable or practicable to disconnect such equipment (e.g. in the case of a socket-outlet incorporating
an SPD), the test voltage may be reduced to 250 V d.c., but the insulation thus measured shall have a resistance of at
least 1 megohm.
613.4 Detection of erroneous connections between circuits
The following test shall be carried out in order to detect erroneous connections between circuits: For each circuit, its
protective device shall be switched off and all loads disconnected. An insulation test in accordance with in accordance
with Table 61A shall be applied between line/phase conductors of the disconnected circuit and all other line/phase
conductors.
613.5 Protection by SELV, PELV or electrical separation
613.5.1 Protection by SELV (414)
The separation of live parts of SELV circuits from earth and from those of other circuits where applicable according
to 414 shall be verified by a measurement of the insulation resistance. The test voltage and values obtained shall be
in accordance with Table 61A.
TABLE 61A: MINIMUM VALUES OF INSULATION RESISTANCE
152
613.5.2 Protection by PELV (414)
The separation of live parts of PELV circuits from those of other circuits where applicable shall be verified by a
measurement of the insulation resistance. The test voltage and the values obtained shall be in accordance with Table
61A.
613.5.3 Protection by electrical separation (413)

The separation of live parts from those of other circuits and earth in accordance with 413 shall be verified by a
measurement of the insulation resistance. The test voltage and the values obtained shall be in accordance with Table 61A.
613.6 Verification of conditions for protection by automatic disconnection of supply including earthing and
equipotential bonding.
613.6.1 General verification of the efficacy of the measure automatic disconnection of supply for protection against
indirect contact (411.3.3) shall be made after the installation is energised, in accordance with 613.13: “Fault- loop
impedance measurement”. In addition, for TN systems, a verification may be made before the installation is energised,
in accordance with the method specified in 613.6.2.1.
613.6.2 TN systems (411.4)
613.6.2.1 Compliance with Table 41A (Chapter 41) for a circuit in a TN system may be verified before the installation
is energised by:
i) determining the fault loop impedance Za of the circuit by calculating or measuring the impedance of the line/phase
conductor, and by measuring the resistance of the protective conductor in accordance with Annex 61C;
ii) noting the type, rating and/or setting of the associated overcurrent protective device and ascertaining its operating
characteristics, in order to determine the operating current corresponding to the required disconnecting time;
iii) obtaining the value of system impedance Zs from the DSO; and
iv) fulfilling the following condition:
ZL x Ia ≤ Uo
where
ZL is the sum of Za and Zs in ohms
Ia is the current in amperes ensuring automatic disconnection by the overcurrent protective device within the time t.
Uo is the nominal voltage between line and earth
t is the disconnecting time specified in 411.4 (0.4 s for circuits with rating not exceeding 32A, 5 s for other circuits).
613.6.2.2 For RCDs, verification shall comprise an inspection before the installation is energised, and a test, in
accordance with 613.14, after installation is energised.
613.6.3 TT systems (411.5)
613.6.3.1 Compliance with 411.5 for a circuit in a TT system shall be verified by:
i) measuring the resistance of the earth electrode and associated protective conductors by means of the method
described in Annex 61D, or by an equivalent method.
Note 1: The resistance of protective conductors, except in large installations, is negligible compared with that of the earth electrode and may be
ignored.
Note 2: Where RCDs are used as disconnection devices, a measurement of the earth electrode is not necessary provided the conventional touch
voltage limit UL is not exceeded.
Note 3: Where this measurement is not possible, it may be possible to replace it by the measurement of the fault loop impedance as in 613.6.2
ii) after the installation is energized, verification of the characteristics of the RCDs and a test in accordance with
613.14.
613.6.3.2 The following condition shall be fulfilled:
Ra x Id ≤ 50V
153
where:
Ra is the resistance of the earth electrode and the protective conductor
Id is the rated residual operating current in amperes of the device

Note: Ra should be not greater than 100 ohms in normal conditions.
613.6.4 IT systems (411.6)
613.6.4.1 Where an IMD is used to detect a first fault, verification shall comprise visual inspection and a test in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
613.6.4.2 Where exposed conductive parts are earthed in groups or individually, the conditions for disconnection after
a second fault shall be verified according to 613.6.3.
Note: TT system conditions apply in this case.
613.6.4.3 Where exposed conductive parts are interconnected by a common conductor, and connected to a common
earth electrode or electrode system, conditions for disconnection after a second fault shall be verified according to
613.6.2.
Note 1: TN system conditions apply in this case.

Note 2: During measurement of the fault loop impedance it is necessary to provide a connection of negligible impedance between the neutral point
of the system and the main earthing terminal of the installation.
613.6.5 Supplementary equipotential bonding
Where the requirements of 613.6.2, 613.6.3, or 613.6.4 are not satisfied, or in case of doubt, it shall be verified that
the supplementary bonding provided according to 413.1.6 fulfils the following condition:
R x Ia ≤ 50V
where
R is the resistance in ohms measured between simultaneously accessible exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts in the location
Ia is the operating current in amperes of the protective device, i.e.
- for RCDs, the rated residual operating current

- for overcurrent protective devices, the rated operating current for 5s (411.4.4).
613.7 Floor and wall insulation- resistance
(For protection against indirect contact in non-conducting locations)
Where it is necessary to comply with the requirements of Annex 41C1, at least three measurements shall be made in
the same location, one of which is approximately 1m from any accessible conductive part in the location. The other
two measurements shall be made at greater distances. The above series of measurements shall be repeated for each
relevant surface of the location.
Note: In Annex 61E, a method of measurement is given as an example.
613.8 Polarity verification and test
613.8.1 The identity of each line/phase and neutral conductor shall be verified.
Note: No particular method is specified.
613.8.2 It shall be verified that no fuse or single-pole switching device is installed in a neutral conductor except
where this is expressly permitted by these Rules.
Note: An example of an exemption is the case of a changeover switch for a double immersion- heater
154
613.8.3 It shall be verified that the centre-contact of each Edison-Screw type lamp holder is connected to the switched
line/phase conductor.
613.8.4 It shall be verified that the back- contact of each screw-in- fuse base is connected to the line/phase conductor.
613.8.5 The polarity of connections to wiring accessories e.g. socket-outlets shall be checked for compliance with
the manufacturer’s instructions or markings.
613.9 Phase- sequence and motor rotation check
In the case of multi-phase circuits it shall be verified that the correct phase- sequence is achieved throughout the
installation. Connections to three-phase motors shall be checked to verify the correct direction of rotation.
613.10 Voltage drop
Where desired, compliance with 525 may be verified by measuring the impedance of the circuit, or by calculation using
Annex 52E or manufacturers’ information such as tables or diagrams.
613.11 Electric strength tests for site-built assemblies
Where equipment e.g. a switchgear assembly or a busbar assembly is built or modified on site, and not type-tested in
accordance with a certified design, it shall be subjected to an insulation test in accordance with the relevant standards
e.g. I.S.EN 60439, or with Table 61B.
TABLE 61B: TEST VOLTAGES FOR SITE-BUILT ASSEMBLIES
613.12 Functional tests
Assemblies, such as switchgear and control gear assemblies, drives, controls and interlocks, shall be subjected to a test
of their functions to verify that they are properly mounted, adjusted and installed in accordance with the relevant
requirements of these Rules and the manufacturer’s instructions.
Where necessary, protective devices shall be submitted to functional tests, as necessary to check that they are properly
installed and adjusted. Such tests shall be carried out, before or after the installation is energized, whichever is
appropriate.
613.13 Fault-loop impedance measurement
After the installation has been connected to the supply, the fault-loop impedance of each circuit shall be measured in
accordance with Annex 61F, and the results shall be not greater than the appropriate values in either Table A61C-1 or
Table A61C-2, whichever is appropriate.
155
613.14 Verification of operation of RCDs
After the installation has been connected to the supply, each RCD shall be tested in accordance with Annex 61G.

Annex 61A: Visual inspection

Annex 61B: Verification of continuity of a conductor
Annex 61C: Determination of fault-loop impedance by calculation and measurement (pre-connection)
Annex 61D: Measurement of earth electrode resistance (TT systems)
Annex 61E: Measurement of the insulation- resistance of floors and walls
Annex 61F: Measurement of fault-loop impedance of circuits (post –connection)
Annex 61G: Verification of operation of RCDs (post-connection).
Figure 61.1a: Erroneous connection test.
Figure 61.1b: Erroneous connection test: Ring final circuit.
156
Chapter 62: Periodic Inspection and Testing
GENERAL
It is recommended that installations be inspected and tested periodically as appropriate to their use and environment
in order to verify compliance with these Rules. The procedures for inspection and testing shall comply with this
Chapter.
After completion of the inspection and testing, a report shall be prepared and given to the appropriate person(s) or
organization that ordered the report. The Report Form shall comply with Annex 62A. The layout of the form is intended
to facilitate a standard approach to inspection.
62.1 SCOPE
The procedures laid down in this Chapter are intended to identify the condition of the electrical installation. The
following are not included in the testing and inspection procedures laid down in this Chapter:
1. Equipment and appliances, whether fixed or permanently connected, e.g. night-storage heaters, electric cookers.
2. Wiring concealed in trunking, conduit, or within the fabric of the building or buried in the ground, which cannot
for practical reasons be inspected.
The information in 1. and 2 above shall be given in the report and the appropriate person, proprietor or organization
shall be informed separately.
62.2 PROCEDURE
62.2.1 Visual inspection
A visual inspection shall be made of the installation in accordance with Annex 61A of Chapter 61 and the Report
Form.
62.2.2 Testing
Testing with the appropriate electrical measurements shall be carried out in accordance with Chapter 61 and the Report
Form.
62.2.3 Completion of the Report
All sections of the Report Form shall be completed, and all instructions carefully noted. On pages 2 and 3 of the
Report Form, any of the numbered questions answered “NO” shall be referred to in the comment section.
It is permissible in larger installations to use sampling methods for inspecting switches, sockets etc. In such cases, an
adequate ratio-and-sampling method shall be used in order to ensure, as far as practicable, that the Report will be
accurate. In addition, where this procedure has been used, this shall be stated in the comments section of the Report,
along with details of the ratio inspected. Observations and recommendations shall be made, based on a combination
of visual inspection and testing in accordance with Chapter 61 and related annexes.
Where necessary, additional comments may be recorded on numbered continuation sheets.
Comments and recommendations shall be clear and unambiguous, having regard to the likelihood that, in most cases,
they will be read by non-technical persons.
62.3 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR REMEDIAL WORK
62.3.1 General
Following the periodic inspection of the installation, a schedule of the following shall be compiled:
1. All defects, damage, deterioration of equipment or wiring, and cases of potentially dangerous non-compliance with
the Rules.
2. Recommendations for necessary consequential remedial work.
157
62.3.2 Completing the Report Form
On page 4 of the Report Form a numbering system is used to indicate to the person(s) responsible for the installation
the recommended action to be taken.
The numerical classification of the actions recommended shall be as follows:

1. Requires urgent attention.

2. Requires improvement.
3. Requires some attention.
4. Does not comply with the current National Rules for Electrical Installations.
It should be noted that non-compliance with the current National Rules does not necessarily imply that the installation
inspected is unsafe.
62.3.3 Serious defects
Where serious defects have been identified in the electrical installation, this shall be notified separately, using registered
mail or equivalent means, to the person(s) or organization responsible for the electrical installation.
62.4 Frequency of Periodic Testing And Inspection
The frequency of periodic inspection and testing shall be determined by the type of installation, its use, the frequency
of maintenance and the external influences to which it is subjected.
62.5 Distribution of Reports
The original report (white copy) is intended for the person(s) or organization that ordered the inspection. The duplicated
copy (yellow) is intended to be retained by the person responsible for the report.
Annex for Chapter 62:

Annex 62A: Report form for periodic inspection.
Chapter 63: Certification

63.1 GENERAL
Certificates and appropriate documentation for the verification of an electrical installation in accordance with Chapter
61 shall be provided to the appropriate person.
63.2 INITIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
63.2.1 After satisfactory verification in accordance with Chapter 61 of a completed installation, extension or
modification to an existing installation, the person carrying out the verification, or a person duly authorized, shall
provide a completion certificate.
The completion certificate shall be in accordance with Annex 63A or Annex 63B, as is appropriate for the type of
installation.
63.2.2 Accompanying documents shall provide a description of the installation with details of all circuits, protective
devices, and test results.
63.2.3 Multi-contractor electrical installation

For the purposes of this chapter, the following definitions apply:
Main Electrical contractor: A person that provides a completion certificate in accordance with 63.4.1 or 63.4.2.
Sub-system contractor: A person, other than the main electrical contractor, that constructs a part of the electrical
installation and is required to provide a sub-system completion certificate in accordance with 63.4.3.
Sub-system: Part of an electrical installation constructed by a sub-system contractor, e.g. a lift,

refrigeration equipment, emergency lighting, fire alarms and security systems.
63.3 INTERIM CERTIFICATE FOR A FULLy COMPLETED SECTION OF AN ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
63.3.1 The requirement for this certification arises where supply is required for a section of an electrical installation
which in itself is complete, but where additional electrical work is necessary in order to complete the total electrical
installation. The type of situation which might merit this approach would be a large installation (Minimum Current
158
Transformer metering) where e.g. lift or air-conditioning requires commissioning at an earlier stage than the rest of
the installation. In this situation the registered electrical contractor must apply to his/her approved regulatory body to
obtain an ETCI completion certificate especially marked for the purpose. When this certificate is submitted for
connection, the DSO will energise the main service to the installation and have no further involvement. The certificate
in question shall be fully completed. Furthermore the comment section shall specify the sub- circuits that are covered
by the certificate and state that all others are locked “off” and under the control of the electrical contractor. It is the
responsibility of the electrical contractor to issue the final white certificate directly to the approved regulatory body
within a three month period of issuing the “interim certificate for a fully completed part installation”. These certificates
shall only be issued in exceptional circumstances and records should be kept by the licensed regulatory body for the
purpose of audit by authorised auditors of the CER and for follow up by the approved regulatory body. Follow- up in
this context means that it is the approved regulatory bodies' responsibility to ensure this process takes place without
fail and that it is not abused.
63.4 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
There are three types of completion certificate:

Cert. No.1 for installations with a Maximum Import Capacity (MIC) of less than 50kVA.
Cert. No.2 for installations with a Maximum Import Capacity (MIC) of 50kVA or more.
Cert No. 3 for existing installations for alterations and/or extensions.
Sub-system certificates required for installations where more than one electrical contractor is involved. (See 63.4.3).
Controlled Works are Major Electrical Installation Works that include the installation, inspection, testing and
commissioning of a new electrical installation requiring connection to the electricity network, and alterations to existing
installations including additions and extensions within the scope of these Rules
63.4.1 PROCEDURES FOR ETCI COMPLETION CERTIFICATE No.1: INSTALLATIONS < 50kVA
INTRODUCTION
The Registered Contractor that constructs the Installation and subsequently signs the completion certificate is
making a formal declaration that the installation as installed by him/her:
- complies with the current National Rules for Electrical Installations (ET101), and
- is ready for connection to the electricity supply network. The use of this certificate fulfils the certification
requirements set down in the Energy (Miscellaneous Provision) Act 2006.
SCOPE
Cert No.1 covers new installations, reconnections, alterations including modification and/or testing of existing
installations, a commercial temporary supply and other. This certificate may only be used for an installation with
an MIC of less than 50kVA.
Note: Sub-system certificates are required for installations where more than one electrical contractor is involved (see 63.4.3).
FILLING IN THE CERTIFICATE

All boxes must be filled in either with a tick or a value in accordance with the instructions on the certificate.
Test Record Sheets must be completed for all installation work. Installations in agricultural premises may also require
a supplementary certification form to accompany the certificate where a government grant is requested. The certificate
should indicate whether it is in respect of construction and test, or test only. Test is acceptable only for existing
installations. The contractor responsible for the construction of a new installation must tick the boxes “construction”
and “test”.
1. Premises Description
This describes the type of premises in which the installation is being constructed.
2. Type of Installation
This indicates whether an installation is:
1. New.
2. Re-connection (of existing installation).
3. Alteration – which includes extensions.
4. Commercial Temporary Supply.
5. Other: Any other electrical work not covered by above. Details must be given in the “Comment or Details” box.
6. Modification / Test of an Existing Installation.
3. Size of Installation
For installations < 50 kVA the number of lighting points, socket outlets, and fixed outlets should be indicated in the
appropriate box.
159
4. Test Results
See Chapter 61 and Annexes for Chapter 61.
5. Test Record Sheets
Test Record Sheets must be completed in detail for all installations and cross-referenced with the electrical completion
certificate.
6. Sub-Systems
This term is used in multi-contractor electrical installations where sub-system contractors such as refrigeration, air
conditioning, lift etc. may be employed in addition to the main electrical contractor. Subsystem contractors must also
certify any work that is subject to the current Rules, by using a separate subsystem completion certificate in accordance
with 63.4.3. These certificates together with the relevant Test Record Sheets must be submitted to the Project
Supervisor for inclusion in Project Safety File.
The main electrical contractor must indicate whether there are sub-systems present by ticking the appropriate
box. If the tick is “yes” i.e. sub-system present then details such as sub-system completion certificate numbers
and sub-system description should be recorded in the comment section of this certificate. A certificate completed
in this fashion is considered to have sufficient detail to comply with the certification requirements where electrical sub-
systems are installed.
7. Comments
This space allows the contractor to give additional information and to comment on the installation, extent of work etc.
The Comment Box should also describe in detail the type of work involved where the “alteration” (e.g. alteration to
existing installation) or “Other” boxes are ticked. Where an extension to an existing installation is involved, the
contractor must make sure that the existing installation is adequate to ensure the safety of the extension. The comment
box should be used only for the purpose of providing additional information. On no account should statements
disclaiming responsibility for part/parts of the installation, or any statement rendering the certificate invalid be made.
8. Registration Number
The Registered Contractor must insert his/her name, address, telephone number and Registration Number in the box
provided.
9. Pre-connection Certification
Before submitting the copy of the certificate to the Regulatory Body, the contractor must provide his/her signature in
the Pre-connection Box. This states that the installation complies with the National Rules ET 101 and that the pre-
connection tests described in Chapter 61 have been completed.
10. Post-connection Tests
Immediately after the installation has been energised these tests must be completed.
10.1. Fault-loop impedance tests
Loop Impedance measurements must be made at the furthest point of each circuit. The maximum value in
ohms obtained must be recorded on the certificate in addition to the rating and type of its associated
protective device.
10.2. RCD tests
All RCD’s must be tested and their respective maximum tripping times recorded on the associated test
record sheet. The information required on the certificate is the following:
RCDs may have a rated residual tripping (operating) current (sensitivity) of e.g. 30mA, 100mA, 300mA,
or 500mA, The maximum tripping time must be recorded for every RCD rating (sensitivity) installed. This
maximum trip time must be recorded in addition to a short description of the circuit protected by the
respective RCD. It is unlikely that all the RCD ratings (sensitivities) listed on the certificate will be installed
in the installation under test. If this is the case delete any RCD sensitivity that does not apply.
DISTRIBUTION OF CERTIFICATES
Each Certificate consists of four pages i.e. the original and three copies. The method of distribution of the Certificate
and copies is shown at the bottom of each Certificate and copy. The “Original” marked “1” is deemed to be the
"Completion Certificate" and must be given to the person ordering the work but not until after the post-connection tests
have been completed i.e. all the required detail entered on the Certificate, and the Certificate signed to that effect. The
copy marked “2” must be forwarded to The Regulatory Body after the preconnection tests have been completed, the
results entered on the Certificate, and the Certificate signed to that effect. The copy marked “3” must be forwarded to
The Regulatory Body after the post-connection tests have been completed, the results entered on the Certificate, and
the Certificate signed to that effect. The final copy must be retained by the contractor concerned. It should be completed
in full after pre and post-connection tests have been completed. It and the associated test record sheets must be available
for inspection.
160
63.4.2 PROCEDURES FOR ETCI COMPLETION CERTIFICATE No.2: INSTALLATIONS ≥ 50kVA
INTRODUCTION
The Registered Contractor that constructs the Installation and subsequently signs the completion certificate is
making a formal declaration that the installation as installed by him/her:
- complies with the current National Rules for Electrical Installations (ET101), and
- is ready for connection to the electricity supply network. The use of this certificate fulfils the certification
requirements set down in the Energy (Miscellaneous Provision) Act 2006.
SCOPE
Cert No.2 covers new installations, reconnections, alterations including modification and/or testing of existing
installations, a commercial temporary supply and other. This certificate may only be used for an installation with
an MIC 50kVA or more.
Note: Sub-system certificates are also required for installations where more than one electrical contractor is involved. (See 64.4.3).

Test Record Sheets must be completed for all installation work. Installations in agricultural premises may also require
and “test”.
1. Premises Description
This describes the type of premises in which the installation is being constructed.
2. Type of Installation
This indicates whether an installation is:
1. New.
2. Re-connection (of existing installation).
3. Alteration – which includes extensions.
4. Commercial Temporary Supply.
5. Other: Any other electrical work not covered by above. Details must be given in the “Comment or Details” box.
6. Modification / Test of an Existing Installation.
3. Maximum Import Capacity (MIC)

The MIC is the maximum number of kilo Volt Amperes (kVA) i.e. maximum capacity for the connection
point of the electrical installation under test.
4. kW Loadings
The kW loading under the different headings, e.g. lighting, heating, etc should be indicated here.
5. Test Results
See Chapter 61 and Annexes for Chapter 61.

Test Record Sheets must be completed in detail for all installations and cross-referenced to the electrical completion
certificate.
7. Sub-Systems
This term is used in multi-contractor electrical installations where sub-system contractors such as refrigeration, air
conditioning, lift etc. may be employed in addition to the Main Electrical Contractor. Subsystem contractors must
also certify any work that is subject to the current Rules by using a separate subsystem completion certificate. These
certificates together with the relevant Test Record Sheets must be submitted to the Project Supervisor for inclusion in
Project Safety File.
The main electrical contractor must indicate whether there are sub-systems present by ticking the appropriate
box. If the tick is “yes” i.e. sub-system present, details such as sub-system completion certificate numbers and
sub-system description should be recorded in the comment section of this certificate. A certificate completed in
this fashion is considered to have sufficient detail to comply with the certification requirements where electrical sub-
systems are installed.
161
8. Comments
This space allows the contractor to give additional information and to comment on the installation, extent of work etc.
The Comment Box should also indicate in detail the type of work involved where the "Alteration" (e.g. alteration to
existing installation) or "Other" boxes are ticked. Where an extension to an existing installation is involved, the
contractor must make sure that the existing installation is adequate to ensure the safety of the extension. The comment
box should be used only for the purpose of providing additional information. On no account should statements
disclaiming responsibility for part/parts of the installation, or any statement rendering the certificate invalid be made.
The Registered Contractor must insert his/her name, address, telephone number and Registration Number in the box
provided.

Before submitting the copy of the certificate to the Regulatory Body, the contractor must provide his/her signature in
the Pre-connection Box. This states that the installation complies with The National Rules and that the pre-connection
tests described in Chapter 61 of the Rules have been completed.
11. Post-connection Tests

Immediately after the installation has been energised these tests must be completed.
11.1 Fault-loop impedance tests

Fault-loop Impedance measurements must be made at the furthest point of each circuit. The maximum value
in ohms obtained must be recorded on the certificate in addition to the rating and type of its associated protective
device.
11.2 RCD tests

All RCD’s must be tested and their respective maximum tripping times recorded on the associated test record
sheet. The information required on the certificate is the following:
RCD’s may have a rated residual tripping (operating) current (sensitivity) of e.g. 30mA, 100mA,300mA, or
500mA, The maximum tripping time must be recorded for every RCD rating (sensitivity) installed. This
maximum tripping time must be recorded in addition to a short description of the circuit protected by the
respective RCD. It is unlikely that all the RCD ratings (sensitivities) listed on the certificate will be installed
in the installation under test. If this is the case delete any RCD sensitivity that does not apply.
DISTRIBUTION OF CERTIFICATES
Each Certificate consists of four pages i.e. the original and three copies. The method of distribution of the Certificate
and copies is shown at the bottom of each Certificate and copy. The Original marked “1” is deemed to be the
“Completion Certificate” and must be given to the person ordering the work but not until after the postconnection tests
have been completed i.e. all the required detail entered on the Certificate, and the Certificate signed to that effect. The
copy marked “2” must be forwarded to The Regulatory Body after the pre-connection tests have been completed, the
results entered on the Certificate, and the Certificate signed to that effect. The copy marked “3” must be forwarded to
The Regulatory Body after the post-connection tests have been completed, the results entered on the Certificate, and
the Certificate signed to that effect. The final copy must be retained by the contractor concerned. It must be completed
in full after pre and post-connection tests have been completed. It and the associated test record sheets must be available
for inspection.
63.4.3 PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETING ETCI SUB-SySTEM COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
INTRODUCTION
This sub-system certificate may not be used on its own to obtain an electricity supply from the Distribution System
Operator. The sub-system contractor that constructs the sub-system and subsequently signs the subsystem completion
certificate is making a formal declaration that the sub system installation complies with the National Rules for Electrical
Installations, and is ready for connection to the main electrical contractor’s installation. The use of this certificate
fulfils the certification requirements set down in the Energy (Miscellaneous Provision) Act 2006.
SCOPE
Where an installation contains sub-systems, each sub contractor must provide a sub-system certificate for that part of
the installation. This sub-system certificate should be held in the project safety file as required by Health & Safety
legislation. The main electrical contractor must be given a copy of each sub-system certificate that has been issued for
each sub-system connected to the electrical installation.

All the boxes must be filled in either with a tick or a value as instructed on the certificate. Test Record Sheets should
be completed for all installation work. The certificate should indicate whether it is in respect of construction and test,
or test only. Test only is acceptable where the installation is existing. The sub-system contractor responsible for the
construction of a new sub-system installation must tick the boxes “construction” and “test”.
162
Test Record Sheets should be completed for all installation work. Installations in agricultural premises may also require
and “test”.
1. Concise Installation Description

The type of sub-system installation involved should be described, e.g. lift, air conditioning etc. Where this complies
with a particular standard or specification this should be stated.
2. Test Results
Tests must be made with suitable testing equipment. Methods of measurement are given in Chapter 61 of the Rules.
The test values must be inserted in the appropriate part of the certificate.

Test Record Sheets must be completed in detail for all sub-systems and cross-referenced to the sub-system completion
certificate.
4. Comments or Details
This space allows the sub-system contractor to give additional information and to comment on the subsystem
installation, extent of work etc. The comment box should also indicate in detail the type of work involved where the
"alteration" (e.g. alteration to existing installation) or "other" boxes are ticked. Where an extension to an existing
installation is involved, the contractor must make sure that the existing installation is adequate to ensure the safety of
the extension. The comment box shall be used only for the purpose of providing additional information. On no account
should statements disclaiming responsibility for part/parts of the sub-system installation, or any statement rendering
the certificate invalid be made.
The Registered Sub-system Contractor must insert his/her name, address, telephone number and Registration Number
in the box provided.
Before submitting the copy of the certificate to the project supervisor, the sub-system contractor must provide his/her
signature in the Pre-connection Box. This states that the installation complies with the National Rules and that the pre-
connection tests described in Chapter 61 of the Rules have been completed.
7. Post connection Tests

Immediately after the sub-system has been energised these tests must be completed
7.1 Fault-loop impedance tests
Fault-loop Impedance measurements must be made at the furthest point of each circuit. The maximum ohm’s
reading obtained must be recorded on the certificate in addition to the rating and type of its associated protective
device.
7.2 RCD tests
All RCD’s must be tested and their respective maximum tripping times recorded on the associated test record
sheet. The information required on the certificate is the following:
RCDs may have a rated residual tripping (operating) current (sensitivity) of e.g. 30mA, 100mA, 300mA, or
500mA, The maximum trip time must be recorded for every RCD rating (sensitivity) installed. This maximum
trip time must be recorded in addition to a short description of the circuit protected by the respective RCD. It
is unlikely that all the RCD ratings (sensitivities) listed on the certificate will be installed in the installation under
test. If this is the case delete any RCD sensitivity that does not apply.
8. DISTRIBUTION OF CERTIFICATES
The method of distribution of Certificates and copies is shown at the bottom of each Certificate and copy:
(a) The pre-connection test copy shall be submitted to the Project Supervisor after the pre-connection tests have
been completed. A copy of this shall be given to the main electrical contractor responsible for preparing the
completion certificate for the installation concerned
(b) The original certificate is deemed to be the “Sub-System Completion Certificate”. The original Certificate shall
be submitted to the Project Supervisor after the post-connection tests have been completed. A copy of this shall
also be given to the main electrical contractor responsible for preparing the completion certificate for the
installation concerned.
(c) The final copy shall be retained by the sub-system contractor. It shall be completed in full after pre- and post-
connection tests have been completed. It and the associated test record sheets shall be available for inspection.
163
63.4.4: PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION CERTIFICATE FOR EXISTING ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS (CERTIFICATE 3)
SCOPE
Cert No. 3 covers alterations (including additions and extensions) to existing installations and cannot be used to
obtain a connection or a re-connection of the electrical supply from the DSO. Cert. No. 3 is to be used in
accordance with CER requirements which includes:
1. Specific controlled works 2, 3, 4 or 5, new work to existing installation, alteration, replacement of accessories,
Minor Works and Sub-systems.
2. (Note: Controlled Works No. 1 is not included in Cert. No. 3).
Such works include the following:
2. the modification, installation or replacement of a Distribution Board including customer tails on either side
of the Main Protective Device, or new installation in special locations as defined in Part 7 of the *National
Wiring Rules ET101 and ET105;
3. the installation or replacement of one or more extra circuits in an existing installation, including the
installation of one or more additional protective devices for such circuits on a distribution board;
4. Subsystems installed in Commercial, Industrial and Domestic installations where they fall within the remit
of the *National Wiring Rules;
5. the inspection, testing and certification of existing electrical installations (in accordance with Chapter 62 of
the *Wiring Rules (ET 101 – Fourth Edition 2008 and to conform to Regulations 89 of S. I. No 732 of
2007).
*Note: Reference to the “National Wiring Rules” or to the “Wiring Rules” in this amendment means the “National Rules for Electrical
Installations – ET101:2008” and subsequent amendments.
Registered Electrical Contractors (RECs) are required to certify the alterations, installation or replacement of
electrical installations, using this Completion Certificate for Existing Installations (Certificate 3).
The Completion Certificate for Existing Installations (Certificate 3) shall be used for the following purposes;
Specific controlled works 2, 3, 4 or 5, new work to existing installation, alteration, replacement of accessories,
Minor Works and Sub-systems.
Note: This certificate cannot be used to obtain a connection or a re-connection of the electrical supply from the DSO.
63.4.4.1 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS (CERTIFICATE 3)
All the boxes must be filled in either with a tick or a value or marked not applicable (N/A) as instructed on the
certificate. Completed Test Record Sheets are required for all installation work.
1. Description of the premises

This describes the type of premises involved.
2. Details of what the certificate covers

Specify Controlled Works Number either 2, 3, 4 or 5. New work to existing installations, alteration, replacement of
accessories, Minor Works and Sub-systems.
3. Tests and Test Record Sheets

Tests must be made with suitable testing equipment. Methods of measurement are provided in Chapter 61 of the
National Rules for Electrical Installations ET101. The test results must be inserted in the appropriate Test Record
Sheets (TRS) and a copy of the results on the TRS to be submitted with the Certificate for Existing Installations
(Certificate 3) to the ESSB.
4. Comments or Details
This space allows the registered electrical contractor to provide additional information and to comment on the
installation, extent of the work etc.
The Comment Box should also indicate in detail the type of work involved where the "Alteration" (e.g. alteration to
existing installations) or "Other" boxes are ticked. It shall be verified that an extension, addition or alteration to an
existing installation complies with these Rules, and that it does not impair the safety of the installation, and that the
safety of the new installation is not impaired by the existing installation.
The comment box shall be used only for the purpose of providing additional information. On no account should
statements disclaiming responsibility for part(s) of the installation be made; nor any statement that attempts to
render the certificate invalid.
164
The Registered Electrical Contractor must insert his/her name, address, telephone number and Registration Number
in the box provided.
6. Certification
The Registered Electrical Contractor must sign the top copy of the Certificate on completion of Pre-connection and
Post-connection tests.
7. Qualified Certifier; see Electrical Safety Supervisory Criteria Document (Version 3.0 - CER/16/001)
The Qualified Certifier must insert his/her qualified certifier’s number in the space provided on the completion
certificate.
8. DISTRIBUTION OF CERTIFICATES
The top copy of the certificate is deemed to be the "Completion Certificate". This original copy (Top Copy) should
be given to the person ordering the work after all required tests have been completed and results entered on the
certificate and the certificate signed to that effect. The middle copy of the certificate should be forwarded to the
Regulatory body, and the bottom copy must be retained by the Registered Electrical contractor concerned. The
certificate should be completed in full after pre and post-connection tests have been completed. It and the associated
test record sheets must be available for inspection."
ANNEXES FOR CHAPTER 63:
ANNEX 63A: SPECIMEN COMPLETION CERTIFICATES IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 63.

ANNEX 63B: GUIDELINES FOR CERTIFICATION FOR ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING INSTALLATIONS.
165
166
PART 7
REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS

OR LOCATIONS
Contents
Forword
701 LOCATION CONTAINING A BATH OR SHOWER BASIN

702 SWIMMING POOLS AND PADDLING POOLS
702A FOUNTAINS
703 LOCATION CONTAINING A HOT-AIR SAUNA HEATER
704 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION SITE INSTALLATIONS
705 AGRICULTURAL AND HORTICULTURAL PREMISES
706 CONDUCTING LOCATIONS WITH RESTRICTED MOVEMENT
707 VOID
708 CARAVAN PARKS AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
709 MARINAS AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
710 MEDICAL LOCATIONS
711 EXHIBITIONS, SHOWS AND STANDS
712 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
713 RESERVED
714 OUTDOOR LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
715 EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
716 RESERVED
717 MOBILE OR TRANSPORTABLE UNITS
721 CARAVANS AND MOTOR CARAVANS
729 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE GANGWAYS
740 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS FOR STRUCTURES, AMUSEMENT DEVICES AND BOOTHS AT
FAIRGROUNDS, AMUSEMENT PARKS AND CIRCUSES.
753 FLOOR AND CEILING HEATING SYSTEMS.
FOREWORD
The requirements of Part 7 supplement, modify or replace the general requirements of the other parts of the Rules.
The absence of a reference to a chapter, a section or a clause means that the corresponding general requirements are
applicable.
The numbers following the section number (e.g. 701) are those of the corresponding chapters, sections or clauses of
Parts 2 to 6 inclusive. Final digits 01, 02 etc indicate additional requirements.
This Part implements the following CENELEC Harmonization Documents:

HD 60364-7-701: 2007: Locations containing a bath or shower basin
HD 60364-7-702: 2003: Swimming pools and paddling pools
HD 60364-7-703: 2005:Locations containing a hot-air sauna
HD 60364-7-704: 2007: Construction and demolition sites
HD 60364-7-705: 2007: Agricultural and horticultural installations
HD 60364-7-706: 2007: Conducting locations with restricted movement
HD 60364-7-708:2008: Caravan parks and similar locations
HD 60364-7-709: 2008: Marinas and similar locations
167
HD 60364-7-711: 2007: Exhibitions, shows and stands

HD 60364-7-712: 2005: Solar photovoltaic (PV) power supply systems
HD 60364-7-714: S1: Outdoor lighting installations
HD 60364-7-715: 2005: Extra-low voltage lighting installations
HD 60364-7-721: 2008: Caravans and motor caravans
HD 60364-7-740: 2006: Temporary installations for structures, amusement devices and booths at fairgrounds,
amusement parks and circuses
701: Location containing a bath or shower basin

701.11 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to the electrical installations in locations containing a fixed bath or
shower and to the surrounding zones as described in this section.
This section does not apply to emergency facilities, e.g. emergency showers used in industrial areas or laboratories.
Note 1: For locations containing a bath or a shower unit for medical treatment, or for disabled persons, special requirements may be necessary.
Note 2: For prefabricated bath or shower units see EN 60335-2-105
701.3 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
701.30 Classification of Zones
701.30.01 The zones specified below shall be taken into account. For fixed prefabricated bath or shower units, the
zones are applied to the situation where the bath or shower unit is in its usable configuration. Horizontal or inclined
ceilings, walls with or without windows, doors, floors and fixed partitions may limit the extent of rooms containing
a bath or shower as well as the zones. Where the dimensions of fixed partitions are smaller than the dimensions of the
relevant zones, e.g. partitions having a height lower than 2.25m, the minimum distances in the horizontal and vertical
directions shall be taken into account.
For electrical equipment in parts of walls or ceilings limiting the zones specified, but being part of the wall surface of
that wall or ceiling, the requirements of the respective zones apply A cupboard or closet opening directly into a location
containing a bath or shower-basin shall be deemed to form part of the appropriate zone or zones for the purposes of
this section.
701.30.02 Zone 0 is the interior of the bath or shower- basin.
In a location containing a shower- unit without a basin, Zone 0 is limited by:
- the floor and the plane 100 mm above the finished floor level, and
- the vertical plane at a radius of 1200m measured horizontally from the centre point of the fixed water-inlet on the
wall or ceiling.
701.30.03 Zone 1 is limited by:
- the upper plane of Zone 0, and

- the horizontal plane 2.25 m above the finished floor level of the bathroom, and - the vertical plane circumscribing
the bath.
In a location containing a shower unit, Zone 1 is limited by:

- The horizontal plane 2.25 metres above the finished floor level, or the horizontal plane corresponding to the highest
fixed shower head or water inlet, whichever is higher
- the vertical plane circumscribing the shower base, or
- for a shower without a basin, with a demountable head, the vertical plane at a radius of 1200mm, measured
horizontally, from the water inlet on the wall, or
- for a shower without a basin and with a fixed head, the vertical plane at a radius of 1200 mm measured horizontally,
from the shower- head.
Zone 1 includes the space below the bath or shower basin if the space is accessible without a tool. [SNC]
Note: For shower units without a basin, Zones 0 and 1 extend horizontally to replace Zone 2.
168
- the vertical plane(s) external to Zone 1 and the parallel vertical plane at a distance of 600 mm, measured horizontally,
from Zone 1, and
- for a bath, the finished floor level and the horizontal plane 2.25 m above the finished floor level, or
- for a shower, the horizontal plane 2.25 m above the finished floor level or the horizontal plane corresponding to the
highest fixed shower- head or water outlet, whichever is higher.

There is no Zone 2 for shower units without a basin.

- the vertical plane(s) external to Zone 2 and the parallel vertical plane(s) 2.40 m, measured horizontally, from Zone
2, and
- the floor and the horizontal plane 2.25 m above the finished floor level. In addition, where the ceiling height exceeds
2.25 m above the finished floor level, the space above Zones 1 and 2 up to the ceiling or to a height of 3.0 m above
the finished floor level, whichever is lower, is in Zone 3.
- Zone 3 also includes the space below the bath or shower basin if it is accessible only by means of a key or tool.
- for a shower unit without a basin, the vertical plane 2400mm from Zone 1 measured horizontally.
701. 41 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
701.413 Protection by electrical separation
701.413.01 Protection by electrical separation is limited to shaver- outlets.
701.414 Protection by extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV
701.414.01 Where the protective measure SELV is used, protection against direct contact (basic protection) shall be
provided by:
- barriers or enclosures affording a degree of protection of at least IP2X, or

- insulation capable of withstanding a test voltage of 500V a.c. r.m.s for 1 minute.
Note: This applies whatever the nominal voltage.
701.414.02 PELV shall not be used.
701.416 Additional protection
701.416.1 Additional basic protection by RCDs
In all zones of a room containing a bath or shower, every circuit shall be protected by a dedicated RCD having a rated
residual operating current not exceeding 30mA, except circuits protected by SELV.
Note 1: See 701.559 for particular requirements for circuits for luminaires.
Note 2: A separate dedicated RCD is required for a shower unit (see 555.3).
701.416.2 Additional protection for fault protective measures by supplementary equipotential bonding
Supplementary equipotential bonding shall be provided in accordance with 701.544
701.51 COMMON RULES AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
701.512.01 Electrical equipment shall have at least the following degrees of protection:
- in Zone 0: IP X7,
- in Zone 1: IPX4,
- in Zone 2: IPX4.
Electrical equipment exposed to water jets e.g. for cleaning purposes in communal baths shall have a degree of
protection of at least IPX5. Notwithstanding the above requirements, shaver outlets complying with I.S.EN 61558-2-
6 may be installed in Zone 2 where direct spray from shower units is unlikely.
Note: Communal baths are baths and shower units used in schools, factories, sports clubs etc., and include those used by the general public.
169
701. 52 WIRING SySTEMS

701.522 Selection and erection in relation to external influences
701.522.6 Impact
The text of 522.6 is replaced by the following:

701.522.6.01 Wiring concealed in the wall of a bathroom shall be protected against damage by impact or penetration,
by means of an earthed metal screen, armouring, metal conduit or trunking, except where one of the following two
conditions a) or b) apply:
a) The wiring is installed in a straight vertical or horizontal run going directly to fixed electrical equipment or to an
accessory, and the distance between the wiring and the reverse side of the wall is not less than 50 mm measured
horizontally.
b) The wiring is protected by the protective measure SELV in accordance with 414.
701.522.6.02 In Zone 0, wiring systems on the surface or concealed within a wall at a depth not exceeding 50 mm
shall supply only fixed electrical equipment situated in Zone 0.
701.522.6.03 In Zone 1, wiring systems on the surface or within a wall at a depth not exceeding 50 mm shall supply
only fixed electrical equipment situated in Zone 0 and Zone 1. For current-using equipment in Zone 1 above a bath,
wiring shall be run vertically from above the appliance, or horizontally through the wall at the rear of the equipment.
only fixed electrical equipment situated in Zones 0, 1 and 2.
only fixed electric equipment in the bathroom.
701.522.8 Other mechanical stresses:
Not normally applicable.
Note: All circuits serving a bathroom or shower room must be protected by an RCD – see 701.416.1.
701.53 EQUIPMENT FOR PROTECTION, ISOLATION, SWITCHING, CONTROL AND MONITORING

Note: For requirements for equipment e.g. appliances in the zones, see 701.55.
701.53.01 The requirements of this section do not apply to switches or controls that are incorporated in fixed
equipment suitable for installation and use in a zone.
701.53.02 In Zone 0, switchgear, control gear or accessories are not permissible
701.53.03 In Zone 1, only the following items are permissible:
- switches and accessories of circuits protected by SELV and supplied at a nominal voltage not exceeding 25 V a.c.
r.m.s. or 60 V ripple- free d.c., the safety source being installed outside Zones 0, 1, and 2, and
- wall outlet boxes and fittings for the supply of current-using equipment permissible in Zone 1.
701.53.04 In Zone 2, only the following items are permissible.
- equipment permissible in Zone 1,

- socket-outlets complying with 701.554,
- accessories of circuits protected by SELV,
- accessories for signalling and communication equipment, provided such equipment is protected by SELV,
- wall outlet boxes and fittings for the supply of current-using equipment in Zone 2.
For the erection of switchgear, control gear and accessories, the requirements of 701.522.6.01 and 701.522.6.02 with
regard to the remaining wall depth are applicable.
701.53.05 In Zone 3, only the following items are permissible [SNC]:
- equipment permissible in Zone 2,

- accessories for equipment in Zone 3,
- socket-outlets complying with 701.554,
- wall outlet- boxes and fittings for the supply of current-using equipment in Zone 3.
- cord-operated switches mounted at a height not less than 2.25m.
Note: Wall-mounted switches, except for SELV, are not permissible in any zone.
170
701.54 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR AND EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
701.544 Equipotential bonding conductors
701.544.01 For compliance with 411.6.2, exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts in Zones 0, 1,
2 and 3 shall be interconnected by supplementary bonding conductors having a cross-sectional area of at least 2.5mm2
to form a local equipotential bonding system.
Note: Metal door architraves and metal window frames and similar parts are not considered to be extraneous-conductive-parts unless they are
connected to metal structural parts of the building, or in contact with earth. Non- insulated floors are not extraneous-conductive parts.
701.544.02 Bonding connections for pipes shall comply with 544.2.6 and 544.2.7
701.544.03 Bonding connections for Class I equipment shall be made either at a point on the protective conductor
or at a terminal on the equipment provided for the purpose. Where there are no exposed conductive parts (i.e. where
there is no Class I appliance), the equipotential bonding system shall be connected by a supplementary bonding
conductor to the nearest convenient point on the protective conductor or earthing terminal on equipment.
701.544.04 Metal baths or shower basins connected to metal pipes shall be connected to the local equipotential
bonding system either directly at a lug or metal support on the bath, or shower basin, or by the pipe-work where
effective conductivity exists.
701.544.05 Metal baths or shower basins isolated from all extraneous conductive parts, e.g. pipe-work, building
metal work including foil backing-material, shall not be connected to the local equipotential bonding system.
Care shall be taken to ensure that fixings in bathrooms and shower cubicles cannot introduce a potential, in particular
where foil- backing materials are used in walls and partitions.
Note: Isolation of a metal bath from earth or the bonding system should be verified by an insulation test (Chapter 61).
701.544.06 Metal radiators connected to non-metal pipes and otherwise isolated from other extraneous conductive
parts, e.g. building metal including foil backing-material, shall not be connected to the local bonding system.
Note: Isolation of the radiator from earth or the bonding system should be verified by an insulation test.
701.544.07 Where it may not be practicable to make a bonding connection inside the bathroom, it may be made in
an adjacent area where it is accessible for inspection.
Note: Such an area may be an attic space above the bathroom or an airing cupboard adjoining the bathroom (See Figures 701.1 and 701.2 ).
701.544.08 Where adequate conductance is not ensured by joints in metal pipes, separate bonding conductors shall
be provided.
701.55 OTHER EQUIPMENT
701.554 Plugs, socket-outlets and cable-couplers.
701.554.01 Socket-outlets shall not be installed in Zone 0 or Zone 1.
701.554.02 In Zone 2 or Zone 3, only the following types of socket-outlets are permissible:
- socket-outlets supplied at SELV,

- socket-outlets forming an integral part of shaver- outlets complying with IS.EN 61558-2-5.
701.554.03 Cable-couplers shall not be used for the connection of equipment.
701.555 Electrical appliances
701.555.01 For fixed equipment supplied by SELV in accordance with 701.414, the source shall be located outside
Zones 0, 1 and 2.
Note: PELV is not permissible in bathrooms.
171
701.555.02 In Zone 0, only the following appliances or equipment are permissible:
a) Appliances or equipment:
- fixed and permanently connected and suitable for use in Zone 0, and
- in compliance with the relevant European Standard, and
- installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
b) Appliances or equipment fixed and permanently connected and protected by SELV with a rated voltage not
exceeding 12V a.c. or 30V d.c.
Note: An example of such equipment is a lift for disabled persons.
701.555.03 In Zone 1, only the following appliances or equipment are permissible:
a) Appliances and equipment:

- fixed and permanently connected, and

- suitable for use in Zone 0 or Zone 1, and
- in compliance with the relevant European Standard, and
- installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
b) Appliances and equipment protected by SELV with a rated voltage not exceeding 25V a.c. or 60V d.c.
Note: Such equipment, which must comply with the above requirements, includes:
- electric water- heating appliances, pumps and shower units,
- appliances and equipment permissible in Zone 0,
- whirlpool units, ventilation equipment, towel rails.
701.555.04: In Zone 2 and Zone 3, appliances and equipment shall be fixed and permanently connected.,
Note Socket-outlets and wall-mounted switches may not be installed in Zone 3 except where they are protected by SELV- see 701.53.05.
701.555.05 Where a prefabricated shower cabinet is installed in a room other than a bath or shower room, any wall
switch and any socket-outlet shall be at a distance of at least 0.6 m from the door opening of the shower cabinet.
Note: See Figure701.5 .
701.555.06 Floor and ceiling heating systems shall comply with 753.
701.555.07
Note: Where the lighting switch also controls a fan, separate isolation of the fan must be provided downstream of the switch. For a fan with an
automatic time-delay device, a three-pole isolating switch is necessary - see 555.5.
701.559 Luminaires
Luminaires shall in addition comply with the following:
701.559.01 Luminaires shall be suitable for use in their particular zones, and have a minimum IP degree of protection
in accordance with 701.512.01
701.559.02 Luminaires in all zones shall be so constructed that the light bulb is totally enclosed by a shade or cover.
Note: Light bulbs in place must not be accessible without removing the cover.
701.559.03 A bathroom shall have at least one luminaire which:
- is mounted outside the zones and supplied by a circuit not protected by an RCD in accordance with 701.416.1, or
- contains a stand-by source of illumination complying with Chapter 56.
Note: This requirement applies to e.g. hotels, guest houses and nursing homes. It is not necessary to provide a standby source of illumination in
situations such as domestic bathrooms.
172
Fig. 701.1: Bathroom equipotential bonding system – all metal pipework and bath.
173
174
Fig. 701.2: Bathroom equipotential bonding system – all plastic pipework.

Fig. 701.3: Examples of bathroom zone dimensions – plan view.
175
176
Fig. 701.4: Examples of bathroom zone dimensions – elevation view.


Fig. 701.5: Prefabricated Shower Unit.
TABLE 701 A: ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PERMISSIBLE IN ROOMS CONTAINING A BATH OR

SHOWER.
177
702: Swimming pools and paddling pools

702.11 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to the basins of swimming pools, and the basins of paddling pools.
They also apply to the surrounding zones of these basins. In such areas, in normal use, the effects of electric shock
are increased by a reduction in body resistance and contact of the body with earth potential.
Swimming pools within the scope of an equipment standard are not within the scope of these Rules. For swimming
pools for medical use, special requirements may be necessary. Except for areas specially designed for swimming
pools, this section does not apply to natural waters, lakes in gravel pits, coastal areas and similar areas.
702.2 DEFINITIONS
Addition:
Small swimming pool: A pool where there is no Zone 2.

702.32 Classification of Zones
702.32.01 The requirements of this section are based on three zones: Zone 0, Zone 1 and Zone 2. Zones 1 and 2 may
be limited by fixed partitions having a minimum height of 2.5 m
Note: See Figures 702.1 and 702.2
Zone 0
Zone 0: is the interior of the basin and includes recesses in its walls or floor, basins for foot cleaning and the space
below them.
Zone 1
Zone 1 is limited by:
- Zone 0,
- a vertical plane 2m from the rim of the basin, and
- the floor or surface expected to be occupied by persons, and
- the horizontal plane 2.5m above that floor or surface.
Zone 1 includes the space limited by a vertical surface situated 1.5m around the diving
boards, spring boards, starting blocks chutes and other components, and by the horizontal plane 2.5m above the highest
surface expected to be occupied by persons.
Zone 2
Zone 2 is limited by:
- the vertical-plane surface to Zone 1 and a parallel plane 1.50m from the former,
- the floor or surface expected to be occupied by persons, and
- the horizontal plane 2.50m above the floor or surface.
702.41 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
702.410 Scope and general requirements
702.410.01 Only the following protective measures are permitted for swimming pools:
In Zone 0:
Protection by SELV at a nominal voltage not exceeding 12V a.c. r.m.s. the safety source being installed outside of
Zones 0, 1 and 2.
In Zone 1:
Protection by SELV at a nominal voltage not exceeding 12V a.c. r.m.s., the safety source being installed outside of
Zones 0, 1 and 2.
178
In Zone 2:
- protection by SELV, the safety source being installed outside Zones 0, 1 and 2; or
- protection by automatic disconnection of supply by means of an RCD with a rated residual operating current not
exceeding 30mA in accordance with 416.1.
702.410.02 Equipment e.g. for cleaning purposes for use in the interior of basins, which are intended to be in
operation when people are not inside Zone 0, shall be supplied by circuits protected by:
- SELV, its source being located outside the Zones, or

- SELV, its source being located in Zone 2 provided its supply circuit is protected by an RCD with a rated residual
operating current not exceeding 30mA, or
- automatic disconnection of the supply by means of an RCD with a rated residual operating current not exceeding
30mA.
The socket-outlets of circuits supplying such equipment shall have a notice warning the user that the equipment must
not be used while the swimming pool is occupied by persons.
702.414 Protection by extra-low voltage provided by SELV
702.414.01 Where SELV is used, whatever the nominal voltage, protection against direct contact shall be provided
by:
- barriers or enclosures affording at least the degree of protection IP2X, or

- insulation capable of withstanding a test voltage of 500V for 1 min.
702.416.2.01 Supplementary equipotential bonding shall be provided in accordance with 702.544.2.
702.512.01 Electrical equipment shall have at least the following degrees of protection
In Zone 0: IPX8.
In Zone 1: IPX5, or, for small swimming pools inside buildings (which normally are not cleaned by means of water
jets), IPX4.
In Zone 2: IPX2 for swimming pools indoors, IPX4 for swimming pools outdoors, IPX5 where water jets are likely
to be used for cleaning purposes.
702.52 WIRING SySTEMS
The following additional requirements apply to surface wiring systems, and to conduit wiring systems embedded in
the walls at a depth not exceeding 50mm.
702.52.01 In Zones 0 and 1, wiring systems shall not have an accessible metal sheath or metal covering.
702.52.02 In Zone 2, wiring systems shall not have an accessible metal sheath or metal covering.
Note: Such wiring may consist of:

- for surface systems, insulated conductors single- core cable in insulating conduit, or multi-core cable with an insulating outer sheath, or
- for embedded systems, single or multi-core cable in insulating conduit.
702.52.03 In Zone 0 and Zone 1, wiring systems shall be limited to those necessary for the supply of
equipment situated in those zones.
702.52.04 Junction boxes shall not be installed in Zone 0. In Zone 1, only junction boxes for SELV circuits are
permissible.
179
702.53.01 Switchgear or control gear shall not be installed in Zone 0 or Zone 1.
Note: See 702.554 for requirements for socket-outlets.
702.53.02 For small swimming pools where it is not possible to locate switches outside Zone 1, switches, preferably
with covers of non-conducting material, are permissible in Zone 1 provided:
- they are installed outside arm’s reach (1.25 m) from the Zone 0 border, and placed at least 0.3 m above the floor, and
- their supply circuits are protected either by SELV not exceeding 25V a.c. or 60V d.c., or by an RCD having a rated
residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
702.53.03 In Zone 2, switches are permitted provided their supply circuits are protected by:
- SELV, its source located outside Zones 0, 1 and 2, or

- SELV, its source located in Zone 2 and protected by an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding
30mA, or
- an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA
702.544.2.01 A local supplementary equipotential bonding system shall connect all extraneous conductive parts in
Zones 0, 1 and 2 and all exposed conductive parts situated in these zones, or their protective conductors.
702.544.2.02 All extraneous conductive parts shall be interconnected by equipotential bonding conductors and,
together with the potential equalising grid, connected to the protective conductor in the distribution board serving
Zones 0, 1 and 2.
Note: Examples of extraneous conductive parts to be bonded include metal reinforcement of concrete, metal basins, metal water pipes, metal
heating ducts.
702.544.2.03 Equipotential bonding conductors shall have a cross sectional area of not less than 6mm2.
Note: In Zone 1 of permanent basin installations, a potential equalisation grid should be provided below and close to the horizontal surface
surrounding the basin and commencing at not more than 0.6m from the rim of the basin. The grid should be provided by one of the
following two methods.
1. Conductors laid parallel to the rim of the basin approximately 0.6m between each other and connected to each other at not less than two
places. The cross-sectional dimensions of conductors should be not less than:
- 100mm2 hot galvanized steel strip of 3 mm minimum thickness,
- 10mm diameter hot galvanized steel round bar,
- 50mm2 copper strip of 2mm minimum thickness,
- 35mm2 copper round rod.
2. Concrete reinforcing steel mesh welded together at joints.

Standard constructional steel mesh may be used, of dimensions 200mm 200mm.
702.554 Plugs, socket-outlets and cable couplers.
702.554.01 Socket-outlets shall not be installed in Zone 0 or Zone 1.
702.554.02 For small swimming pools where it is not possible to locate socket-outlets outside Zone 1, socket-outlets,
preferably having non-conductive covers or cover-plates, are permitted in Zone 1 if they are installed outside arm’s
reach (1.25m) from the Zone 0 border, and placed at least 0.3 m above the floor, and they are protected by:
- SELV in accordance with 414 at a nominal voltage not exceeding 25V a.c. or 60V d.c., its source located outside
Zones 0 and 1, or
- an RCD having a residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
702.554.03 In Zone 2, socket-outlets are permitted only if their supply circuits are protected by one of the following
protective measures:
180
- SELV, its source located outside Zones 0,1 and 2, or

- SELV, its source located in Zone 2, provided its supply circuit is protected by an RCD having a rated residual
operating current not exceeding 30mA, or
- an RCD having a residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
705.555 Appliances and current-using equipment of swimming pools

705.555.01 Appliances which are intended to be in operation only when people are outside Zone 0 may be used in
all zones provided that they are supplied by circuits protected according to 702.410.02.
702.555.02 Electric heating elements embedded in the floor shall comply with 753, and in addition shall be:
- protected by SELV, the source being outside Zones 0, 1 and 2, or

- covered by an embedded earthed metal grid or by an embedded earthed metal sheath connected to the supplementary
equipotential bonding specified in 702.544 provided that their supply circuits are additionally protected by an RCD
with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA
In Zone 0 and 1, only fixed current-using equipment especially intended for use in swimming pools may be installed,
subject to 702.555.02 and 702.555.03.
In Zone 2 only the following may be installed:
- Class II fixed equipment, and

- Class I fixed equipment protected by RCDs having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
702.555.03 Special requirements for the installation of electrical equipment in Zone 1 of swimming pools
Fixed equipment designed for use in swimming pools and other basins (e.g. filtration groups, jet stream) supplied at
low voltage is permitted in Zone 1 subject to the following requirements:
a) The equipment shall be located inside an insulating enclosure providing at least Class II or equivalent insulation and
providing protection against mechanical impact of medium severity. This sub-clause applies irrespective of the
classification of the equipment.
Note: This enclosure may be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment.
b) The equipment shall be accessible only through a hatch or a door that can only be opened by means of a key or tool.
The opening of the hatch or door shall disconnect all live conductors. The supply cable and the main disconnecting
means shall be installed in such a way that it provides protection equivalent to Class II.
c) The supply circuit of this equipment shall be protected by:
- SELV at a nominal voltage not exceeding 25V a.c. or 60V d.c., the source for SELV being located outside Zones 0,
1 and 2; or
- an RCD with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
702.559 Luminaires and lighting installations
702.559.01 Underwater lighting of swimming pools
Luminaires for use in the water or in contact with the water shall comply with I.S.EN 60598-2-18.
Luminaires located behind watertight portholes intended to be serviced from behind shall comply with the appropriate
section of I.S.EN 60598, and installed so as to ensure that their exposed conductive parts cannot come into contact
under any circumstances with any conductive parts of the portholes.
For small swimming pools where it is not possible to locate luminaires outside Zone 1, luminaires inside Zone 1 are
permitted if they are installed outside arm’s reach from the Zone 0 border (1.25 m) and protected by:
- SELV, the source for SELV being installed outside Zones 0, 1 and 2; or
- RCDs with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
In addition, luminaires shall have an enclosure providing Class II or equivalent insulation and providing protection
against mechanical impact of medium severity.
181

Fig. 702.1: Zone dimensions for swimming-pools and paddling-pools (elevation).
Fig. 702.2: Zone dimensions for swimming-pool basin above ground.
182

Fig. 702.3: Example of dimensions (plan) with fixed partitions of height at least 2.5m.
702A: Fountains
702A.11 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to basins of fountains and to their surrounding areas. Where a fountain
forms part of a swimming pool, the requirements of 702 apply also.
702A.2 DEFINITIONS
Addition: Basin of a fountain: A water basin not intended to be occupied by persons.
703A.3 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
702A.32 Classification of zones
702A.32.01 The requirements of this section are based on two zones: Zone 0 and Zone 1. Zone 0 is the interior of
the basin and includes recesses in its walls and floors and water jets or waterfalls and the space below them. Zone 1
is limited by Zone 0, by a vertical plane 2m from the rim of the basin, and by a horizontal plane 2.5m above the rim.
702A.41 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK
702A.410.01 In Zones 0 and 1 of fountains only the following protective measures shall be employed:
i) SELV, the source being located outside Zone 0 and Zone 1;

ii) automatic disconnection of the supply by an RCD with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
702A.51 COMMON RULES AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
702A.512 External influences
702A.512.01 Electrical equipment shall have at least the following degrees of ingress protection:
- in Zone 0: IP X8
- in Zone 1: IP X5.
183
702A.52 WIRING SySTEMS
702A.52.01 The following additional requirements apply:
a) Cables for electrical equipment in Zone 0 shall be installed outside the basin and run to that equipment inside the
basin by the shortest practicable route.
b) In Zone 1, cables shall be installed with suitable mechanical protection.
Cables shall comply with I.S. 201 or I.S. 202 but shall not be used unless the manufacturer has declared their suitability
for continued immersion in water
702A.52.02 Junction boxes shall not be installed in Zones 0 or 1, but for SELV circuits they may be installed in Zone 1.
702A.54 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR AND EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
702A.544.2 Supplementary equipotential bonding
702A.544.2.01 All extraneous conductive parts in Zones 0 and 1 shall be connected to the protective conductor and
the exposed conductive parts of the installation in these zones.
702A.55 OTHER EQUIPMENT
702A.55.01 Electrical equipment in Zones 0 and 1 shall be mechanically protected e.g. by use of mesh-glass or by
grids which can only be removed by tools.
702A.55.02 Electrical equipment for use in Zones 0 and 1 shall be Class I and shall be suitable for installation in
Zones 1 and 2.
Electric pumps shall comply with I.S.EN 60335-2-41.
702A.559 Luminaires and lighting installations
702A.559.01 Luminaires in Zone 0 and 1 shall be fixed and shall comply with I.S.EN 60598-2-18.
Fig. 702A.1: Example of determination of zones of a fountain.
184
703 Location containing a hot air sauna heater

703.11 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to:

- sauna cabins erected on site, e.g. in a location or room,

- the room where the sauna heater is installed, or the sauna-heating appliances are installed. In this case, the whole room
is considered as the sauna.
They do not apply to prefabricated sauna cabins complying with I.S.EN 60335-2-53.
Where facilities such as cold-water basins or showers are installed, 701 applies also.
703.32 CLASSIFICATION OF ZONES OF AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The requirements of this section are based on three zones of ambient temperature as follows:
Zone 1: is limited by the floor, the ceiling and a vertical plane circumscribing the sauna heater at a distance of 0.5m
from the sauna heater. If the sauna heater is located closer than 0.5m to a wall, Zone 1 extends to the cold side of the
thermal insulation of that wall.
Zone 2: is the space outside Zone 1, which is limited by the floor, a horizontal plane 1m above the floor, and the cold
side of the thermal insulation of the walls.
Zone 3: is the space outside Zone 1, which is limited by the ceiling and walls, a horizontal plane 1m above the floor,
and the cold side of the thermal insulation of the walls.
703.414 Protective measure: SELV and PELV
by:

- insulation capable of withstanding a test voltage of 500V a.c. r.m.s for 1 min.
703.416.1 Additional protection for basic insulation (protection against direct contact).
703.416.1.01 Additional protection shall be provided for all circuits of the sauna except for the sauna heater, by an
RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
703.512.01 Equipment shall have at least the degree of protection IP X4. If cleaning by water jets may reasonably
be expected, electrical equipment shall have a degree of protection of at least IPX5.
703.512.02 In Zone 1, only equipment belonging to the sauna heater may be installed.
In Zone 2, there is no special requirement concerning heat-resistance of equipment.
In Zone 3, the equipment shall withstand a minimum temperature of 125° C, and the insulation of wires shall withstand
a minimum temperature of 170°C.
Note: It is recommended that luminaires should not be mounted directly on the ceiling. There should be a clearance of 100mm between the
fitting and the ceiling in order to prevent overheating.
703.52.01 Wiring systems shall be capable of resisting the mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses likely to occur
in a sauna room.
185
703.52.02 Wiring systems shall preferably be installed outside the zones, i.e. on the cold side of the thermal
insulation.
703.52.03 If the wiring system is installed in Zone 1 or Zone 3 (i.e. on the warm side of the thermal insulation), it
shall be heat-resistant according to 703.52.01. Metal sheaths and metal conduits shall not be accessible in normal use.
703.53 EQUIPMENT FOR PROTECTION, ISOLATION, SWITCHING , CONTROL, AND MONITORING

703.53.01 Switchgear and control gear, which forms part of the sauna heater equipment or of other fixed equipment
installed in Zone 2, may be installed within the sauna room or cabin according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Other switchgear and control gear, e.g. lighting, shall be placed outside the sauna room or cabin. Socket-outlets shall
not be installed within the location containing the sauna heater.
703.537 Devices for isolation and switching
703.537.01 An isolating switch for the sauna heater shall be installed outside the sauna room and close to the room
entrance.
703.555.01 Sauna-heating appliances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Fig. 703.1: Zone dimensions of locations with sauna heaters.
186
704: Construction and demolition site installations.

704.11 SCOPE
704.11.01 The special requirements of this section apply to temporary installations for construction and demolition
sites during the period of construction or demolition work, including e.g. the following:
- building operations,
- construction work of new buildings
- repair, alteration, extension or demolition of existing buildings or parts of existing buildings,
- engineering works,
- earth works,
- work of a similar nature.
The special requirements of this section do not apply to:
- mining installations or other installations where equipment of a similar nature to that used for surface-mining
applications are involved,

- installations in administrative locations of construction or demolition sites. (offices, cloakrooms, meeting rooms,
canteen, restaurants, dormitories, toilets etc. for which the general Rules in Parts 3 to 6 apply.
Note: For special situations, more severe requirements may apply, e.g. 706: Conducting locations with restricted movement.
704.11.02 The requirements of this section are applicable to:

- fixed installations comprising the main switchgear assembly, control devices and protective devices,
- installations on the load side of that assembly comprising mobile and transportable electrical equipment as part of
moveable installations.
Note: The place where such an assembly is located is considered to be the interface between the supply system and the construction or demolition
site installation.
704.313 Supplies
704.313.01 Equipment shall be identified with the particular supply from which it is energized, and shall contain only
components connected to one and the same installation, except for control and signalling circuits and input from
standby supplies.
Note: A single construction or demolition site may be served by several sources of supply, including fixed or mobile generating sets.
704.313.02 Safety and standby supplies shall be connected by means of devices arranged to prevent the
interconnection of different supplies.
704.410 Scope and general requirements
704.410.01 Circuits supplying socket-outlets having a rated current not exceeding 32A, and other circuits supplying
portable or hand-held equipment with a rated current not exceeding 32A, shall be protected in case of a fault (indirect
contact) by one of the following measures:
- an RCD with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA,

- SELV or PELV according to 414,
- Reduced Low Voltage according to 415.
Where SELV or PELV is used, whatever the nominal voltage, basic protection (protection against direct) shall be
provided by:
- barriers or enclosures affording a degree of protection at least IP2X, or

- insulation capable of withstanding a test voltage of 500V for min.
704.410.02 Circuits supplying socket-outlets and having a rated current exceeding 32A shall be protected against
indirect contact by RCDs having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 500mA.
187
704.410.03 The protective measure electrical separation (413) is not permitted on construction or demolition sites.
704.512.01 Care shall be taken to ensure that equipment has the degrees of protection appropriate for the external
influences.
704.522.01 To avoid damage, cables shall preferably not be run across site roads or walkways. Where this is
unavoidable, supplementary protection shall be provided against mechanical damage and impact by construction plant.
Particular attention shall be given to the protection of surface-run cables and overhead cables, taking account of the
environment and activities at the site.
704.522.02 Flexible cables that are subject to movement shall be of the HO7 RN-F type or equivalent type resistant
to abrasion and water.
704.530.5 Distribution boards
704.530.5.01 Distribution boards on construction and demolition sites shall comply with I.S.EN 60439-4.
704.530.5.02 At the main supply point of each installation, a distribution board shall be provided containing the
main switchgear and control gear, including the principal control, protective and isolating devices.
704.530.5.03 Every circuit shall be fed from a distribution board containing the following:
- overcurrent protective devices

- devices affording protection in case of a fault (indirect contact).
Note: Socket-outlet circuits must be protected in accordance with 704.410.01.
704.530.5.04 Enclosures containing the supply authority’s equipment shall be made of non-conductive material,
and shall have a degree of protection IP55 {SNC}.
704.537 Devices for isolation and switching.
704.537.01 The main isolating switch shall be located in the main distribution board. The switch shall be suitable
for securing in the open or OFF position, e.g. by means of a padlock or by locating it inside a lockable enclosure.
704.554 Plugs, socket-outlets and cable-couplers.
704.554.01 Socket-outlets shall comply with both I.S.EN 60369-1 and I.S.EN 60369-2, and shall have enclosures
of non- conductive material.
705: Agricultural and Horticultural Premises
705.11 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to all parts of fixed installations of agricultural and horticultural
premises indoors and outdoors. Such premises include housing for animals, (such as stables, chicken-houses and
piggeries), feed-processing locations, including adjacent rooms (e.g. for feed-processing, milking machines, milk-
storage rooms), lofts, storerooms for hay, straw, fertilizers, fruits, vegetables, grain, fuels, and greenhouses.
The particular requirements of this section apply also to locations where agricultural and horticultural products are
prepared, produced and processed commercially or in bulk (e.g. drying, stewing, pressing-out, fermenting butchering,
188
meat-processing ). Some of the requirements are also applicable for residences and other locations in common buildings
belonging to the agricultural and horticultural premises (see 705.20.1). The following locations are excluded from
this section: Locations used solely for residential and similar purposes.
Note: Where potentially explosive atmospheres may be present, ET 105 applies.
705.2 DEFINITIONS
The following additional definitions apply for the purposes of this section:
Agricultural and horticultural premises: Rooms, locations or areas where:
- livestock are kept;

- feed, fertilizers, vegetables or animals are produced, stored, prepared or processed;
- plants are grown, such as greenhouses
Residences and other locations belonging to agricultural and horticultural premises: Residences and other
locations that have a conductive connection to the agricultural and horticultural premises by either protective
conductors of the same installation or by extraneous conductive parts.
Note 1: Examples of other locations are offices, social rooms, machine-halls, workrooms, garages and shops.
Note 2: Extraneous conductive parts are not part of the electrical installation, but may introduce a dangerous potential.
Note 3: Conductive connections may be metal pipe- systems, protective conductors or metal sheaths of the same wiring system.
High-density livestock rearing: The breeding and rearing of livestock for which the use of automatic systems for life
support is necessary.
Note: Examples of automatic life-support systems are those for ventilation, heating , air-conditioning, feeding. High-density rearing includes
piggeries, chicken-houses, inland-water fisheries and artificial lake fish- production.
Arrangements for livestock keeping: Buildings and rooms for the housing of animals, cages, runs or other structures
used for continuous accommodation of livestock.
705.312 TyPES OF DISTRIBUTION SySTEM
705.312.2 System earthing
705.312.2.01 Where the system earthing is type TN, there shall be separate neutral and protective conductors
downstream from the origin of the installation. This requirement applies also to residences and other locations
belonging to agricultural or horticultural premises according to the Definition in 705.2.
705.34 MAINTENANCE
Consideration shall be given to the likelihood that the installation may not receive regular maintenance.
705.411.3 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault (indirect contact)
705.411.3.01 For circuits, whatever the type of system earthing, the following protective devices shall be provided:
- in final circuits supplying socket-outlets with rated current not exceeding 32 A, RCDs with a rated residual operating
current not exceeding 30mA,
- in final circuits supplying socket-outlets with rated current more than 32A, RCDs with a rated residual operating
current not exceeding 100mA,
- in all other circuits, RCDs with a rated residual operating not exceeding 300mA.
Note: Where improved continuity of service is required, RCDs with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 300 mA should be of the S
type or have a time-delay.
189
705.411.3.02 Supplementary equipotential bonding shall comply with 705.544.2.
705.414.01 Special requirements for SELV and PELV circuits.
Where SELV or PELV is used, whatever the nominal voltage, protection against direct contact shall be provided by:
- barriers or enclosures affording at least the degree of protection IP2X or IP XXB, or

- insulation capable of withstanding a test of 500V a.c. r.m.s. for 1 min.
Note: For requirements for SELV and PELV in fire-hazard areas, see 421.02.
705.42 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE AND HARMFUL THERMAL EFFECTS
705.421 Protection against fire caused by electrical equipment
705.421.01 Equipment for high-density livestock rearing shall comply with I.S.EN 60335-2-71: Particular
requirements for electrical appliances for breeding and rearing animals , and shall be mounted in an appropriate
position in order to avoid:
- risk of burns to livestock, and

- risk of fire by ignition of combustible materials.
Radiant heaters shall be installed at a distance of at least 0.5 m from livestock and from combustible material or at the
minimum distance specified in the manufacturer’s instructions, whichever is the greater.
705.422 Protection against fire where particular hazards or dangers exist
705.422.01 For fire-risk areas, RCDs having a rated residual operating- current not exceeding 300mA shall be
installed and shall disconnect all live conductors including the neutral . Where improved continuity of service is
required, RCDs in final circuits not supplying socket-outlets shall be of the S type or have a time-delay. RCDs for the
protection of socket-outlet circuits complying with 416.1 are deemed to comply also with this requirement.
Note: RCDs for all circuits are specified in 705.411.3.01, but for fire –protective purposes they must also disconnect the neutral conductor.
705.422.02 In locations where a fire risk exists, conductors of circuits supplied from extra-low voltage shall be
protected by barriers or enclosures affording a degree of protection IP 4X, or, in addition to their basic insulation, by
an enclosure of insulating material.
Note 1: Cable type H07RNF for outdoor use complies with this requirement.
Note 2: An increased fire risk may exist where highly-flammable substances are present
705.44 PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES AND ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES
705.443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to switching
705.443.01
Note: Where electronic equipment is used, it is recommended to provide protective measures against lightning and against overvoltages according
to 443 and 534.
Note: In agricultural and horticultural premises special requirements for the selection and erection of electrical equipment apply due to special
external influences, e.g. influence of moisture, dust, aggressive chemical vapours, acids or salts. In addition, an increased fire- risk may
exist due to the presence of highly- flammable substances.
190
705.512.2.01 A minimum degree of protection shall be provided for electrical equipment as follows:
- where used under normal conditions: IP 44,

- where water hosing is normally employed e.g. in dairies, milking parlours and similar locations: IP 55,
- where dust is present: IP54,
- where dust is present in harmful quantities: IP 65.
This requirement shall not apply to residential locations, offices, shops or similar locations.
Note: See 705.544 for special requirements for socket-outlets.
705.512.2.02 Where corrosive substances are present, e.g. in dairies or byres, the electrical equipment shall be
adequately protected.
Note: In agricultural and horticultural premises special requirements for the selection and erection of electrical equipment apply due to special
external influences, e.g. presence of moisture, dust, aggressive chemical vapours, acids or salts.
705.513 Accessibility to livestock

705.513.01 Electrical equipment generally shall be inaccessible to livestock. Equipment that is unavoidably accessible
to livestock, such as equipment for feeding and basins for watering, shall be adequately constructed and installed so
as to avoid damage by, and minimize the risk of injury to, livestock.
705.514 Identification
705.514.5.01 Diagrams
The following documentation shall be provided and handed to the user of the installation:
- a plan indicating the location of all electrical equipment,

- the routing of all concealed cables,
- a single-line distribution diagram,
- an equipotential bonding diagram indicating the locations of the bonding connections.
705.522.5 Presence of corrosive or polluting substances
705.522.5.01 In areas where corrosive materials are present, e.g. dairies, cattle-sheds, wiring systems shall be
adequately protected. For locations where livestock is kept, external influences shall be classified AF4, and conduits
shall have protection against corrosion of at least Class 4 (High Protection) according to I.S.EN 61386-2-1. [SNC].
Note: for classification system AF4, AG3 etc see Annex 51D.
705.522.6 Impact
705.522.6.01 For locations where the wiring system may be exposed to impact and mechanical shock from e.g.
vehicles and mobile agricultural machines:
- the external influences shall be classified AG3 (high impact), and

- conduits shall have a degree of protection against compression of at least Class 4 (Heavy) according to
I.S.EN 61386-2, and
- cable trunking and ducting systems shall have a Heavy degree of protection against impact according to I.S. EN
61084-2-.1.
705.522.6.02 In locations accessible to, and enclosing, livestock, wiring systems shall be erected so that they are
inaccessible to livestock or suitably protected against mechanical damage.
Note: Where conduits are used as additional protection, they should provide a degree of protection against compression of 450 N and a normal
degree of protection against impact according to IEC 61386-24.
191
705.522.6.03 In uncultivated ground with drainage, or arable land, and in areas of agricultural premises where
vehicles and mobile agricultural machines are operated, cables buried in the ground shall be at least 1m below the
surface. Where farm traffic exists, cables shall preferably be laid underground.
Note 1: See also 522.6.6.1 Table 52B

Note 2: Additional mechanical protection such as tiles or concrete slabs or metal covers must be provided where there may be risk of damage to
the cable in future excavation work.
705.522.6.04 Overhead cables shall be mounted at least 6m above ground level. Overhead lines shall be insulated.
705.522.10 Presence of fauna
705.522.10.01 Special measures shall be taken where vermin, e.g. mice and rats may be expected.
705.537.01 The electrical installation of each building, or part of a building, shall be isolated by a single isolating
switch complying with 537.2.
705.537.02 For circuits that are used only seasonally e.g. during harvest time, a separate isolating switch shall be
provided which disconnects all live conductors including the neutral. These isolation switches shall be marked
according to the part of the installation to which they belong.
Note: MCBs or RCDs may be used for this purpose.
705.537.03 Isolating switches and switching devices for emergency switching including emergency stopping shall
not be installed where they are accessible to livestock nor in any position where access to them may be impeded by
livestock, account being taken of conditions likely to arise in the event of panic by livestock.
Note: More than one emergency stopping device may be needed where livestock is kept. Attention is drawn to 537.4.1 whereby means for
emergency switching or stopping must be provided in all locations and situations where necessary to remove danger. In agricultural
installations, such locations include e.g. milking parlours, in particular the operator’s pit where emergency stopping must be provided.
705.54 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AND EQUIPOTENTIAL

BONDING
705.543.01 In armoured cables, the protective conductor shall consist of a cable core intended for the purpose and
complying with 514.3. The armouring of a cable shall not be used as a protective conductor [SNC].
705.544.2.01 Equipotential bonding conductors shall be protected against mechanical damage and corrosion, and
shall be selected to avoid electrolytic effects.
705.544.2.02 In buildings where livestock may be kept, and in milking parlours, supplementary equipotential
bonding shall connect all extraneous conductive parts and exposed conductive parts or their protective conductors.
Where a metal grid is laid in a floor, it shall be connected to the local supplementary equipotential bonding system
(see Annex 705A).
705.544.2.03 Equipotential bonding conductors shall be protected against mechanical damage and shall consist of:
- copper conductor having a minimum cross-sectional area of 4 mm2

- hot-dip galvanized steel strip with dimensions of at least 30mm x 3mm
- hot-dip galvanized round steel with a diameter of at least 8 mm.
Other suitable materials may be used.
Note: See Annex 705A
192
705.554 Plugs, socket-outlets and cable couplers
These requirements do not apply to indoor locations, such as houses, offices, shops, and locations with similar external
influences, belonging to agricultural and horticultural premises. In such cases, the normal Rules of 554 apply.
705.554.01 Socket - outlets and cable couplers shall comply with both I.S.EN 60309 Part 1 and Part 2 and shall
have casings or enclosures that are resistant to corrosion.
705.554.02 Socket-outlets shall be mounted at a height of at least 0.45m above the floor.
705.554.03 Socket-outlets shall not be installed in a position where they are likely to come in contact with
combustible material.
705.554.04 Where there are conditions of severe external influences (> AG1 and/or > AD1), socket-outlets shall be
provided with appropriate protection.
Protection may also be provided by the use of additional enclosures or by installation in building recesses.
705.555.01 Appliances shall be permanently connected and fixed in accordance with these Rules, taking into account
the manufacturer’s instructions. Space heaters shall be mounted so as to be inaccessible to livestock.
Note: See also 705.421 for requirements for appliances in areas of increased fire hazard.
705.555.02 Electric fence equipment (mains operated)
a) A mains-operated electric fence unit shall comply with I.S. EN 60335-2-76.

b) An electric fence control unit shall not be installed in the vicinity of flammable materials
c) An electric fence control unit shall not be installed where it is likely to suffer mechanical damage.
d) An electric fence control unit shall be installed in a position that is inaccessible to children and . animals.
e) An electric fence control unit that does not have a minimum degree of protection of IP44 shall be provided with a
suitable weatherproof enclosure.
f) An electric fence control unit shall not be mounted on a pole carrying telecommunications conductors or power
conductors.
g) Where electric fences are in the vicinity of overhead lines, appropriate distances shall be observed to take account
of induction currents.
Note: Attention is drawn to the requirements of telecommunications and supply authorities.
h) Electric fence control units installed outdoors shall be permanently fixed and wired, and the disconnecting device
shall consist of a suitable switch mounted within clear view of the unit. Control units installed indoors shall be
permanently fixed and wired with a suitable switch, or connected by means of a plug and socket.
i) A disconnecting device shall interrupt all live conductors of the supply to the control unit
j) The output earth terminal of an electric fence control unit shall be connected to an earth electrode having a diameter
of at least 9mm and buried in the soil to a depth of at least 500mm. No part of this earthing system shall be within 10m
of any part of the earthing system of the main installation or extraneous conductive parts of buildings.
Note: See Annex 705B for recommendations for installing the fence wire.
705.555.03 Soil warming equipment
Soil-warming equipment and equipment for seed propagation not supplied from a SELV source at a voltage not
exceeding 25V a.c. r.m.s shall comply with the following:
a) Heating- cables shall be suitable for the purpose, and shall have a copper screen with an outer covering that provides
adequate protection against corrosion and other chemical effects. This screen shall be connected to the protective
conductor.
193
b) Heating- cables shall be installed in such a way that they are not unduly exposed to risk of damage from garden tools.
Connections to heating cables shall be protected against ingress of moisture.
c) Circuits supplying heating- cables shall be protected by an RCD with a residual operating current not exceeding
30mA.
705.559 Luminaires
705.559.01 Luminaires in areas where there is a particular fire hazard, such as buildings used for the storage of hay,
grain or chemicals, shall in addition comply with 422.2.4. Pendant lighting fittings suspended solely by means of
flexible cable shall not be used.
705.559.02 Luminaires shall comply with I.S. EN 60598 series and shall be selected regarding their degree of
protection and surface temperature according to the conditions of the surrounding areas and the places of installation
(e.g. IP 54, suitable temperature marking F for mounting on combustible material).
705.559.03 In areas where a fire risk and a danger from a combustible coating of dust exist, only luminaires with
suitable temperature marked D shall be installed.
Luminaires marked D shall only be installed if the luminaires containing the lamps have a degree of protection IP 54.
705.559.04 Luminaires shall be mounted at places where a sufficiently large distance from combustible materials is
ensured taking into account the storage of goods and other dangerous work processes.
Note: Safety distances are normally given in the manufacturer’s instructions for mounting. See also 422.2.4.
705.559.05 In locations where hay, straw grain or similar combustible materials are stored or processed, the ON
and OFF positions of switches controlling luminaires in such locations shall be readily identifiable either in those
locations by a visual signal, or at each switch position.
705.56 SAFETy SERVICES
705. 56.01 Automatic life support for high density livestock rearing
Note: Account must be taken of legal requirements for the keeping of livestock
High density livestock rearing systems operating for the life-support of livestock shall comply with the following:
a) Where any necessary supply of food, water, heating, lighting for poultry-houses or ventilation to livestock is not
ensured in the event of a power supply failure, a secure alternative or back- up supply complying with 562 shall be
provided.
b) For the supply of ventilation systems, and lighting systems for poultry-houses, the following conditions apply in
addition:
i) separate final circuits shall be provided; such circuits shall only supply electrical equipment necessary for the
operation of the ventilation or lighting;
ii) discrimination with the main circuits supplying ventilation equipment shall be ensured in case of a fault.
c) Where electrically-powered ventilation is necessary in an installation, one of the following shall be provided:
i) a stand-by electrical source complying with 562 ensuring sufficient supply for the equipment; or
ii) temperature and supply - voltage monitoring. This may be achieved by one or more monitoring devices. The
device(s) shall release a visible or audible signal that can be readily observed by the user and shall operate
independently of the normal supply.
d) A visual and/or an audible signal shall be provided to indicate failure of the lighting system in a poultry-house.
Note: The reliability of the installation for 3) and 4) will be increased if, for this purpose, separate supply circuits are provided downstream of
the main distribution board.
Annexes for 705

Annex 705A: Equipotential bonding in cattle sheds and milking parlours
Annex 705B: Installation of electric fences.
194
706: Conducting locations with restricted movement
706.11 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to fixed installations and electrical equipment in conducting locations
where movement of persons is restricted by the location, and to supplies for portable equipment for use in such
locations.
A conducting location with restricted movement consists mainly of metal, or other conducting surrounding parts,
within which it is likely that a person will come into contact through a substantial portion of his/her body with the metal
or other conducting parts and where the possibility of interrupting this contact is limited.
The particular requirements of this section do not apply to locations that allow a person freedom of bodily movement
to work, enter and leave the location, without physical constraint.
706.411.3 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault (protection against indirect contact)
706.411.3.01 Only the following protective measures are permissible
i) for the supply to hand-held tools and portable measuring equipment:

- SELV (414),
- Reduced Low Voltage (415);
ii) for the supply to hand lamps:
- measures in accordance with 559.13;
iii) for the supply to fixed equipment:
- earthing and automatic disconnection of the supply with supplementary equipotential conductive parts of the
location,
- SELV and PELV (414),
- Reduced Low Voltage (415),
- the use of Class II equipment or equipment having equivalent insulation complying with 412 provided the
supplying circuits are protected additionally by the use of RCDs having a rated residual operating current not
exceeding 30mA, in accordance with 416.1.
Only circuits and the protective measures applicable to equipment in this location are permissible.
Note: Protection by electrical separation (413) is not permitted in such locations
706.414 Special requirements for SELV and PELV circuits
706.414.01 Safety sources shall be placed outside the location.
by:
- insulation capable of withstanding a test voltage of 500V for 1 min.
706.544.01 Extraneous conductive parts shall be bonded locally to the protective conductor.
If a functional earth is required for certain fixed equipment, for example measuring and control apparatus, equipotential
bonding shall be provided between all exposed conductive parts, all extraneous conductive parts inside the restrictive
conductive location, and the functional earth.
707 Void
195
708: Caravan parks and similar locations
708.11 SCOPE
708.11.01 The particular requirements of this section apply to caravan parks, camping parks and similar locations.
In caravan parks, camping parks and similar locations, these particular requirements apply to circuits intended to
supply leisure accommodation vehicles, tents or residential park homes. For the remainder of the electrical installation
of caravan parks and camping parks the normal Rules apply These particular requirements do not apply to the internal
electrical installations of caravans, mobile homes or other leisure accommodation vehicles, mobile or transportable
units or residential park homes.
708.11.02 The electrical installation of a caravan park comprises:
i) Main distribution switchgear connected to the public supply or a private generator;

ii) Control units, which may be separate or contained in one enclosure;
iii) Supply terminals with socket-outlets, which may or may not be contained in the control units;
iv) Wiring between i) and ii), and where applicable, iii) above.
708.2 DEFINITIONS
The following additional definitions apply for the purposes of this section.
Caravan: Trailer leisure accommodation vehicle used for touring, which meets requirements for construction and
use as a road vehicle.
Caravan Park/camping park: An area of land that contains two or more caravan pitches.
Caravan Park Electrical Installation: Electrical wiring and equipment intended to supply caravans up to and
including socket-outlets.
Caravan/Tent Pitch: Plot of ground intended to be occupied by a leisure accommodation vehicle or tent.
Control Unit: Equipment comprising control and protection devices for electricity supplies to caravan socket-outlets.
Mobile Home: Transportable leisure accommodation vehicle that retains means for mobility, but does not meet
requirements for construction and use as a road vehicle.
Motor Caravan: Self-propelled leisure accommodation vehicle used for touring that meets requirements for the
construction and use as a road vehicle.
Residential park home: Structure that either can be moved as a whole or in parts or is fixed which is designed for
use as a place of temporary or seasonal residence.
Supply Terminal: An enclosure or supporting structure for the accommodation of socket- outlets, into which caravan
connecting devices are inserted.
708 30 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
708.312 Types of distribution system
708.312.2 Conductor arrangement and system earthing
The types of system earthing shall be TN-C-S or TT. PEN conductors shall not be used in final circuits.
708.313 Supplies
708.313.01 The nominal supply voltage of the installation shall not exceed 230V single-phase or 400V three- phase.
708.416.01 Each final circuit supplying a socket-outlet shall be protected individually by an RCD having a rated
residual operating current not exceeding 30mA, which disconnects all poles including the neutral.
196
708.512.01 In caravan parks and camping parks special consideration is necessary for protection against electric
shock due to the fact that the human body may be in contact with earth potential and to the protection of wiring due
to tent pegs or ground anchors and to displacement caused by heavy or high vehicles.
708.512.02 In caravan parks, equipment shall have a degree of protection of at least IP44.
Note: Where the electrical equipment may be subjected to water jets for washing purposes, a degree of protection IPX5 will be necessary, which
may be provided by the equipment itself or by an additional enclosure.
708.512.03 Equipment installed in caravan parks and camping parks shall be protected against mechanical damage
caused by impacts of medium severity AG2. Protection shall be provided by one or more of the following:
- the position or location selected to avoid being damaged by any reasonably foreseeable impact,
- the provision of local or general mechanical protection,

- installing equipment providing a minimum degree of protection against external mechanical impact IK07 according
to IEC 62262.
708.521 Types of wiring systems
708.521.01 General
Except where it is impracticable, cables shall be installed underground in accordance with 522.6.8.
Where it is impracticable to install cables underground, they may be run overhead. Overhead cables shall comply
with 708.521.03
708.521.02 Underground wiring
Underground wiring systems shall comply with 522.6.8, whether in ducting or buried directly in the ground, and shall
in any case be at least at depth of 500mm, or, where there is movement of heavy vehicles, 750 mm. Account shall also
be taken of possible damage due to tent pegs or ground-anchors.
Note: Buried ducting, other than of concrete, must be coloured red
708.521.03 Overhead wiring
All overhead conductors shall be insulated. They shall be located at a minimum distance of 2m outside the boundary
of any caravan pitch.
Poles and other supports for overhead wiring shall be located or protected so that they are unlikely to be damaged by
any vehicle movement foreseen.
Overhead conductors shall be at a height above ground of not less than 6m.
708.521.04 Conductor sizes Cables connecting the control units to the main supply point shall have a minimum
conductor cross-sectional area of 10mm2, or else determined as follows:
- a minimum load demand of 1 kW for each caravan plus 4kW.
Where socket-outlets are contained in a separate supply terminal, a separate cable having a minimum cross-sectional
area of 2.5mm2 shall connect each socket-outlet to the appropriate outlet in the control unit.
197
708.530 Control units
708.530.01 Control units shall be provided for the purpose of supplying electricity to the caravan socket- outlets. The
units shall be supplied from the main distribution switchgear. A control unit shall supply not more than four caravan
socket-outlets. Supplies shall be single phase only. Caravan socket-outlets may be contained in the control unit or in
a separate supply terminal.
Note: It is recommended that the enclosures of control units be locked and keys kept under control of the site manager or attendant.
708.531 Devices for protection against electric shock
708.531.01 A control unit shall contain an individual RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding
30mA, for each caravan socket-outlet. RCDs shall disconnect all poles, including the neutral. Each RCD shall have a
permanent label indicating the particular caravan pitch supplied.

708.533.01 A control unit shall contain an individual MCB for each caravan socket-outlet. Each MCB shall have a
permanent label indicating the particular caravan pitch supplied.
708.537 Devices for isolation
708.537.01 In each control unit, a single isolating switch shall be provided, which disconnects all poles including
the neutral.
708.54 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AND EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
708.542 Connections to earth
708.542.01 An earth electrode shall be installed at, or adjacent to, each control unit and shall be connected to the
protective conductor of the installation.

708.554.01 Socket-outlets may be contained in either:
- the control unit, or

- a separate supply terminal complying with 708.554.02 and 708.554.03.
708.554.02 A supply terminal shall be located as close as practicable to the caravan or tent pitch, but not further than
20m.
708.554.03 A supply terminal, where provided, shall contain not more than four socket-outlets which shall be
mounted on a substantial surface, and protected against the weather and mechanical damage.
708.554.04 Socket outlets shall comply with I.S. EN 60309-1 and I.S EN 60369 -2.
Socket-outlets shall have:
- a minimum degree of protection IP44,

- a rating of 250V, 16A,
- an earth (protective) contact and two live contacts,
- a hinged spring-loaded cover.
Other socket-outlets complying with other national standards may be installed, but only in addition to the type specified
above.
Note: It is recommended that the socket-outlets be provided with switches interlocked so that they can be switched on only when a plug has been
inserted, and the plug removed only when the switch is in the “OFF” position.
708.554.05 The lowest part of socket-outlets shall be placed at a height between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the ground.
In special cases of extreme environmental conditions, it is permitted to exceed the stated maximum height of 1.5 m.
In these cases, special measures shall be taken to ensure the safe insertion and removal of plugs.
198
Fig. 708.1: Schematic diagram: Caravan park installation.
199
709: Marinas and similar locations
709.11 SCOPE
This section applies to marinas and similar locations, and in particular, to circuits intended to supply pleasure craft or
houseboats.
This section does not apply to the internal wiring of pleasure craft or houseboats. This section does not apply to the
supplies for houseboats that are directly connected to the public supply.
709.2 DEFINITIONS
Control unit: Equipment comprising control and protective devices for electricity supplies to berths.
Houseboat: Floating decked structure designed or adapted for use as a place of permanent residence, normally kept
in one place on inland water.
Marina: Facility for mooring and servicing of pleasure crafts, with fixed wharves, jetties, piers or pontoon
arrangements capable of berthing more than one pleasure craft.
Pleasure craft: Any boat, vessel, yacht, motor launch, houseboat or other floating craft used exclusively for sport or
leisure.
Supply terminal: An enclosure or supporting structure for the accommodation of socket-outlets for supplies to berths.
709.3 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
709.312 Types of distribution system
709.312.2 Conductor arrangement and system earthing
709.312.2.01 The types of system earthing shall be TN-S, TN-C-S or TT.
709.313 Supplies
709.313.01 The nominal supply voltage shall not exceed 230V single-phase or 400V three-phase.
709.416.1 Additional protection against direct contact
709.416.1.01 Each final circuit supplying a socket-outlet or a fixed connection to a pleasure craft houseboat shall
be protected individually by an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA and which
disconnects all poles including the neutral.
Supplementary equipotential bonding shall comply with 709.544.2.
For marinas, particular consideration shall be given to the likelihood of corrosive substances, movement of structures,
mechanical damage, and the presence of flammable substances such as fuel.
Particular consideration shall be given to the increased risk of electric shock due to the presence of water, reduction
of body resistance and contact of the human body with earth potential.
200
709.512.2.01 Presence of water (AD)
Electrical equipment installed on or above a jetty, wharf pier or pontoon shall have a degree of protection not less than
the following:
- where water splashes are present (AD4): IPX4,

- where water jets are or may be present (AD5): IPX5,

- where water waves are present. (AD6): IPX6.
709.512.2.02 Presence of solid foreign bodies including dust (AE)
Electrical equipment installed on or above a jetty, pier or pontoon shall have a degree of protection not less than IP4X
(AE4).
709.512.2.03 Presence of corrosive or polluting substances (AF)
Electrical equipment installed on or above a jetty, wharf, pier or pontoon shall be resistant to corrosive or polluting
substances (AF2) Where hydrocarbons are present, a higher degree of protection (AF3 )is applicable.
709.512.2.04 Impact (AG)
Equipment installed on or above a jetty, wharf pier or pontoon shall be protected against mechanical damage of medium
severity (AG2) by one or more of the following measures:
- location or position of equipment such that it is unlikely to be damaged by any foreseeable impact,
- provision of additional local or general mechanical protection,
- selecting equipment having the necessary level of protection against mechanical impact of IK08 according to IEC
Publication 62262.
709.521.01 The following types of wiring system are deemed suitable in general:
i) underground cables;
ii) overhead cables in certain situations only and in accordance with 709.522.03;
iii) unarmoured cables having the required degree of protection against movement, impact, corrosion in accordance
with 709.512.
iv) cables with armouring with a protective serving of thermoplastic or elastomeric material;
v) mineral-insulated cables with a PVC protective covering;
vi) other cables and materials giving a level of protection not less than that specified in i) to v) above.
709.521.02 The following types of wiring systems shall not be used on or above a jetty, wharf, pier or pontoon, or
where there is a danger of impact from masts:
i) overhead cables or conductors;

ii) insulated conductors in conduit or trunking and similar enclosures;
iii) cables with aluminium conductors;
iv) mineral-insulated cables.
709.522.01 General
Cables shall be selected and installed so that damage due to tidal and any other movement is prevented. Cable systems
shall have provision for the drainage of water, e.g. drain- holes.
709.522.02 Underground wiring
Underground wiring systems shall comply with 522.6.8, whether in ducting or buried directly in the ground, and shall,
in any case, be at a depth of at least 500mm, or, where there is movement of heavy vehicles, 750 mm. Account shall
be taken of possible damage due to anchors.
201
709.522.03 Overhead wiring
All overhead conductors shall be insulated. Poles and other supports for overhead wiring shall be located or protected
so that they are unlikely to be damaged by any foreseeable craft or vehicle movement.
Overhead conductors shall not be installed in areas where there is foreseeable craft or vehicle movement.
Note: See 522.6.9 for general requirements for overhead conductors (minimum height 6m).
709.530 Control units: General
709.530.1 Control units shall be provided for the purpose of supplying electricity to the pleasure boats or houseboats.
The units shall be supplied from the main distribution switchgear. A control unit shall supply not more than four
socket-outlets.
Socket-outlets may be contained in the control unit or in a separate supply terminal.
Note: The control unit should be under the control of the location manager or attendant.
709.531 Devices for protection against electric shock
709.531.2.01 Every socket-outlet shall be individually protected by an RCD having a rated residual operating current
not exceeding 30mA. The device shall disconnect all poles including the neutral. Each device shall have a permanent
label indicating the particular berth supplied.
709.533.01 A control unit shall contain an individual MCB for each socket- outlet. Each device shall have a
permanent label indicating the particular berth supplied.
Note: This function may be provided by an RCBO.
709.537.01 In each control unit, an isolating switching device shall be provided which disconnects all poles including
the neutral.
709.544.2.01 The protective conductor of the shore supply shall not be connected to the equipotential bonding
system of a pleasure craft or houseboat.
709.554.01 Socket-outlets shall comply with I.S. EN 60309 Part 1 and Part 2, and have a minimum degree of
protection in accordance with 709.512.2.01.
709.554.02 Socket-outlets shall be located as close as practicable to the berths that they are intended to supply, and
installed in a control unit or a separate supply terminal.
709.554.03 Not more than four socket-outlets shall be supplied from the one control unit.
709.554.04 Socket-outlets shall be installed at a height of not less than 1 m above the highest water level. In the case
of floating pontoons or walkways only, this height need not exceed 300 mm provided appropriate additional measures
are taken against the effects of splashing.
202
Fig. 709.1: Schematic diagram: Marina installations.
203
710: Medical Locations

710 Introduction
In medical locations it is necessary to ensure the safety of patients likely to be subjected to the application of medical
electrical equipment. For every activity and function in a medical location, the particular requirements for safety have
to be considered. Safety can be achieved by ensuring the safety of the installation and the safe operation and
maintenance of medical electrical equipment connected to it. The use of medical electrical equipment on patients
undergoing critical care medicine has called for enhanced reliability and safety of electrical installations in hospitals
so as to improve the safety and continuity of supplies. This need is met by application of this standard.
Please refer to ET 218, Electricity in the Medical Workplace: An Educational Guide for Users of Electrical Equipment
in Medical Practice. This guidance should be applied in hospitals, private clinics, medical and dental practices, health
care centres and dedicated medical rooms in the workplace.
Standards for equipment and other reference documents
For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced
document (including any amendments) applies.
I.S.EN 60601 series, Medical electrical equipment

I.S.EN 60601-1:1990 + A1:1993 + A2:1995, Medical electrical equipment – Part 1: General requirements for
safety (IEC 60601-1: 2006)
I.S.EN 60601-1-1:2001, Medical electrical equipment – Part 1-1: General requirements for safety; Collateral
standard: Safety requirements for medical electrical systems (IEC 60601-1-1:2000)
I.S.EN 61557-8:1997, Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1 000 V a.c. and 1 500 V d.c.
– Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures – Part 8: Insulation monitoring
devices for IT systems (IEC 61557-8:1997)
I.S.EN 61558-2-15:2001, Safety of power transformers, power supply units and similar – Part 2-15: Particular
Requirements for isolating transformers for the supply of medical locations ( IEC 61558-2-15:1999, mod.)
ISO 8528-1:2005, Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating sets –
Part 1: Application, ratings and performance
710.11 SCOPE
710.11.01 The particular requirements of this part apply to electrical installations in medical locations so as to ensure
safety of patients and medical staff. These requirements, in the main, refer to hospitals, private clinics, medical and
dental practices, health care centres and dedicated medical rooms in the work place.
The requirements of this part do not apply to medical electrical equipment.
Note 1: It may be necessary to modify an existing electrical installation, in accordance with this standard, when a change of utilization of the
location occurs. Special care should be taken where intra-cardiac procedures are performed in existing installations.
Note 2: Where applicable, this standard can also be used in veterinary clinics.
Note 3: For medical electrical equipment, refer to the I.S.EN 60601 series.
Note 4: Care should be taken that other installations (e.g. data networks etc.) do not impair the safety level of the medical location.
Note 5: These requirements concern, for example, electrical installations for medical locations in:
- hospitals and clinics (including container design),
- homes for senior citizens and aged care,
- medical centres, outpatients. clinics and departments, casualty wards,
- other outpatients. institutions (industrial, sports and others).
Note 6: The requirements contained in this section of the standard are the minimum requirements of the respective medical purpose.
710.2 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this part, the following additional definitions apply.
710.2.1 Medical location
Location intended for purposes of diagnosis, treatment, monitoring and care of patients
Note: To ensure protection of patients from possible electrical hazards, additional protective measures need to be applied in medical locations.
The type and description of these hazards can vary according to the treatment being administered. The purpose for which a location is to
be used may justify areas with different classifications (Group 0, 1 or 2) for different medical procedures.
710.2.2 Patient
Living being (person or animal) undergoing a medical, surgical or dental procedure (I.S.EN 60601-1:2005, definition
3.76)
204
710.2.3 Medical electrical equipment
Electrical equipment having an applied part or transferring energy to or from the patient or detecting such energy
transfer to or from the patient and which is:
a) provided with not more than one connection to a particular supply mains, and
b) intended by its manufacturer to be used:
- in the diagnosis, treatment, or monitoring of a patient, or

- for compensation or alleviation of disease, injury or disability
Note: Medical electrical equipment includes those accessories as defined by the MANUFACTURER that are necessary to enable the NORMAL
USE of the ME EQUIPMENT. [I.S.EN 60601-1:2005, definition 3.33]
710.2.4 Applied part

Part of medical electrical equipment that in normal use necessarily comes into physical contact with the patient for ME
equipment or an ME system to perform its function [I.S.EN 60601-1:2005, definition 3.8]
710.2.5 Group 0
Medical location where no applied parts are intended to be used and where discontinuity (failure) of the supply cannot
cause danger to life
710.2.6 Group 1
Medical location where applied parts are intended to be used as follows:

- external;
- invasive to any part of the body, except where 710.2.7 applies and where discontinuity (failure) of the supply cannot
cause danger to life
710.2.7 Group 2
Medical location where applied parts are intended to be used in applications such as intracardiac
procedures, vital treatments and surgical operations where discontinuity (failure) of the supply can cause
danger to life
Note: An intracardiac procedure is a procedure whereby an electrical conductor is placed within the heart of a patient or is likely to come into
contact with the heart, such conductor being accessible outside the patient's body. In this context, an electrical conductor includes insulated
wires such as cardiac pacing electrodes or intracardiac ECG electrodes, or insulated tubes filled with conducting fluids.
710.2.8 Medical electrical system
Combination, as specified by its manufacturer, of items of equipment, at least one of which is medical electrical
equipment to be inter-connected by functional connection or by use of a multiple socket-outlet [I.S.EN 60601-1:2005,
definition 3.64]
Note: The system includes those accessories which are needed for operating the system and are specified by the manufacturer.
710.2.9 Patient environment
Any volume in which intentional or unintentional contact can occur between a patient and parts of the medical electrical
equipment or medical electrical system or between a patient and other persons touching parts of the medical electrical
equipment or medical electrical system [I.S.EN 60601-1:2005, definition 3.79]
(see Figure 710.1)
Note: This applies when the patient’s position is pre-determined, if not, all possible patient positions should be considered.
710.2.10 Main distribution board
Board in the building which fulfils all the functions of a main electrical distribution for the supplied building area
assigned to it and where the voltage drop is measured for operating the safety services
205
710.2.11 Medical IT system
An IT electrical system fulfilling specific requirements for medical applications
710.30 General
The allocation of group numbers and classification of safety services in a medical location shall be made in agreement
with the medical staff, and authority responsible for safety. In order to determine the classification of a medical location,
it is necessary that the medical staff indicate which medical procedures will take place within the location. Based on
the intended use, the appropriate classification for the location shall be determined.
Note 1: Classification of a medical location should be related to the type of contact between applied parts and the patient, as well as the purpose
for which the location is used (see Annex 710 B).
Note 2: Applied parts are defined by the particular standards for medical electrical equipment.
710.31 PURPOSES, SUPPLIES AND STRUCTURE OF AN INSTALLATION

710.312.2 Types of system earthing
The TN-C system earthing shall not be applied in medical locations and medical buildings downstream of the main
distribution board.
710.313 Supplies
710.313.1 General
In medical locations the distribution system should be designed and installed to facilitate the automatic change-over
from the main distribution network to the electrical safety source feeding essential loads according to Chapter 56.
710.35 POWER SOURCE FOR SAFETy PURPOSES
Chapter 35 applies, with the additional requirements of 710.562.
710.410.2 Basic protection (protection against direct contact) shall comply with Annex 41A.
Note: Class II equipment is also permitted.
710.411.3 Requirements for fault protection (protection against indirect contact)
710.411.3.3 Automatic disconnection of supply
710.411.3.3.01 Care shall be taken to ensure that simultaneous use of many items of such equipment connected to
the same circuit will not cause unwanted tripping of the RCD.
In medical locations of group 1 and group 2, where RCDs are required by this sub-clause, only Type A or Type B shall
be selected, depending on the nature of the likely d.c components in the supply current.
Note: See 531.2 and Annex 53A
710.411.3.3.02 In medical locations of Group 1 and Group 2, the following shall apply:
- the conventional touch voltage UL shall not exceed 25V a.c. or 60V d.c.,
- for TN and IT systems, Table 41A applies.
Note: In the TN system, the UL ≤ 25 V condition can be effected by an additional equipotential bonding.
206
710.411.4 TN systems
710.411.4.01 In final circuits of Group 1 rated up to 32A, RCD’s with a rated residual operating current not exceeding
30mA shall be used.
Note: This also provides additional protection against direct contact in accordance with 416.1).
Protection by automatic disconnection of supply by means of RCD’s with rated residual operating - currents not
exceeding 300mA shall only be used on the following circuits:
- circuits for the supply of operating tables,

- circuits for X-ray units,
Note: The requirement is mainly applicable to mobile X-ray units brought into group 2 locations.
- circuits for large equipment with a rated power greater than 5 kVA,
- circuits for non-critical electrical equipment (non life-support).
In circuits designed for a rated current greater than 63 A, RCD’s with a rated residual operating current not exceeding
300 mA shall be used.
Note: The lowest tripping current value for which unwanted tripping can be excluded by the electrical equipment specification should be used.
710.411.5 TT systems
710.411.5.01 In medical locations of Group 1 and Group 2, the requirements of the TT system apply. RCDs shall
be used as protective devices.
710.411.6 IT systems
710.411.6.01 In Group 2 medical locations, Medical IT systems shall be used In Group 2 medical locations, the
medical IT system shall be used for final circuits supplying medical electrical equipment and systems intended for life
support, surgical applications and other electrical equipment located in the "patient environment", excluding equipment
listed in 710.411.4.
For each group of rooms serving the same function, at least one separate Medical IT system is necessary. The Medical
IT system shall be equipped with an insulation monitoring device (IMD) in accordance with IEC 61557-8 with the
following specific requirements:
- a.c. internal impedance shall be ≥100 kΩ,

- internal resistance shall be ≥250 kΩ,
- test voltage shall be ≤ 25 V d.c.,
- injected current, even under fault conditions, shall be ≤ 1 mA peak,
- indication shall take place at the latest when the insulation has decreased to 50 kΩ. If the response value is adjustable,
the lowest possible set-point value shall be ≥ 50 kΩ. A test device shall be provided,
- response and alarm-off time shall be ≤5 s.
Note 1: An indication is recommended if the earth or wiring connection is lost.

Note 2: The necessary additional requirements on IMDs given above are at this time not covered in the equipment standard IEC 61557-8. They
will be removed from this publication as soon as they have been treated in the relevant equipment standard.
For each Medical IT system, an acoustic and visual alarm system incorporating the following components shall be
arranged at a suitable place so that it can be permanently monitored (audible and visual signals) by the medical staff:
and furthermore is forwarded to the technical staff:
- a green signal lamp to indicate normal operation,

- a yellow signal lamp which lights when the minimum value set for the insulation resistance is reached; it shall not
be possible for this light to be cancelled or disconnected,
- an audible alarm which sounds when the minimum value set for the insulation resistance is reached.
This audible alarm may be silenced, - the yellow signal shall go out on removal of the fault and when the normal
condition is restored.
A fault location system shall be considered where appropriate.
Monitoring of overload and/or high temperature for the Medical IT-transformer is required.
207
710.414 Protective measures: extra-low-voltage provided by SELV and PELV
710.414.01 When using SELV and/or PELV circuits in medical locations of Group 1 and Group 2, the nominal
voltage applied to current-using equipment shall not exceed 25 V r.m.s. a.c. or 60 V ripple free d.c. Protection by
basic insulation of live parts (protection against direct contact) shall be provided in accordance with Annex 41A In
medical locations of Group 2, exposed-conductive-parts of equipment (e.g. operating theatre luminaires), shall be
connected to the equipotential bonding conductor.
710.411.7 Functional extra-low voltage (FELV)
710.411.7.01 Functional extra-low voltage (FELV) is not permitted in medical locations.
710.416.2.01 In each medical location of Group 1 and Group 2, supplementary equipotential bonding shall be
installed and the protective bonding conductors shall be connected to the equipotential bonding busbar for the purpose
of equalizing potential differences between the following parts, located in the "patient environment":
- protective conductors,
- extraneous-conductive-parts,
- screening against electrical interference fields, if installed,
- connection to conductive floor grids, if installed;
Note: If due to floor grid connection to the supplementary equipotential bonding an earth loop is formed, then the connection may be disregarded.
- metal screens of isolating transformers, via the shortest way to the protective conductor.
A sufficient number of supplementary equipotential bonding connection points for the connection of medical electrical
equipment shall be available in Group 2 and are recommended in Group 1 (see also 710.30).
Note: Fixed conductive non-electrical patient supports such as operating theatre tables, physiotherapy couches and dental chairs should be
connected to the equipotential bonding conductor unless they are intended to be isolated from earth
710.416.2.02 In medical locations of Group 1, the resistance of the conductors, including the resistance of the
connections, between the terminals for the protective conductor of socket-outlets and of fixed equipment or any
extraneous-conductive-parts and the equipotential bonding bus bar shall not exceed 0,7Ω
In medical locations of Group 2, the resistance of the conductors, including the resistance of the connections, between
the terminals for the protective conductor of socket-outlets and of fixed equipment or any extraneous-conductive-
parts and the equipotential bonding bus bar shall not exceed 0,2Ω
Note: Reference DIN 42801.
710.416.2.03 The equipotential -bonding busbar shall be located in or near the medical location. Connections to
this busbar shall be so arranged that they are clearly visible and can be disconnected individually.
Note 1: It is recommended to use star-shaped or tree-shaped wiring and avoid .earth-loops..

Note 2: For rooms used for intra-cardiac procedures special national requirements to isolate the equipotential bonding busbar may apply.
710.422.01 Where a fire detection and alarm system is provided, the system shall comply with the recommendations
relevant to design and installation contained in CEN TS 54: Part 14: 2004, Fire detection and fire alarm systems -
Guidelines for planning, design, installation, commissioning, use and maintenance, or I.S. 3218: Code of practice for
fire detection and alarm systems for buildings – system design, installation and servicing. The type of system provided
should be appropriate to the uses of the building and for protection of life (types L and M systems). Guidance on the
provision of fire detection and alarm systems in hospitals is contained in Firecode Health Technical Memorandum 05-
03 Part B: Fire detection and alarm systems, 2006.
710.444 Protection against electro-magnetic interferences (EMI)
Note: At present, there is no corresponding section in Chapter 44, but the provisions below apply regardless.
208
710.444.01 Disturbances are not expected, if the magnetic induction B at 50 Hz is not exceeding the following
values at the patient position:
- Btt = 1 • 10-7 Tesla for Electromyogram (EMG),

- Btt = 2 • 10-7 Tesla for Electroencephalogram (EEG),
- Btt = 4 • 10-7 Tesla for Electrocardiogram (ECG).
Note: In general these limit values are not exceeded, if the following minimum distances in all directions are observed between electrical
equipment, which can cause magnetic disturbances, and the places of patient examination:
a) when foremost inductive equipment with large output is used, a distance of 6 m in general is sufficient.
Examples of such equipment:
- transformer of the electrical power installation, e.g. of the IT system;

- permanently installed motors . especially motors with nominal output exceeding 3 kW
b) between multi-strand cables and lines of the electrical power installation and patient positions to be protected:
Conductor cross sectional area min. distance
10 mm2 – 70 mm2 : 3m
95 mm2 – 185 mm2 : 6m
> 185 mm2 : 9m
Longer distances may be required with single conductors. If there is a requirement to check the adherence of limit
values, it is recommended to commission experts.
See I.S. EN 50174-2 for additional information.
710.51: COMMON RULES AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
710.512.2 External influences.
Note: Where appropriate, attention should be given to prevention of electromagnetic interference.
710.512.2.1 Explosion risk.
Note 1: Requirements for medical electrical equipment for use in conjunction with flammable gases and vapours are contained in I.S. EN 60601-1.
Note 2: Where hazardous conditions are likely to occur (e.g. in the presence of flammable gases and vapours), special precautions may be required.
See also ET 105
Note 3: Prevention of build-up of static electricity is recommended.
Electrical devices (e.g. socket-outlets and switches) shall be installed at a distance of at least 0.2 m (centre to centre)
but not directly below from any medical gas-outlets for oxidizing or flammable gases, so as to minimize the risk of
ignition of flammable gases.
710.514 Identification and marking.
710.514.5 Diagrams
710.514.5.1 Plans of the electrical installation together with records, drawings, wiring diagrams and modifications
thereto, shall be provided for the user.
The relevant documents are in particular:
- block diagrams showing the distribution system of the normal power supply and power supply for safety services in
a single-line representation. These diagrams shall contain information on the location of the sub-distribution boards
within the building.
- main and sub-distribution board block diagrams showing switchgear and control-gear and distribution boards in a
single-line representation;
- architectural diagrams,
- schematic diagrams of controls,
- computational verification of compliance with the requirements of standards
209
- list of loads permanently connected to the power supply for safety services indicating the normal currents and, in the
case of motor-operated loads, the starting currents.
Note 1: Drawings and wiring diagrams should be in accordance with I.S.EN 61082-1.
Note 2: Examples of computational verifications are:
- coordination of automatic disconnection by the protective devices directly connected to the supply side at short-circuit
conditions. Computation and verification is especially important for electronic current-sources (power inverter).
710.514.6 Operating instructions
710.514.6.01 Instructions for operation and maintenance, shall be provided for the user.
The relevant documents required in particular are:
- instructions for operation, inspection, testing and maintenance of storage batteries and power sources for safety
services,
- a logbook containing a record of all tests and visual inspections which require to be completed prior to
commissioning,
- information regarding visual inspection(s).
710.516 Operating conditions
710.516.1 Electrical operating areas
The arrangement of electrical operating areas shall comply with 729.51. The following arrangements shall each be
accommodated in their own enclosed electrical operating areas:
- main transformer,
- switching stations with nominal voltages above 1 kV,
- main distributor for the general power supply,
- main distributor for the safety power supply,
- stationary generating set for the safety power supply,
- central batteries for the safety power supply, if the type of construction requires accommodation in an enclosed
electrical operating area, as well as converter and control cabinets for the additional safety power supply.
Note: See also 710.422.
710.516.2 Transformers for medical IT systems
Transformers shall comply with I.S. EN 61558-2-15 with the following additional requirements:
The leakage current of the output-winding to earth and the leakage current of the enclosure, when measured in no-load
condition with the transformer supplied at rated voltage and rated frequency, shall not exceed 0.5mA.
Single-phase transformers shall be used to form the medical IT systems for portable and fixed equipment and the rated
output shall not be less than 0.5 kVA and shall not exceed 10 kVA. Transformers shall not be connected in parallel.
No capacitors shall be used with transformers in medical locations.
If the supply of three-phase loads via an IT system is also required, a separate three-phase transformer shall be provided
for this purpose with output line-to-line voltage not exceeding 250 V.
Note: For monitoring see 411.6.3.
710.516.3 Power supply for medical locations of Group 2.
In case of a single-fault condition a total loss of power in Group 2 room shall be prevented.
Note: This may be achieved by either:

- provision of two independent supply lines (see also 710.562), or
- provision of a ring-structure, capable of providing backup for the mains supply, or
- local additional power supply units, or
- an additional power supply unit for a group of class 2 rooms, or
- other equally effective technical measures to ensure continuity of mains power.
210

Any wiring system in Group 2 medical locations shall be exclusive to the use of equipment and fittings in that location.

Distribution boards for group 2 shall be installed in close proximity to the group 2 medical locations and clearly
identified.
Note 1: Dedicated distribution boards should be provided for the general power supply and the safety power system.
Note 2: Distribution boards should preferably be installed outside medically used locations and be safely guarded against unauthorized persons.
710.533.1 Protection of wiring systems in medical locations of Group 2
710.533.1.01 Overload protection shall not be provided in the output line (secondary circuit) of the transformer of
a Medical IT-system. Fuses may be used for short-circuit protection. Protection against short-circuit and overload
shall be provided for each final circuit.
710.536 Coordination of protective devices in the safety supply system
710.536.2 Selectivity between over-current protective devices
710.536.2.01 Selectivity shall be ensured: In case of a short-circuit in a final circuit, the incoming circuits of the
upstream distribution board shall not be interrupted.
710.537.6 Automatic change-over devices
Automatic change-over devices shall be arranged so that safe separation between supply-lines is maintained.
Note: This can be achieved by e.g.: ensuring that the maximum total operating time (from the first fault to extinguishing the electric arc of the
switching device) is less than the minimum time-delayed switch-over time of the automatic switching system. In this case cables between
the automatic switching system and the subsequent over-current protection device should be installed short-circuit and earth-fault proof.
710.538: IMDs shall be installed at or near the origin of the medical IT system.
710.54: EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AND EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING
710.544.01 Equipotential bonding conductors for the additional equipotential bonding shall be identified with green-
yellow marking at the points of connection.
710.554 Plugs, socket-outlets and cable-couplers
710.554.01 Socket-outlet circuits in the medical IT system for medical locations of Group 2
Socket-outlets, intended to supply medical electrical equipment shall be fitted with a voltage indicator.
The voltage indicator luminaires shall have a long life-span.
Note: For voltage indicator luminaires the emission of green light is preferred.
At each patient’s place of treatment, e.g. bed-heads, the configuration of socket-outlets shall be as follows:
- either a minimum of two separate circuits feeding socket-outlets shall be installed or each socket-outlet shall be
individually protected against overcurrent.
Note: Each circuit preferably should supply only socket -outlets assigned to one place of treatment.
Where circuits are supplied from other systems in the same medical location these socket-outlets shall either:
- be of such construction that prevents their use in other systems, or

- be clearly and permanently marked.
211
In medical locations of Group 1 and Group 2, at least two different sources of supply shall be provided for some of
the luminaires. One of the two supplies shall be connected to the safety service.
In escape routes, alternate luminaires shall be connected to the safety service (see 710.56).
710.56 SAFETy SERVICES
710.561 General
710.561.01 In medical locations a power supply for safety purposes is required, which, in accordance with the
standard, will energize the installations needed for continuous operation in case of failure of the general power system,
for a defined period within a pre-set switch-over time.
Note: The responsible management of the medical location (including medical staff) should be involved in the decision where safety services
are needed.
The safety power supply system shall automatically take over, if the voltage of one or more incoming live conductors
of the main distribution board of the building with the main power supply has dropped for more than 0,5 s by more
than 10% of the nominal voltage.
A safety analysis for back-up of emergency power during service/maintenance shall be made by the responsible staff.
710.562 Sources for supplies to safety services
Note: Classification of safety services is given in Annex 710A.
710.562.1 General requirements for safety power supply sources of Group 1 and Group 2
710.562.1.01 In the sense of this Rule, primary cells are not permissible as safety power sources. In the sense of this
Rule, an additional main incoming power supply from the general power supply, is not regarded as a source of the
safety power supply.
If unit-type power stations with jacking-piston combustion engines are used as safety power sources, they shall comply
with ISO 8528-1, 13.3.2.
The availability (readiness for service) of safety power sources shall be monitored and indicated at a suitable and
permanently staffed location.
710.562.1.02 In case of a failure of the general power supply source, the power supply for safety services shall be
energized to feed the equipment stated in 710.562.2.01, 710.562.2.02 and 710.562.2.03 with electrical energy.
710.562.1.03 For interconnecting cables between the individual components and sub-assemblies of safety power
supply sources, see 710.52.
Note: The circuit that connects the power supply source for safety services to the main distribution board should be considered a safety circuit.
710.562.1.04 Where socket-outlets are supplied from the safety power supply source they shall be readily
identifiable.
710.562.2 Detailed requirements for safety power supply services
710.562.2.01 Power supply sources with a change-over period less than or equal to 0.5s
In the event of a voltage failure of one or more line conductors at the distribution board, a special safety power supply
source shall maintain:
- luminaires of operating theatre tables,

- other essential luminaires, e.g. endoscopes,
- critical life-supporting medical electrical equipment, for a minimum period of 3 h.
It shall restore the supply within a change-over period not exceeding 0.5s.
Note 1: The duration of 3 h may be reduced to 1h if a power source according to 710.562.2.02 is installed and the essential luminaires for operation
can be supplied from this source.
Note 2: Included under other indispensable luminaires may be light sources for endoscopic surgical field-luminaires.
212
710.562.2.02 Power supply sources with a change-over period less than or equal to 15s
Equipment according to 710.565.1 and 710.566 shall be connected within 15s to a safety power supply source capable
of maintaining it for a minimum period of 24 h, when the voltage of one or more line conductors at the main distribution
board for the safety services has decreased by more than 10 % of the nominal value of supply voltage and of a duration
greater than 3s.
Note: The duration of 24h may be reduced to a minimum of 3h if the medical requirements and the use of the location.
710.562.2.03 Power supply sources with a changeover period greater than 15s
Equipment other than those covered by 710.562.2.2.01 and 710.562.2.02, which is required for the maintenance of
hospital services, may be connected either automatically or manually to a safety power supply source capable of
maintaining it for a minimum period of 24 h. This equipment may include, for example:
- sterilization equipment,
- technical building installations, in particular air conditioning, heating and ventilation systems, building services and
waste disposal systems,
- cooling equipment,
- cooking equipment,
- storage battery chargers.
710.565 Safety lighting circuits
710.565.1 Safety lighting
In addition to the requirements of I.S. 3217, Emergency lighting, the following applies.
In the event of mains power failure, the necessary minimum illuminance shall be provided from the safety services
source for the following locations. The interruption time to the safety source shall not exceed 15s:
- escape routes;
- lighting of exit signs;
- locations for switchgear and control gear for emergency generation sets and for main distribution boards of the
normal power supply and for power supply for safety services;
- rooms in which essential services are intended. In each such room at least one luminaire shall be supplied from the
power source for safety services;
- locations of central fire alarm and monitoring systems;
- rooms of group 1 medical locations. In each such room at least one luminaire shall be supplied from the power
supply source for safety services,
Note: In Group 1 medical locations outside hospitals or equivalent institutions it may not be necessary to install any safety power supply at all,
if a failure of the supply causes no danger to finish the procedure and evacuate the location.
- rooms of Group 2 medical locations. A minimum of 50% of the lighting shall be supplied from the power source for
safety services.
If additional protection by disconnection is applied, it shall be arranged within the circuit in such a way, that the
protective device will not disconnect all of the lighting circuits of the room or escape route.
The luminaires of the escape routes shall be evenly arranged in alternate circuits.
The complete lighting system shall remain in operation in the event of a fault.
Note: For the values for minimum illuminance, see the Building Regulations.
710.566 Other services
Other services which require a safety service supply with a changeover period not exceeding 15s may include, for
example, the following:
- selected lifts for fire-fighters,
- ventilating systems for smoke extraction;
- paging systems,
- medical electrical equipment used in Group 2 medical locations which serves for surgical or other procedures of vital
importance. Such equipment will be defined by responsible staff;
- electrical equipment of medical gas supply including compressed air, vacuum supply and narcosis (anesthetics)
exhaustion as well as their monitoring devices,
- fire detection, fire alarms and fire extinguishing systems.
213
710.6 VERIFICATION
710.6.01 The dates and results of each verification shall be recorded.
710.61 INITIAL VERIFICATION

The tests specified below under items a) to g, in addition to the requirements of Chapter 61, shall be carried out, both
prior to commissioning and after alterations or repairs and before re-commissioning:

a) functional test of insulation monitoring devices of medical IT systems and acoustical/visual alarm systems;
b) measurements to verify that the supplementary equipotential bonding is in accordance with 710.416.2.01 and
710.416.2.02;
c) verification of the integrity of the facilities required by 710.416.2. for equipotential bonding;
d) verification of the integrity of the requirements of 710.56 for safety services;
e) measurements of leakage current of the output circuit and of the enclosure of medical IT transformers in no-load
condition;
f) computational verification of the compliance of the selectivity of the safety power supply in regard to planning
documents and calculation;
g) verification of the applied protective measures for compliance with the requirements for Group 1 and Group 2.
710.62 PERIODIC VERIFICATION
710.62.01 The manufacturer (installer) shall give advice to the operating authority in the operating instructions for
the following necessary periodic verification ( Chapter 62.).
Periodic verification of items a) to h) of 710.61 shall be carried out in accordance with Chapter 62. The following
intervals are recommended:
a) functional testing of changeover devices: 12 months;
b) functional testing of insulation monitoring devices: 12 months;
c) measurement verifying the supplementary equipotential bonding: 36 months;
d) verifying integrity of facilities required for equipotential bonding: 36 months;
e) monthly functional testing of:
- safety services with batteries: 15 min,
- safety services with combustion engines, until rated running temperature is achieved: 12 months for endurance run,
- safety services with batteries: capacity test,
- safety services with combustion engines: 60 min,
In all cases at least 50 % to 100 % of the rated power shall be taken over.
f) checking of the tripping of RCDs at I∆N: not more than 12 months;
g) visual inspection, functional tests and measurements of the electrical installation, especially to verify the protection
against electric shock, including the settings of adjustable protective devices: 36 months;
h) functional test of the lighting of exit signs, escape routes, locations for switchgear and control gear:12 months.
Note: The dimensions in the figure show minimum extent of the patient environment in a free surrounding.
Figure 710.1 – Example of patient environment (IEC 60601-1)
214
711: Exhibitions, Shows and Stands
711.1 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to temporary electrical installations in exhibitions, shows and stands
(including mobile and portable displays and equipment), which may be indoors or outdoors. It does not apply to
temporary installations such as those of circuses, amusement booths, and travelling fairs, which are usually located
outdoors and covered by 740 of these Rules.
711.2 DEFINITIONS
The following additional definitions apply for the purposes of this section
Exhibition: Event intended for the purpose of displaying and/or selling products etc., which can take place in any
suitable location, either a room, building or temporary structure.
Origin of the temporary installation: The point in the permanent installation or other source of supply from which
electrical energy is delivered.
Show: display or performance in any suitable location, either a room, building or temporary structure.
Stand: Area or temporary structure used for display, marketing, sales, entertainment etc.
Temporary structure: A unit or a part of a unit including mobile portable units, situated indoors or outdoors, designed
and intended to be assembled and dismantled.
Temporary electrical installation: Electrical installation erected and dismantled at the same time as the stand or
display with which it is associated.
711.32 Classification of external influences
711.32.01 The external influences to be expected may include the presence of water and mechanical stresses.
711.411.3 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault (protection against indirect contact).
711.411.3.01 Regardless of the type of earthing system (TN or TT), the supply to a temporary structure shall be
protected at the origin by an RCD having a rated residual operating current not greater than 300mA, and a time delay
to ensure discrimination with final circuits protected by other RCDs.
711.411.3.02 Except for emergency lighting, all final circuits having a rating not exceeding 32A shall be protected
by RCDs having a rated residual operating current not greater than 30mA.
711.414 Protection by SELV or PELV
711.414.01 Where SELV or PELV is used, conductors shall be protected by insulation capable of withstanding a test
voltage of 500V a.c. for 1 min., or by barriers or enclosures having a degree of protection at least IP 2X. SELV lighting
installations shall comply with 715.
711.416.2.01 Supplementary equipotential bonding shall comply with 711.544.2.
Note: The requirements below apply in addition to those in Chapter 42, 422.2.3.
215
711.422.01 A motor, which is automatically or remotely controlled and which is not under continuous supervision,
shall be fitted with a manually re-settable device that provides protection against excessive temperatures.
711.422.02 Lighting equipment such as incandescent lamps, spotlights, projectors having high surface-temperatures
shall be suitably guarded, and installed and located in accordance with the relevant standard. All such equipment shall
be located well away from combustible material so as to prevent contact therewith. Showcases and signs shall be
constructed of materials having adequate heat- resistance, mechanical strength, electrical insulation and ventilation,
taking into account the combustibility of exhibits in relation to the heat generated.
711.46 ISOLATION AND SWITCHING
711.462 Isolation
711.462.01 Every separate temporary structure, e.g. a vehicle, a stand or a unit intended to be occupied by one
specific user, and each circuit supplying outdoor installations shall be provided with its own isolating device which
shall be readily accessible and easily identifiable.

711.520.1 General
711.520.01 Cables shall be protected against mechanical damage by armouring or other equally effective means.
Flexible cables or cords shall not be laid on the floor except where they are not accessible to the public, or where they
have additional protection against mechanical damage.
711.521.01 Where no fire alarm system is installed in a building used for exhibitions etc. cable systems shall be:
- flame retardant according to I.S. 271, or

- single or multi-core cables enclosed in conduit or trunking providing fire protection in accordance with I.S.EN 60614
or I.S.EN 61084, and having a degree of protection of at least IP 4X.
711.526 Electrical connections
711.526.01 Joints shall not be made in cables except where necessary as a tee connection to a circuit. Such joints
shall be in an enclosure providing a degree of protection of at least IP 4X. Where necessary, cables shall be connected
by means of cable couplers complying with 554.6.
Where strain could be transmitted to terminals, the connection shall be provided with adequate means of support.
711.530.6.01 Switchgear and control gear shall be located in enclosures affording a degree of protection of at least
IP 44.
711.544 Supplementary equipotential bonding
711.544.2.01 In locations used for animals, supplementary equipotential bonding shall connect all exposed
conductive parts, and extraneous conductive parts that can be touched simultaneously, to the protective conductor of
the installation. Where a metal grid is embedded in the floor, it shall be connected to the local supplementary bonding
system.
711.544.2.02 The extraneous conductive parts of a vehicle e.g. a wagon, caravan or container, shall be connected to
the supplementary equipotential bonding system, and at more than one place where conductive continuity is not
ensured throughout the structure.
Bonding conductors shall consist of copper conductors having a cross-sectional area of at least 4 mm2. This requirement
does not apply to vehicles made substantially of insulating material, the metal parts of which are unlikely to become
live in the event of a fault.
216
711.551 Low-voltage generating sets
711.551.01 Where a low-voltage generating set supplies a temporary installation, it shall be ensured that the earthing
arrangements comply with 542.1 and 542.2.
For TN systems, all exposed conductive parts shall be bonded to the exposed conductive parts of the generator by
means of a protective conductor complying with 543.
The neutral conductor or star point of the generator shall be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the generator.
Note: Further information may be found in publication ET 210: 2003
711.554.01 An adequate number of socket-outlets shall be installed to facilitate the safe use of equipment by the
users. Where a floor-mounted socket is installed, it shall be adequately protected from mechanical damage and
accidental ingress of water.
Note: Not more than one flexible cable or cord may be connected to a plug.
Multi-way plug-in type adapters should not be used.
711.559.5 Protection against fire and harmful thermal effects
711.559.5.01 Luminaires mounted below 2.5 m (arm’s reach) from floor level or otherwise liable to accidental
contact shall be firmly and adequately fixed, and so sited or guarded as to prevent risk of injury or ignition of materials.
711.559.5.02 Insulation-piercing lamp holders shall not be used unless the cables and lamp holders are specifically
designed for the purpose and are compatible. The lamp holders shall not be removable after fitting to the cable.
711.559.14 High-voltage discharge-lighting installations
Installations of any luminous tube, sign or lamp as an illuminated unit on a stand, or as an exhibit supplied from a
voltage exceeding low voltage shall comply with 559.14, and in addition, with the following requirements:
711.559.14.01 Luminous tubes, signs and lamps shall be installed out of arm’s reach or alternatively they shall be
adequately protected so as to reduce the risk of injury to persons.
711.559.14.02 Switchgear and control gear shall be mounted on non-combustible surfaces.
The associated fascia or stand- fitting material shall be of non-combustible materials.
Note: See I.S EN 50107
711.559.14.03 The emergency switch shall be readily visible, accessible, and located and marked in accordance
with the requirements of the fire authority.
711.559.14.04 Circuits supplying equipment for high-voltage discharge-lighting shall not supply any other
equipment.
712: Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Power Supply Systems

Note: The abbreviation “PV” is used for “solar photovoltaic” in this section).
712.11 SCOPE
This section applies to the electrical installations of PV power supply systems including systems with a.c. modules.
712.2 DEFINITIONS
The following definitions apply for the purposes of this section:
217
A.C side: The part of a PV installation from the a.c. terminals of the PV inverter to the point of connection of the
PV supply cable to the electrical installation.
D.C. side: The part of a PV installation from a PV cell to the d.c. terminals of the PV Inverter.
PV cell: A basic PV device that can generate electricity when exposed to light such as solar radiation.
PV module: The smallest completely environmentally-protected assembly of interconnected PV cells.
PV string: A circuit in which PV modules are connected in series to enable a PV array to generate the required output
voltage.
PV array: A mechanically and electrically integrated assembly of PV modules and other necessary components that
forms a d.c. power supply unit.
PV array junction box: An enclosure where all PV strings of any PV array are electrically-protected and where
protective devices can be located where required.
PV generator:
An assembly of PV arrays.
PV generator junction box: An enclosure where all PV arrays are electrically-connected and where protective
devices can be located where required.
PV string cable: A cable connecting PV modules to form a PV string.
PV array cable: The output cable of a PV array.
PV DC main cable: The cable connecting the PV generator junction box to the d.c terminals of the PV inverter.
PV inverter: A device that converts d.c. voltage and d.c. current into a.c. voltage and a.c. current respectively.
PV supply cable: The cable connecting the a.c. terminals of the PV inverter to a distribution circuit of the electrical
installation.
PV AC module: An integrated module/inverter assembly where the electrical interface terminals are a.c. only. No
access is provided to the d.c. side.
PV installation: The completed installation of a PV power supply system.
Standard test conditions (STC): The test conditions specified in I.S.EN 60904-3 for PV cells and PV modules.
Open-circuit voltage under standard test conditions UO STC: The voltage under standard test conditions across an
unloaded (open) PV module, PV string, PV array, PV generator, or on the d.c. side of the PV inverter.
Short-circuit current under standard test conditions I SC STC: Short-circuit current of a PV module, PV string, PV
array, or PV generator under standard test conditions.
Simple separation: Separation between circuits or between a circuit and earth by means of basic insulation (411.2
and Annex 41A).
712.312.2 Types of system earthing
712.312.2.01 It is permissible to earth one of the live conductors on the d.c. side provided there is at least simple
separation between the a.c. side and the d.c side.
Note: Precautions should be taken to avoid corrosion on any connections to earth on the d.c. side.
712.411.3 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault (indirect contact).
712.411.3.01 For the measure protection by automatic disconnection of supply, the PV supply cable shall be
connected to the supply side of the protective device.
218
712.411.3.02 Where an electrical installation includes a PV power supply system without at least simple separation
between the a.c. side and the d.c. side, protection by automatic disconnection of the supply shall be provided by an
RCD Type B.
Where the PV inverter cannot, by reason of its construction, feed d.c. currents into the electrical installation, the RCD
need not be Type B.
712.412 Protection by double or reinforced insulation

This protective measure shall preferably be applied on the d.c. side.
712.43 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT
712.433 Protection against overload on the d.c. side.
712.433.01 Overload protection may be omitted for PV string and PV array cables if the continuous current-carrying
capacity of the cable is equal to at least 1.25 times the short- circuit current under test conditions ISC STC at any
location.
712.433.02 Overload protection may be omitted for the PV main cable if its continuous current- carrying capacity
is equal to at least 1.25 times the short-circuit current ISC STC of the PV generator.
Note: The manufacturer’s instructions for the protection of cables should be taken into account.
712.434 Protection against short-circuit currents
712.434.01 The PV supply cable on the a.c. side shall be protected against short-circuit currents by an overcurrent
device located at the connection to the main electrical installation.
712.44 PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES AND ELECTROMAGNETIC

DISTURBANCES
712.444 Protection against electromagnetic interference (EMI) in buildings.
712.444.01 For the purpose of minimizing voltages induced by lightning, the area of all wiring loops shall be kept
as small as possible.
712.462.01 Means shall be provided for isolating the PV inverter from both the a.c. side and the d.c. side.
Note: See 551.7 for PV installations operating in parallel with the supply network.
712.51 COMMON RULES AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES.
712.511.01 Crystalline PV modules shall comply with I.S.EN 61215.
PV modules of Class II construction shall be considered if the open- circuit voltage UOC STC exceeds 120V d.c.
PV array junction boxes, PV generator junction boxes and switchgear assemblies shall comply with I.S. EN 40369-1.
712.512.01 Electrical equipment on the d.c. side shall be suitable for direct voltage and direct current.
It is permissible to connect PV modules in series up to the maximum rated operating voltage of the PV modules (Uoc
stc of the PV strings) and the PV inverter, whichever is lower, taking into consideration the equipment manufacturer’s
instructions.
If blocking diodes are used, their reverse voltage shall be rated for 2 x UOC STC of the PV string. The blocking diodes
shall be connected in series with the PV strings.
219
712.512.02 PV modules shall be installed so as to ensure adequate heat dissipation under conditions of maximum
solar radiation for the site, taking into account the manufacturer’s instructions.
712.513 Accessibility
712.513.01 The selection and erection of equipment shall facilitate future maintenance and shall not adversely affect
the provisions for enabling maintenance and service work to be carried out safely.
712.522.01 PV string cables, PV array cables and PV d.c. main cables shall be selected and installed so as to
minimize the risk of earth faults and short-circuits.
Note: This may be achieved e.g. by the use of single-core cables.
712.522.02 Wiring systems shall withstand the expected external influences such as wind, ice-formations,
temperatures and solar radiation.
712.537.2 Isolation
712.537.2.01 For compliance with 712.462, a device shall effectively isolate the PV inverter from the PV installation
and from the DSO network.
712.537.2.02 Isolation on the d.c. side of the inverter shall be effected by a switching device. All junction boxes for
the PV generator and for the PV array shall carry a warning label indicating that the active parts inside the boxes may
still be alive after isolation from the PV inverter.
712.54 Earthing arrangements, protective conductors and equipotential bonding
712.544.01 Protective equipotential conductors shall be run parallel to, and in as close contact as possible with, the
d.c. cables and a.c. cables and accessories.
Figure 712.1: Schematic diagram: Solar PV installation.
220
713 Reserved
714 Outdoor Lighting Installations
FOREWORD
Further information on street lighting is given in ET 211: “Code of practice for Public Lighting Installations in
Residential Areas”.
714.11 SCOPE
The particular requirements of this section apply to fixed outdoor lighting installations.
Note: Outdoor lighting comprises luminaires, wiring systems and accessories located outside buildings.
They apply particularly to:

- lighting installations e.g. for roads, parks, gardens, places open to the public, sporting areas, illumination of
monuments and floodlighting,
- other equipment incorporating lighting such as telephone kiosks, bus- shelters, advertising panels, town plans and
road signs.
The particular requirements of this section do not apply to:
- public lighting installations owned and operated by a supply authority,

- temporary festoon lighting (covered by 740.559),
- road traffic signal systems,
- luminaires fixed to the outside of a building and supplied directly from the internal wiring of that building;
- lighting for swimming pools (covered by 702.559).
714.2 DEFINITIONS
The following additional definitions apply:
Bracket: A support projecting from a column or wall on which a lantern is mounted.
Column: A vertical support for luminaires.
Control discharge gear: Circuit electrical equipment necessary for the starting and operation of discharge lamps.
Lantern: A luminaire designed for road- or area - lighting and comprising a housing for a light source or sources
together with any refractor, reflector, dispersive surround or enclosure which may be associated with the source or
sources in order to modify the light distribution or other lighting characteristics.
Main supply point: This is replaced by the following:

For public lighting, the point at which the DSO makes the electricity supply available. This will normally be at the
customer’s service pillar for underground supplies, or at the first column for overhead supplies.
Service pillar: Ground-mounted equipment containing control and distribution equipment.
Note: This is the property of the customer.
714.3 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.
714.32 Classification of external influences
External influences may be ambient temperature, weather conditions, and vandalism. (Annex 51D).
714.411 Basic insulation with automatic disconnection of supply and earthing
714.411.2 Basic protection (protection against direct contact).
221
714.411.2.01 Cabinets housing accessible live parts shall be lockable with a key or tool, unless they are in a location
to which only authorised persons have access.
714.411.2.02 Doors giving access to electrical equipment shall be lockable with a key or tool. In addition, basic
protection shall be provided when the door is open, either by the use of equipment having at least the degree of
protection IP20 by its construction or installation. Alternatively, placing a barrier or an enclosure providing the same
degree of protection is admissible.
714.411.2.03 For lanterns and other luminaires at heights not exceeding 2.80m above ground level, access to the light
source shall only be possible after the removal of a barrier or enclosure which requires the use of a key or tool.
714.411.2.04 The installation shall be protected additionally by means of an RCD having a rated residual operating
current not exceeding 30mA. Where failure of the illumination is likely to cause other danger, e.g. slips, trips or falls,
circuits shall be sub-divided into several sub-circuits, each protected separately by an RCD.
This requirement shall not apply to high-level luminaires mounted at a height not less than 2.8m.
Note 1: Socket-outlets must be protected by a 30mA RCD.

Note 2: Examples where failure of illumination is not likely to cause danger are telephone kiosks, bus shelters, advertising signs and similar
equipment.
714.412 Protection by double or reinforced insulation
714.412.01 Where only Class II equipment is installed, a protective conductor shall not be provided and the
conductive parts of the lighting column shall not be connected to an earthing system.
Note: Metal column roots or foundations are not required to be isolated from the surrounding earth in such cases.
714.512 Operational conditions and external influences.
714.512.01 Electrical equipment in general shall have, either by construction or installation, a degree of protection
of at least IP33.
714.512.02 Electrical equipment installed externally on outdoor lighting columns shall have a degree of protection
of at least IP44.
714.512.03 Lanterns shall have a degree of protection of at least IP54.
Note: Higher degrees of protection may be necessary in some cases e.g. because of operational or cleaning conditions.
714.514 Identification and marking
714.514.01 Ducting of materials other than concrete and containing cables shall be coloured red.
714.522.6 Impact
714.522.6.01 Cables fixed externally to outdoor lighting columns shall be provided with additional mechanical
protection such as a metal tubing for up to a height of at least 3m above ground level.
714.522.6.02 Underground cables shall be mechanically protected by enclosure in a concrete pipe, or a polythene
pipe of High density Class B according to I.S 135, or other pipe having an equivalent resistance to impact. Pipes shall
comply with I.S.EN 50086 - 2- 4, having a 750 N load rating for a deflection of 5%.
Note 1: Pipes must be identified in accordance with 722.514.

Note 2: See Table 52B (Chapter 52) which specifies the minimum depths for buried cable.
222
714.522.8 Other mechanical stresses
714.522.8.01 Overhead lines shall have a clearance from the ground of at least 5.5m.
Note: Greater clearances are normally required for thoroughfares such as roads, railways and waterways.
714.522.8.02 Overhead conductors shall consist of hard-drawn copper or shall otherwise be suitable for catenary
installation The cross-sectional area shall be at least 6 mm2.
714.522.8.03 The cross-sectional area of phase (line) and neutral conductors in underground cable
shall be not less than 6mm2.
Note 1: Where columns are intended to be erected close to overhead networks, permission to proceed shall be obtained in writing from the DSO.
Note 2: Particular care is necessary where external lighting is adjacent to overhead conductors.
Under medium and high voltage conductors, wiring should be placed underground in order to avoid falling conductors (see 714.566.6.02).
714.533.01 A customer’s main overcurrent protective device shall be installed at the Main Supply Point.
The device shall have a short-circuit breaking capacity of at least 16kA.
714.54 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AND EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING.
714.542 Connections to earth
714.542.2 Earth electrode
714.542.2 01 The main earth electrode shall be installed close to the Main Supply Point.
714.542.3 Earthing conductors
714.542.3.01 The connection of the main earth electrode to the earthing conductor shall be accessible for the initial
inspection and testing.
Note: This connection may be buried subsequently for security and to prevent interference.
714.542.4 Main earthing terminal or bar.
714.542.4.01 The main earthing terminal or bar shall be located at the Main Supply Point and shall have facilities
for the connection of the following conductors:
- earthing conductors,
- main protective conductor (for TN systems, carried out by the DSO,
- lantern protective conductors where the Main Supply Point is at the column,
- equipotential bonding conductors of the metal of reinforced- concrete columns where accessible.
714.543.1.01 For each external lighting circuit, whether underground or overhead, the earthing terminals of
individual columns shall be connected to the main earthing terminal at the Main Supply Point, by a protective
conductor.
The cross-sectional area of each protective conductor shall comply with Table 54C, except that it shall have a minimum
cross-sectional area of:
- for conductors in cables outside of the lighting column: 6mm2,

- for conductors in cables inside of the lighting column: 2.5mm2.
714.543.4 Main protective conductor
714.543.4.01 The main protective conductor shall connect the main earthing terminal to the neutral conductor at the
main supply point. This connection shall be made only by the DSO.
223
714.544.2 Supplementary bonding conductors and local equipotential bonding
714.544.2.01 In each column, an equipotential bonding conductor shall interconnect the extraneous conductive
parts of the lantern to the column earthing terminal bar.
Where the control gear is located at the base of the column, separate bonding conductors shall connect the extraneous
conductive parts to the main earthing terminal.
Such equipotential bonding conductors shall have a cross-sectional area at least equal to that of the live conductors,
and shall not form part of multi-core cables.
714.544.2.02 Metal structures, e.g. fences, grids, which are in the proximity of, but are not part of, the outdoor
lighting installation, need not be bonded to the main earthing terminal.
714.559 Luminaires and lighting equipment
Luminaires in general shall comply with I.S. EN 60598. Luminaires for street lighting shall comply with I.S. EN
60598-2-3.
715: Extra-Low Voltage Lighting Installations
Introduction
This section implements CENELEC HD 30634-7-715 : 2007.
715.1 SCOPE
This section applies to extra-low voltage lighting installations supplied from sources having a maximum rated voltage
of 50V a.c. r.m.s or 120V d.c.
715.414.01 SELV shall be applied exclusively.
715.414.02 Where bare conductors are used, the voltage shall not exceed 25V a.c. r.m.s. or 60V d.c.
715.414.03 Safety transformers shall comply with I.S. EN 61558-2-6.
715.414.04 Converters shall not be operated in parallel.
Note: The requirements below apply in addition to those in Chapter 42.
715.421.01 Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, with particular regard
to those relating to flammable and non-flammable surfaces.
Note: The attention of the user should be drawn to the potential hazards of using the wrong type of lamp.
715.422 Fire risk of transformers and converters where particular hazards or dangers exist
715.422.01 Transformers shall be either:
- protected on the primary side by a protective device complying with 715.422.04, or

- short-circuit proof transformers (both inherently and non-inherently proof).
715.422.02 Electronic converters shall comply with I.S. EN 61347-2-2 and with I.S. EN 60598-2-23.
Note: It is recommended that converters marked with the symbol be used
224
715.422.03 If both circuit conductors are not insulated, they shall be either:
- provided with a special protective device complying with 715.422.04, or

- systems complying with I.S. EN 60598-2-23.
715.422.04 The special protective device against risk of fire shall comply with each of the following:
a) continuous monitoring of the power demand of the luminaires, and automatic disconnection of the supply circuit
within 3s in case of a short-circuit or failure that causes a power increase exceeding 60W.
b) automatic disconnection while the supply is operating with reduced power, (e.g. by gating control or a regulating
process or a lamp failure) if there is a failure that causes a power increase exceeding 60W.
c) automatic disconnection, when the supply is switched on and there is a failure that causes a power increase exceeding
60W.
d) the device shall be fail-safe.
Note: Account should be taken of starting currents.

715.43.01 SELV circuits shall be protected against overcurrent by a common protective device or a protective device
for each circuit in compliance with Chapter 43.
Note: When selecting the protection device for the primary circuit, account should be taken of the magnetising current of the transformer.
715.43.02 Overcurrent protective devices for transformers having a rating not exceeding 50VA shall be self-resetting.
715.462.01 Where transformers operate in parallel, the primary circuit shall be controlled by a common isolating
device.
715.521.01 Wiring systems shall consist of one or more of the following:
- insulated conductors in conduit or trunking,

- flexible cables and cords,
- systems for extra-low voltage lighting complying with EN 60598-2-23,
- track systems complying with I.S. EN 60570,
- bare conductors.
715.521.02 Conductors shall not be used for other purposes, e.g. for signs, price- tags, coat-hangers or similar items.
715.521.03 Where parts of the extra-low voltage system are accessible, they shall comply with 423.
715.521.04 Extraneous conductive parts such as metal structural parts, pipe systems or parts of furniture shall not
be used as current-carrying conductors.
715.521.05 Bare conductors
Bare conductors used for extra-low voltage lighting systems shall comply with each of the following:
a) The nominal voltage shall not exceed 25V a.c or 60V d.c.
b) The installation shall be designed, installed or enclosed in such a way that the risk of short -circuit is reduced to a
minimum.
c) The conductors shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 4 mm2.
d) The conductors shall not be placed directly on combustible material.
For suspended bare conductors, at least one conductor and its terminals shall be insulated for that part of the circuit
between the transformer and the protective device, so as to prevent a short-circuit.
Note: Where bare conductors are used, consideration should be given to the possible presence of combustible material.
225
715.521.06 Suspended systems
Suspension devices for luminaires, including supporting conductors, shall be capable of carrying at least five times
the mass of the luminaires, lamps included, but not less than 5 kg.
Connections, including terminations, shall be made with screw terminals or screwless clamping devices complying
with I.S. EN 60998-2 -1 or I.S. EN 60998-2-2.
Insulation-piercing connectors, or termination wires with counterweights hung over suspended conductors, shall not
be used.
The suspended system shall be fixed to surfaces by insulated distance-cleats and shall be continuously visible
throughout the route.
Note: See also 715.521.05 concerning bare conductors.
715.521.07 Track systems
Track systems for luminaires shall comply with I.S. EN 60570.

715.524.01 The minimum cross-sectional areas of conductors for extra-low voltage lighting installations shall be
not less than the following:
- 1.5 mm2 copper, except in the case of flexible cables of length not exceeding 3m where 1.0 mm2 is permissible,
- 4 mm2 copper for suspended flexible cables and insulated conductors,
- 4 mm2 copper for composite cables consisting of braided tinned copper outer sheath, having an inner core of material
of high tensile strength.
715.525 Voltage drop in consumers’ installations
715.525.01 In extra-low voltage lighting installations, the voltage drop between the transformer and the furthest
luminaire shall preferably not exceed 5% of the nominal voltage of the installation.
715.533 Overcurrent protective devices
715.533.01 Protective devices shall be easily accessible.
715.533.02 Protective devices that are movable or easily accessible may be located above false ceilings, provided
information is given to the appropriate person about the presence and location of the devices.
If the identification of a device for a circuit is not obvious, a sign or diagram shall be placed close to the device,
identifying the circuit and its purpose.
715.533.03 Protective devices shall be installed in compliance with the following:
- mechanical stress on the conductors and terminals shall, be avoided, and

- they shall be adequately supported, and
- they shall be located so as to avoid overheating due to thermal insulation in the vicinity.
Note: Protective devices may be incorporated in the source – see 715.552
715.552 Transformers and other sources
715.552.01 Transformers and other SELV sources shall be installed in compliance with the following:
- mechanical stress of the conductors and terminals shall be avoided,

- they shall be adequately supported,
- they shall be located so as to avoid overheating due to thermal insulation in the vicinity.
226
715.559 Luminaires and lighting equipment
715.559.01 Luminaires shall comply with I.S. EN 60598.
Note: See also 559
715.559.02 Symbols
Independent ballast IEC 60417 sheet No. 5138.
Converter with a temperature limitation of 110ºC
Short-circuit proof (inherently or non-inherently) safety isolating transformer (EN 61558-2-6)
717: Mobile or transportable units

FOREWORD
This section implements CENELEC Harmonization Document 60364-7-717: S1
717.1 SCOPE
The requirements of this section apply to mobile or transportable units. For the purposes of this section, the term
“unit” means a vehicle and/or a mobile or transportable structure in which all or part of an electrical installation is
contained.
Units may be either:

- of the mobile type, e.g. vehicles self-propelled or for towing, or
- of the transportable type, e.g. containers or cabins placed on a base frame.
Note: Examples of the type of use intended are for broadcasting, medical services, advertising, fire-fighting, workshops.
The requirements do not apply to:
- generating sets,
- marinas and pleasure craft,
- mobile machinery complying with I.S.EN 60204-1,
- caravans and mobile homes,
- traction equipment of electric vehicles,
- vending, trailer and similar mobile units.
Where applicable, additional requirements specified in other sections of Part 7 shall be taken into consideration.
717.312 Types of earthing system
717.312.01 The TN-C system shall not be used inside any unit.
717.313 Supplies
The supply to a unit may consist of the following:
i) connection to a low-voltage generating set in accordance with 551;

ii) connection to a fixed installation in which the protective measures are effective for the unit;
iii) simple separation with an IT earthing system;
iv ) connection through an isolating transformer providing electrical separation in accordance with 413. Method i) may
be combined with any of the other methods ii), iii), and iv).
The sources, and means of connection or electrical separation may be within the unit. Where Method i) or ii) is used
and connection is by means of a polarised plug and socket arrangement, overcurrent protective devices shall be installed
in the unit at the origin of the installation.
Note: In the case of i), ii) and iii) a local earth electrode may be necessary.
227
717.411.3.01 For supply in accordance with 717.313 i ), only TN systems and IT systems are permissible.
Equipotential bonding shall be provided as appropriate according to 717.544.
717.411.3.02 For supply in accordance with 717.313 ii), only TN and TT systems shall be used, and protection shall
be provided by an RCD having a rated residual current not exceeding 30mA. A label shall be fixed in the proximity
of a socket-outlet supplying the unit, stating that the socket-outlet must not be used to supply any equipment outside
the unit.
717.411.3.03 In all cases specified in 717.313, all equipment installed between the source of supply and the
protective devices within the unit, including those devices, shall be protected by the use of Class II insulation or its
equivalent.
717.411.3.04 In a TN system in a unit with a conductive enclosure and supplied in accordance with 717.313 i) or
iii), the enclosure shall be connected to the neutral point, or, if not available, a phase/line conductor.
717.411.3.05 In a TN system in a unit with a non-conducting enclosure, the exposed conductive parts within the unit
shall be connected to the neutral point, or, if not available, a phase/line conductor.
717.411.3.06 In an IT system in a unit with a conductive enclosure, the exposed conductive parts shall be connected
to the enclosure.
717.411.3.07 In an IT system, in a unit with a non-conductive enclosure, the exposed conductive parts shall be
connected together and to a protective conductor.
717.416.1 Additional protection against direct contact
717.416.1.01 Additional protection against direct contact shall be provided by RCDs having a residual operating
current not exceeding 30mA for all circuits supplying socket-outlets, except those protected by SELV or by Reduced
Low-Voltage.
717.43.01 Where a line/phase conductor is connected to the enclosure as permitted by 717.411.3, overcurrent
protection need not be provided for this conductor.
717.514.01 A warning notice shall be affixed in such a position and in a location which is clearly visible to the user,
stating in clear and unambiguous terms, the types of supply that may be connected to the unit.
717.52.01 Cables for the connection of the unit to the supply shall be of a flexible type, having a minimum cross-
sectional area of 2.5 mm2.
The cable shall enter the unit in such a way as to minimise the possibility of insulation damage or a fault that might
make live the exposed conductive parts of the unit. The cable sheath shall be securely gripped or
anchored to the unit.
717.52.02 Cables shall be of a flexible type, and shall be either:

- installed in conduit, or
- installed in such a way that mechanical damage is unlikely to occur due to
e.g. abrasion by sharp edges.
717.554 Plugs, socket-outlets and connecting devices
228

Note: Protection by automatic disconnection of supply by residual current protective devices (RCD).
Figure 717.1: Example of connection to a Class I or Class II low voltage generating set located inside the unit with or
without an earth electrode.
Figure 717.2: Example of connection to a Class II low voltage generating set located outside the unit.
229
717.554.01 Connecting devices for the supply to the unit shall:
- comply with I.S. EN 60309 Part 1 and Part 2,

- have enclosures of insulating material, and
- have a minimum degree of protection IP 44 if located outside the enclosure.
Appliance inlets with their enclosures shall have a minimum degree of protection IP 55.
Socket-outlets located outside the enclosure shall have a minimum degree of protection IP 54.
721: Caravans and Motor Caravans

Introduction
This section implements CENELEC HD 60364-7-721 2007.
721.1 SCOPE
This section applies to the electrical installations of caravans and motor caravans at nominal voltages not exceeding
230/400V a.c. or 48V d.c. It applies to those circuits and equipment intended for the use of the caravan for habitation
purposes.
This section does not apply to:

- electrical circuits and equipment for automotive purposes,
- mobile homes, residential park homes or transportable units.
Note 1: The general requirements apply to mobile homes and residential park homes
Note 2: 717 applies to transportable units
Note 3: For the purpose of this section, caravans and motor caravans are referred to as “caravans”.
721.2 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this section, the following additional definitions apply:
Leisure accommodation: A unit of living accommodation for temporary or seasonal occupation which may meet
the requirements for construction and use as a road vehicle.
Caravan: Trailer leisure accommodation vehicle used for touring, which meets the requirements for construction
and use as a road vehicle.
Motor caravan: A self-propelled leisure accommodation vehicle used for touring that meets the requirements for
construction and use as a road vehicle.
721.313 Supplies
The nominal supply voltage for the electric installation of the caravan shall not exceed:
- 400V a,c, three-phase,

- 230V a.c. single-phase,
- 48V d.c.
Note: The standard d.c. voltages are 12V, 24V, 42V and 48V.
Extra-low voltage d.c. installations shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions or an
appropriate guide. Where the d.c. supply is obtained from an inverter supplied from a low- voltage source, the output
voltage shall be maintained between 11V and 14V maximum.
721.411 3 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault
721.411.3.01 Protection against electric shock in case of a fault shall be provided by an RCD having a rated residual
230
operating current not exceeding 30mA, which disconnects all poles of the supply. This may be provided externally in
the caravan park supply outlet.
721.414.01 Any part of a caravan installation supplied at extra-low voltage shall comply with 414.
721.43.01 Each final circuit shall be protected against overcurrent by an individual protective device that disconnects
all poles of the supply.
721.43.02 A main overcurrent device shall be provided. This is not required where the installation consists of only
one final circuit with a rating not exceeding 16A.
721.510 General
721.510.01 Where there is more than one electrical installation, each installation shall be provided with a separate
disconnecting device and segregated from every other installation.
721.514.01 Instructions for use shall be provided with the caravan to enable the safe use of the installation.
Instructions shall include the following:
-a description of the installation,

- a description of the function of RCDs and their testing procedure (test button),
- a description of the location and function of the main isolating switch,
- a list of instructions in accordance with Annex 721A.
Where necessary, details of precautions to be taken during maintenance by the user shall be provided.
721.521.01 Wiring systems shall consist of one or more of the following:
- insulated single-core non-sheathed cables with flexible stranded Class 5 conductors in non-metal conduit,
- insulated single-core non-sheathed cables with stranded Class 2 conductors in non-metal conduit,
- sheathed flexible cables complying with I.S 202.
Note 1: Conduit and trunking systems must comply with Chapter 52.
Note 2: See IEC 60228 for stranded Class 2 and Class 5 conductors
721.522 Selection and erection with respect to external influences
721.522.7 Vibration (AH)
721.522.7.01 Since the wiring will be subject to vibration, all wiring shall be protected against mechanical damage
by its location or by additional protection. Wiring passing through metalwork shall be protected against damage by
means of suitable bushes or grommets, securely fixed in position.
Particular precautions shall be taken to avoid mechanical damage that could be caused by sharp edges or abrasive
parts.
721.522.8 Other mechanical stresses
721.522.8.01 Cables not enclosed in rigid conduit and all flexible conduit shall be supported at intervals not
exceeding 0.4m for vertical runs and 0,25m for horizontal runs.
Wiring on the under side of a caravan shall be protected against mechanical damage by a suitable enclosure such as
conduit or trunking, or by mounting in slots or recesses.
231
721.524.01 The cross-sectional area of any conductor shall be not less than 1.5 mm2.
721.526.01 Connections between conductors shall be made only in suitable connection-boxes or in electrical
equipment that provides protection against mechanical damage. If the cover of the box is removable without the use
of a tool, the connections shall be covered with insulating material.
721.528 Proximity of wiring systems to other services
721,528.01 No electrical equipment, including wiring systems, shall be installed in a storage compartment intended
for the storage of gas-containers.
721.53 EQUIPMENT FOR PROTECTION, ISOLATION, CONTROL AND MONITORING
721.537 Isolation and switching

721.537.2.01 A main isolating switch and a main overcurrent protective device shall be provided and fixed in a
readily-accessible position inside the caravan. Where an installation consists of a only one final circuit, the overcurrent
protective device protecting that circuit may be fulfil the requirements for isolation.
721.537.2.02 A durable warning notice shall be fixed in a prominent position adjacent to the switch, and shall
contain the following information:
- the appropriate disconnecting and disconnecting procedure on arrival and departure

- the appropriate procedure when a fault occurs.
721.543.01 The protective conductor of a circuit shall consist of a core in a multi-core cable, or a single conductor
in conduit, together with the live conductors of the circuit.
721.554 Plugs, socket-outlets and cable-connectors
721.554.01 A caravan shall be provided with a male-type supply inlet or socket-outlet complying with I.S. EN
60369 Part 1 and Part 2.
The supply inlet shall be installed:
- at a height not more than 1.8m above ground level, and

- in a readily-accessible position, and
- in a suitable recess on the outside the caravan, such that it does not protrude significantly beyond the body of the
caravan.
The supply inlet shall have a minimum degree of protection IP 44 when the plug is inserted and after the plug has been
withdrawn.
The supply inlet enclosure shall incorporate a spring-loaded lid.
Note: The means of connection to the caravan pitch outlet need not be provided with the caravan, but, where provided, it should consist of a
flexible cable 25m in length incorporating a protective conductor, and be provided with a plug at one end and a connector at the other end,
each complying with I..S. EN 60309 Part 1 and Part 2.
721.554.02 Socket-outlets, except those for extra-low voltage circuits, shall have an earth contact.
721.554.03 Socket-outlets provided for extra-low voltage circuits shall be suitably labelled to indicate the voltage.
721.554.04 Socket outlets mounted externally shall comply with I.S. EN 60369 Part 1 and Part 2, and they shall have
a minimum degree of protection IP45. They shall be mounted and located so as to avoid mechanical damage.
232
721.554.05 At least one double socket-outlet or two single socket-outlets shall be provided in the caravan.
721.559 Luminaires and lighting installations.
721.559.01 At least one luminaire shall be provided, with an associated wall-mounted switch.
721.559.02 Luminaires shall be selected and installed so that they do not attain, or subject their surroundings to,
excessive temperatures.
721.559.03 Luminaires shall be mounted directly on the structure or fabric of the caravan. Notwithstanding this
requirement, pendant luminaires may be installed in a caravan provided there are means for securing the luminaire
when the caravan is in motion. Accessories for the suspension of pendant luminaires shall be suitable for the mass
suspended and for the forces associated with vehicle- movement.
721.559.04 A luminaire intended for dual-voltage operation shall comply with the appropriate standard.
729 Operating or maintenance gangways

729.1 SCOPE
This section applies to restricted-access areas containing switchgear and control gear assemblies, where the special
requirements specified in Annex 41B are permissible. It also includes requirements for operating or maintenance
gangways.
This section is applicable only if the conditions stated below are fulfilled:
- the locations are clearly and visibly marked by appropriate signs,

- access thereto is limited to authorized persons,
- doors giving entry to closed restricted-access areas shall allow easy escape to the outside, and, even if locked from
the outside with a key, it shall be possible to open them from the inside without the use of a key or any other device
that is not part of the opening mechanism..
729.410.2.3 Restricted -access areas containing unprotected live parts.
In restricted-access areas where it is not reasonably practicable to provide basic protection (protection against direct
contact), for compliance with Annex 41B clause 3, minimum distances shall be ensured as specified below.
729.410.2.3.1 Minimum distances in gangways without protection against direct contact.
In a location where no protection against direct contact is provided, the minimum distances shall be as follows:
1. Where the gangway has unprotected live parts on one side only:
2. Where the gangway has unprotected live parts on both sides:
233
729.513.2 Requirements for operating and maintenance gangways

The widths of gangways and access areas shall be adequate for work, operational access, emergency access, emergency
evacuation and for the movement of equipment.
Note: A minimum width of 1200mm is recommended.
729.513.2.1 Restricted- access areas with complete basic protection (protection against direct contact)
Where basic protection in accordance with Annex 41A is provided, the following minimum distances apply:
Note 1: Additional workspace and greater distances may be necessary for special types of switchgear.
Note 2: The above distances apply only where all parts of the panelling or enclosure have been installed and closed, and circuit-breakers put in
the position “isolation”.
729.513.2.2 Restricted-access areas with partial protection by obstacles
In restricted-access areas where partial protection by obstacles in accordance with Annex 41B clause 2 is provided,
the following minimum distances apply:
Note: The above distances apply only after all parts of the panelling have been installed and closed and to circuit-breakers in the position
“isolation”.
729.513.2.3 Access of gangways
Maintenance or operation gangways with a length exceeding 10m shall be accessible from both ends.
Note 1: It is recommended that access be provided at both ends where gangways exceed 6m in length.
Closed restricted -access areas with a length exceeding 10m shall be accessible by doors from both ends.
Note 2: It is recommended that means of access be provided at both ends for closed restricted-access areas exceeding 6m in length.
729.513.2.4 Additional requirements for closed restricted-access areas to permit evacuation
To permit easy evacuation, the doors of any equipment inside the location shall close in the direction of the evacuation
route. Gangways shall permit equipment doors or hinged panels to be opened at an angle of 90°.
For doors that can be fixed in the fully-open position, or circuit-breakers or equipment that are withdrawn fully for
maintenance, a minimum passing distance of 700mm shall be provided between the fully-open door or panel edge, or
fully-withdrawn circuit- breaker/equipment and the opposite side of the gangway.
Doors giving access to gangways in closed restricted-access areas shall open outwards, and they shall have the
following dimensions:
- width: 700mm
- height: 2000 mm
234
740 Temporary installations for structures, amusement devices and booths at fairgrounds,
amusement parks and circuses
FOREWORD
This section implements CENELEC HD. 60364-7-740: 2006.

740.1 SCOPE
This section specifies the requirements for the safe design, installation and operation of temporarily- installed mobile
or transportable electrical machines and structures that incorporate electrical equipment. It applies to machines and
structures that are intended to be installed repeatedly, without loss of safety, temporarily, at fairgrounds, amusement
parks, circuses and similar places.
It also includes luminaires forming part of the machines or structures, and temporary festoon lighting chains in public
places.
This section applies to the electrical installation for structures and machines, being either integral parts or constituting
the total amusement device.
740.2 DEFINITIONS
Amusement device: Ride, stand, side-show, tent or marquee, booth or grandstand intended for the entertainment
of the public.
Booth: A movable or transportable unit intended to accommodate equipment generally, for pleasure or
demonstration purposes.
Fairground: An area where one or more stands, amusement devices or booths are erected for leisure use.
Ride: An amusement device in which, or on which, persons are carried.
Stand: An area or temporary structure used for display, marketing, sales or entertainment.

740.411.3.01 Automatic disconnection of the supply to the temporary structures shall be provided at the origin of
the installation by RCDs with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 300mA. Such RCDs shall incorporate
a time-delay or be of the S type, so as to ensure discrimination with RCDs protecting final circuits, and shall comply
with 531.2.
740.416.1 Additional protection for basic insulation
740.416.1.01 Final circuits for lighting, socket-outlets rated up to, and including, 32A and portable equipment
connected by means of a flexible cable or cord with a current-carrying capacity not exceeding 32A shall be provided
with additional protection by an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
Where applicable, emergency lighting circuits shall be protected by the same RCD protecting the lighting circuits. This
requirement does not apply to:
- circuits protected by SELV (414), or

- lighting circuits placed out of arm’s reach provided they are supplied by socket-outlets or couplers complying with
740.554.02.
Supplementary equipotential bonding shall comply with 740.544.2.

Note: The requirements below apply in addition to Chapter 42.
235
740.422 Protection against fire where particular hazards or dangers exist
740.422.01 A motor which is automatically or remotely controlled and which is not continuously supervised shall
be fitted with a manually re-settable protective device against excessive temperatures.

740.462 Isolation
740.462.01 Every separate temporary electrical installation for amusement devices and each circuit supplying
outdoor installations shall be provided with its own disconnecting device which shall be readily identifiable and readily
accessible.
740.51 COMMON RULES AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Electrical equipment shall have a minimum degree of protection IP 44.

All equipment, including wiring, shall be arranged so as to facilitate its operation, inspection and maintenance and
access to its connection.
740-52 WIRING SySTEMS
740.521.01 Where appropriate, cables and/or cable management systems shall be of flexible construction and, where
subjected to movement, cables shall be type H07RNF (PCP) or H07BNF (EPR).
All cables shall meet the requirements of I.S. EN 50265.
Cables shall have a minimum voltage designation of 450/750V, except within amusement devices where cables having
a minimum voltage designation of 300/500V may be used.
Note: Where enhanced performance is required, cables should comply with the requirements of I.S. EN 50266.
740.521.02 Conduit systems shall comply with I.S.EN 50086, trunking and ducting systems shall comply with
I.S.EN 50085, and tray and ladder systems shall comply with I.S. EN 61537.
Where there is a risk of severe mechanical damage to wiring, i.e. external influence AG3, e.g. areas open to the public,
roadways, a heavy degree of protection shall be provided as follows:
- armouring, or
- conduit providing a degree of protection against compression of 1250N, a Heavy degree of protection against impact
and a Medium (inside) and a High (outside) protection against corrosion according to I.S. EN 50086-2-1, or
- cable trunking and ducting systems providing a Heavy degree of protection according to I.S. EN 50085-2-1, or
- any other method providing at least the equivalent degree of protection.
740.521.03 Cables buried in the ground shall comply with 522.6.8. The routes of such cables shall be marked at
suitable intervals.
740.526.2.01
Note: Joints shall not be used for repairing or extending cables. Where necessary, cables must be connected by means of cable-couplers complying
with 554.6.
740.530.5.01 Switchgear shall be placed in enclosures that can be opened only by means of a tool or key, except
those parts that are designed and intended to be operated in normal use.
236
740.530.5.02 Switchgear enclosures containing the DSO equipment shall be made of non-conductive material and
shall have a minimum degree of protection IP 55.
740.530.5.03 Every booth, stand or amusement device shall be supplied from its own designated outlet(s) in the
distribution board.

740.537.01 Devices for isolation shall disconnect all live conductors including the neutral.
740.537.02 Every booth, stand or amusement device shall have its own means of isolation or switching, which shall
be readily accessible.
Note: See 740.559.14 for isolation requirements for discharge- lighting circuits.
740.54 EARTHING ARANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR AND BONDING
740.544.2.01 In locations used for animals, local supplementary equipotential bonding shall include the protective
conductor of the installation, all exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts that can be touched
simultaneously.
740.551 Low voltage generating sets

Note: Further information may be obtained from publication ET 210:2003
740.551.01 Generating sets shall be located or protected so as to prevent danger and injury to persons through
inadvertent contact with hot surfaces or dangerous parts.
Note: For the purposes of this section, danger and injury from non-electrical causes are included.
740.551.02 Electrical equipment associated with a generator shall be mounted securely and, if necessary, on anti-
vibration mountings.
740.551.03 Where a generator supplies a temporary installation, care shall be taken to ensure that the earthing
arrangements are in accordance with 542 and suitable for either a TN or a TT earthing system, whichever is appropriate.
Note: The IT earthing system is not used in Ireland for low-voltage supplies.
740.551.04 The neutral conductor shall be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the generator.
740.553 Transformers, reactors and power-factor correction equipment: Safety isolating transformers and
electronic converters
740.553.01 Multiple-connection safety isolating transformers shall comply with I.S. EN 61558-2, or provide an
equivalent degree of safety.
740.553.02 Electronic converters shall comply with I.S. EN 61347-2-2.
740.553.03 The secondary circuit of each transformer or converter shall be protected by a manually re-settable
protective device.
740.553.04 Safety isolating transformers shall be mounted outside of the reach of the public. Access by authorized
persons for testing and maintenance purposes shall be provided.
740.553.05 Enclosures containing transformers, converter or rectifiers shall be adequately ventilated and it shall be
ensured that ventilation outlets are not obstructed during use.
740.554.01 A sufficient number of socket-outlets shall be installed, appropriate for the user’s requirements and for
the safety of the installation.
Note: As a guide, one socket-outlet per square metre of the floor or linear metre of wall of a booth or stand would normally be adequate in most
cases, although in some cases more outlets might be required.
237
740.554.02 Socket-outlets dedicated to lighting circuits located outdoors shall comply with I.S.EN 60309 Part 1 and
Part 2, except in the following situation:
Lighting circuits complying with 740.416.1.01 second indent and not protected by an RCD shall be connected by
means of dedicated connecting devices that do not permit the insertion plugs complying with I.S. EN 60309 Part 2 or
I.S 411.
Note: In such cases connection devices will be of a non-standard, e.g. multi- pin type
Luminaires shall have a minimum IP rating of IP 44 , and they shall be installed so as not to impair their protection
against ingress of solid materials and moisture.
Luminaires shall be securely fixed to the structure or support intended to carry them.
Luminaires mounted at less than 2.5 m above floor level or otherwise accessible to accidental contact by persons shall
be firmly fixed and located or guarded so as to prevent danger to persons and ignition of materials.
Access to a fixed light- switching device shall be prevented by a barrier or enclosure that can only be removed by the
use of a tool or key.
Extra-low voltage lighting installations shall in addition comply with 715.
740.559.02 Lamp- holders
Insulation- piercing lampholders shall not be used unless both cables and lampholders are specifically designed for
the purpose and are compatible. Such lampholders shall not be removable after being fitted to the cable.
740.559.03 Lamps in shooting galleries
Lamps in shooting galleries and other side-shows where projectiles are used shall be suitably protected against
accidental damage.
740.559.04 Floodlights
Where transportable floodlights are used, they shall be mounted so that the luminaire is mounted out of arm’s reach,
or suitably protected.
Supply cables thereto shall be flexible and in accordance with 740.521 and shall have adequate protection against
mechanical damage.
740.559.05 Festoon decorative lighting chains
Festoon decorative lighting chains outdoors and in places accessible to the public shall comply with I.S.EN 60598-2-
20 and shall have a suitable IP rating. Such lighting chains shall be installed in accordance with the following:
a) They shall be installed so that their ingress protection is not impaired.

b) They shall be securely attached to the structure or support intended to support them.
c) They shall be mounted at a height of not less than 3m above the floor or ground, or otherwise located so that they
are inaccessible to accidental contact, or they shall be firmly fixed and so located or guarded as to prevent risk of
injury to persons or ignition of materials.
Overhead festoon lighting chains shall be supported on suitable catenary wire systems which may be separate or an
integral part of the system.
Festoon decorative lighting chains shall be additionally protected against direct contact by either:
- SELV, or
- an RCD having a maximum rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
740.559.14 Discharge lighting installations
Installations of any luminous tube, sign or lamp supplied at a voltage exceeding low voltage shall comply with 559.14
and in addition with the following requirements:
238
740.559.14.01 Luminous tubes, signs and lamps shall be installed out of arm’s reach, or alternatively, they shall be
adequately protected so as to reduce the risk of injury to persons.
740.559.14.02 Circuits used to supply luminous tubes signs or lamps, shall be controlled by an emergency switch.
740.559.14.03 The emergency switch shall be readily visible, accessible, and located and marked in accordance
with the requirements of the fire authority.
740.559.14.04 Circuits supplying equipment for discharge-lighting shall not supply any other equipment.
Fig. 740.A: Electrical Installation in fairground etc. Line diagram.
753 Floor and Ceiling Heating Systems

FOREWORD
This section implements CENELEC HD 60364-7-753: 2007
753.11 SCOPE
This section applies to the installation of electric floor and ceiling systems which are erected as thermal- storage
heating systems or direct heating systems. It does not apply to wall heating systems or heating systems for use outdoors.
753.2 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this section, the following additional definitions apply:
Thermal - storage floor heating system: A heating system in which, due to a limited charging period and output,
a restricted availability of electrical energy is converted into heat and dissipated mainly through the surface of the floor
to the room to be heated with an intended time delay.
Direct heating system: A heating system that generates heat from electrical energy and dissipates it to the room to
be heated, with a rapid response time.
Complementary floor heating: A direct heating system, which may be incorporated into the skirting boards, that
supplements the heat output from that of a limited thermal storage floor heating system.
Heating-free area: An unheated floor or ceiling area which is completely covered when placing pieces of furniture
or kept free for built-in furniture.
239
Heating element: A cable, with or without a screen or sheath, intended to emit heat.
Flexible sheet heating element: A heating element consisting of sheets of polymer or polymer mesh and electrical
insulation laminated with electrical resistance material, or a base material on which electrically-insulated heating
elements are fixed.
Heating mat:
A self-contained heating-unit utilising electrical energy for conversion to heat.
Cold lead: An insulated cable or cord intended to connect the heating unit to the electrical installation.
Self-limiting heating cable: A cable that cannot exceed 70ºC when tested according to the relevant European
Standard, and forms part of a heat-emitter.
753.411.3.01 Floor and ceiling heating systems shall be protected by one or more RCDs having a residual operating
current not exceeding 30mA.
The conductive screens, sheaths or other conductive coverings forming part of the heating elements shall be connected
to the protective conductor of the installation.
Note: Limitation of the rated heating power to 7.5 kW single-phase or 13 kW three-phase downstream of an RCD may avoid unwanted tripping
of the RCD due to leakage capacitance.
753.416.1 Additional protection for basic insulation by RCDs
753.416.01 Circuits supplying heating equipment of Class II construction or equivalent insulation shall be protected
in addition by an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30mA.
753.423 Protection against temperatures causing discomfort
753.423.01 The surface- temperature of the floor shall be limited to 35°C.
753.424 Protection against overheating
753.424.01 To avoid overheating of floor or ceiling heating systems in buildings, at least one of the following
measures shall be applied within the zone where heating units are installed so as to ensure that the temperature does
not exceed 80°C:
- appropriate design of the heating system,

- appropriate installation of the heating system in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions,
- use of protective devices.
Heating elements shall be connected to the electrical installation by means of cold leads or terminal fittings. The
connections to cold leads shall be by crimping connections or similar permanent connections that cannot be undone
in the normal fashion.
753.424.02 Heating elements shall be separated from ignitable building elements by metal sheeting or metal conduit,
or, alternatively, by a distance not less than 10mm in air from the ignitable building element.
Note 1: Higher temperatures and arcs may arise under fault conditions with consequent risk of fire.
Note 2: See also Chapter 42.
753.51 COMMON RULES
753.511.01 Flexible sheet heating elements shall comply with I.S. EN 60335-2-96.
Heating cables for industrial applications shall comply with the relevant European or national standards.
The manufacturer’s instructions for installation shall be observed.
240
753.512.01 Heating elements shall be covered as soon as possible by the specified protective material and
precautions shall be taken to avoid mechanical damage.
753.512.02 Heating elements in ceilings shall have a degree of protection not less than IPX1. Heating elements for
installation in floors of concrete or similar material shall have a minimum degree of ingress-protection IP X7 and the
appropriate mechanical properties.
753.513.01 A plan of the heating system shall be provided by the installer for the user containing the following
information:
- manufacturer’s name,
- type designation of the heating units,
- number of heating units,
- length and/or area of heating units,

- rated power output,
- surface power density,
- diagram of the layout of the system,
- spacing and cover depth on heating elements,
- position of junction boxes,
- conductors, shields, grids etc.,
- heated area,
- rated voltage,
- rate resistance of heating units when cold,
- rated currents of overcurrent protective devices,
- rated residual operating currents of RCDs,
- insulation resistance of the heating installation and the test-voltage used.
The plan shall be permanently affixed to, or adjacent to, the relevant distribution board.
In addition, the installer shall provider the user with the information in Annex 753A.
753.515 Prevention of mutual detrimental influences
753.515.01 Heating elements shall not cross expansion joints of the building or structure.
753.515.02 The manufacturer’s instructions concerning erection shall be followed during installation.
753.520 General
753.520.01 Where room fittings or furniture may be installed, heating-free areas shall be provided in such a way that
heat-emission is not impeded by such room fittings or furniture.
753.522.1 Ambient temperature
753.522.1.01 For cold leads and control leads installed in the zone of heated surfaces, the increase of ambient
temperature shall be taken into account.
753.522.6 Impact
753.522.6.01 Where floor or ceiling heating elements are installed, precautions shall be taken to ensure that no drilling,
fixing or other means of penetration, e.g. screws for door-stoppers, are carried out by other contractors or operators.
Heating-free areas shall be provided to facilitate drilling and fixing by screws or similar means.
Suitable warning notices indicating those areas shall be provided in the appropriate documentation.
Annex for 753:
Annex 753A: Information to be provided for the proprietor.
241
ANNEXES
Introduction
The annexes to the Rules are of two types, normative and informative.
A normative annex contains supplementary technical details that are necessary for the implementing of a particular
Rule or Rules. A normative annex may specify the means for compliance- e.g. the annexes for Chapter 61, or it may
give an acceptable means for compliance- e.g. Annex 52C. In the latter case, any alternative method or means should
provide at least the equivalent level of safety and reliability required by the Rules. Most of the normative annexes in
the Rules form part of the relevant CENELEC Harmonization Documents in the HD 60364 series. Others are derived
from Harmonization Documents, e.g. Annex 43A, Annex 51E, and others are a continuation and up-date of previous
annexes, e.g. Annex 55A.
An informative annex is not mandatory by its nature, but it contains useful information that is necessary for an
understanding of the Rules. The information therein is derived from various sources e.g. Annex 51C and Annex 51D
which are derived from IEC publications.
The annexes are numbered according to the particular chapter to which they apply, or in the case of Part 7, the particular
section to which they apply.
The tables in the Annexes have been given a prefix “A” to distinguish them from the tables in the main text of the Rules.
Chapter 41:
Annex 41A: Measures for basic protection against electric shock. Normative.
Annex 41B: Measures for basic protection in certain types of location. Normative.
Annex 41C: Special measures for protection in case of a fault. Normative
Chapter 43:
Annex 43A: Protection of conductors in parallel against overcurrent. Normative
Chapter 51:
Annex 51A: Statutory Regulations. Informative
Annex 51B : Recommended graphical symbols. Informative
Annex 51C: Classification system for enclosures (IP system) Informative
Annex 51D: Classification system for external influences Informative
Annex 51E: Multi-core cable core colours. Normative.
Chapter 52:
Annex 52A: Cable capacities of conduit and trunking. Normative
Annex 52B: Cable bending radii and cable support spacing. Normative
Annex 52C: Current-carrying capacities for cables and insulated wires. Informative.
Annex 52D: Standard types of cables and insulated wires. Informative
Annex 52E: Voltage-drop values for cables with copper conductors. Informative
Annex 52F: Summary of the Rules for wiring concealed in walls or partitions. Normative
Chapter 53:
Annex 53A: Residual current protective devices. Informative
Annex 53B: Overcurrent protection of meter tails. Normative
Chapter 54:
Annex 54A: Minimum sizes for earth electrodes of commonly-used material from the point of view of corrosion and
mechanical strength. Informative
Annex 54B: Method for deriving the value of k. Informative
Annex 54C: Recommendations for the earthing of IT installations. Normative
Chapter 55:
Annex 55A: Final circuit arrangements. Informative
242
Chapter 61:
Annex 61A: Visual inspection. Normative.
Annex 61B: Verification of continuity of a conductor. Normative.
Annex 61C: Determination of fault-loop impedance with measurement of resistance of the protective conductor
(pre-connection). Normative.
Annex 61D: Measurement of earth-electrode resistance (TT systems). Normative.
Annex 61E: Measurement of the insulation resistance of floors and walls. Normative.
Annex 61F: Measurement of fault-loop impedance of circuits (post connection). Informative.
Annex 61G: Verification of operation of RCDs (post connection). Normative.
Annex 62A: Periodic inspection report. Normative.
Annex 63A: Specimen Completion certificates. Normative.
Annex 63B: Procedures for certification for minor electrical works. Normative.
Part 7:
Annex 705A: Equipotential bonding in cattle sheds and milking parlours. Normative.
Annex 705B: Electric fences. Normative.
Annex 710A: Classification of safety devices for medical locations. Normative.

Annex 710B: Examples for allocation of group numbers and classification for safety services of medical locations.
Annex 721A: Example of notice mounted in a caravan.
Annex 753: Floor and ceiling heating systems: Information for the user. Normative.
243
ANNEX 41A
(Normative)
MEASURES FOR BASIC PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

(PROTECTION AGAINST DIRECT CONTACT)
A.1 Protection by basic insulation of live parts
Note: The insulation is intended to prevent contact with live parts
Live parts shall be completely covered with insulation that can only be removed by destruction.
In the case of equipment, the insulation shall comply with the relevant Irish or European Standard for the electrical
equipment.
A.2 Protection by barriers or enclosures

Note: Barriers or enclosures are intended to prevent contact with live parts
A.2.1 Live parts shall be inside enclosures or behind barriers providing at least the degree of protection IP 2X.
Notwithstanding this requirement, larger openings are permissible in equipment complying with Irish or European
Standards, where these openings are necessary during replacement of parts such as lamps or fuses, or for the proper
operation or functioning of equipment, subject to the following requirements:
a) Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent persons or livestock from unintentionally touching live parts,
b) It shall be ensured, as far as practicable, that persons are aware that live parts can be touched through the opening
and should not be touched unintentionally,
c) Openings shall be no larger than is necessary for proper functioning or for replacement of a part.
A.2.2 Horizontal top surfaces of barriers or enclosures that are readily accessible shall provide a degree of protection
of at least IP 4X.
A.2.3 Barriers and enclosures shall be firmly secured in place and shall have sufficient stability, durability and
resistance to thermal and mechanical stresses, and appropriate separation from live parts in the known conditions of
service, taking account of relevant external influences.
A.2.4 Where it is necessary to remove barriers, or to open enclosures, or to remove parts of enclosures, this shall be
possible only:
- by the use of a key or tool, or

- after disconnection of the supply to live parts protected by barriers or enclosures, restoration of the supply being
possible only after replacement or reclosure of the barriers or enclosures, or
- where an intermediate barrier providing a degree of protection of at least IP 2X prevents contact with live parts, by
the use of a key or tool to remove the intermediate barrier.
A.2.5 If, behind a barrier or in an enclosure, items of equipment are installed which may retain dangerous electrical
charges after they have been switched off, (e.g. capacitors), an appropriate warning label shall be affixed to the
equipment. Small capacitors such as those used for time-delayed response of equipment or arc extinction are deemed
not to be dangerous.
Note: Unintentional contact is not considered dangerous if the voltage resulting from static charges falls below 120V d.c. in less than 5 S after
disconnection from the supply.
244
ANNEX 41B
(Normative)
MEASURES FOR BASIC PROTECTION (PROTECTION AGAINST DIRECT CONTACT)

IN CERTAIN TyPES OF LOCATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH SUB-CLAUSE 410.2.4
Obstacles and placing out of reach
1. Application
Protection against electric shock in normal service by means of obstacles or by placing out of reach is applicable only
in areas that are accessible to authorized persons, such as switch rooms.
2. Protection by obstacles
Note: Obstacles are intended to prevent unintentional contact with live parts but not intentional contact by circumvention of the obstacle.
2.1 Obstacles shall prevent:
- unintentional bodily approach to live parts, and
- unintentional contact with live parts during the operation of live equipment in normal service.
2.2 Obstacles may be removable without using a key or tool but shall be so secured as to prevent unintentional
removal.
3. Protection by placing out of reach
Note: Placing out of reach is intended only to prevent unintentional contact with live parts.
3.1 Simultaneously accessible parts at different potentials shall not be within arm’s reach.
Note 1: See Part 2 for definition of “arm’s reach”.
Note 2: Two parts are deemed to be simultaneously accessible if they are not more than 2.50 m apart.
Note 3: The values of arm’s reach apply to contact directly with bare hands without assistance (e.g. by tools or a ladder).
3.2 If a normally- occupied position is restricted by an obstacle (e.g. a handrail, mesh screen) affording a degree of
protection less than IP2X, arm’s reach shall extend:
- in a horizontal direction from the obstacle,
- in a vertical direction from that position disregarding the obstacle.
3.3 In places where bulky or long conductive objects are normally handled, the distances specified above shall be
increased taking into account the relevant dimensions of those objects.
245
ANNEX 41C
(Normative)
SPECIAL MEASURES FOR PROTECTION IN CASE OF A FAULT

FOR APPLICATION ONLy WHERE THE INSTALLATION IS CONTROLLED
OR UNDER SUPERVISION By AUTHORISED PERSONS
C.1 Non-conducting location
In this protective measure, protection against electric shock in case of a fault is provided by the insulating surroundings
of the location, such as floors and walls, and 410.2.5 applies.
The protective measure is intended to prevent simultaneous contact with parts that may be at different potentials
through failure of the basic insulation of a live part.
This protective measure is intended to be used only for special purposes such as industrial and experimental processes
C.1.1 All electrical equipment shall be protected against direct contact in accordance with Annex 41A
C.1.2 Exposed-conductive-parts shall be arranged so that in normal circumstances persons will not come into
simultaneous contact with:
- two exposed conductive parts, or

- an exposed conductive part and an extraneous conductive part,
if those parts can be at different potentials through failure of the basic insulation of live parts.
C.1.3 In a non-conducting location there shall be no protective conductor.
C.1.4 Where the location has insulating floor and walls, one or more of the following arrangements apply:
(a) Relative spacing of exposed-conductive-parts and of extraneous- conductive- parts as well as spacing of exposed
conductive parts.
This spacing is sufficient if the distance between two parts is not less than 2.5m; this distance may be reduced to
1.25m outside of the zone of arm’s reach.
(b) Interposition of effective obstacles between exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts.
Such obstacles are sufficiently effective if they extend the distances to be surmounted to the values stated in paragraph
a) above. They shall not be connected to earth or to exposed conductive parts and as far as possible they shall be of
insulating material.
(c) Insulation or insulating arrangements of extraneous-conductive parts.
The insulation shall be of sufficient mechanical strength and be able to withstand a test voltage of at least 2000V.
Leakage current shall not exceed 1mA in normal conditions of use.
C.1.5 The resistance of insulating floors and walls at every point of measurement under the conditions specified in
Chapter 61 shall not be less than:
- 50 kΩ, where the nominal voltage of the installation does not exceed 500 V,
- 100 kΩ, where the nominal voltage of the installation exceeds 500V.
Note: If at any point the resistance is less than the specified value, the floors and walls are deemed to be extraneous-conductive-parts for the
purpose of protection against electric shock.
246
C.1.6 The arrangements made shall be permanent and it shall not be possible to make them ineffective. They shall
also ensure protection where the use of mobile or portable equipment is envisaged.
Note1: Attention is drawn to the risk that, where electrical installations are not under effective supervision, further conductive part may be
introduced at a later date (e.g. mobile or portable Class I equipment or extraneous-conductive-parts such as metal water pipes), which may
invalidate compliance with 411.3.
Note 2: It is essential to ensure that the insulation of floors and walls cannot be unduly affected by humidity.
C.1.7 Precautions shall be taken to ensure that extraneous-conductive-parts cannot transmit potentials outside the
location concerned.
C.2 Protection by earth-free local equipotential bonding
Note: Earth-free local equipotential bonding is intended to prevent the appearance of a dangerous touch voltage.
C.2.1 All electrical equipment shall be protected against direct contact in accordance with Annex 41A
C.2.2 Equipotential bonding conductors shall connect all simultaneously accessible exposed conductive parts and
extraneous conductive parts.
C.2.3 The local equipotential bonding system shall not be in electrical contact with earth directly through exposed
conductive parts nor through extraneous-conductive-parts.
Note: Where this requirement cannot be fulfilled, protection by automatic disconnection of supply is applicable (see 411.3).
C.2.4 Precautions shall be taken to ensure that persons entering the equipotential location cannot be exposed to a
dangerous potential difference, in particular where a conductive floor insulated from earth is connected to the earth-
free equipotential bonding system.
C.3 Protection by electrical separation for the supply of more than one item of current-using equipment.
C.3.1 All electrical equipment shall be protected against direct contact in accordance with Annex 41A.
C.3.2 Protection by electrical separation for the supply of more than item of apparatus shall comply with 413, with
the exception of 413.1.2.
C.3.3 Precautions shall be taken to protect the separated circuits from damage and insulation failure.
C.3.4 The exposed conductive parts of the circuit, including the protective earth contacts of socket-outlets, shall be
connected together by insulated, non-earthed bonding conductors. Such conductors shall not be connected to the
protective conductors of other circuits, or to any extraneous-conductive-parts.
Note: See also note to 413.3.6
C.3.5 Socket-outlets shall be provided with protective contacts, which shall be connected to the equipotential bonding
system in accordance with C.3.4.
C.3.6 Except where supplying equipment with double or reinforced insulation, all flexible cables shall contain a
protective conductor for use as an equipotential bonding conductor in accordance with C.3.4.
C.3.7 It shall be ensured that, if two faults affecting two exposed- conductive-parts occur and if these are fed by
conductors of different polarity, a protective device shall disconnect the supply in a time complying with Table 41A
of Chapter 41.
C.3.8 It is recommended that the product of the nominal voltage of the circuit in volts and the length in meters of
the wiring system should not exceed 100,000, and that the length of the wiring system should not exceed 500m.
247
ANNEX 43A
(Normative)
PROTECTION OF CONDUCTORS IN PARALLEL AGAINST OVERCURRENT

Introduction
For a design for protection of conductors in parallel against overcurrent, protection against overload and against short-
circuits must be dealt with separately.
The problem with parallel conductors is trying to ensure that the conductors carry substantially equal currents, e.g. the
difference not exceeding 10%. In Chapter 52, sub-clause 523.7 states that where adequate current-sharing cannot be
achieved, or where four or more conductors are envisaged, the alternative choice of busbar trunking should be
considered.
Moreover, if the conductors are not arranged in trefoil or other suitable configuration, the difference between the
impedances of the conductors will vary considerably, especially in the case of larger-sized conductors, and hence the
current-sharing ratio, which could be as high as 70% and 30% respectively.
Protection of parallel conductors against overload and short-circuit can be a complicated matter, particularly with the
disposition of the protective devices. This annex gives guidance on the various options available, with their advantages
and disadvantages.
Protection of parallel conductors against overload
Clause 433.4 of Chapter 43 “Overload protection of conductors in parallel”, permits the use of a single protective
device, provided the current is shared substantially equally between the conductors. In this case, protection may be
provided by a single device in accordance with formula (1) below in Clause 433.1 “Co-ordination between conductors
and overload protective devices”.
(1) IB ≤ In ≤ IZ
where In is the rated current of the protective device and IZ is the continuous current capacity of the conductor.
Where there is unequal current-sharing between conductors, e.g. where the ratio exceeds 10%, the protection of each
conductor must be considered separately.
The design current IB can be calculated from the total load current and the impedance of a conductor, using the formula
The value of IBk for an individual conductor k with an impedance of Zk may be calculated from the formula
IB
(2) IBk = _______________________________________
{Zk /Z1 + Zk /Z2 + Zk /Z3 + …. + Zk /Zk + …+ etc}
where
IB is the design current for the circuit;

IBk is the design current for conductor k;
Zk is the impedance of conductor k;
Z1 and Z2 etc. are the respective impedances of the other parallel conductors.
The values of the impedances Z should be verified by measurement.
The design current IBk of conductor k used in formula (1) above will give the rating Ink of the appropriate overload
protective device.
If it is decided to use a single overload protective device, its rating In is derived from Formula (1) as follows:
IB ≤ In ≤ ∑ IZk
where ∑ IZk is the sum of the continuous current – carrying capacities of all parallel conductors.
248
Short-circuit protection of conductors in parallel
Chapter 43, Clause 434.4 deals with short-circuit protection of conductors in parallel. It permits the use of a single
short-circuit protective device provided it operates effectively for a fault in the most onerous position in one parallel
conductor. This is a matter for detailed calculation by the designer.
If this cannot be achieved, there are two alternatives:
1) The wiring is designed and installed in such a way that risk of short-circuits is reduced to a minimum, e.g. by
location or by additional mechanical protection, and risk of fire or danger to persons is reduced to a minimum. This
is the more practicable alternative.
2) Short-circuit devices are provided for each conductor. Where there are more than two parallel conductors, a
protective device is provided at both ends of each conductor. There are disadvantages in this method because of the
complexity of multiple fault currents, “back-feeds”, and their paths which makes it difficult to ensure the correct
operation of the devices and the protection of the conductors.
This method has its limitations, and requires extreme care in its application.
249
ANNEX 51A
STATUTORy REGULATIONS CONCERNING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATIONS
(Informative)
1. Regulations concerning the safety of persons at work and electrical installations.
“S.I. No. 299 of 2007: Safety, Health and Welfare at Work (General Application) Regulations 2007, Part 3 (Electricity),
amended by S.I. No. 732 of 2007: Safety, Health and Welfare at Work (General Application) (Amendment) Regulations
2007”.
For the list of Regulations pertaining to potentially explosive atmospheres, see ET 105 and associated publications.
2. The Building Regulations issued by the DoE.
3. Regulations concerning the sale and marketing of electrical equipment.

Directive 2006/95/EC.
250
ANNEX 51B
RECOMMENDED GRAPHICAL SyMBOLS
251
252
Annex 51B (Continued)

Annex 51B (Continued)
253
ANNEX 51C
IP CLASSIFICATION SySTEM FOR ENCLOSURES

Example: Equipment marked IP55 is protected against normal dust and housing, and is suitable, e.g. for dairies. Where the
Rules specify IPX4, it means that only protection against hosing is required.
254
Explanation
Introduction
(Informative)
ANNEX 51D
CLASSIFICATION SySTEMS FOR EXTERNAL INFLUENCE:
255
256
TABLE A51D:
CONCISE LIST OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
ANNEX 51E
THE IDENTIFICATION OF CORES IN MULTI-CORE CABLE

Normative
GENERAL
Rule 514.2 including Table 51A states the requirements for identifying conductors, and sub-clause 514.3.6 deals
specifically with multi-core cables. For cables with up to five cores, the colour code consists of brown, black and grey
for phase/line conductors, blue for neutral conductors, and the bi-colour green-and –yellow for protective, earthing and
bonding conductors. The colours must be used for the entire length of each conductor, except in specific cases described
below, e.g. the bare protective conductor in flat PVC/PVC cable.
Blue must be used only for neutral conductors and for mid-point conductors, e.g. on Reduced Low-voltage (110V
c.p.e circuits).
Rule 514.3.9 states cases where identification is not required, where the function is obvious, e.g. armouring or
concentric conductors.
Supplementary marking, commonly referred to as “sleeving”, is permissible only in very limited situations (Rule
514.3.10).
EXEMPTIONS
Cable with six or more cores: Such cables do not have to be identified in the same way as cables with five or fewer
cores. Normally, the cores will be the one colour, e.g. black or white, with numerical marking on the insulation. For
such cables, the cores used as protective or neutral conductors must be sleeved or marked at at the terminations with
the appropriate colours.
MICC (mineral insulated cable) is exempt from the colour code, and sleeving is required as for other cables with
six or more cores.
Armouring, concentric conductors or bare overhead conductors (Rule 514.3.9) do not require specific
identification.
Control cable used solely for control circuits.
D.C. CIRCUITS
Rule 514.3.8 states the colours for conductors for d.c. circuits as follows:
1) With earthed negative pole: Positive: Brown. Earthed negative (PEL): Blue
2) With earthed positive pole: Negative: Brown. Earthed positive (PEL): Blue
3) With mid-point earthed and neither pole earthed:
Positive: Brown. Negative: Grey. Mid-point: Blue.
SUPPLEMENTARy IDENTIFICATION (SLEEVING) (Rule 514.3.10)
The use of sleeving is limited to:
- single core cable > 120mm2

- cable with six or more cores
- MICC cable
- bare protective conductors
- two or more phase/line conductors connected to the same phase
- terminations of PEN conductors (blue core with green-and-yellow sleeving)
Sleeving must comply with a recognized standard, e.g. I.S. EN 60454.
257
ANNEX 52A
CABLE CAPACITIES OF CONDUIT AND TRUNKING

(Normative)
Introduction
Single-core p.v.c. – insulated cables in straight runs of conduit not exceeding 3m.
258

Single-core p.v.c. – insulated cables in straght runs of conduit exceeding 3m in length or in runs of any length
incorporating bends or sets.
259
260
Single-core p.v.c. – insulated cables in trunking

Other sizes and types of cable or trunking

261
ANNEX 52B
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CABLE-BENDING RADII AND CABLE

SPPORT SPACINGS
(Normative)
1. Bending radii for cables: (522.8.3)

2. Cable support spacings: (522.8.4)
262
ANNEX 52C
CURRENT-CARRyING CAPACITIES FOR INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(Informative)
Contents
-A52-F19
Introduction
263
Reference methods for wiring systems
TABLE A52-D: REFERENCE METHODS FOR WIRING SySTEMS

H: Armoured cable buried in the soil.
Current-carrying capacities of cables
Correction factors for ambient temperatures
Reduction factors for groups of two or more circuits or multi-core cables
264
265
266
267
268
CONTINUOUS CURRENT-CARRyING CAPACITIES OF CABLES
List of Tables
Table No. Type of Cable Installation methods

A52-F1 PVC / Copper ABCD
A52-F2 PVC / Copper EFG
A52-F3 XLPE/EPR Copper ABCD
A52-F4 XLPE/EPR Coper EFG
A52-F5 Mineral / Copper 70ºC C
A52-F6 Mineral / Copper 105ºC C

A52-F7 Mineral / Copper 70ºC EFG
A52-F8 Mineral / Copper 105ºC EFG
A52-F9 Armoured / PVC / Copper CEFG
A52-F10 Armoured / XLPE / EPR Copper CEFG
A52-F11 PVC / Aluminium ABCD
A52-F12 PVC / Aluminium EFG
A52-F13 XLPE / EPR Aluminium ABCD
A52-F14 XLPE / EPR Aluminium EFG
A52-F15 Armoured / PVC / Aluminium CEFG
A52-F16 Armoured / XLPE / EPR Aluminium CEFG
A52-F17 Flexible
A52-F18 Armoured / PVC / Copper H
A52-F19 Armoured / XLPE / Copper H
269
270
99
484
218
280
271
272
253
822
273
273
274
26
275
276
219
277
278
279
280
277
281
282
102
137
183
448
189
283
284
193
392
347
285

TABLE A52-F18: ARMOURED PVC-INSULATED CABLES WITH COPPER CONDUCTORS
Continuous current-carrying capacities in amperes

Conductor temperature 70ºC - Reference temperature 20ºC
Installation method H of Table A52D (Buried in soil)
286
Cross-sectional Single-phase or two loaded Three-phase or three loaded conductors

area mm2 conductors
Multi-core Single-core Multi-core Single-core Single-core
touching trefoil flat touching
touching
287

Reduction factors for groups of two or more circuits or multi-core cables
General
Groups containing different sizes
Groups in conduits, cable trunking or cable ducting
288
Groups on trays
289
ANNEX 52D
STANDARD CABLE TyPES AVAILABLE ON THE IRISH MARKET

(Informative)
GENERAL
Table A52H of this annex lists the standard cables normally available in Ireland. It gives the relevant national standards
- I.S. (Irish), BS (British), and VDE (German). There are two main types of standard cable recognised in Europe under
the CENELEC system: Harmonized Types and Approved National Types. In Table A52H below, every type of
cable is given a CENELEC code.
Other cable types from European countries, with the appropriate approval marking, are also acceptable.
Installers should check that cables comply with the standards by looking for the approval marking stamped on the cable
sheath or insulation. Harmonized Types carry the mark <HAR> with the name of the Approvals body e.g. BASEC (UK)
or VDE (Germany). Approved Irish types carry the BASEC approval mark.
CENELEC CABLE CODE SySTEM FOR POWER CABLES.
First digit: H: Harmonized cable type

N: Approved National Type
Second/third digits: 03: 300/300

(Voltage level) 05: 300/500
07: 450/750
Fourth digit: V: PVC

(Core insulation) R: Rubber, including butadiene
S: Silicone rubber
Fifth digit V: PVC

(Sheath) R: Rubber, including butadiene
N: PCR (Polychloroprene rubber)
J: Glass-fibre braiding
Z: Low smoke/fumes
-: No sheath
Sixth digit: U: Solid

R: Stranded
K: Fine stranded.
F: Flexible
Additional digit V: (As in VVV) Filler between core and sheath

H2: Flat construction bare protective conductor 2-core
H4: Flat construction bare protective conductor multi-core.
290
TABLE A52H
291
TABLE A52H Contd.

Key: Cu: Copper; Al: Aluminium; PVC: Polyvinylchloride (insulated and/or sheath); LSOH: Low smoke and zero halogen;
XLPE: Cross-linked polyethylene (insulated); SWA: Steel-wire armour.
Note: * From 5th September 2017 Denotes these cables will be no longer permissible.
292
ANNEX 52E
VOLTAGE DROP VALUES FOR CABLES WITH COPPER CONDUCTORS

(Informative)
This annex contains tables giving values of voltage drop in cables. The values are in millivolts for a current of one
ampere for a run of one metre. The values are based on the voltage drop that The values
would occurare in millivolts
when the cablesfor
areaoperating
c The values are based on the voltage drop that would
at their maximum permissible temperatures, and therefore the values are higher than those that would occur in the
o
average installation. They can be regarded as “conservative” values”. For more precise values, and for larger cable
They can be regarded as
sizes, manufacturers information should be obtained.
“ For more precise values, and for larger cable sizes, manufacturers information
s
The manufacturer’s information should included the effects of power factor and lower conductor operating
temperatures.
The Reference methods of installation of A B C E F G are taken from Annex 52C, Table A52-D
TABLE A52-J1
Voltage drop mV/ampere/metre for PVC-insulated multi-core cable with copper conductors
Conductor operating temperature 70ºC

Installation reference methods A B C E
Conductor Installation methods A & B Installation methods C & E

Size mm2 1 phase 3 phase 1 phase 3 phase
1.5 29 25 29 25
2.5 18 15. 18 15
4 11 9.5 11 9.5
6 7.3 6.4 7.3 6.4
10 4.4 3.8 4.4 3.8

16 2.8 2.4 2.8 2.4
25 1.8 1.5 1.75 1.5
35 1.30 1.10 1.25 1.1
50 1.00 0.85 0.95 0.81

70 0.70 0.61 0.66 0.57
95 0.50 0.48 0.50 0.43
120 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.35
150 0.34 0.37 0.34 0.29

185 0.29 0.32 0.29 0.25
200 0.24 0.29 0.24 0.21
300 0.21 0.24 0.21 0.185
293
TABLE A52-J2
Voltage drop mV/ampere/metre for PVC-insulated single core cables with copper conductors
Installation reference methods F and G
3 phase
Conductor 1 phase Method F 3 phase
size mm2 Method F Trefoil M Flat Method G
M
1.5 29 25 25 26
2.5 18 15 15 15
4 11 9.5 9.5 9.5
6 7.3 6.4 6.4 6.4
10 4.4 3.8 3.8 3.8

16 2.8 2.4 2.4 2.4
25 1.75 1.5 1.55 1.51

35 1.25 1.10 1.11 1.15
50 0.95 0.82 0.84 0.86

70 0.66 0.57 0.60 0.63
95 0.50 0.43 0.47 0.57
120 0.41 0.36 0.40 0.44
150 0.34 0.30 0.34 0.36

185 0.29 0.28 0.31 0.34
240 0.25 0.22 0.27 0.32
300 0.255 0.19 0.25 0.31
TABLE A52-J3
Voltage drop mV/ampere/metre for XLPE insulated multi-core cables with copper conductors
Installation reference methods A B C E
C Methods C & E
Conductor Methods A & B Methods C & E
Size mm2 1 phase 3 phase 1 phase 3 phase
1.5 31 27 31 27
2.5 19 16 19 16
4 12 10 12 10
6 7.9 6.8 7.9 6.8
10 4.7 4.0 4.7 4.0

16 2.9 2.6 2.9 2.5
25 1.9 1.68 1.85 1.60
35 1.35 1.15 1.35 1.15
50 1.05 0.90 1.0 0.87

70 0.75 0.65 0.71 0.62
95 0.58 0.50 0.52 0.46
120 0.48 0.42 0.43 0.38
150 0.43 0.37 0.36 0.32

185 0.39 0.32 0.30 0.28
240 0.33 0.29 0.25 0.24
300 0.31 0.27 0.22 0.20
294
TABLE A52-J4
Voltage drop mV/ampere/metre for XLPE-insulated multi-core and single-core* cables with copper conductors
Installation reference methods F and G
Conductor
Methods C & E Methods F Method G

Size mm2 Multi-core cable Single core cable 3 phase 3 phase
1 phase 3 phase Trefoil Flat Flat Spaced
1.5 29 25
2.5 18 15
4 11 9.5
6 7.3 6.4
10 4.4 3.8
16 2.8 2.4
M M
25 1.75 1.50
35 1.25 1.10
50 0.94 0.81 0.82 0.84 0.86

70 0.65 0.57 0.58 0.62 0.68
95 0.50 0.43 0.45 0.50 0.57
120 0.41 0.35 0.37 0.43 0.50
150 0.34 0.29 0.32 0.38 0.45

185 0.29 0.25 0.27 0.34 0.41
240 0.24 0.21 0.23 0.30 0.37
300 0.21 0.16 0.21 0.28 0.34
* Non-magnetic armouring
TABLE A52-J5
Voltage drop mV/ampere/metre for armoured PVC-insulated multi-core cable and single core* cables with copper conductors
Installation reference methods C E F G
Conductor Methods C & E Methods F Method G

1.5 29 25
2.5 18 15
4 11 9.5
6 7.3 6.4
10 4.4 3.8
16 2.8 2.4
25 1.75 1.50
35 1.25 1.10
50 0.94 0.81 0.82 0.84 0.86

70 0.65 0.57 0.58 0.62 0.68
95 0.50 0.43 0.45 0.50 0.57
120 0.41 0.35 0.37 0.43 0.50
150 0.34 0.29 0.32 0.38 0.45

185 0.29 0.25 0.27 0.34 0.41
240 0.24 0.21 0.23 0.30 0.37
300 0.21 0.16 0.21 0.28 0.34
* Non-magnetic armouring
295
TABLE A52-J6
Voltage drop mV/ampere/metre for armoured XLPE-insulated single core* and multi-core cables with copper conductors
Operating temperature 90ªC
Installation reference methods C E F G
Conductor Methods C & E Methods F Method G

1.5 31 27
2.5 19 16
4 12 10
6 7.9 6.8
10 4.7 4.0
16 2.9 2.5
25 1.90 1.65
35 1.35 1.15
50 1.00 0.87 0.87 0.88 0.90

70 0.69 0.60 0.62 0.65 0.70
95 0.52 0.45 0.47 0.52 0.58
120 0.42 0.37 0.39 0.44 0.51
150 0.35 0.30 0.33 0.39 0.43

185 0.29 0.26 0.28 0.34 0.47
240 0.24 0.21 0.24 0.30 0.37
300 0.21 0.185 0.21 0.28 0.34
*Non-magnetic armouring
296
ANNEX 52F
SUMMARy OF THE RULES FOR WIRING CONCEALED IN WALLS OR PARTITIONS
Normative
This annex is for handy reference only and it is intended to be read in conjunction with the Rules. It must not be cited
or used as the definitive text.
1. GENERAL PRINCIPLES
The two main risks for concealed wiring systems are: chemical attack and mechanical impact from penetration by
fixings or drills.
Clauses 522.5 and 522.6 respectively of Chapter 52 cover these items. Other forms of mechanical damage are covered
by clause 522.8.
Rule 522.5: Wiring in solid walls must be protected e.g. by conduit against chemical attack from lime etc. In the wiring
runs described in 2D, PVC conduit will suffice.
Wiring in hollow walls or partitions with thermal or other insulation must be protected against chemical attack by
that insulation. In the wiring runs described in 2D, PVC conduit will suffice.
Rules 522.6.4, 522.6.5: Wiring in solid walls must be protected against penetration/impact from nails or drills by
means of a metal sheath or screen or armouring, or by metal conduit or trunking, except in the wiring runs described
in 2 D below.
PVC conduit is not acceptable for protection against penetration of wiring concealed in solid or hollow walls.
3. Rule 522.8.14: Wiring traversing or concealed in metal stud partitions could, if damaged during or after installation,
make the metalwork live. This must be prevented.
2. PERMISSIBLE WIRING SySTEMS CONCEALED IN WALLS
(See Table 52A in Chapter 52)
A. Hollow walls and partitions and similar situations without thermal insulation:
Rule 522.6.5:
- Cable with metal sheath or screen or armouring: anywhere.
- Cable in metal conduit: anywhere
- Cable with or without PVC conduit: for wiring runs described in D below only.
B. Hollow walls and partitions and similar situations with thermal insulation:
Rule 522.5 and Rule 522.6.5:

- Cable with metal sheath or screen or armouring: anywhere
- Cable in PVC conduit: for wiring runs described in D below only.
C. Solid walls concrete or masonry etc:
Rule 522.6.4
- Cable with metal sheath or screen or armouring: anywhere
- Cable in PVC conduit: for wiring runs described in D below only.
297
D. Wiring runs not requiring protection against penetration
Rules 522.6.4 and 522.6.5.
Wiring in the following runs does not require protection against penetration :
- within 150 mm from the room corners measured horizontally.
- within 150 mm from the ceiling measured vertically.
- vertically or horizontally going directly to an accessory, an appliance or a distribution board.
There is no requirement for the minimum depth of wiring behind the surface.
However, in such cases, there must be a clearance of at least 50 mm between the wiring and the surface of the opposite
side of the wall.
E. Wiring in metal stud- partitions:

Rule 522.8.14
Where wiring is concealed in or traverses a metal stud-partition, the following apply:
1. Openings for wiring in the metal stud partition must be fitted with means for protecting the wiring from abrasion,
e.g. conduit, grommets or bushings.
2. The metalwork must be bonded to the nearest protective conductor.
F. Bathrooms (701):
There are separate rules in 701.522.6 for wiring concealed in the walls of bathrooms, which replace 522.6 (q.v).
All circuits supplying equipment in the zones of a bathroom must be protected by a 30mA RCD. This does not apply
to lighting circuits and fittings outside the zones, where it is desirable for safety reasons to maintain lighting if the RCD
should trip.
298
ANNEX 53A
(Informative)
RESIDUAL CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (RCDs)

Relevant Rules: 411.3.4, 411.5, 416.2: 531.2, 536, various sections of Part 7
GENERAL
It should be noted that not all applications of RCDs are included in this summary. The residual operating current mA
rating of an RCD given below is the maximum permissible value.
The different measures of protection provided by RCDs.
a) A 30mA RCD usually provides additional protection against direct contact, as in circuits for socket-outlets. (Rules:
416.1, 554))
b) An RCD is also used for protection in case of a fault, e.g. for TT systems earthing, in which case a higher value of
residual operating-current is permitted e.g. 300mA. (Rules:411.5) or in areas of increased fire-hazard (Rules 422.2).
TyPES AND CLASSIFICATIONS OF RCDS.
RCDs are classified under several different headings as follows:
Physical arrangement:
An RCD may consist of:
- a residual-current operated circuit protective device (RCCB) complying with EN 61008

- a combined residual-current and overcurrent protective device (RCBO) complying with EN 61009
- for higher current values, a modular RCD with an external residual-current sensor (MRCD) complying with I.S. EN
60947-2.
Source of energy for operation
For its source of energy for operation, an RCD may be:
- independent of line voltage (electro-mechanical type),

- dependent on line voltage (electronic type),
RCDs dependent on an auxiliary source such as a d.c. supply are appropriate only in industrial and similar installations
where there is a competent person in charge.
Effects of d.c. components in the supply.
There are three types of RCD relating to their ability to operate correctly with the presence of d.c. components in the
supply:
Type AC is responsive only to sinusoidal residual alternating currents and is acceptable for use only in domestic and
similar installations where there is negligible presence of d.c. components. This type is usually satisfactory for
additional protection against direct contact. (Rules 416.1).
The presence of d.c. components can affect the waveform of a residual fault-current and hence the operation of an
RCD, in which case only Types A and B are suitable.
Type A is responsive to sinusoidal residual alternating currents and pulsating direct currents. This type is usually
suitable for industrial and commercial usage.
299
Type B is responsive to:
- sinusoidal residual alternating currents up to 1000Hz,

- pulsating d.c. currents
- pure residual currents ( e. g,) from a rectifier), with or without phase-angle control, independent of polarity, whether
applied suddenly or gradually.
Please note that Type B RCDs should not be confused with Type B MCBs, in particular where they are combined in
the one device to form an RCBO.
SELECTIVITy BETWEEN RCDS
Rules 536.3
Where RCDs are installed in series e.g. in an installation with TT system earthing, selective operation is necessary to
ensure that the RCD upstream (e.g. at the origin) will not trip before the RCD downstream. (socket-outlet circuits).
One method of achieving this is by ensuring that their characteristic curves do not intersect, as may be expected in the
case of a 300mA RCD with a 30mA RCD downstream. This method is not always reliable, and a better method is to
use a Type S RCD with time delay upstream.
AVOIDANCE OF NUISANCE-TRIPPING OF RCDS
Rules 531.2.5
Nuisance-tripping can be caused by having too many circuits or appliances protected by the one RCD, where the sum
of normal leakage currents may reach a value near the actual operating current of the RCD. More than one RCD is
required in such cases. Essential equipment such as data processing equipment or freezers should be on separate RCDs,
or else permanently connected.
APPLICATION OF RCD
A Domestic and similar installations
1. All circuits serving socket-outlets must be protected by a 30mA RCD. Rules 416.1, 554.
2. In bathroom zones, all circuits must be protected by a 30mA RCD. Circuits outside these zones (e.g. for lighting)
do not require RCD protection. (Rules: 701.).
3. Immersion heaters must be protected by a 30mA RCD ( Rules: 555.4).
4. A shower unit must be protected by a separate 30mA RCD or an RCBO (Rules 555.4).
5. For circuits for essential items such as freezer units, see Annex 55A clause 4.2 d).
B Industrial and similar installations
1. All circuits serving socket-outlets up to and including 32A must be protected by a 30mA RCD except in special
cases specified in 554, e.g. SELV circuits, or where the socket-outlet is used solely for isolation for maintenance, and
not for supplying appliances or tools.
Only Type A or B should normally be used in these locations because of the risk of d.c. pollution.
2. On construction and demolition sites, socket-outlet circuits above 32A rating must be protected by an RCD
rated not more than 500mA (Type A or B). (Rules: 704)
3. In agricultural and horticultural installations, the following additional rules apply: Rules: 705.411.3.01.
a) for final circuits supplying socket-outlets over 32A rating: an RCD with a rated residual operating current not
exceeding 100mA is required.
b) for all other circuits, an RCD with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 300mA is required with a time-
delay where continuity of service is desired.
300
4. For installations in exhibitions, shows and fairs (Rules: 711) and for temporary outdoor installations in
circuses etc (Rules: 740) all final circuits must be protected by a 30mA RCD. In all cases, a 300mA RCD Type S (with
time delay) is required at the origin.
5. Floor and ceiling heating systems: All circuits must be protected by a 30mA RCD (Rules: 753).
In areas of particular fire hazard, RCDs must disconnect all conductors including the neutral.
6.
In locations where particular fire hazards or dangers exist, wiring systems, except mineral- insulated cable and busbar-
trunking systems, must be protected against insulation faults by a 300mA RCD. Where there is a risk of fire due to a
resistive fault, the wiring system must be protected by a 30mA RCD.
(Rules: 422, 527, 56, 705)
RCM: Residual-current monitoring device (538): This is similar to an RCD except that it merely gives a signal
when a fault occurs. This is an additional device that will detect an incipient fault without causing tripping. It will
normally be set at a much lower current setting than that of an RCD. This device would normally be confined to
industrial applications.
301
ANNEX 53B
PROTECTION OF METER TAILS Rules 430.4, 533.3.5
Rule 430.4 states that the conductors between the meter and the distribution board must be protected against
overcurrents. The DSO (supply) fuse does not provide this protection.
The main protective device for the installation must be situated:
i) at the main supply point (the origin of the installation)
or,
ii) within 3m of the meter (i.e. in the distribution board) provided the conductors upstream are mechanically protected
and/or located so as to avoid the risk of short-circuit and damage, and are not placed near combustible material. Branch
connections are prohibited.
Where the device is located at the main supply point it may be located in a special compartment inside the standard
meter cabinet, as laid down in 533.3.5 (q.v.). In such a case, the device must be an MCB.
302
ANNEX 54A
(Informative)
TABLE A54A: Minimum sizes of commonly used earth electrodes, embedded in soil or concrete used to prevent
corrosion and provide mechanical strength.
303
304
TABLE A54A: (Continued)

ANNEX 54B
Rule 543.1.1: Method for deriving the factor k

(Normative)
TABLE A54B.1: VALUES OF k
TABLE A54B.2: VALUES OF k FOR INSULATED PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS NOT

INCORPORATED IN CABLES, AND NOT BUNCHED WITH OTHER CABLES
305
TABLE A54B.3: VALUES OF k FOR BARE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS IN CONTACT

WITH CABLE COVERING BUT NOT BUNCHED WITH OTHER CABLES
TABLE A54B.4: VALUES OF k FOR PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AS A CORE

INCORPORATED IN A CABLE OR BUNCHED WITH OTHER CABLES OR INSULATED
CONDUCTORS
TABLE A54B.5: VALUES OF k FOR PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AS A METAL LAyER

OF A CABLE, E.G. ARMOUR, CONCENTRIC CONDUCTOR ETC.
306
TABLE A54B.6: VALUES OF k FOR PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR COMPRISING STEEL

CONDUIT TRUNKING OR DUCTING
TABLE A54B.7: VALUES OF k FOR BARE CONDUCTORS WHERE THERE IS NO RISK

OF DAMAGE TO ANy NEIGHBOURING MATERIAL By THE TEMPERATURES
INDICATED
307
ANNEX 54C
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE EARTHING OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGy INSTALLATIONS

Informative
1. Scope
This annex deals with the additional earthing and bonding arrangements required for information technology
installations, including cable television equipment.
These recommendations may be used where:
- information technology installations or similar equipment are interconnected for data exchange purposes,
- information technology equipment is subject to electromagnetic interference,
- information technology equipment is connected to functional earth electrodes.
Examples of equipment and installations to which this Annex may apply are:
- telecommunications and data communication or data processing equipment, or installations using signalling with
earthed return connections,

- d.c. power supply networks serving information technology equipment inside a building,
- private automatic branch exchange (PABX) equipment,
- local area networks (LAN)
- fire alarm systems and intruder alarm systems,
- building services installations, e.g. direct digital control systems,
- systems for computer-aided manufacturing (CAM) and other computer-aided services.
The term “functional” indicates the use of earthing and equipotential bonding for signalling and EMC purposes.
2. General
The earthing arrangements of information technology installations and equipment must comply with Chapter 41 and
Chapter 54 and other relevant requirements of the Rules.
These recommendations include:
- equipotential bonding to protect signal conductors, protective conductors and functional earthing conductors against
overcurrents,
- equipotential bonding to provide electromagnetic compatibility of installed equipment,
- measures for d.c .return currents in functional earthing conductors.
3. PEN conductors
PEN conductors should not be used in buildings containing information technology installations.
4. Main earthing terminal
The main earthing terminal for the electrical installation can generally be used for functional earthing, and is regarded
as the point of connection of the information technology equipment with the earth electrode system.
5. Earthing bus-conductor
The earthing terminal may be extended throughout the building by connection to an earthing bus-conductor or earthing
busbar.
The earthing bus-conductor should be in accordance with the requirements for protective conductors in 543 and have
a cross-sectional area not less than that required for the main protective conductor in 543.4.1.
6. Connections to the earthing bus-conductor
The following conductors may be connected to the earthing bus-conductor at any point along its run:
- conductors that are to be connected to the main earthing terminal in accordance with 542.4.1,
- supplementary bonding conductors in accordance with 544.2,
- conductive screens, sheaths or armouring of telecommunications equipment or cables,
- earthing conductors for overvoltage protective devices,
- the earthed conductor of an earthed d.c. power supply system for information technology equipment,
- functional earthing conductors.
308
7. Functional earthing conductors
The cross-sectional area of a functional earthing conductor should take account of possible fault currents that may flow
due to faults in the installation or in the supply network.
Where the supply voltage does not exceed 120V ripple-free d.c. the functional earthing conductor may also be used
as a d.c. return conductor. In this case, account should also be taken to prevent electrolytic corrosion in accordance
with 542.
Equipotential bonding may be necessary to reduce fault and supply currents in functional earthing conductors that form
part of signal cables.
For cable television and similar systems, effective means of isolation e.g. a harmonic filter should be provided from
the main installation earthing system.
8. Combined functional earthing and protective conductors
A combined functional earthing and protective conductor must in every case satisfy the requirements for a protective
conductor by compliance with 543.
In addition, the combined functional earthing and protective conductor should comply with clause 7 above.
9. Earth electrodes for functional earthing
Where electrodes are installed specifically for the functional earthing of information technology equipment, measures
should be taken to limit the following:
- overcurrents in the protective conductors and the signal coinductors in the installation,
- hazardous prospective touch-voltages between simultaneously accessible conductive parts within the installation,
- hazardous step voltages in the vicinity of the earth electrodes.
Some information technology equipment, for example, certain types of radio transmitting antennae, require an
extensive functional earthing electrode system. This system may have an earth resistance that is considerably lower
than the earth resistance of the earth electrode for the installation as provided under 542.2.
Certain faults on the incoming supply to an installation will create a rise in potential at the main earthing terminal that
can cause overcurrents to flow through the protective conductors of the installation to a functional earthing electrode
that has a comparatively low earth resistance.
To protect against such overcurrents, earth electrodes for functional earthing should be connected to the main earthing
terminal by an earthing conductor complying with 542.3. Electromagnetic devices such as ferrite rings may be inserted
in this earthing conductor to increase its impedance at signal frequences. Such devices should not significantly increase
its impedance at the frequency of the supply.
10. Information technology links between buildings
Where a telecommunication link is provided between buildings with installations having independent earthing
arrangements, measures should be taken to limit fault currents that might otherwise flow in the telecommunication
cable by one of the following methods:
i) Use of a metal-free fibre-optic telecommunication cable or link providing similar isolation. In this case, no further
protective measures are required.
ii) Use of screened telecommunication cable. In this case, a copper conductor should connect the respective main
earthing terminals.
This conductor should have a cross-sectional area sufficient to to protect against overcurrents in the signal conductors.
309
ANNEX 55A
FINAL CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS.

(Informative)
1. GENERAL
This annex deals with the practical application of the Rules to the design and installation of final circuits. It does not
deal with protective earthing or equipotential bonding, which is covered by Chapter 54.
This annex may not be cited or used as a substitute for the Rules.
All circuits must comply with Chapter 43, Section 523, Chapter 55 and other relevant requirements in the Rules.
Special requirements apply to circuits in bathrooms (701), in construction and demolition sites (704), in agricultural
and horticultural premises (705), in exhibitions, shows and fairs (711) and in temporary installations for circuses
amusements etc.(740).
A final circuit is defined as “a circuit connected directly to current-using equipment or to socket outlets”.
A final circuit may be:
- a circuit supplying a single point or an item of equipment such as a cooking appliance,

- a radial circuit supplying two or more points, e.g. lighting outlets, socket-outlets, permanently connected small
appliances,
- a ring circuit supplying a number of points such as socket-outlets and small appliances.
Circuits supplying socket-outlets must be protected by a 30mA RCD, except in a few very special cases (Rules 554.4).
In general, parallelling of conductors in final circuits is not permitted. (Rules 555.1.3).
For information on RCDs, see Annex 53A.
2. CURRENT-CARRyING CAPACITy AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
Rules: Chapter 43, section 523, section 533, and Annex 52C.
2.1 General
The following criteria apply to all circuits:
Cables must be the correct size to carry the normal load current (for which see Section 523 and Annex 52C).
Cables must be protected against overcurrents (overload and short-circuit) in accordance with Chapter 43.
2.2 Branch circuits
Conductors of branch circuits should have the same cross-sectional area as those of the main circuit; otherwise they
must be protected by a sub-fuse or MCB with the appropriate rating for the conductor size. See also “Ring Final
Circuits” below
In the case of a 13A plug and socket connection, the plug fuse protects the flexible cable to the appliance. It is not
intended to protect the appliance. The correct size of fuse for the plug should be chosen, and this is usually stated by
the appliance manufacturer.
2.3 Miniature circuit-breakers (MCBs)
MCBs may be Type B, Type C or Type D. For normal applications (e.g. domestic and similar installations) only
Type B is suitable. Type C is suitable only for the commercial and industrial applications, e.g. banks of fluorescent
luminaires, motors etc. where significant starting currents occur. Type D is for transformers only.
3 FINAL CIRCUIT SUPPLyING ONE POINT IN DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS
Rules: 523, 555, Annex 52C, Annex 52J
310
3.1 General
The following items should be supplied by individual circuits:
- permanently- connected heating appliances rated > 10 A, e.g. storage heaters, immersion heaters, process heaters,
shower units.
- socket-outlets rated > 16A
In certain cases, where other arrangements are impractical, small ancillary items e.g. fan, water pump may be fed
from such a circuit, provided:
i) the branch conductor size is not reduced, or
ii) a suitable sub-fuse or MCB is fitted.
3.2 Circuits supplying sustained heating loads
Sustained heating- loads such as storage heaters can cause a build-up of heat in the switchgear. If the switch or MCB
rating is close to that of the sustained heating - load, this along with other factors, may give rise to excess temperatures
in the switchgear. In such cases, the next-highest switch or MCB rating should be chosen. In such cases, the MCB rating
should also be appropriate to the cable current-carrying capacity.
Storage- heaters and other sustained heating loads should not be supplied from ring final circuits
3.3 Cooker circuits
Rules: 555.2
a) Integral cooker units
The following size of cable is the minimum permissible; it does not apply to small table-mounted cookers.
Cooker up to 10 kW: 6mm2 copper (fixed wiring), 4mm2 copper (flexible cable) fuse/MCB 35/32A, isolating switch
45A double pole.
For cookers over 10kW, the cable and switchgear ratings should be calculated (see Annex 52C), taking account of
diversity where appropriate).
b) Separate ovens and hobs
Where the oven and hob are separate appliances, a common supply and isolator may be used provided it is within 2m
of each appliance. In such cases, it should be ensured that each part of the circuit complies with the fault-loop
impedance value appropriate to the overcurrent device, e.g., 0.9 ohms maximum for a 32A MCB.
3.4 Shower units
Rules 555.4
Shower units with instantaneous heaters can take high currents from 40A upwards. The supply and the main isolating
and protective devices should be checked to make sure that they are adequate for the demand. In view of the high
currents involved, the length of the circuit conductors will have an effect on the voltage drop and the fault loop
impedance, and this should be checked before selecting the cable (See Annex 52J).
The cable size should be determined in the usual way, i.e. by consulting the tables in Annex 52C.
The installer should check that the unit terminals are suitable for the conductor size.
A separate RCD and MCB, or RCBO, should be provided for each shower unit.
The user should be warned against using the isolating switch to switch off the shower unit on load, since this can
cause excessive wear on the switching parts with subsequent overheating and damage. In such cases, especially with
higher rated shower units, switching with a contactor is recommended.
3.5 Multiple shower units
Where two shower units are required, there are two possible situations:
Where two units may be used simultaneously, they must be on separate circuits each having its own MCB and RCD,
or RCBO, protection. In this case the load, although only on for short periods, could overload the supply unless special
provision is made by the DSO. Furthermore, the main isolating switches and protective devices must be adequate for
the total load of the installation.
Where simultaneous operation is not required, two units may be fed from the one circuit provided only one unit is
supplied at a time. This may be achieved by an arrangement of interlocked contactors.
311
4. RADIAL FINAL CIRCUITS IN DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS.

Rules: Chapter 43, 523, Annex 52C, 533
Radial final circuits may be used to supply lighting-outlets, socket-outlets and permanently- connected appliances as
follows:
4.1 Radial final circuits for lighting equipment in domestic and similar installations
Rules: 524, 559. Annex 52C
Minimum size of conductor: 1.5mm2
Recommended rating of fuse or MCB: 10A for 1.5mm2 conductor

20A for 2.5mm2 conductor
The short length of flex between a ceiling rose and a lampholder may have a minimum
cross-sectional area of 0.5mm2. The flex should have heat-resistant insulation (e.g. 90°C PVC). This does not require
a sub-fuse or sub-MCB.
A radial final circuit for lighting circuits may also supply small items of equipment, none of which exceeds 300W
rating, e.g. bell transformers, shaver outlets, alarm systems.
At least two radial lighting circuits should be provided for a normal dwelling or similarly sized premises.
4.2 Radial final circuits for socket-outlets and appliances in domestic and similar installations
(Rules: 554)
a) General
A radial circuit may supply an arrangement of socket- outlets and small permanently- connected appliances. Preferably,
socket-outlets and appliances should be on separate circuits.
Recommended maximum number of points: 10 (see the definition of “point”). One point may serve a single or double
socket-outlet.
Minimum cross-sectional area of conductor: 2.5mm2
Recommended fuse/MCB rating: 20A for 2.5mm2 conductor
25A for 4.0mm2 conductor
b) Kitchen area:
Rules: 554, 555
At least two radial final circuits should be provide in a kitchen to supply high-current portable appliances such as
irons and kettles.
The number and position of socket-outlets will depend on the size and layout of the kitchen. For the average-sized
domestic kitchen a minimum of ten socket-outlets is recommended. They should be distributed over at least two
separate radial circuits and located to suit the position of the equipment.
Socket-outlets that are not readily accessible, e.g. behind or under kitchen furniture or stationary appliances, must be
provided with isolating switches rated 20A in accessible positions e.g. on the wall above the work-top, suitably labelled.
This is to enable the immediate disconnection of the appliance, e.g. a washing machine, in the case of an emergency.
c) Other rooms:
A radial circuit should not serve more than two rooms. A hall, landing, closet or WC does not count as a room in this
case.
Socket-outlets and wall-mounted switches are prohibited in bathrooms (See Section 701).
d) Freezer units:
In order to improve the reliability of the supply to freezers and similar appliances, either of the following two methods
of supply may be applied:
1. A fixed outlet from a circuit not protected by an RCD.

2. A dedicated socket - outlet circuit protected by its own separate RCD.
See sub-clause 531.2.5.4.
312
5 RING FINAL CIRCUITS IN DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS
5.1 General
A ring final circuit is defined as “a final circuit arranged in the form of a ring connected to a single point of supply”.
The protective conductor is included in the ring.
The current-carrying capacity of the conductors forming the ring final circuit should be not less than 0.67 times the
rated current of the overcurrent device for that circuit.
Minimum size of conductors: 2.5mm2 copper

Socket-outlets: 13A rating complying with IS 411 for fused plugs Fuse/MCB rating: 35A/32A
Number of points: Unlimited, but a ring circuit should not serve a floor area larger than 100m2. Ring circuits should
not be used in kitchens
Where two or more ring final circuits are installed, points for socket-outlets and other outlets should be distributed
evenly between circuits.
5.2 Spurs in ring final circuits
A spur is the name given to a branch connection of a ring final circuit.

A spur must be protected by an overcurrent device. Non-fused spurs are not permissible
A spur may be used:
- for an appliance permanently- connected to a ring final circuit,

- where a socket-outlet complying with I.S. EN 60309 Parts 1 and 2 (outdoor type with non - fused plug) is supplied
from the ring final circuit.
6. RADIAL FINAL CIRCUITS IN INDUSTRIAL AND SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS.
Rules: 43, 523, 554
In the case of industrial and similar installations, two types of radial final circuits are envisaged:
- circuits as for domestic and similar installation intended for general use indoors;
- circuits supplying industrial- type socket-outlets (I.S. EN 60309) and individual items of equipment with ratings not
exceeding 16A.
The number of outlets and their ratings are a matter for the designer.
Where the radial final circuit has a rating exceeding 25A, a branch circuit supplying equipment or socket-outlets must
be protected by a local fuse or MCB if the branch conductors are smaller than those of the radial circuit.
7. RING FINAL CIRCUITS IN INDUSTRIAL AND SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS
Rules: 43, 523, 533
In industrial and similar installations ring final circuits supplying socket-outlets complying with EN 60309 Parts 1 and
2 should comply with the following:
The number and rating of socket-outlets served by the ring must be selected so that in normal use the load on the
circuit does not exceed the rated current of the overcurrent device protecting the circuit.
The current carrying capacity of the conductors forming the ring should be at least equal to the rated current of the
overcurrent device protecting the circuit.
Socket-outlets should be individually protected against overcurrent by suitable devices, e.g. a swirch-fuse.
8. SOCKET- OUTLETS
Rules: 411.5, 416.1, 554
The following is a brief summary, but the Rules must be consulted for details.
313
8.1 Domestic and similar installations
Domestic and similar locations and indoors generally: Socket-outlets complying with I.S. 411, 13A rating.
Domestic and similar installations outdoors: Where there is no risk of mechanical damage due to impact, socket-
outlets complying with I.S. 411, 13A rating, with an enclosure having a minimum rating of IP 44.
The required height of an indoor socket-outlet above the floor is between 400mm and 1200mm.
Inaccessible socket-outlets e.g. behind kitchen units must have an accessible isolating switch (Rule 554.3.5).
8.2 Industrial, agricultural and similar installations
In industrial locations and in severe conditions outdoors, agricultural areas:

Socket-outlets complying with I.S.EN 60309 Parts 1 and 2 with a degree of protection of least IP 44, or, where pressure-
hosing may take place, IP 55.
I.S. EN 60309 Part 1 deals with ratings and environmental protection (IP rating and mechanical protection criteria),
but not dimensions. I.S. EN 60309 Part 2 deals with dimensional requirements.
In certain circumstances, socket-outlets may require to be switched, e.g. for emergency stopping. In industrial and
similar installations, plug-and-socket arrangements alone are not permissible for emergency switching.
Socket-outlets should be mounted at a height where they are unlikely to be affected by flood- water, e.g. caravan
parks, marinas. In agricultural installations, additional requirements apply (see 705).
314
ANNEXES FOR CHAPTER 61: VERIFICATION AND TESTING
(Normative)
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 61 specifies the requirements for the verification and testing of a completed installation. Supplementary
information is given in the annexes below.
The sequence of the tests specified in Chapter 61 should be followed in normal practice. The test for fault loop
impedance (613.13) and the test for RCDs (613.14) can only be carried out after the installation has been energised.
The clauses of Chapter 61 and corresponding annexes are as follows:
Clause Test Annex

613.1 Inspection 61A
613.2 Verification of continuity of conductors 61B
613.4 Automatic disconnection of supply and earthing:
- determination of fault loop impedance by calculation with measurement

of resistance of the protective conductor (pre-connection only) 61C
- measurement of earth –electrode resistance (TT systems) 61D
613.5 Measurement of insulation resistance of floors and walls. 61E
613.13 Measurement of earth –fault loop impedance of circuits 61F

(post-connection)
613.14 Verification of operation of RCDs 61G

(post-connection)
Attention is drawn to certain tests specified in 613.6.5 which may be necessary in some circumstances where there may
be doubt about the effectiveness of supplementary bonding: between exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts
Attention is drawn to clause 613.13, with respect to the changes in the values of Fault Loop Impedance in this draft
ANNEX 61A
VISUAL INSPECTION
(Normative)
The following requirements should be checked when carrying out a visual inspection :
General
Good workmanship and proper materials used

Circuits separate, no interconnection of neutrals between circuits (i.e. no “borrowed neutrals”)
Circuits suitably identified
Conductors and cable cores correctly identified by colour
Adequate number of circuits
Adequate number of socket outlets
Main electrical isolator
Main earthing terminal
Correct type and ratings of fuses, circuit breakers and RCDs
All connections secure.
Earthing, main bonding, and supplementary bonding, especially in bathrooms.
315
Protection against direct contact
All live parts insulated or enclosed

Appropriate IP rating
Cable entries and unused entries sealed
Fixed wiring
Correct type- indoor, outdoor, or buried in the ground

Correct current rating
Mechanical protection (essential for insulated conductors), sheath, armouring
Bending radii (Annex 52B)
Adequately supported
Joints mechanically and electrically sound and adequately insulated
Conductors secured without strain on conductors or terminals
Terminals and cores enclosed
Access for replacement of wiring
Current-carrying capacity and voltage drop for methods of installation (Annex 52C and Annex 52E)
Conduit and trunking capacity (Annex 52A)
Separation of circuits
Suitability for thermal effects – e.g. resistance to high temperatures, resistance to spread of fire, resistance to fire
Protective, earthing and bonding conductors
Minimum cross-sectional areas

Protective conductor to every point, equipment, socket, ceiling rose, wall switch etc.
Insulation and correct colours (green/yellow) for these
Joints sound
Bonding in bathrooms, kitchen sink/draining boards.
Accessories (general)
Visual compliance with standard (EN or IS or other)

Boxes provided for all accessories whether flush-mounted or surface mounted, in particular sockets and wall switches
No sharp edges on cable entries
Correct and sound connection
Identification of conductors
Green/yellow sleeving of bare protective conductors
Adequate current rating
Correct IP rating, e.g. for outdoors
Earthing terminal connected to protective conductor
Exposed metal e.g. ornamental metal face-plate earthed.
Socket-outlets
Minimum height 400 mm (except for special floor and trunking mounting types) maximum 1200 mm.
Correct polarity
Maximum number per circuit (radial)
Isolating switch for inaccessible sockets in kitchens.
Switches and combined switch-fuse units
Adequate rating, especially for continuous heating loads

Single-pole switches in phase only
Joint boxes
Accessible for inspection

Protected against mechanical damage
Cooker control unit
Situated to side of cooker

No strain on connections
316
Conduit and trunking
Visual compliance with standard

Securely fixed, supported, covers in place,
Maximum number of conductors or cables not exceeded
Adequate boxes for drawing-in of cables
Radius of bends not to damage cables

Protection against external influences (heat, moisture, mechanical damage, corrosion)
Earthing of metal conduit and trunking.
Joints electrically and mechanically sound, additional connections where necessary at joints in trunking
Drainage where necessary
Lighting
Connection to the fixed wiring correct

Suitable for mass suspended
Only one flex except for multiple pendants
Ceiling rose earthing terminal connected to the protective conductor

Flex support devices used
Holes in ceiling made good
Located so as not to pose a fire hazard
Distribution boards
All outlets correctly labelled

Adequate rating
Securely fixed
Suitable location – not in bathroom or airing cupboards, under stairs or near a gas meter or appliance, or in escape route
Accessible for isolating in case of emergency
Connections secure and correctly terminated
Cables correctly identified and soundly terminated
No sharp edges that might damage cables
All covers and lids in place and securely fastened
Correct ratings, settings and types for circuit-breakers (Type B or C) and fuses
Correct ratings of RCDs
Correct no. of poles of circuit-breakers and RCDs
Neutral and protective conductors in each circuit arranged in the same sequence as the phase conductors.
Three-phase circuit conductors connected to the same way
ANNEX 61B
VERIFICATION OF CONTINUITy OF A CONDUCTOR (613.2)
(Normative)
A test should be made either with a proprietary instrument designed for the purpose, or alternatively with a supply
having a no-load voltage between 4 and 24V d.c. or a.c. r.m.s. and a minimum current of 0.2A d.c. or a.c. This test is
not intended to verify values of resistance.
ANNEX 61C
DETERMINATION OF FAULT-LOOP IMPEDANCE By CALCULATION WITH MEASUREMENT OF

RESISTANCE OF THE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR (613.6.2.1)
(Normative)
This is an optional method that may be employed to check the value of fault-loop impedance values of circuits during
construction of the installation. Regardless of any such check, the fault loop impedance must be measured after
connection of the supply in accordance with 613.13.
317
1. The method for determining the value of fault loop impedance ZL consists of the following:
i) Measurement of the resistance of the protective conductor RE (see below); and
ii) Calculation of the impedance of the phase conductor Rp from its cross-sectional area, its length, and
manufacturer’s information; and
iii) Ascertaining the value of current Ia that causes tripping of the protective device in 0.4 s for circuits up to 35A rating
or 5 sec for circuits exceeding 35A rating; and
iv) Applying the following formula using the values obtained above.
ZL ≤ Uo / Ia Ω
2. Resistance of protective conductor.
The resistance RE of the protective conductor should be measured either with a suitable proprietary instrument or,
alternatively, as follows:
The circuit is disconnected from the supply. One end of the protective conductor is connected to a conductor of known
resistance (e.g. one of the phase conductors) and a test voltage is applied between the other ends of both conductors,
and the current measured.
The supply used for this test may be:
- up to 40V a.c. with a current of 1.5 times the current rating, not necessarily exceeding 25A, or
- d.c. from a hand - operated generator.
The resistance of the protective conductor is the ratio of voltage to current, less the known resistance of the current
carrying conductor.
When a measurement on an a.c. system is made with less than 10V a.c. or with rapidly reversed d.c. and the protective
conductor is wholly or mainly of steel conduit or pipe, a factor of two should be applied to the measured value.
The value RE should be entered in the completon certificate.
ANNEX 61D
MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE RESISTANCE (TT Systems)
(Normative)
613.6.3 requires that the combined resistance of the protective conductor and earth electrode be measured for TT
systems. As the resistance of the protective conductor is small by comparison with that of the earth electrode, it is
sufficient in most cases to measure the earth electrode resistance. In the case of TT systems the maximum touch
voltage appears between exposed conductive parts and earth assuming a person is in good conduct with earth. The value
of touch voltage is the product of fault current If and earth electrode resistance RE, and must not exceed 50V a.c.
r.m.s.
To test the resistance of the earth electrode X two auxiliary electrodes are required – one is used as a voltage electrode
(Z) and the other as a current electrode (Y) (See Fig. 61.2 below).
The auxiliary voltage electrode Z is driven into the ground about half-way between X and Y and the voltage drop
between electrodes X and Z is measured when a current is flowing between electrodes X and Y.
A method of making this test is as follows:
Using an isolated a.c. supply, a controlled current is passed between the auxiliary current electrode Y and the earth
electrode X. The voltage is measured across the earth electrode X and the auxiliary voltage electrode Z.
The resistance RE = U where
1
318
RE is the earth resistance in ohms

U is the voltage measured between voltage electrode Z and earth electrode X in volts
I is the current flowing between the electrode Y and the earth electrode X in amperes
Extreme care is necessary when using this method.

Alternatively the test can be carried out with a proprietary instrument.
X: earth electrode under test, disconnected from all other sources of supply
Y: auxiliary current electrode
Z: auxiliary voltage earth electrode
Z1: alternative position of Z for check measurement
Z2: further alternative position of Z for check measurement
Figure 61.2: Measurement of earth-electrode resistance
ANNEX 61E
MEASUREMENT OF THE INSULATION RESISTANCE OF FLOORS AND OF WALLS
(Normative)
This test concerns the protective measure “Protection by non-conducting location” in Annex 41C which is intended
only for special applications.
A recommended method of measuring the insulation resistance is as follows:
An insulation tester providing a no-load voltage of approximately 500V is used as a d.c. source.
The resistance is measured between the test electrode and the protective conductor or earth of the installation.
The test electrodes may be one of the types below. The use of test electrode 1 is the reference method.
It is recommended that the test be made before the application of the surface treatment (varnishes, paints and similar
products).
TEST ELECTRODE 1
The electrode comprises a square metal plate with sides 250mm and a square of damped water-absorbent paper or cloth
with sides approximately 270mm from which surplus water has been removed which is placed between the metal
plate and the surface being tested.
319
TEST ELECTRODE 2
The test electrode comprises a metal tripod of which the parts resting on the floor form the points of an equilateral
triangle. Each supporting part is provided with a flexible base ensuring, when loaded, close contact with the surface
being tested over an area of approximately 900mm2 and presenting a resistance of less than 500 ohms. See Fig. 61.3
Before measurements are made, the surface being tested is moistened or covered with a damp cloth. While
measurements are being made, a force of approximately 750 N or 250 N is applied to the tripod in the case of floors
or of walls respectively.
Figure 61.3: Test Electrode 2.
ANNEX 61 F
MEASUREMENT OF EARTH-FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCE OF CIRCUITS
(Informative)
The fault loop impedance should be measured using a proprietary instrument having a facility for measuring low
values of impedance.
In TN systems, the main protective conductor (“neutralizing link”) must be left in place.
Measurements are made as follows:
a) At the location of the main fuse, the instrument is connected between the phase conductor and the main earthing
terminal.
b) For a final circuit, the instrument is connected at the furthest point of the circuit between the phase conductor and
the corresponding point on the associated protective conductor, e.g. at a socket outlet.
Selecting the appropriate overcurrent device depends on the value of the fault loop impedance.
Table 61C-1 gives the maximum values of fault loop impedance for a range of fuses and MCBs for all circuits of
rating up to 35A inclusive (0.4 s disconnection time).
320
Table 61C-2 gives the maximum values of fault loop impedance for circuits of rating exceeding 35A (5 s disconnection
time).
The values given in the tables are those for a nominal voltage to earth of 230V a.c. r.m.s.
For any other voltage V, the values should be multiplied by the factor V/230
For other types of fuse or MCB, the values of fusing or tripping current If may be obtained from the characteristic
curves for the times of 0.4 sec or 5 sec as appropriate. The characteristic curves for fuses and MCBs are available from
all reputable manufacturers.
The maximum fault loop impedance ZL corresponding to the tripping current If is obtained from the formula:
ZL = 230 / If Ω
In some limited situations ohmic values in excess of the maximum values stated in Tables A61C-1 or 2 may be
recorded. Compliance with the requirement may still be possible subject to the tester’s consulting the technical
specification provided by the manufacturer of the particular devices and obtaining the maximum stated values for
those devices that ensure a disconnecting time of 0.4 or 5 sec, whichever is applicable. The values obtained by test
shall not exceed those maximum stated values.
TABLE A61C-1: MAXIMUM VALUES OF FAULT-LOOP IMPEDANCE ZL FOR 230 V A.C. CIRCUITS
WITH RATINGS NOT EXCEEDING 35 A
Maximum disconnecting time: 0.4 s ( Table 41A)
321
TABLE A61C-2:
MAXIMUM VALUES OF FAULT-LOOP IMPEDANCE ZL FOR 230v A.C. CIRCUITS
WITH RATINGS EXCEEDING 35A
Maximum disconnecting time: 5 seconds
322

ANNEX 61G
VERIFICATION OF OPERATION OF RCDs

ANNEX 61G
VERIFICATION (Normative)
OF OPERATION OF RCDs
For compliance with 613.14, the operating characteristics of RCDs should be verified by injecting a
test residual current and recording the time of operation by means of a proprietary instrument
specifically designed for the purpose. The values obtained should be in accordance with the tables
below. Alternatively, any point on the characteristic
A curve may be verified, but the value obtained must
be compatible with those in the tables.
5xI
0.04 s
5xI
0.15 s
M 0.05 s
5xI
0.04 s
5xI
0.15 s
M 0.05 s
I Ān is the rated residual operating current e.g. 30mA or 300mA.
* For RCDs rated 30mA or less, 0.25A may be used instead of 5 In.
The load should be disconnected during testing in order to interrupt the normal earth leakage currents
from equipment. Disconnection should be made at the permanent terminations. Insulated connectors
should be used for injecting current.
323
324
ANNEX 62A
REPORT FORM FOR PERIODIC INSPECTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 62

Date ____________________ Periodic Inspection Report for an Electrical Installation PR No.
REGISTERED CONTRACTOR DETAILS: INSTALLATION DETAILS:

Name ________________________________________ Occupant Name/Trading as ______________________
Address _______________________________________ Address _______________________________________
______________________________________________ Electro-Technical ______________________________________________
Council of Ireland Limited
______________________________________________ ______________________________________________
Reg No. _______________________________________ Installation Approx Age ________ Occupant in Attendance? Yes T No T
PLEASE CIRCLE ANSWERS OR TICK BOXES AS APPROPRIATE
Installation Category? Domestic T Commercial T Industrial T Other (specify) __________________

Reason for Inspection? Insurance Inspection T Safety Audit T If Other (specify)__________________________________

Extent of Installation covered by this report? Entire Installation* TYES TNO (see partial inspection details below)
* N.B. Cables concealed within trunking and conduits within the fabric of the building or underground have not been inspected unless stated otherwise.
If Partial Inspection Specify what part the report refers to ________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TYPE OF SYSTEM EARTHING : TNCS, TT, TNS, IT
Installation Voltage Single Phase TThree Phase TL 1. L2. L3. L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1
V V V V V V
Max prospective S/C current _____ A Main isolation** and overcurrent device type ? NONE TSWITCH FUSE TMCB TMCCB T
Nominal rating _____ A ** If a main RCD is used as a main isolating device the following details are required Rated current In _____ A
Tripping current I¨Q___________mA
325
©ETCI 2006. This document should not be copied or reproduced in any form or manner without the expressed permission of the Electro Technical Council of Ireland Limited. PAGE 1 of
PR No.
326
PR No.
327
PR No.
328
ANNEX 63A
SPECIMEN COMPLETION CERTIFICATES IN ACCORDANCE

WITH CHAPTER 63
Completion Certificate 1 for an installation with a Maximum Import Capacity < 50kVA.
Completion Certificate 2 for an installation with a Maximum Import Capacity ≥ 50kVA.
Certificate 3 Completion Certificate for Existing Installations”.
Sub-system completion certificate.

329
330
331
332
Certificate 3 – Completion Certificate for Existing Installations. (See certificate 3 below):

333
ANNEX 63B
Normative
GUIDELINES FOR CERTIFICATION FOR ALTERATIONS

TO EXISTING INSTALLATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Clause 611.5 of the Rules states “It shall be verified that an extension, addition or alteration to an existing installation
complies with the Rules, and that it does not impair the safety of that installation, and that the safety of the new
installation is not impaired by the existing installation”. These Guidelines are intended to explain the necessary
procedures that should be followed by the installer.
1. BASIC PRINCIPLES
New work must comply with the current Rules.

Before commencing new work, the installer should assess the existing installation to ensure that it will not impair the
safety of the proposed new work, and likewise that the new work will not impair the safety of the existing installation.
Should the installer become aware of any defect in any part of the installation that would impair the safety of the new
work, the client must be informed in writing thereof. No new work should commence until these defects have been
made good
2. CLASSIFICATION OF NEW WORK

For the purposes of this Annex, new work comprising alterations to an existing installation is classified as follows:
A. Major alteration to an existing installation, requiring a completion certificate to be provided by the installer
and given to the client.
An extension: The provision of one or more additional circuits.
Replacement of a distribution board. Replacement of the wiring for a circuit. Replacement of a protective device.
Relocation of a distribution board.
Addition: Alterations to an existing installation, requiring a Completion Certificate for an Existing Installation
(Certificate 3), to be provided by the registered electrical contractor and given to the client, with a copy to the Electrical
Safety Supervisory Body (ESSB).
This certificate may be used when alterations are required to an installation which is already connected to the electrical
supply. This completion certificate must not be used to obtain a connection or a re-connection of an electrical supply
from a DSO. The type of work associated with this completion certificate includes the following:
Controlled works of type 2, 3 4 and 5.

Minor works.
Test (only) of the existing Installation.
B. Minor alterations to an existing installation, requiring a Declaration of Compliance when requested by

the client.
A minor alteration includes the following:
Addition to an existing circuit of an accessory or similar item e.g. a socket-outlet, a wall-switch or a lighting outlet.
Replacement of an accessory or similar item e.g. a socket-outlet, a wall-switch or a lighting outlet.
Relocation of an accessory or similar item e.g. a socket-outlet, a wall-switch or a lighting outlet.
3. LOADING
Where an extension is planned, the registered electrical contractor shall ensure that the main supply wiring and the
distribution board have sufficient capacity to facilitate the total load including any additional load due to the extension
or addition. When a substantial increase in loading is involved, the Distribution System Operator (DSO) shall be
informed if the additional load exceeds the existing installation’s MIC.
4. DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
4.1 Replacement
Where a distribution board is to be replaced, it should comply with the following:
i) Clause 530.5 of these Rules, and

ii) where applicable, ET 205: “Code of Practice for the Design, Selection and Erection of LV Distribution Boards for
Residential Applications.
334
All protective devices fitted to the replacement distribution board should be correctly selected to provide the required
protection for existing circuits and any new circuits, in accordance with the current Rules. This should be verified in
the same way as for a new installation, i.e. by tests for fault-loop impedance and RCD operation as specified in Chapter
61 of the Rules.
The conductors connecting the replacement board to the incoming supply should be of at least 16 mm2 copper;
replacement may be necessary.
The main bonding conductors and main protective conductors should be checked for compliance with the Rules and
replaced where necessary.
Cables and their terminations should be checked for signs of damage, e.g. heat or mechanical damage, and replaced
where necessary.
4.2 Relocation
Where a distribution board is to be relocated, cables should be checked for signs of damage and replaced where
necessary.
4.3 Wiring
Where replacement of wiring is necessary due to the replacement or relocation of a distribution board, the new work
is deemed to be equivalent to an extension.
5. MINOR ALTERATION
When replacing or relocating an accessory or similar items, cables and their terminations should be checked for signs
of damage and replaced where necessary. It is recommended that where relocation is intended, the item should be
replaced
6. TESTING
New work must be tested in accordance with Chapter 61 of the Rules.
7. CERTIFICATION OR DECLARATION OF COMPLIANCE
Documentation should be prepared by the installer for all new work as follows:
- for a major alteration, a completion certificate Type 1 or Type 2 in accordance with Annex 63A,
- for a minor alteration, a Declaration of Compliance for Minor Electrical Works.
- for new work in an existing installation a completion certificate for existing installations Certificate 3 in accordance
with Annex 63A.
Documentation shall be prepared by the installer for all new work as follows:
Controlled Works Number either 2, 3, 4 or 5. New work to existing installation, alteration, replacement of
accessories, Minor Works and Sub-systems of existing installations in accordance with Annex 63B.
All entries on the Completion Certificate for Existing Installations (Certificate 3) must be completed by the
registered electrical contractor.
MPRN is the Meter Point Reference Number of the installation.

The tests are those relating to the new work and the parts of the existing installation that are relevant to the new
work.
A copy of the Completion Certificate for Existing Installations (Certificate 3) should be provided to the client as an
assurance that the new work complies with the current edition of the National Rules for Electrical Installations
ET101.
A Completion Certificate for Existing Installations (Certificate 3) may not be used to obtain a connection or a re-
connection of the electrical supply from the DSO.
8. TEST RECORD SHEETS
Test record sheets shall be completed by the installer, a copy of the test record sheets must be submitted to the
ESSB and a copy of the test record sheets must be retained by the installer for his or her own records.
335
9. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS HAVING EXISTING WIRING NOT COMPLyING WITH THE

COLOUR CODE SPECIFIED IN ET101:2008.
Some electrical installations may contain older wiring systems that do not comply with the colour code specified in
the current National Rules. In such cases, it is necessary for safety reasons that warning notices be provided for the
benefit of personnel that may not be familiar with the older systems.
In some older installations, the colour black is used for the neutral conductor, and in three-phase circuits, the
colour blue is used for a phase/line conductor.
Warning notices should be provided in the relevant locations, e.g. distribution boards, with the following
wording or its equivalent:
WARNING!
The colours for cables and insulated conductors in this (part of the) installation may not comply with the National
Rules for Electrical Installations ET 101: 2008. The core colours and their respective functions should always be
verified by inspection and test.
336
RE
G
337
IS
TE
RE
D
ANNEX 705A
Normative
EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING IN CATTLE SHEDS AND MILKING PARLOURS
INTRODUCTION
Rule 705.544.2.01 states “In buildings where livestock may be kept, and in milking parlours, supplementary
equipotential bonding shall connect all extraneous conductive parts and exposed conductive parts”. Because of the
effect of stray currents on milch cows, special additional measures are needed to minimise these currents. This may
be achieved by installing a metal grid in the floor and connecting it to the local bonding system in accordance with
705.544.2.04.
GENERAL
In order to reduce the possibility of stray currents to a minimum, a metal equipotential grid should be installed in the
floor of milking parlours. The grid should be connected to the local bonding system in at least in two places, i.e. at
opposite ends of the grid. Wherever possible, metal furniture in a milking parlour should be connected to the grid at
the time of installation. This will be in addition to the normal bonding connections in the milking parlour.
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF METAL GRIDS IN MILKING PARLOURS.
General
1. The floor slab incorporating the metal grid should be at least 75mm thick, and the grid should be embedded therein
at the middle level.
2. The bonding camps used for the bonding conductors should comply with 544.1.4 and they should also be resistant
to corrosion.
3. The entry and exit voltage gradient ramps should be installed below the surface and laid at an angle of not less
than 45 degrees with the horizontal. The ramps should be not less than 1.7m long.
New installations
For new installations, when the floor is being installed, a ready-made bonding grid may be used. The grid spacing
should be not greater than 200mm x 200mm. The standard concrete reinforcing mat may also be used for the purpose.
See Figure 705.1.
Existing installations (retrofit)
For existing installations, where suitable, the bonding grid may be located in a screed laid on the existing floor.
Alternatively, the grid may be formed in an existing floor by inserting bonding conductors in slots cut in the floor. The
grid in this case should be made of copper conductors having a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 and spaced
at not more than 300 mm apart. The conductors shall be connected together at least every 3000 mm run. At least four
bonding conductors should be installed in a milking parlour.
The refill grouting should be of the expanding type.
See Figure 705.2
338
339
340
ANNEX 705B
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC FENCES

Clause 705.555.2 of the Rules specifies the installation requirements for mains-operated control units for electric
fences. This annex gives recommendations for installing the fence itself.
1. Barbed wire should not be used for electric fences.
2. A control unit should feed only one electric fence, or system of interconnected fences, except in the cases where a
control unit is designed to supply more than one fence.
3. Electric fence wires fed from different control units should be kept at least 2m apart. Electric fence wires should be
kept at least 2m clear from metal parts of buildings, structures and similar items, unless they are separated by non-
conducting material.
4. An electric fence wire should be kept well clear of overhead power lines. Fence wires that run parallel with overhead
power lines should be kept at least 20m distant from the base of the pole or pylon.
5. Parts of an electric fence buried in the ground or likely to be handled by persons should be covered with suitable
insulating material.
6. Where an electric fence crosses a passage or road used by vehicles it should be kept at least 6m above ground.
7. Where an electric fence is run beside public road, a pathway or a property boundary, warning signs should be placed
at 100m intervals bearing the words: “CAUTION: ELECTRIC FENCE”.
ANNEX 710A
(normative)
Classification of safety services for medical locations
Table A.1 – Classification of safety services necessary for medical locations

(see also Chapter 56)
Class 0 Automatic supply available at no-break
(no-break)
Class 0,15 Automatic supply available within 0, 15 s
(very short break)
Class 0,5 Automatic supply available within 0,5 s
(short break)
Class 15 Automatic supply available within 15 s
(medium break)
Class >15 Automatic supply available in more than 15 s
(medium break)
Note 1: Generally it is unnecessary to provide a no-break power supply for medical equipment.
However, certain microprocessor-controlled equipment may require such a supply.
Note 2: Safety services provided for locations having differing classifications should meet that classification which gives
the highest security of supply. Refer to Annex B for guidance on the association of classification of safety services with
medical locations.
Note 3: The notation “within” implies “≤”.
341
ANNEX 710B
(Informative)
Examples for allocation of group numbers and classification

for safety services of medical locations
A definitive list of medical locations showing their assigned groups is impracticable, as the use to which
locations (rooms) might be put will differ between countries and even within a country.
The accompanying list of examples is provided as a guide only.
Table B.1 – List of examples

Group Class
Medical location 0 1 2 ≤ 0,5s ≤ 0,5s ≤ 15 s
1. Massage room x x x
2. Bedrooms x x
3. Delivery room x xa x
4. ECG, EEG, EHG room x x

5. Endoscopic room xb x xb
6. Exmination or treatment room x x x
7. Urology room xb x xb
8. Radiology diagnostic and therapy room x x
9. Hydrotherapy room x x
10. Physiotherapy room x x
11. Anesthetic area x xa x
12. Operating theatre x xa x
13. Operating preparation room x xa x
14. Operating plaster room x xa x
15. Operating recovery room xa
16. Heart catherization room x xa x
17. Intensive care room x xa x
18. Angiographic examination room x xa x
19. Haemodialysis room x x
20. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) room x x x x
21. Nuclear medicine x x
22. Premature baby room x xa x
23. Intermediate Care Unit (IMCU) x x x
a Luminaries and life-support medical electrical equipment which needs power supply within 0,5 s or less.
b Not being an operating theatre.
Explanations of terms listed in Table B.1
1. Massage room
2. General ward (bedrooms): Medically used room or group of rooms in which patients are accommodated for the
duration of their stay in a hospital, or in any other medical establishment.
3. Delivery room: Room in which the birth takes place.
4. Electrocardiography room (ECG), electroencephalography room (EEG), electrohysterography room (EHG)
5. Endoscopic room: Room intended for application of endoscopic methods for the examination and/or treatment of
organs through natural or artificial orifices.
Examples of endoscopic methods are bronchoscopic, laryngoscopic, cystoscopic, gastroscopic and similar methods,
if necessary performed under anaesthesia.
6. Examination or treatment room
7. Urology room (not being an operating theatre): Room in which diagnostic or therapeutic procedures are performed
on the urogenital tract using medical electrical equipment, such as X-ray equipment, endoscopic equipment and high-
frequency surgery equipment.
8. Radiological diagnostic room (radiological diagnostic and therapy room): Room intended for the use of ionizing
radiation for display of internal structures of the body by means of radiography or fluoroscopy or by the use of radio-
active isotopes or for other diagnostic purposes. Therapy room: Room intended for the use of ionizing radiation to
obtain therapeutic effects.
342
9. Hydrotherapy room: Room in which patients are treated by hydrotherapeutic methods. Examples of such methods
are therapeutic treatments with water, brine, mud, slime, clay, steam, sand, water with gases, brine with gases,
inhalation therapy, electrotherapy in water (with or without additions), massage thermotherapy and thermotherapy in
water (with or without additions). Swimming pools for general use and normal bathrooms are not considered as
hydrotherapy rooms.
10. Physiotherapy room: Room in which patients are treated by physiotherapeutic methods.
11. Anaesthetic room: Medically used room in which general inhalation anaesthetics are administered.
NOTE: The anaesthetic room comprises for instance the actual operating theatre, the operating preparation room, the operating plaster room and
treatment room.
12. Operating theatre: Room in which surgical operations are performed.

13. Operating preparation room: Room in which patients are prepared for an operation, e.g. by administering
anaesthetics.
14. Operating plaster room: Room in which plaster of Paris or similar dressings are applied while anaesthesia is
maintained.
NOTE: Such a room belongs to the operating room group and is usually spatially connected to it.
15. Operating recovery room: Room in which the patient under observation recovers from the influence of
anaesthesia.
NOTE: Such a room is usually very close to the operating room group but not necessarily part of it.
16. Heart catheterization room: Room intended for the examination or treatment of the heart using catheters.
Examples of applied procedures are measurement of action potentials or the haemodynamics of the heart, drawing of
blood samples, injection of contrast agents or application of stimulants.
17. Intensive care room: Room in which bed patients are monitored independently of an operation by means of
medical electrical equipment. Body actions may be stimulated if required.
18. Angiographic examination room: Room intended for displaying arteries or veins, etc. with contrast media.
19. Haemodialysis room: Room in a medical establishment intended to connect patients to medical electrical
equipment in order to detoxicate their blood.
20. Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI)
21. Nuclear medicine
22. Premature baby room
23. Intermediate Care Unit (IMCU): Room in which bed patients are monitored independently of an operation by
means of medical electrical equipment.
Bibliography
DIN 42801:1980, Connection device for potential equalization conductors.

IS/EN 50174-2:2000, Information technology – Cabling installation – Part 2: Installation planning and
practices inside buildings.
IS/EN 61082-1:1993, Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology – Part 1: General requirements.
ANNEX 721A
EXAMPLE OF NOTICE MOUNTED IN A CARAVAN
“INSTRUCTION FOR ELECTRICITy SUPPLy”

Normative
ON ARRIVAL AT CARAVAN SITE:
1. Before connecting the caravan installation to the electricity supply, check that:
a) The electricity supply is suitable for your installation and your appliances, if it has the appropriate voltage and
frequency (230V a.c. 50Hz)
b) Your installation will be properly earthed. The plug on the end of the flexible cable should be the outdoor type
complying with EN 60309 Parts 1 and 2, and having 3 pins including the earth connection. If necessary, a suitable
flexible cable may be available at the location from the site owner. Supply should not be taken from any other source
such as a lighting outlet.
The socket-outlet at the supply point complies with I.S. EN 60309 -1 and -2
c) The RCD (residual current protective device) at the supply point should be checked by pressing the test button.
343
2. Make sure that the supply switch has been switched OFF.
3. Connect the caravan supply inlet to the supply point socket outlet using the correct flexible cable.
4. After inserting the plug and the caravan connector, switch on the supply at the supply point.
5. Modifications and maintenance should only be carried out by a competent electrical contractor.
6. Lamp-holders should not be used to connect appliances e.g. by using an adaptor.
ON LEAVING THE CARAVAN SITE:

1. Reverse the procedures described above.

2. Replace the covers on the socket-outlet and the caravan supply inlet.
3. Switch off the supply at the supply point.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
The caravan electrical installation should be checked once a year, but especially before use.
ANNEX 753A
(Normative)
FLOOR AND CEILING HEATING SySTEMS
Information to be given to the user of the installation
A description of the installation should be provided by the installer of the heating system for the proprietor of the
building or his/her agent upon the completion of the installation.
The description shall contain at least the following information:
a) a description of the construction of the heating system, especially the installation depth of the heating units.
b) a location diagram with information concerning:
- the distribution of the heating circuits and their rated power;
- the position of the heating units in each room;
- particular features that have been taken into account during installation, e.g.heating-free areas, complementary
heating zones, unheated spare areas for fixing means penetrating the floor;
c) data on the control equipment used, along with relevant circuit diagrams and the dimensioned positions of any
sensors for floor temperature and weather conditions;
d) data on the type of heating units and their maximum operating temperature.
The installer should inform the proprietor that the description of the heating system includes all necessary information,
e.g. for maintenance or repair.
After completion, the installer of the heating system should hand over an appropriate number of copies of the
instructions for the use of the heating installation to the proprietor or his/her agent. A copy of the instructions should
be permanently fixed in or near each relevant distribution board.
The instructions for use should include at least the following:
- description of the heating system and its function;
- operation of the heating installation in the first heating period in the case of a new building e.g. where drying-out is
in process;
344
- operation of the control equipment for the heating system in the dwelling area and the complementary heating zones
as well, if any;
- information on the restrictions on placing furniture or similar items;
- additional floor coverings such as carpets with a thickness greater than 10mm may lead to higher floor temperatures
which can adversely affect the performance of the heating system;
- items of furniture fixed to, or solidly covering the floor, built-in units, should be placed only on heating-free areas;
- furniture, such as carpets, seating and rest-furniture with pelmets, which in part do not cover the floor may not be
placed in complementary heating zones;
- in the case of ceiling heating systems, restrictions regarding the height of furniture. Cupboards of room height may
not be placed below any area of the ceiling where heating elements are installed;
- dimensioned position of complementary heating zones and placing areas;

- a statement that, in the case of floor and heating systems, no fixing should be made which penetrates the floor or
ceiling. This does not apply to unheated areas.
345
Nat Rules Index 2013 (2016).qxp_Layout 1 27/04/2016 09:24 Page 1
INDEX
Note: In most cases, references for Parts 1 to 6 are not repeated in Part 7.
A
Application of protective
A.C. circuits 521.5
measures for safety 40
Accessible conductive parts 729, Ax 41B
Accessibility: 131.2
Arcing, arcs 421.3
– connections, joints 526.4
– earth electrode 542.2
Areas of fire hazard 563.2
– emergency switch 464. 537.4
– equipment 513
Arms reach Part 2
– fire-fighter’s switch 539.4
– isolation 462, 537.2
Assessment of general
– wiring system 522.8.1.5
characteristics Part 3
Accessories
Armoured cable – see Cables
– bathroom 701-53
– lighting 537.5.2.7, 559
Arrangement of circuits 314
Additional protection
Atmospheric origin–overvoltage 443
against direct contact 416.1
531.2.4
Authorized person Part 2, 539.3
Additions Ax 63B
Alterations Ax 63B
Autotransformers (FELV) 411.7.4
Agricultural inst. 705
Attics – wiring in 522.8.8
Air conditioning
– bonding of 544.1
Automatic disconnection of
Airing cupboards 555.6
supply(Earthing) 411.3.3,
613.6, 613.13
Alarms
– fire Chap. 56
Automatic restarting 445.1
– overcurrent 433.3.3
Alterations Ax 63B
Automatic starting 551.6.2
Aluminium
(generators)
– corrosion 522.5.2
– conductors 521.2
Auxiliary circuits 537.5.3
– minimum size 524.1
(see also control circuits.)
– neutral conductor 524.2
B
– protective conductor 543.1.1
Ambient temperature
– conductors 523.2 Back-up protection (o/c) 536.2
– current ratings Ax 52C
– wiring 522.1 Bands – voltage Chap 37
Apartment buildings Bare conductors

– bonding of services 544.1.6 – fire hazard 422.2.2.1
– isolation 539.2.5, – general 521,
539.2.6 Table 52A
Appliances – SELV circuits 414.4.5
– bathrooms 701-55 lighting 715
– fire hazard 422.2.6
– general 555 Barriers
– switching 530.6, – fire (penetration) 527.2
555.1.2 – in trunking 528.1
Ax55A – shock protection 729, Ax 41B
– water heating 555.3 – for safety circuits 562.1.2
346
Basic protection 411.2 – core sleeving 514.3.2

Ax 41A – cross-sectional areas
(minimum) 524
Bathrooms 701. – corrosion 522.5
– couplers 554.7
Batteries 551.8 – current-carrying capacity 523
– for safety supply 562.1 Ax 52C

– ducting/trunking 521.6
Bell transformers 436 – EPR 523
– erection 52
Bending-cables, 522.8.3 – fire resistant 563.3
Ax 52B-1 – fire retardant 527.1
– flexible 522.8.13,
Bonding – See Equipotential Bonding 522.15
– floors (under) 522.6.7.4
Boxes - joint – floors (buried in) 522.8.7
– cable connections 526.7 – floor heating 753
– for light switches 537.5.5 – glands 526.6

– for socket-outlets 554.1.3 – grouping 523
Ax 52C
Breaking capacity – heat resisting 522.2
– general 434.5 – identification of cores 514.3
– protective device 533.3 – installation 522
– main o/c. device 533.3.4 – joints 526
– low temperatures 522.1.1
Building Ax 52D
– apartment (bonding) 544.1.6 – lighting 559.6.4
– fire precautions 421, 422, 562 – LSF (Low Smoke) 527.3
– penetration 522.8.15, – mechanical stresses 522.6, 522.8
563.3.1 – metal sheath Table 52
– sites 704 522.6.10
– methods of installation Table 52A
Building void (wiring) 522.6.6 – mineral- insulated Table 52A
523.1
Buried cable (ground) 522.6.8 – outdoors Table 52A
522.3
Burns (protection) 423, 434.5.3 – overhead 522.6.10
522.8.16
Busbars 521.4 708.522.8
(see also trunking) Table 52A 709.522.8
– parallelling of, 433.4
C
434.4, Ax 43A
523.6
– segregation of 528.1
Cable – selection of Table 52A
– aluminium prohibited 521.2 – soil warming 705 -555.04
– aluminium - size 524.1 – solar gain 522.1 523.4.4
– armoured Table 52A – standard Ax 52D
522.6.3, 522, – supports 522.8.4
543.2.1 Ax 52B-2
– bending 522.88 – temperature 522
Ax 52B-1 523.1.1
– buried 522.6.6 523.2
705.522.6 – terminations 526.5
708.522.6 – trunking 521.6
– catenary 522.8.16 522.6.3
708.522.6 – voltage drop limit 524
– CENELEC cable code Ax 52D – voltage drop values Ax 52E
– channel Ax 52C – XLPE 523
– connections 526 Ax 52C,
– core colours 514.3 Ax 52E
347
Capacitors 552 Clearances overhead 522.6.10

708.522.6
Caravan Parks 708 709.522.6
Caravans 721 Colours
– cable core 514.3
Catenary 522.8.16
Combustible dust 422.2.1

Ceiling roses 559.6.3
Ceiling heating 753 Combustible materials

(constructional) 422.3
CENELEC Introduction
Combustion (products) 527.3
Central heating pipes
– bonding of 544.1 Compatibility Chap 33,
512.2.3
Certification 63
Communication cables 528.2
Circuits 311.2
– a.c. 521.5
Communal baths 701.512
521.6
– arrangement 314
Compensation capacitors 559.8
521.8
– cooker 555.2, Ax 55A
Completion Certificates 63, Ax 63A
– devices for, 531, 533, 537
– emergency 563
Concealed wiring 522.6
– final Ax 55A
– impedance (fault) 411.4.3
Conductors
613.6, 613.13
– current ratings 523, Ax 52C
Ax 61F
– general 52
– isolation 462, 537.2
– identification 514.3
– isolation of generator 551.6
– overcurrent protection 43, 533
– radial final Ax 55A
- parallel 433.4, 434. 4,
– rating: see Cables
514.3, 523.7,
– ring final Ax 55A
555.1.3
– segregated 528.1
– sizes (minimum) 524
– SELV 414
– terminations 526.5
– separated (isolated) 413
Conduit
Circuit Breaker
– bends 522.8.3
– application 533.1.2
– capacities Ax 52A
– co-ordination 536.2 – erection 522.8.2
435 – fire protection 527.1
– main 533.3.5 – general 521.6
– miniature (MCB) 533.3.4 – protective conductor, use of 543.2.1
Ax 61F – space factors Ax 52A
– overcurrent 432
– selection 533.1 Confined spaces 706
– sustained loads Ax 55A (conducting)
Circuses 740 Connections 526
Class I equipment Part 2 Construction sites 704

– bathrooms 701-555
– protection 411.3 Contactors
– switching- emergency 537.3, 537.4
Class II equipment Part 2 – undervoltage 445, 535
– bathrooms 701-555
– protection by 412 Continuity
– protective conductor 543, 613.2.1
Class III equipment Part 2 – ring final circuits 613.2.2
– use of 410, 412 – of service: general Chap. 36
701.555 RCDs 531.2.5
348
Control D.C. conductor colours 514.3.8

– circuits 537.5.3
– motor, of 552 D.C. components (RCD) 531.2.1.3
Converters (inverters) 551.4.3.3,
712.537 D.C system earthing 312.2.4
D.C. switching 462.4

Cooking appliances 555.2
411.3 D.C. voltages 36
Co-ordination overload and 435 DCL (device for connecting

short-circuit protection 433.1, 536 a luminaire) 559.6.1
Co-ordination of short circuit Declaration of conformity Ax 63B

devices 433
Definitions Chap 2,
Co-ordination of overload and medical 710.2
short-circuit protection 435, 536
Degrees of protection 512.2

Cord-operated pull switches 701-555 – IP system Ax 51C
Core colours (cable) 514.3 Demand (maximum) 132.3, 311
Correction factors Demolition sites 704

– cable ratings group Ax 52G
– cable ratings temp. Ax 52H De-rating of switches 537.5.2.5
Corrosion Design 132

– batteries 551.8.2
– earthing connections 542 Design current 433.2, 523
– wiring systems 522.5
Detached buildings,
Couplers (cable) 554.7 isolation of 462.3
Creosote, PVC damage 522.5.4 Devices 53

– isolating 537
Cross-sectional areas – shock protection 531
– conductors min. 132.6, 524 – overcurrent 533
– protective conductor 543.1
Diagrams 514.5, 611.2,
Current-carrying 753
capacities of cables 523.6, Ax 52C
Direct contact 411.1, 416,
Current-sharing 433.4, 523.7 (protection against 729, Ax 41A
shock in normal operation)
Current transformers 433.3.3
Discharge lighting 539.14,
Current-using equipment 555 740.559.14
701.555 – fireman’s switch 537.6
– installation 559.8
D Discharge of energy 462.4
Dairies 705 Disconnection

– automatic earth fault 411.3.3
Damage – to wiring 522.6, 522.8 – automatic (overcurrent) 431, 43, 434
– isolation 537
Damage, inspection 612, Ax 61A
Ax62A Disconnection times Table 41A,
Table 41B,
Damp locations 522.3 613.4, Ax 61G
(wiring) 705, 709 (RCD)
349
Discrimination (selective operation) – free location Ax 41C

– overcurrent devices 536.2 – leakage current (RCDs) 531.2.5
– RCDs 536.3 – for IT equipment Ax 54C
Display stands 559.4, 711 Earthing

– basic requirements 411.3, 54
Distribution – information tech. Ax 54C

– boards 530.5
– circuits 413.1 – systems (TN, TT, IT) 312.2, 411.4
– systems 312 411.5, 411.6
– arrangements 54
Disturbances (voltage) 443 – conductor 542.3
(see also Protective conductor)
Diversity 311 – functional Ax 54C
– resistance Ax 61D
Documentation 132.13, 514,
– terminal (main) 542.4
612.3
Doors of cubicles Ax 41A, 729 Electric fence 705.555.02
Doors of enclosures Ax 41A, 729 Electric shock

– application of measures 410
Double insulation 412 – direct contact 411.2, 416.1
– indirect contact 411.3, 416.2
Drainage (conduit) 522.3 – operating areas 729
– protection against Chap. 41
Draining board 544.2.8
Electrical equipment 55
Duct
– safety services 56
– cable ducting Ax 52A
– cable in 522.6.9
Electrical separation –
– internal barriers 528.1.1
protection by, 413
– internal fire barriers 527.4
Electricity Supply (DSO)
Dust
– low voltage supply 411.4.1 a)
– classification IP Ax 51C
– earth connection (TN) 543.4
– fire hazard 422.2.1.1,
422.2.1.4,
Electrode (earth) 542.2
422.2.4.3
Ax 61D
(luminaires)
– wiring systems 522.4
Electrolysis,
- earthing connection 542.1.3
Dynamic stresses
short-circuit 434.3.1
Electromagnetic effects 516, 541.2
E Electromagnetic
compatibility 131.6, 33.2,
Earth 515.3
– connections to 542 medical 710.444
– contact, body with 706
– continuity conductor Electronic equipment 443.2.2,
see protective conductor 613.3.4
– electrode 542.2
Ax 54A, Embedded wiring 522.6.4,
Ax 61C 522.8.7
– fault current 411.3
– fault loop impedance 411.3 Emergency circuits
– testing 613 (see safety circuits)
– test values Ax 61C Emergency lighting 564.1
– free local equipotential
bonding Ax41C Emergency services
(see safety services)
Emergency control 132.9
350
Emergency stopping 464, 537.4, European Committee for

552 Electrotechnical
Standardization (CENELEC) Introduction
Emergency switching 464
(see also fire) 537.4, 539.2 Exciter circuits of machines
– omission of protection 433.3.3
Enclosures
– cable connections 526.3 Exhibitions etc 711
– Class II equipment 412.3
– degrees of protection Ax 51C Expansion joints 522.8.13
– materials 422.2.1
– external influences 512.2 Exposed conductive parts
Ax51D Explosive atmospheres 11
distribution boards 530.7 – definition Part 2
– fire hazard 422.2.1 – earthing of 411.3.1
– shock protection 412, Ax 41A – for FELV 411.7
– for PELV 414.4
Energy let-through – separated circuits 413.3.3

– (discrimination) 536 – IT systems 411.6
– Non-conducting location Ax 41C
Environmental conditions – TN systems 411.4
– fire conditions 422, 527
– general 512.2 Extensions Ax 63B
F
– wiring systems 522
Equipment Part 5
Fairgrounds 740
Equipotential bonding
– main 411.3.2, 544.1 Farms 705
– supplementary 416.2
Fans 555.5
Extensions Ax 63B
Fault currents 131.5,
External influences 32, 512.2, Ax 613.6
Ax 51D
– fire hazard 422 Fault, protection in case of 411.3
– wiring 522
Fault-loop impedance 411.4
Extraction fans 555.5 411.5.4, 613.6
613.13, Ax 61F
Extra-low voltage
– general 36, 414 Fauna, damage by, 522.10
– lighting 715
FELV (Functional ELV) 411.7
Extraneous conductive parts Part 2,
– general 411.3.2 Fences (electric) 705.555.
– bonding 544
– bathrooms 701.544 Ferromagnetic enclosures 521.5
– farms 705.544
– swimming pools 702.544 Festoon lighting 740.559.05
– bathrooms 701.544
– farms 705.544 Final circuits
– swimming pools 702.544 – disconnecting times Ax 61C
– bathrooms 701 - 544 – general Ax 55A
– information technology Ax 54C – parallel conductors 555.1.3
– kitchens dr. boards 544.2.8 – protection (shock) 41
– swimming pools 702.544 – protection (o/current) 43
– testing 613.6.6
Fire alarms 563.3.3
Erection of equipment Part 5
Fire barriers 527.2, 563.1
Erroneous connections (test) 613.4
351
Fire hazards Fundamental principles 13

– agricultural 705.422
– areas 563.3 Fuses Chapter 43,
– equipment 421 533.2.1.3,
– external influences 422
– distribution boards 530.7 Fused spurs Ax55A
– protective measures 422, 530.5.5,

527, 563 G
– switching 539
– wiring systems 527, 563 Gangways 729
Fire-resistant cable 563.3 Gas fumes 526.4
Fire-retardant cable 527.1 Gas meters

– bonding 544.1.6
Fire-segregated areas 527.1 – near distribution boards 530.5.6
Fire-sealing 527.2 Gas services bonding 544.1

Fire-fighter’s lift 564.3 General characteristics Part 3
Fire-fighter’s switch Generators 411.4.1, 551,
– for discharge lighting 539.4, 562, 740.551
559.14
Glands (cable) 526.6
Fire propagating structure 422.5
Graphical symbols Ax51B
Fixed equipment 555, 701.555
Guarding of equipment 4
Flame-propagation 527.1
Flammable liquids 421.5 H

Flexible cables: 521.9, 522.7 Hand-held equipment 415
522.15.2
Ax 52D Hand-held lamps 559.13
Flexible conduit 521.9.4
Harmful effects 133.4
Flora (wiring system) 522.9
Harmful thermal effects Chap. 42
Floor and ceiling heating 753
Harmonics 431.2.3,
Floors 512.1.2,
– wiring in or under 522.8.7 523.6.3, 524.3,
533.2.2, 524.4,
– insulation resistance 613.7 553.2.2
Ax 41C1
Ax 61E Heat, effects of: Chapter 42,
522.2
Fluorescent (discharge) lighting: 559.7, 559.8
Heating appliances 555.4
Foreign bodies (wiring) 522.4 422.2.1.4
Ax 51C
Heating cables
Foundation earth Part 2 – floor and ceiling 753
542.2.1 – soil 705.555.04
Fountains 702A
Heat sources (external) 522.2
Frequency 313.1.1
512.1.3 High-density livestock rearing 705.2
Functional earthing Ax54C High level lighting 714.411.2
Functional ELV (FELV) 411.7 High protective conductor currents Ax 54C
Functional switching 465, 537.5.2 High-voltage discharge lighting 559.14
352
Higher-voltage systems (faults) 442 Insulation monitoring device (IMD) 538.1
Hollow walls 422.4, 522.6.5 Interlocking Ax 41B,

551.6
Horticultural installations 705
Interruption of supply 131.7, 445,
“Hot press” (airing cupboard) 555.6 551
I
IP system Ax 51C
Isolation 461, 462, 537.2

Identification and marking 514 – generators 551.6.
– conductors 514 – appliances 555.1.2
– omission of 514.5.9 – cookers 555.2
IMD see insulation monitoring device IT system earthing 312.2.3, 411.6

433.3.2,
Immersion heaters 555. 3 533.2.3.6.3
Impact (wiring) 522.6 J

Impedance –fault loop 411.4.3, 613.6
Jetties 709
613.13,
Ax 61F
Joints 526
Impulse-withstand – protective conductor 543.3
– categories 443.2 – flexible cables 526.2.1
– equipment 443.4, Junction boxes 526

537.2.2.1
Indirect contact 411.3, Ax 41C K

(protection against)
Keys Ax 41A,
Industrial socket-outlets 554, 704.554.2 714.411
Information technology equipment Ax 54C k factor 434.5.2,

Ax 54B
Initial verification Chap 61,
Chap 63 Kitchens
– bonding 544.2.8
Inspection: – circuits Ax 55A
– conduit boxes 526.3.3, 526.5,
L
526.6
– definition Part 2
– earthing electrode connection 542.3.4
– installations 612 Labels 514.1
– periodic 62 – bonding 544.1.5
544.2.7
Instantaneous water heaters – earthing conductor 542.3.5
(shower units) 555.3, Ax 55A – fire-fighter’s switch 539.4.5
– isolating devices 537.2
Instructed persons Ax 51 D – RCD testing 531.2.2.2
Insulating floor 410.2.5, Lampholders see luminaires.

Ax 41C1,
Ax 61.E Leakage currents- see earth-leakage currents
543.8
Insulation Legal requirements Ax 51A
– basic Ax 41A
– double 412 Lids Ax 41A, 729.5
– monitoring 538.3
– reinforced 412 Life-support (animals) 705.56.01
– supplementary 412
– site-built assemblies 613 Lifting magnets (O/C protection of) 433.3.3
– testing 613.3
Lift shafts (wiring) 528.1.2
– resistance 613.3
353
Lighting 559, 740.559 MCB see miniature circuit breaker

– outdoors 714
– extra-low voltage 715 Mechanical damage/stresses
– earthing conductor 543
Lightning protection 11.2, 443, – wiring 522.6, 522.8
534.2.8 Mechanical maintenance 463, 537.3
Live parts – protection 729, Ax 41A Medical locations 710

Ax 41B
Member organizations
Livestock 705.2, 705.513
Metal: see exposed conductive parts
and extraneous conductive parts
Local (supplementary) bonding 416.2, 544.2
– testing 613.6.5 Metal – protection against
– bathrooms 701.544.2 electrolytic corrosion 522.5, 542.4.5
Locations with Meter cabinet 533.3.5,
restricted movement 706 Ax 53B,
704.530.5.04
Low voltage band Chapter 37
Meter tails 430.4, 533.3.5,
LSF cable 527.3 Ax 53B
Lug (cable) 526.5.5 Meters – gas 530.5.6
544.1.5
Luminaires 559 Mid-point conductor 415.2, 514.3.2,
– bathrooms 701.55 514.3.8
– farms 705.55
– fire- hazard areas 422.2.4 Milking parlours 705, Ax705A
– extra-low voltage 715
Mobile installations 717
M Moisture (wiring systems) 522.3
Monitoring
Machinery 552, 557
– IT system earthing 411.6
Magnets (lifting) 433.3.3 – devices 538
Main earthing terminal 542.4 Motors

– control 537.5.4, 552.8
Main bonding 411.3.2, 544.1 – emergency stopping 464
– isolation 462
Main isolating switch 462.5, 539.1 – fire-hazard areas 422.2.3
– generators 413.3, 414.3,
Main overcurrent device 551.1.
(fuse/circuit-breaker) 430.4, 533.3.5,
Ax 55A Motor caravans 721
Main protective conductor 543.4 Moulding (wiring) 522.9

Moulded case circuit breaker see circuit breaker
Main supply point Part 2
462.5, 533.3.5 Movable luminaires 559.12
Maintenance Chap 34, 529
– gangways 729 MRCD Part 2,
– agricultural 705.34 531.2.2.3,
Ax 53A
Marinas 709
Multi-core cable 521.7
Marking 514 – colours 514.3.6
– circuits Ax 55A
Maximum demand 311 – ratings Ax 52C
– LV and ELV 414.4.2, 528.1
Maximum temperatures
– equipment 423, 424 Multi-occupancy building 544.1.7, 539.2
– wiring 523, Ax 52C Mutual detrimental influence 515, 528
354
N Oscillations 33.1
Neon: see discharge lighting. Outdoor lighting 714
Neutral Overcurrent Chapter 43,

– artificial 411.6.1 533, 563.5
– common 521.8.2 – co-ordination of overload and

– conductor protection 431.2, short-circuit protection 435
– combined with – detection of 431.1
protective conductor 312, 543.5 – devices 432, 433.2,
– disconnection 431.3, 461.2, 434.5
– earthing of 411.4, 411.5, – discrimination 435, 536.2
411.6, 543.5 – general 430.1
– harmonics 431.2.3 – generators 551.5
– identification 514.3 – harmonics 431.2.3
– isolation 431.3, 461.2, – limitation of 436
461.5 – main protective device 430.4
– minimum size 524.4 – neutral conductor

– overcurrent protection 431.2, 431.3 – omission of protection 430.5, 433.3.3,
– switching of 431.3, 461.2, 434.3
531.2.1.1 – overload protection 433
– position of main device 430.4, 533.5
“Neutralizing” etc. see Main protective conductor – protective devices 432, 433.2,
– short-circuit protection 431, 432.1,
Nominal voltage 313.1.1, 512.1. 432.3, 434
Non-conducting location 613.7, Ax41C1, Overhead conductors 522.6.10,
Ax 61E – farms 705.522.6.04,
– caravan parks 708.521.03,
Non-electrical services 411.3.2, 528.2,
– marinas 709.521.03
(bonding) 544.1
Overheating 424
Non-sheathed insulated conductor 521.10,
Table 52A
Overload protection 432.1, 433
Notices see signs – device 432.2
– omission of 433.3
O
– parallel conductors 433.4
Overvoltage protection 442, 443

Object of the Rules 12 – devices: 534
P
Obstacles - protection by, Ax 41B, 729
Oil- fires precautions 421.5

Parallel conductors
Omission of protection against – current-carrying 523.7
electric shock 410.2.8 – overload protection of 433.4
– short-circuit protection of 434.4
Omission of overload protection 433.3 – prohibition of 555.1.3
Omission of short cct. protection 434.3 Parallelling of supplies 313.2.8, 551.7
Operating areas 729 Partial protection against shock 729, Ax 41B
Operating temperatures (wiring) 523.1.1 Partitions
– in trunking 528.1
Operating instructions Ax 721A,
Ax 753 – metal 522.8.14
Operational conditions 512.1 Passageways 729
Ordinary persons Annex 51D PELV 414
Origin of a circuit 431.1.1 PEN conductor 312.2.1, 411.4

514.3.4, 543.5
355
Pendant light fittings 559.6.2 – for fault 531

– for fire 532
Penetration of buildings 522.8.15 – for overcurrents 533
– for overvoltages 534
Periodic inspection Chap. 62 – co-ordination of 536
Phase (line) conductor PVC see wiring systems,

– identification 514.3.6, cables,
514.3.7
R
– loss of 431.1
– protection of 431.1
Radial final circuits Ax 55A
Phase sequence 552.1.5
Radiant heaters 422.1.4, 555.2
Photo-voltaic systems (solar) 712
Ratings
Pipes – cable 523, Ax 52C
– bonding of 544.2
– switchgear 533.3
– prohibited for protective
conductors 543.2.3 RCDs see residual current protective device
– for buried cables 522.6.8.3
RCD testing 531.2.2.2,
Placing out of reach Ax 613.14,
(protection by) Ax 41B Ax61G
Plaster walls (wiring in) 522.6.4, RCM see residual current monitoring device
522.6.5
Reactors 553.1
Pleasure craft 709.2
Record sheets Chapter 62
Plugs and socket-outlets 554
Reduced low voltage 415
Points (wiring) Ax55A
Reduction factors 523.5,
Polarity (test) 613.8 537.5.2.5,
Ax 52C
Polluting substances
– wiring systems 522.5, Ax 51D Regulations (statutory) Ax 51A
Portable equipment (110V) 415 Reinforced concrete 542.2.7

707
Reinforced insulation 412
Power-factor correction 553.3.2 (Class II equipment)
Powertrack systems 521.4 Reliability Chapter 34
Prefabricated shower units 701.555.05 Remote switching 464, 537.4

– motors 552.1.2
Processed materials 422, 527 – emergency 539.2
Prospective short-circuit 434, 533.3, Reports Chapters 62, 63
551.2.2
Residual current protective device 416.1, 531.2,
Prospective touch voltage 411.3.3
613.14,
Protective conductor 411.3.1, 543
(RCD) Ax 53A,
– marking 514.3.3,
Ax 55A
514.3.6 c)
– associated with
– for FELV circuits 411.7.3
overcurrent device: 536.5
– for PELV circuits 414.4
– direct contact 416.1
– IT earthing 411.6
– discrimination 536.3
– TN earthing 411.4
(selectivity)
– TT earthing 411.5
– resistance Ax 61c – fire hazard 422.2.2, 532
– farms 705.41 and
Protective devices 705.422
– equipment 132.8 – shower units 701.416.1
356
– socket-outlets 554.4 Service s/c breaking capacity Part 2, 53.3.3,

– soil heating 705.555.03 533.3.5
– testing 531.2.2.2,
613.14, Ax61G Shaver units 554.6.2,
– TT systems 411.5 701.554.02
– water- heaters 555.3
Shock current Chapter 41

Residual current monitor (RCM) 538.4
Shops 539.2.3
Resistance
Short-circuit
– earth electrode 411.5.2,
– definition Chapter 2
613.6.3, Ax61D
– devices 533
– omission of protection 434.3
– floors and walls: Ax 61E
– parallel conductors 434.5, Ax 43A
– insulation 613.3
– protection 434
Restricted access 729 (see also overcurrent)
Restricted movement Shower units 555.3,

(locations with) 706 701.555.03,
Ax 55A
Ring final circuits Ax 55A
Signs - electric
Risk assessment (O/V) 443.3.2 see discharge lighting
Rotating machines 551, 552, 613.9 Signs

– emergency stop 464, 537.4 – warning 514.1
– capacitors 553.2.3
S
– sockets 554.4.2
– switches 537.2.2
– maintenance 537.3.1.2
Safety notices 537 – caravans Ax721A
Safety services 132.4, 313.2, Simultaneously-accessible parts

Chap 56, – definition Chapter 2
710.56 – indirect contact 411.3.1,
Ax 41C
Safety source
(for PELV and SELV) 414. 3 Single-core cables 514.3.7,
521.5.2
Saunas 703 Single-insulated cable:
see insulated conductor
Scope 11.1
Single-pole switching 461.2, 530.2.2
Sealing: Conduit etc 527.2 537.2.2,
537.2.2.5
Segregation of circuits 528.1.
563.1 Sinks, bonding 544.2.8
(draining boards)
Segregation of equipment 515.2
Site-built assemblies 412.2, 421.6
Seismic effects 522.12 – testing of 613.11
Selection & erection Part 5 Site (construction) 704
Selectivity 536.2, 536.3 Smoke control 527.3, 560.1,
560.3, 562.4
SELV
(separated extra-low voltage) 414 Socket-outlets
– general 554
Semi-conductor devices
– isolation 537.2.2.1 – bathrooms 701.554
– circuits (protection) 416.1, Ax 53A
Separation, electrical 413, 521.8.3 – emergency switching 537.4.2.2
613.8.5, – height 530.6, 554.1.1
Ax41C – isolation of 537.2.4
357
– kitchens 554.3.5 Sub-system certificates Annex 63A

– radial circuits Ax55A
– RCD protection 416.1, 554.1.4, Sunlight (on cables) 522.11
554.4
Supervised installation 410.2, 411.6
– reduced low-voltage 415.4
– ring circuits Ax 55A Supplementary bonding 416.2, 544.2,
– SELV 414.4.3 613.6.5

– special applications 554.5
Supplies Chap 30,
Soil warming 705.555.03 Chap 31,
313, 551
Soil thermal conductivity 523.4.5
Supply conductors 312,
Solar radiation 522.11
Supports (cables) 522.8.4,
Solar photo-voltaic systems 712 Ax 52B-2
Soldered connections/joints 526.2.1, 526.8 Suspended equipment 522.7.2,

715.521.06
Space factors (conduit etc) 521.6.4,
Ax 52A Surge protective devices (SPDs) 443.5, 534
Sustained loads 537.5.2.3

Space heaters 422.2.1.1,
555.4 Swimming pools 702
Special locations Part 7 Switches, switching 46, 537
– appliances 555.1.2
Special methods for – neutral 461.2, 530.2.2
protection against shock Ax41B, – wall mounted 537.5.5, 530.6
Ax41C
Switchgear Chapter 53
Spotlights 422.2.4.2
Switchgear assemblies 530
Spurs (ring circuits) Ax 55A
Switch-rooms 539.3
Static inverters 551.4.3.3,
551.7
Symbols 442.1.2, 514.5,
Standards 511 Ax 51B
Stands 711 T
Standby supplies 313.2, Telecommunications circuits 528.2, Ax54C
Chapter 36,
551.6, 710.56 Temperature (ambient) 522.1, 523.4,
Ax 52C
Starting currents Chapter 33, – limits 424, 523,
524.1, 552.2.3 Ax 52C
– rise (connections) 526.4
Stationary equipment Part 2
Terminations (conductors) 526.5
Statutory Regulations Ax51A
Temporary installations 740
Storage batteries 551.8
Testing 613
Storage heaters Ax55A
Thermal cut-outs 422.1.3
Stranded conductors 526.8
Thermal effects Chapter 42
Stresses (wiring) 522.8
– cables 522.1, 523.4
(voltage) 442.2, 442.3
– immersion heaters 555.6
Stroboscopic effects 559.10 – luminaires 422.2.4
– insulation 522.2.1,
Structures 526.10, 559.5
– movement 522.15 – shielding 522.2.1
– fire propagation 422.5
Thermal insulation 522.1, 559.5
Structural influences 522.15 Ax 52C
358
Times – disconnecting Tables 41A, Vermin 522.10

41B, Vertical runs (wiring) 522.8.5
434.5, Ax61G
Voids (building) 522.6.6
TN system earthing 411.4 Vibration 522.7,
312.2.1 537.2.2.3
Total insulation 412 Visual inspection 612, 62.2.1

Touch voltage 411.3.3.1
Voltage
Track systems (luminaires) 715.521.07 – bands Chapter 37
– disturbances 443
Transformers 553.1 – drop 524, Ax 52E
– auto 411.7.4 – extra-low Chapter 37
– bell 436 (see also PELV and SELV)
– current 433.3.3 – functional extra-low 411.7
– discharge lighting 559.14 – general 313.1, 512.1.1
– SELV + PELV 414.3 – low Chapter 37

– isolating 413.3 – nominal 512.1.1
– over 442, 443
Transients Chap 33 – reduced low 415
– transients 552, 525.3
Tripping (unwanted) RCDs 531.2.5 – under 445, 535
Trunking (cable) 521.6, 522.5.4

522.6, 522.6.4
W
522.6.5, Walls (wiring) Table 52A,
522.8.6, Ax 52F
527.1.4, Ax52A – fire hazard areas 422.2.2, 563.3
– hollow 522.6.5
TT systems 312.2.2, 411.5 – insulation resistance 613.5, Ax 61E
613.6.3 – thermally-insulating Ax 52C
– solid 522.6.4
Type-tested equipment 412
– voids 522.6.6
U Wall-mounted switches 537.5.2.7
Warning notices & signs: see Signs

Ultimate s/c breaking capacity Part 2, 533.3
Water
Ultra-violet radiation 522.11
– degrees of protection 512.2, Ax51D
Underground cable 522.6.8 – heaters 555.3
– pipes 542.2.6,
Undervoltage protection 445, 535 543.2.3,
544.1.2
Underwater luminaires 702.559.01
Wiring
Uninterruptible power supplies 551.4.3.3 – external influences 522
– sealing of penetrations 527.2
Utilization equipment – systems Chap. 52,
(fire-fighting) 564
Table 52A,
V
Annexes
– fire hazard areas 422.2.2,
527, 563
Value, items of 422.6 – luminaires 559.6
Ventilation Workmanship, good Ax61A

– forced 420.2.2 Z
– livestock 705.56.01
Zones
Verification 134, – bathrooms 701.32
Chapter 61 – premises 539.2.8
+ Annexes – saunas 703.32
for Ch. 61 – swimming pools 702.32
359
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES

Et101-2008+a1+a2 Ac A3-2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Et101-2008+a1+a2 Ac A3-2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LICENCE

Licensee: Thomas Murphy

Learn about LexConnect, All Jurisdictions, Standards referenced in Australian legislation

Fourth Edition National Rules for Electrical Installations ET 101: 2008

ET 101:2008, National rules for electrical installations

This corrigendum becomes effective on 2018-05-31

Remove the following Clause

“701.559.03 A bathroom shall have at least one luminaire which:

This page is intentionally left BLANK.

No copying without NSAI permission except as permitted by copyright law.

S.R. xxx: Standard Recommendation - recommendation based on the consensus of an expert

ET 101:2008/A3:2018 21 May, 2018

1 Swift Square, T +353 1 807 3800 T +353 1 857 6730

Údarás um Chaighdeáin Náisiúnta na hÉireann

722 Supplies for electric vehicles ........................................................................................... 3

722.314 Arrangements of circuits .................................................................................. 5

Amendment No. 3: ET 101:2008/A3:2018 to the National R ules for Electrical Installations

ET 101:2008 Fourth Edition (Incorporating Amendment No. 1: ET 101: 2008/A1:2011 and

The text of this Standard is based on the following documents:

CENELEC HD 60364-7-722:2016, Part 7-722 Requirements for special installations or

If requirements or explanations additional to those of the other parts of ET 101:2008 are

The implementation date for ET 101:2008/A3:2018 is 2018-05-31.

 The decimal point is shown as a comma ( , ) throughout this Standard Recommendation.

722 Supplies for electric vehicles

This Part implements CENELEC HD 60364-7-722:2016.

– circuits intended to supply energy to electric vehicles;

Inductive charging is not covered.

722.2 Normative References

HD 384 / HD 60364 (series), Electrical installations of building / Low -voltage electrical

I.S. EN 60947-2, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 2: Circuit-breakers

I.S. EN 61008-1, Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral overcurrent

722.3 Terms and definitions

[SOURCE: I.S. EN 61851-1:2011, 3.8]

[SOURCE: I.S. EN 61851-1:2011, 6.2 "EV charging modes, mode 1 charging"]

[SOURCE: I.S. EN 61851-1:2011, 6.2 "EV charging modes, mode 3 charging"]

[SOURCE: I.S. EN 61851-1:2011, 6.2 "EV charging modes, mode 4 charging"]

722.30 Assessment of general characteristics

722.312 Supply conductor arrangement and system earthing

In TN system, the final circuit supplying a connecting point shall be a TN -S system.

722.314 Arrangements of circuits

722.4 Protection for safety

722.413.3 Requirements for protection in case of a fault (protection against indirect

722.41.B Obstacles and placing out of reach

722.41.B.2 Protection by obstacles

Protection by obstacles shall not be used.

722.41.B.3 Protection by placing out of reach

Protection by placing out of reach shall not be used.

722.41.C.1 Non-conducting location

Protection by non-conducting location shall not be used.

722.41.C.2 Protection by earth-free local equipotential bonding

Protection by earth-free local equipotential bonding shall not be used.

722.5 Selection and erection of equipment

722.512 Operational conditions and external influences

722.512.2.101 Presence of water (AD)

722.512.2.102 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)

722.512.2.103 Impact (AG)

722.531 Devices for protection against electric shock by automatic disconnection of

722.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent

722.536 Coordination of protective devices

Add a new first paragraph as follows:

722.538 Monitoring devices

722.538.1.101 Insulation monitoring devices for IT systems (IMDs)

It is recommended to install an IMD with the following two response values: